CITY OF SEATTLE Seattle Public Utilities
IMPROVEMENT OF: SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION
Project Manual – Volume 2 of 3
Division 02 through Division 26
FUNDED BY: DWF and King County Flood Control District PW#: 2019-067 ORDINANCE #: 125724
Advertise: January 29, 2020
Bids Open: February 26, 2020
SEATTLE, WASHINGTON
TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 01 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
VOLUME 2 – DIVISION 02 THROUGH DIVISION 26
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
Section 02 41 01 – Demolition and Deconstruction
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Forming
Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing
Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
Section 03 48 11 – Precast Concrete Vaults
Section 03 60 00 – Grouting
Section 03 70 00 – Mass Concrete
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry
DIVISION 05 – METALS
Section 05 05 14 – Hot-Dip Zinc Coating
Section 05 05 33 – Anchor Bolts
Section 05 10 00 – Structural Metal Framing
Section 05 31 23 – Steel Roof Decking
Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications
Section 05 51 00 – Metal Stairs
Section 05 52 20 – Steel Railings
Section 05 53 10 – Metal Gratings and Stair Treads TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 01 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry
Section 06 71 01 – Fiberglass Reinforced Products and Fabrications
Section 06 82 13 – Fiberglass Reinforced Gratings
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07 10 00 – Dampproofing and Waterproofing
Section 07 31 10 – Thermal Insulation
Section 07 54 23 – Thermoplastic Polyfin Roofing
Section 07 60 00 – Metal Flashing Trim and Accessories
Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants
Section 07 93 00 – Preformed Joint Fillers
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors and Frames
Section 08 31 20 – Floor Access Doors
Section 08 71 01 – Finish Hardware
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
Section 09 65 10 – Resilient Wall Base
Section 09 90 00 – Coatings
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
Section 12 93 00 – Site Furnishings TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 01 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
Section 22 00 00 – Plumbing Basic Requirements
Section 22 30 00 – Plumbing Equipment
Section 22 40 00 – Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
Section 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
Section 23 30 00 – Sheet Metal Ductwork and Accessories
Section 23 34 00 – HVAC Fans
Section 23 37 13 – Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Section 23 81 43 – Air Source Unitary Heat Pumps
Section 23 82 00 – Heating Units
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
Section 26 00 00 – Electrical
Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
Section 26 05 73 – Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study
Section 26 08 01 – Testing
Section 26 22 00 – Low Voltage Transformers
Section 26 24 00 – Panelboards
Section 26 24 19 – Motor Control Centers
Section 26 27 15 – Miscellaneous Electrical Devices
Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
Section 26 32 13 – Engine Generators TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 01 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
Section 26 32 30 – Vehicle Charging Equipment
Section 26 35 26 – Active Harmonic Filters
Section 26 36 00 – Automatic Transfer Switch
Section 26 50 00 – Lighting
End of Section 00 01 10 DEMOLITION AND DECONSTRUCTION SECTION 02 41 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the requirements for removing, salvage, and recycling, of above ground and buried structures including but not limited to buried utilities, fencing, drainage structures, pavements, and debris. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), versions current at time of bid. B. City of Seattle, Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, 2017 Edition. C. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and the listed documents, the requirements of the Contract Specifications shall prevail.
Reference Title ANSI A10.6 Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations EPA, CFR, Title 40 Part 61—National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants Part 273—Standards for Universal Waste Management Part 262—Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste Part 265—Interim Status Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities OSHA, CFR, Title 29 Part 1926—Occupational Safety and Health Regulations for Construction Director’s Rule (DR) 4-2009 City of Seattle Department of Planning and Development Demolition Permit with a Waste Diversion Plan Hazardous Materials Inventory Regulated Building Materials Assessment Report, 636 and 640 South Riverside Drive, Seattle Public Utilities, October 5, 2009 WAC 296-62 General Occupational Health Standards WAC 296-65 Asbestos PSCAA Regulation III, Article 4 Asbestos Control Standards
WAC 296-62-155-176 Lead in Construction WAC 173-303 Dangerous Waste Regulations WAC 296-800-170 Employer Chemical Hazard Communication D. Whenever the words “Standard Specifications” are referred to, the reference is to the City of Seattle, Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, 2017 Edition. E. The Contractor shall have at least one copy of the Standard Specifications at the job site. DEMOLITION AND DECONSTRUCTION SECTION 02 41 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
F. The Standard Specifications apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the work. The legal/contractual relationship sections, and measurement and payment sections do not apply to this document. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. City or COS: City of Seattle. B. Beneficial Use: The use of solid waste as an ingredient in a manufacturing process, or as an effective substitute for natural or commercial products, in a manner that does not pose a threat to human health or the environment. C. Demolition: Dismantling, razing, destroying, or wrecking of any fixed building or structure or any part thereof. D. Recycling: The transformation or remanufacturing of waste materials into useable or marketable materials for use other than incineration or other means of disposal. E. Regulated Building Materials: Materials such as asbestos-containing material, lead containing coatings, PCB containing light ballasts, and mercury containing components where regulated notification, handling, and disposal is required. F. Relocate: Remove, protect, clean and reinstall equipment, including electrical, instrumentation, and all ancillary components required to make the equipment fully functional, to the new location identified on the Drawings. G. Reuse: The recovery of materials for repeated use in the same form. H. Salvage/Salvageable: The removal of select materials from a building prior to deconstruction or demolition. Salvage generally applies to recovery of appliances, cabinets, fixtures, flooring and other materials for reuse that require minimal labor to recover and for which the building envelope does not need to be disturbed for their removal. Unless otherwise specified, title to items identified for demolition shall revert to Contractor. I. Structure: Anything constructed or erected on the ground or any improvement built up or composed of parts joined together in some definite manner and affixed to the ground, including fences, walls, and signs, but not including poles, flowerbed frames and such minor incidental improvements. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following according to Standard Specification 01 33 10 Submittals. 1. Submit proposed waste diversion plan in accordance with requirements specified herein for approval prior to issuance of the demolition permit C. Submit proposed deconstruction plan in accordance with requirements specified herein for approval before such work is started. 2. Upon completion of the deconstruction effort submit the final waste diversion report and associated receipts identifying rates of reuse, recycling, and beneficial use. 3. Submit proposed demolition plan, in accordance with requirements specified herein, for approval before such work is started. DEMOLITION AND DECONSTRUCTION SECTION 02 41 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
4. Submit copies of any notifications, authorizations and permits required to perform the work. 5. Submit records of pipe cleaning activities, including video inspection, and record of disposal of removed materials. 6. Submit copies of notices of intent for well decommissioning. 1.06 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions, Contractor’s safety requirements shall conform with ANSI A10.6. B. Furnish timely notification of this demolition project to applicable federal, state, regional, and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61 Subpart M. C. Comply with WAC 296-62, WAC 296-65 and PSCAA Regulation III, Article 4 for asbestos related work. D. Conduct exposure assessment in compliance with WAC 296-62-155-176 during operations that may disturb the lead paint in such a way that the airborne exposure may reach or exceed the Action Level of 30 micrograms per cubic meter or the Permissible Exposure Limit of 50 micrograms per cubic meter. E. Collect and analyze per WAC 173-303 a toxicity characteristic leachate procedure (TCLP) sample that is a representative of the waste stream. F. Comply with WAC 296-800-170. 1.07 DEMOLITION PLAN A. Demolition plan shall provide for safe conduct of the work and shall include: 1. Construction must be timed in accordance with permit provisions for working in the fish window 2. Detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation. 3. The Contractor’s planned sequence of operations, including coordination with other work in progress; stockpile locations; temporary grading and drainage to protect the subgrade. 4. Disconnection schedule of utility services. 5. Dewatering plan, where required by Section 31 23 20, Control of Water. 6. Shoring Plans, where required in accordance with Section 31 41 00, Shoring. 7. Locations of meters and related equipment and proposals for returning to utility. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. The work of this Specification shall not commence until Contractor’s deconstruction and demolition plan has been approved by the Engineer. B. Include the work of this Specification in the progress schedule, as specified in Section 01 33 10. C. Abandoned utilities shall be removed as required to complete the work. DEMOLITION AND DECONSTRUCTION SECTION 02 41 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE DEMOLISHED A. Paving: 1. Paving shall be removed as indicated or required to construct the new pavement and gravel surfacing as shown in the Drawings. 2. When limits are not shown on the Drawings, utility cuts and other openings in Seattle's streets, alleys and other public places for construction or other activities shall comply with the most current edition of the "Street and Sidewalk Pavement Opening and Restoration Rules" found at: http://streetsillustrated.seattle.gov/navigating-the-process/construction-and- maintenance/opening-and-restoration-rule/ 3. Non-rigid pavement shall be precut full depth prior to removal by sawcutting to ensure a neat, straight line. Full depth precut may be performed using an asphalt cutting wheel at the discretion of the Engineer. B. Utilities and Related Equipment: 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for pulling the necessary City of Seattle permits to remove and/or abandon existing sanitary sewer and storm drainage infrastructure. 2. Remove existing utilities as indicated and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved by the Engineer. When utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the Drawings, notify the Engineer prior to further work in that area. 3. Coordinate the removal of the water meters and related equipment with the City. 4. Excavate and remove abandoned utility lines to the edge of the property boundary or as required to complete the work. 5. Plug abandoned sewer and storm drain lines with concrete to a minimum plug length of 3 feet to prevent groundwater infiltration. C. Utilities and Related Equipment: 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for pulling the necessary City of Seattle permits to remove and/or abandon existing sanitary sewer and storm drainage infrastructure. A list of owner acquired permits is found in 00 31 43 – Permits Obtained by Owner. 2. Remove existing utilities as indicated and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved by the Engineer. When utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the Drawings, notify the Engineer prior to further work in that area. 3. Coordinate the removal of the water meters and related equipment with the City. 4. Excavate and remove abandoned utility lines to the edge of the property boundary or as required to complete the work. DEMOLITION AND DECONSTRUCTION SECTION 02 41 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
5. Plug abandoned sewer and storm drain lines with concrete to a minimum plug length of 3 feet to prevent groundwater infiltration. D. Existing shoring and concrete backfill around 72-inch storm drain: 1. Remove the existing shoring and concrete backfill around the existing 72-inch storm drain as necessary to complete the installation of the diversion structure, associated storm drain, and pipe connection. E. Fencing: Remove all fencing not part of the permanent work. Contractor may use existing fencing for site control. Contractor to reinstall a portion of the fencing in kind, as indicated in the drawings. F. Trees shall be removed as indicated on plans and the contractor shall use appropriate disposal methods for removed trees. G. Other Features: Miscellaneous features such as landscaping, rockeries, fencing and posts, concrete barriers, ecology blocks, abandoned signs and posts, and abandoned poles shall be recycled to the extent possible and removed from the site if reuse on the project is not possible. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Dust and Debris Control: 1. Prevent the spread of dust and debris across the site and avoid the creation of a nuisance in the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution. 2. Sweep pavements as often as necessary to control the spread of debris that may result in foreign object damage potential to vehicular traffic. B. Existing Work: 1. Survey the site and examine the Drawings and Specifications to determine the extent of the work before beginning any demolition. 2. Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items scheduled to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the City; any Contractor-damaged items shall be repaired or replaced as directed by Engineer. C. Protection of Personnel: 1. During demolition, continuously evaluate the condition of the facilities being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the demolition site. 2. Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect City’s personnel and the general public from injury due to demolition Work. 3. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of City’s personnel and the general public to occupied portions of the structure. D. Groundwater Monitoring Wells: 1. Contractor shall preserve the groundwater monitoring wells and raise to proposed grade as indicated on the drawings. E. Miscellaneous Features: Tide vault, power poles, water meters, fire hydrants and utility poles shall be protected in place during construction activities. DEMOLITION AND DECONSTRUCTION SECTION 02 41 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
3.03 BURNING A. The use of burning at the site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permitted. 3.04 RELOCATIONS A. Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with workmen skilled in the trades involved. Clean all items to be relocated prior to reinstallation, to the satisfaction of Engineer. Repair items to be relocated which are damaged or replace damaged items with new undamaged items as approved by Engineer. 3.05 BACKFILL A. Demolition debris may not be used as backfill. B. Fill excavations and other hazardous openings to existing ground level or foundation level of new construction in accordance with Section 31 00 00, Common Work Results for Earthwork. 3.06 TITLE TO MATERIALS A. All items designated to be removed shall become the property of Contractor. 3.07 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL A. The City will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage to, property scheduled to become Contractor’s property after Engineer’s authorization to begin demolition. B. Store salvaged items as approved by Engineer and remove them from the site before completion of the Contract. 3.08 UNSALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A. Except for rockery material that can be reused on the project site, all demolition material shall be removed from the site and disposed of properly. All costs shall be included in the contract price. 3.09 BLASTING A. The use of explosives at that site will not be permitted. 3.10 CLEANING EXISTING STORM DRAIN A. Remove the debris from the tide gate vault, existing storm drain manhole #D017-108, and existing 72-inch storm drain pipe in between prior to the beginning of construction and at the completion of construction of the diversion structure.
END OF SECTION 02 41 01
CONCRETE FORMING SECTION 03 11 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies formwork requirements for concrete construction. B. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 03 30 00 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the documents listed below. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document cites other standards, such standards are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ACI 117 Standard Specifications for Tolerance for Concrete Construction and Materials ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete ACI 350 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures ACI 347R Guide to Formwork for Concrete National Institute of Construction and Industrial Plywood Standards – PS1
B. Design: Formwork design requirements shall conform to the following: 1. Formwork, shoring and reshoring shall be designed by a Washington licensed professional engineer qualified to perform structural engineering having a minimum of 5 years’ experience in this type of design work. 2. Design and engineering of formwork, shoring and reshoring, as well as its construction, is the responsibility of the Contractor. 3. A procedure and schedule shall be developed for removal of shores (and installation of reshores) and for calculating the loads transferred to the structure during this process. 4. Structural calculations shall be made as required to prove that all portions of the structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely support its own weight plus the loads placed thereon.
CONCRETE FORMING SECTION 03 11 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
5. When developing procedure, schedule and structural calculations, consideration shall be made regarding the structural system that exists, effects of all loads during construction and strength of concrete at each state of construction. C. Design Criteria: Design of formwork shall conform to the following criteria: 1. Formwork shall be designed for loads, lateral pressures and allowable stresses outlined in ACI 347 and for design considerations, wind loads, allowable stresses and other applicable requirements of the controlling local building code. Where conflicts occur between the above two standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern. 2. Formwork shall be made to limit maximum deflection of form facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view to 1/240 of span between structural members. 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. Manufacturer's installation instructions and acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. C. Manufacturer and type of proposed form materials, form ties, form release compound, void forms and form coating materials. D. Formwork designer qualifications. E. Submit letter of certification stamped by the registered Engineer referenced in paragraph 1.02-B.1 that formwork has been designed in accordance with the specifications. F. If requested, structural analysis and concrete strength data used in planning and implementing form removal and shoring.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMS A. Wood Forms: Wood forms shall be new 5/8-inch or 3/4-inch, 5-ply structural plywood of concrete form grade. Forms shall be built-in-place type or pre-fabricated panel. Built in place type forms shall be 4 by 8 foot sheets except where smaller pieces will cover entire area. When approved by the Engineer, plywood may be reused. B. Metal Forms: Metal forms excluding aluminum may be used. Forms shall be tight to prevent leakage, free of rust and straight without dents to provide members of uniform thickness.
CONCRETE FORMING SECTION 03 11 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
C. Prefabricated Forms: 1. Manufacturers: a. Spec Formliners, Inc., 530 East Dyer Road, Santa Ana, CA, www.specformliners.com, Ph: (714) 429-9500. b. Or approved substitute. 2. Product: See drawings for pattern location. a. Spec Rib; Standard Rib, Pattern number 1101. b. Weathered Wood Grain, Pattern number 1216. c. Medium Bush Hammer, Pattern number 1615. 3. Form release: a. Dayton Superior liner Coat (J-4 LC) form release, or approved substitute. 2.02 FORM TIES A. Form ties shall be commercially fabricated for use in form construction and shall be constructed so that ends or end fasteners can be removed without causing spalling at surfaces of the concrete. Diameter on ends shall be 3/4 inch minimum to 1 inch maximum. Embedded portion of ties shall be not less than 1 1/2 inch from face of concrete after ends have been removed. Ties with built-in waterstops shall be provided in all walls that will be in contact with process liquid during plant operation and/or high ground water.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION A. Preparation shall conform to the following: 1. Before placing of either reinforcing steel or concrete, surfaces of forms shall be covered with an approved coating material that will effectively prevent absorption of moisture and prevent bond with concrete, will not stain concrete or prevent bonding of future finishes. A field applied form release agent or sealer of approved type or a factory applied non absorptive liner may be used. 2. Excess form coating material shall not be permitted to stand in puddles in forms nor in contact with hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed. 3. Temporary openings shall be provided at base of column and wall forms and at other points where necessary to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before concrete is placed, and to limit height of free fall of concrete to prevent aggregate segregation. 4. Temporary openings, also called form “windows”, shall be used to limit height of free fall of concrete and to limit the lateral movement of concrete during placement. Openings are required in walls placements greater than 20 feet in height and shall be spaced so that no more than 8 feet of solid form exists between openings measured horizontally and vertically.
CONCRETE FORMING SECTION 03 11 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
5. Surfaces of forms, reinforcing steel and other embedded materials shall be cleaned of any accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and of all other foreign material before concrete is placed. 6. Attach prefabricated form liner to formwork as recommended by the prefabricated form liner manufacturer. B. Form Release for prefabricated forms: Follow manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations for application of the form release. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Form erection shall conform to the following: 1. Products shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Surfaces of columns, piers, walls, and in risers shall vary from plumb a maximum of 1/2 inch for entire height and 1/4 inch in 10 feet of height. Exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves, and other exposed to view lines shall vary from plumb a maximum of 1/2 inch for entire length and 1/4 inch in 20 feet of length. 3. Maximum variation from level or from grade shall be 3/4 inch for entire length, 3/8 inch for any bay or 20 foot length and 1/4 inch in 10 feet of length for slab soffits, ceilings, beam soffits and in arises, measured before removal of supporting shores and shall be 1/2 inch for entire length and 1/4 inch in 20 feet of length for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other exposed to view lines. 4. Maximum variation of linear structure lines from established position in plan and related position of columns, walls, and partitions shall be 3/4 inch for entire length and 3/8 inch for any bay or 20 foot length. 5. Maximum variation in size and location of sleeves, floor openings, and wall openings and variation in horizontal plan location of beam, column and wall centerlines shall be 1/2 inch. 6. Maximum variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in thickness of slabs and walls shall be 1/2 inch and in concrete plan dimensions for footings and foundations shall be - 1/2 inch, + 2 inches. 7. Maximum misplacement or eccentricity of footings and foundations shall be 2 percent of footing width in direction of misplacement but not more than 2 inches. 8. Specified thickness of footings and foundations may be decreased by up to 5 percent with no maximum increase except that which may interfere with other construction. 9. Maximum step variance in the flight of stairs for Rise is 1/8 inch and for Tread is 1/4 inch and in consecutive steps for Rise is 1/16 inch and for Tread is 1/8 inch. 10. Sufficient control points and benchmarks to be used for reference purposes to check tolerances shall be established and maintained in an undisturbed condition until final completion and acceptance of the work. 11. Regardless of tolerances listed, no portion of a structure shall be allowed to extend beyond the legal boundary of work site.
CONCRETE FORMING SECTION 03 11 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
12. To maintain specified tolerances, formwork shall be cambered to compensate for anticipated deflections in formwork prior to hardening of concrete. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from concrete. 13. A 3/4-inch chamfer strip shall be placed in exposed to view corner of form to produce a 3/4-inch wide beveled edge. 14. At construction joints, contact surface of form sheathing for flush surfaces exposed to view over hardened concrete in previous placement shall be overlapped by at least 1 inch. Forms against hardened concrete shall be held to prevent offsets or loss of mortar at construction joint and to maintain a true surface. Where possible, juncture of built-in-place wood or metal forms shall be located at architectural lines, control joints or at construction joints. 15. Where circular walls are formed and forms made up of straight sections are proposed for use, straight lengths not exceeding 2 feet wide shall be provided for curved surfaces 25 feet or larger. Formwork shall be braced and tied to maintain correct position and shape of members. 16. Wood forms for wall openings shall be constructed to facilitate loosening, if necessary, to counteract swelling. Formwork shall be anchored to shores or other supporting surfaces of members so that movement of any part of formwork system is prevented during concrete placement. 17. Runways for moving equipment shall be provided with struts or legs, supported directly on formwork or structural member without resting on reinforcing steel. 18. A positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) of shores and struts and take up all settlement during concrete placing operation shall be provided. Forms shall be securely braced against lateral deflection. Wedges used for final adjustment of forms shall be fastened prior to concrete placement in position after final check. 3.03 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Removal of forms shall conform to the following: 1. No construction loads shall be supported on, nor any shoring removed from, any part of the structure under construction except when that portion of the structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely support its weight and loads placed thereon. 2. When required for concrete curing in hot weather, required for repair of surface defects or when finishing is required at an early age, forms shall be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations or lack of support. 3. Top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete shall be removed as soon as concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Any needed repairs or treatment required on such sloping surfaces shall be performed at once, followed by curing specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 4. Wood forms for wall openings shall be loosened as soon as this can be accomplished without damage to concrete.
CONCRETE FORMING SECTION 03 11 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
5. Formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams, and other parts not supporting weight of concrete may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal. 6. Where no reshoring is planned, forms and shoring used to support weight of concrete shall be left in place until concrete has attained its specified 28-day compressive strength. Where a reshoring procedure is planned, supporting formwork may be removed when concrete has reached the concrete strength required by the formwork designer’s structural calculations. 7. When shores and other vertical supports are so arranged that non-load-carrying form facing material may be removed without loosening or disturbing shores and supports, facing material may be removed when concrete has sufficiently hardened to resist damage from removal. 3.04 RESHORING A. Reshoring shall conform to the following: 1. No construction loads shall be supported on, nor any shoring removed from, any part of the structure under construction except when that portion of the structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely support its weight and loads placed thereon. 2. While reshoring is underway, no superimposed dead or live loads shall be permitted on the new construction. 3. During reshoring, concrete in structural members shall not be subjected to combined dead and construction loads in excess of loads that structural members can adequately support. 4. Reshores shall be placed as soon as practicable after stripping operations are complete but in no case later than the end of working day on which stripping occurs. 5. Reshores shall be placed to carry their required loads without overstressing. 6. Where no reshoring is planned, forms and shoring used to support weight of concrete shall be left in place until concrete has attained its specified 28 day compressive strength. Where a reshoring procedure is planned, supporting formwork may be removed when concrete has reached the concrete strength by the formwork designer’s structural calculations.
END OF SECTION 03 11 00
CONCRETE REINFORCING SECTION 03 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Reinforcing steel for use in reinforced concrete. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The references listed below are a part of this section. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ACI 117 Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement ACI 318 Building Code Requirements For Structural Concrete ACI SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A706 Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A775 Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars ASTM A884 Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement ASTM A1064 Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel CRSI-PRB Placing Reinforcing Bars CRSI-MSP Manual of Standard Practice FEDSPEC QQ-W-461H Wire, Steel, Carbon (Round, Bare, and Coated) 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENT (NOT USED) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. 2. A copy of this specification section with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements.
CONCRETE REINFORCING SECTION 03 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
3. Check-marks (✓) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. Deviations shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Include a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. 4. Mill certificates for all reinforcing. 5. Manufacturer and type of proprietary reinforcing steel splices. Submit a current ICC Report and manufacturer’s literature that contains instructions and recommendations for each type of coupler used. 6. Qualifications of welding operators, welding processes and procedures. 7. Reinforcing steel shop drawings showing reinforcing steel bar quantities, sizes, spacing, dimensions, configurations, locations, mark numbers, lap splice lengths and locations, concrete cover and reinforcing steel supports. Reinforcing steel shop drawings shall be of sufficient detail to permit installation of reinforcing steel without reference to the contract drawings. Shop drawings shall not be prepared by reproducing the plans and details indicated on the contract drawings but shall consist of completely redrawn plans and details as necessary to indicate complete fabrication and installation of reinforcing steel, including large scale drawings at joints detailing bar placement in congested areas. Placement drawings shall be in accordance with ACI 315. Reinforcing details shall be in accordance with ACI SP-66. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ship reinforcing steel to the jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags having permanent mark numbers which match the shop drawing mark numbers. All reinforcing shall be supported and stored above ground. Use only plastic tags secured to the reinforcing steel bars with nylon or plastic tags for epoxy coated reinforcing steel bars.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 BAR REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing steel bars shall be deformed billet steel in conformance with ASTM A615, Grade 60. Bars to be welded shall be deformed billet steel conforming to ASTM A706. Where specified, reinforcing steel shall be epoxy-coated in conformance with ASTM A775. 2.02 WIRE FABRIC A. Wire fabric shall be welded steel mesh conforming to ASTM A1064. 2.03 WIRE AND PLAIN BARS A. Wire used as reinforcement and bars used as spiral reinforcement in structures shall be cold drawn steel conforming to ASTM A1064.
CONCRETE REINFORCING SECTION 03 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
2.04 SMOOTH DOWEL BARS A. Smooth dowel bars shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60, with a metal end cap at the greased or sliding end to allow longitudinal movement. 2.05 EPOXY COATED BARS A. Epoxy coated bars shall conform to ASTM A775 and ASTM A884. 2.06 EPOXY COATED REINFORCING STEEL BAR PATCHING MATERIAL A. Epoxy coated reinforcing steel bar patching material shall be compatible with coating material, inert in concrete, obtained from manufacturer of the epoxy resin used to coat the reinforcing steel bars and meet the requirements of ASTM A775. 2.07 REINFORCING STEEL MECHANICAL SPLICES A. Reinforcing steel mechanical splices shall be a positive connecting threaded type mechanical splice system manufactured by Erico, Inc., Dayton Superior, Williams Form Engineering Company, or approved substitute. B. Type 1 mechanical splices shall develop in tension or compression a strength of not less than 125 percent of the ASTM specified minimum yield strength of the reinforcement and shall meet all other ACI 318 requirements. Type 1 mechanical splices are typical except for locations noted below where Type 2 mechanical splices are required. C. Type 2 mechanical splices shall meet the requirements for a Type 1 mechanical splice, plus develop the ASTM specified tensile strength of the reinforcement. Type 2 mechanical splices shall be provided at locations specifically noted on the design drawings. 2.08 TIE WIRE A. The wire shall be minimum 16 gage annealed steel conforming to FEDSPEC QQ-W-461H. 2.09 BAR SUPPORTS A. Bar supports coming into contact with forms shall be CRSI Class 1 plastic protected or Class 2 stainless steel protected and shall be located in accordance with CRSI-MSP and placed in accordance with CRSI-PRB. B. Provide manufactured concrete block supports with embedded tie wires (wire dobies) for footing and slabs on grade. Do not use brick, broken concrete masonry units, spalls, rocks, construction debris, or similar material for supporting reinforcing steel. C. Provide stainless steel or plastic protected plain steel supports for other work. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Fabricate reinforcing steel bars in accordance with ACI 315 and the following tolerances: 1. Sheared lengths: +/-1 inch. 2. Overall dimensions of stirrups, ties, and spirals: +/-1/2 inch. 3. All other bends: +0 inch, -1/2 inch 4. Minimum diameter of bends of reinforcing steel bars: Per ACI 318.
CONCRETE REINFORCING SECTION 03 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT TOLERANCE A. Reinforcing steel placement tolerance shall conform to the requirements of ACI 117, ACI 318, and the following: 1. Reinforcing steel bar clear distance to formed surfaces shall be within +/-1/4 inch of specified clearance and minimum spacing between bars shall be a maximum of 1/4 inch less than specified. 2. Reinforcing steel top bars in slabs and beams shall be placed +/-3/8 inch of specified depth in members 8 inches deep or less and +/-1/2 inch of specified depth in members greater than 8 inches deep. 3. Reinforcing steel spacing shall be placed within +/- one bar diameter or +/- 1 inch, whichever is greater. 4. The minimum clear distance between reinforcing steel bars shall be equal to the greater of 1 inch or the reinforcing steel bar diameter for beams, walls and slabs, and the greater of 1 1/2 inches or 1.5 times the reinforcing steel bar diameter for columns. 5. Beam and slab reinforcing steel bars shall be threaded through column vertical reinforcing steel bars without displacing the column reinforcing steel bars and still maintain clear distances for beam and slab reinforcing steel bars. 3.02 CONCRETE COVER A. Unless specified otherwise on the Drawings, reinforcing steel bar cover shall conform to the following: 1. Reinforcing steel bar cover shall be 3 inches for concrete cast against earth. 2. Reinforcing steel bar cover shall be 2 inches for reinforcing steel bars for formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth and weather. 3. Reinforcing steel bar cover shall be 2 inches for any formed surfaces exposed to or above any liquid. 4. Reinforcing steel bar cover shall be 1 ½ inches for reinforcing not in the above categories unless noted otherwise on the design drawings. 3.03 SPLICING A. Reinforcing steel splicing shall conform to the following: 1. Use Class B splice lengths in accordance with ACI 318 for all reinforcing steel bars unless shown otherwise on the drawings. 2. For welded wire fabric the splice lap length measured between the outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet shall not be less than one spacing of cross wires plus 2 inches, nor less than 1.5 times the development length nor less than 6 inches.
CONCRETE REINFORCING SECTION 03 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
3. Splices of reinforcement steel bars not specifically indicated or specified shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Mechanical proprietary splice connections may be used when approved by the Engineer or as indicated on the drawings. 4. Welding of reinforcing steel bars is not allowed unless approved by the Engineer. 3.04 CLEANING A. Reinforcing steel bars at time of concrete placement shall be free of mud, oil, loose rust, or other materials that may affect or reduce bond. Reinforcing steel bars with rust, mill scale or a combination of both may be accepted without cleaning or brushing provided dimensions and weights including heights of deformation on a cleaned sample are not less than required by applicable ASTM standards. 3.05 PLACEMENT A. Reinforcing steel bar placement shall conform to the following: 1. Uncoated reinforcing steel bars shall be supported and fastened together to prevent displacement by construction loads or concrete placement. For concrete placed on ground, furnish concrete block supports or metal bar supports with non-metallic bottom plates. For concrete placed against forms furnish plastic or plastic coated metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers for the reinforcing steel bar support. Only tips in contact with the forms require a plastic coating. 2. Fasten coated reinforcing steel bars together to prevent displacement. Use plastic or nylon ties to hold the coated reinforcing steel bars rigidly in place. Support coated reinforcing steel bars with plastic or plastic coated chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and supports as required. 3. Support reinforcing steel bars over cardboard void forms by means of concrete supports which will not puncture or damage the void forms nor impair the strength of the concrete member. 4. Where parallel horizontal reinforcement in beams is indicated to be placed in two or more layers, reinforcing steel bars in the upper layers shall be placed directly over the reinforcing steel bars in the bottom layer with the clear distance between each layer to be 2 inches unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Place spacer reinforcing steel bars at a maximum of 3’-0” on center to maintain the minimum clear spacing between layers. 5. Extend reinforcement to within 2 inches of formed edges and 3 inches of the concrete perimeter when concrete is placed against earth. 6. Reinforcing steel bars shall not be bent after embedding in hardened concrete unless approved by the Engineer. 7. Tack welding or bending reinforcing steel bars by means of heat is prohibited. 8. Where required by the contract documents, reinforcing steel bars shall be embedded into the hardened concrete utilizing an adhesive anchoring system specifically manufactured for that application. Installation shall be per the manufacturer’s written instructions.
CONCRETE REINFORCING SECTION 03 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
9. Bars with kinks or with bends not shown shall not be used. 10. Heating or welding bars shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.4 and shall only be permitted where specified or approved by the Engineer. Bars shall not be welded at the bend. 3.07 REPAIR OF EPOXY COATING A. Epoxy coating damage need not be repaired in cases where the damaged area is 0.1 square inch or smaller. Repair all damaged areas larger than 0.1 square inch in conformance with ASTM A775. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field quality control shall include the following: 1. Notify the Engineer whenever the specified clearances between the reinforcing steel bars cannot be met. The concrete shall not be placed until the Contractor submits a solution to the congestion problem and it has been approved by the Engineer. 2. The reinforcing steel bars may be moved as necessary to avoid other reinforcing steel bars, conduits or other embedded items provided the tolerance does not exceed that specified in this section. The Engineer’s approval of the modified reinforcing steel arrangement is required where the specified tolerance is exceeded. No cutting of the reinforcing steel bars shall be done without written approval of the Engineer. 3. Coated reinforcing steel bars will be inspected on the jobsite for handling defects, coating abrasion, coating thickness and continuity of coating. The Engineer may defer final inspection of the coated reinforcing steel bars until bar erection and handling is complete. Repair coated areas as directed by the Engineer and completed prior to concrete placement. 4. SPU laboratory shall be employed to review and approve Contractor welding procedures and qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.4. The laboratory shall visually inspect each weld for visible defects and conduct non-destructive field testing (radiographic or magnetic particle) on not less than one sample for each 10 welds. If a defective weld is found, the previous 5 welds by the same welder shall also be tested.
END OF SECTION 03 20 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies cast-in-place concrete which consists of furnishing all material, mixing and transporting equipment, and performing all labor for the proportioning, mixing, transporting, placing, consolidating, finishing, and curing of concrete in the structure. B. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 03 11 00 3. Section 03 60 00 4. Section 05 54 01 5. Section 07 92 00 6. Section 07 93 00 7. Section 40 05 02 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ACI 211.1 Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavy Weight and Mass Concrete ACI 214 Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete ACI 304 Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete ACI 304.2 Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Concrete ACI 350 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures ACI 350.1 Tightness Testing of Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures ASTM C31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
Reference Title ASTM C39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ASTM C40 Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate for Concrete ASTM C42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete ASTM C136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM C143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete ASTM C150 Portland Cement ASTM C157 Length Change of Hardened Cement Mortar and Concrete ASTM C172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete ASTM C231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method ASTM C260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C595 Blended Hydraulic Cements ASTM C618 Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete ASTM C881 Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete ASTM C1059 Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete ASTM C1260 Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method) ASTM C1567 Determining the Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method) ASTM D75 Sampling Aggregates ASTM E329 Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction CRD-C572 U.S. Corps of Engineer’s Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop IBC 2015 International Building Code with local amendments SBC 2015 Seattle Building Code COS 2017 City of Seattle Standard Specifications for Road, Specifications Bridge, and Municipal Construction
1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. Each proposed mix design showing: 1. Expected strength at 28 days (56 days for concrete class A) 2. Corresponding slump before and after the introduction of high-range water- reducing admixtures 3. Water/cement ratios 4. Weights and test results of the ingredients 5. Aggregate gradation 6. Test results of mix design prepared by SPU Materials Lab 7. Other physical properties necessary to review each mix design for conformance with these specifications 8. Shrinkage test results for Class C-1 concrete to be used at liquid containment structures. C. Product literature and technical data for aggregates and pozzolan. D. Product literature, technical data and dosage of all proposed admixtures including, but not limited to, air entraining, water reducing and/or retarding admixtures at liquid containing concrete. E. Anticipated average delivery time from batch plant to site. If this time exceeds the limit specified in paragraph 3.01, include proposed method to extend set time without deleterious effects on final product. Engineer reserves the right, in their sole discretion, to accept or reject such proposed methods. F. Curing program description in sufficient detail to demonstrate acceptable strength, finish and crack control as specified. G. Product literature and technical data for waterstops, sealants, joint fillers, curing compounds, bonding compounds, surface sealers and hardeners, epoxy and chemical grouts for crack injection (if needed). H. Report of the most recent inspection of testing laboratory facilities by the Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory of the National Bureau of Standards. The report shall note deficiencies mentioned in the report of that inspection have been corrected. The evidence of inspection shall be provided prior to beginning the work of this section. I. Sample panels of formed surface finishes as specified in paragraph 3.10C of this section and Section 03 11 00, Concrete Forming. Samples of concrete floor and slab finishes as specified in paragraph 3.11E of this section. J. Tremie slab placement plan and techniques. K. Tremie slab inspection plan and methods of inspection. L. Concrete delivery truck tickets.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
M. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer’s Data: Copies of manufacturer’s data shall be provided for the following: a. Cement b. As-delivered concrete strength, slump, temperature, and air content c. Final laboratory report. 2. Ready-Mixed Concrete Truck Delivery Tickets: Each load of ready-mixed concrete delivered to the job site shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket showing the information listed in ASTM C94, Section 16. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Assurance by SPU: 1. Special Inspection of concrete work shall be performed by the Special Inspector under contract with SPU or the SPU’s Material’s Lab, and in conformance with the SBC Chapter 17. Special Inspector(s) and laboratory shall be acceptable to SPU in their sole discretion. Special Inspection of concrete is in addition to, but not replacing, other inspections and quality control requirements herein. Where sampling and testing required herein conforms to Special Inspection standards, such sampling and testing need not be duplicated. 2. All structural concrete work shall receive Special Inspection in accordance with SBC Chapter 17. Structural concrete includes all elements which resist code- defined loads and whose failure would impact life safety. Non-structural site work concrete does not require Special Inspection. Anchor bolts and anchors installed in hardened concrete require Special Inspection. B. Quality Control by Contractor: 1. To demonstrate conformance with the specified requirements for cast-in-place concrete, the Contractor shall provide the services of an independent testing laboratory which complies with the requirements of ASTM E329. The testing laboratory shall sample and test concrete materials as specified in this section. Costs of testing laboratory services shall be borne by the Contractor. C. Basis for Quality: 1. Cast-in-place concrete shall conform to the requirements of ACI 301, except as modified herein.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Portland cement shall be ASTM C150, Type II or Type V, low alkali, containing less than 0.60 percent alkalis. In addition to standard requirements, cement shall satisfy optional chemical and physical requirements of ASTM C150, Tables 2 and 4, respectively.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
2. If low alkali cement is not available, aggregates shall show an expansion of less than 0.1% when tested in accordance with ASTM C1260 or ASTM C1567 concrete mix test results shall be submitted verifying that the aggregates are not reactive per the criteria in this standard. ASTM C1260 and ASTM C1567 results shall be no older than 1 year. 3. Portland-pozzolan cement shall be ASTM C595, Type IP (MS), interground, low alkali. 4. Use cementitious materials that are of the same brand and type and from the same plant of manufacture as the cementitious materials used in the concrete represented by the submitted field test records or used in the trial mixtures. See Change of Materials paragraph below. B. Aggregates: 1. General: a. Except as modified herein, fine and coarse aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33. Fine and coarse aggregates shall be regarded as separate ingredients. Aggregates shall be non-reactive and washed before use. b. Check aggregates for alkali-silica reactive constituents per ASTM C1260. Aggregate shall have less than 0.1% expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM C1260. Aggregates having 0.1% or greater expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM C1260 may still be satisfactory provided ASTM C1567 concrete mix test results are submitted and show an expansion of less than 0.1% at 16 days. ASTM C1260 and ASTM C1567 test results shall be no older than 1 year. c. Tests for size and grading of fine and coarse aggregates shall be in accordance with ASTM C136. Combined aggregates shall be well and uniformly graded from coarse to fine sizes to produce a concrete that has optimum workability and consolidation characteristics. Establish the final combined aggregate gradation during mix design. d. Aggregates used in the concrete shall be obtained from the same sources and have the same size ranges as the aggregates used in the concrete represented by the submitted historical data or trial mixtures. See Change of Materials paragraph below. 2. Fine Aggregate: a. Fine aggregate shall be hard, dense, durable particles of either sand or crushed stone regularly graded from coarse to fine. Gradation shall conform to ASTM C33. For classes of concrete which will be used in liquid retaining structures, fine aggregate shall not exceed 40 percent by weight of combined aggregate total, except for concrete with coarse aggregate of less than maximum size 1/2 inch. b. Variations from the specified gradations in individual tests will be acceptable if the average of three consecutive tests is within the specified limits and the variation is within the permissible variation listed below:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
U.S. Standard Sieve Size Permissible Variation in Individual Tests, Percent 30 and coarser 2 50 and finer 0.5
c. Other tests shall be in accordance with the following specifications:
Test Test method Requirements Amount of material ASTM C117 3 percent passing No. 200 sieve maximum by weight Sand equivalent ASTM D2419 Minimum 70 3. Coarse Aggregate: a. Coarse aggregate shall be hard, dense and durable gravel or crushed rock free from injurious amounts of soft and friable particles, alkali, and organic matter. Other deleterious substances shall not exceed the limits listed in ASTM C33, Table 3 for Class Designation 5S. Gradation of each coarse aggregate size specified shall conform to ASTM C33, Table 2. b. Variations from the specified gradations will be acceptable in individual tests if the average of three consecutive tests is within the specified limits. c. Other tests shall be in accordance with the following specifications: C. Pozzolan: 1. Pozzolan shall be Class N, natural pozzolan, or Class F fly ash conforming to ASTM C618. Class C fly ash is not allowed. Pozzolan supplied during the life of the project shall have been formed at the same single source. See paragraph Change of Materials paragraph below. 2. The pozzolan color shall not substantially alter the resulting concrete from the normal gray color and appearance. 3. Use pozzolan materials that are of the same brand and type and from the same plant of manufacture as the materials used in the concrete represented by the submitted field test records or used in the trial mixtures. D. Admixtures: 1. General: a. Admixtures shall be compatible with the concrete and with each other. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride are not acceptable. Use admixtures in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and add separately to the concrete mix. The water reducing retarders and admixtures shall reduce the water required by at least 11 percent for a given concrete consistency and shall comply with the water/cement ratio standards of ACI 211.1. Retarder dosage shall result in set time consistent with requirements specified in Part 3.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
2. Water Reducing Admixtures: a. Conform to ASTM C494, Type A. Acceptable products include: BASF “MasterPozzolith 322”; SIKA Chemical Corp. “Plastocrete 161”; Euclid Chemical Co. “Eucon WR 91”; or approved substitute. 3. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixtures: a. Conform to ASTM C494, Type D. Acceptable products include: BASF “MasterPozzolith 80”; Sika Chemical Corp. “Plastiment”; Euclid Chemical Co. “Eucon Retarder 75”; or approved substitute. 4. High Range Water Reducing (Superplasticizing) Admixtures: a. Conform to ASTM C494, Type F. Acceptable products include: BASF “MasterGlenium” Series; Sika Chemical Corp. “Viscocrete 2100”, or “Viscocrete 2110” (Hot Weather) or “Viscocrete 6100” (Cold Weather); Euclid Chemical Co. “Eucon 37”; W.R. Grace “ADVA 195”; or approved substitute. 5. High Range Water Reducing And Retarding Admixtures: a. Conform to ASTM C494, Type G. Acceptable products include: W.R. Grace “Daracem 100”; Sika Chemical Corp. “Sikaplast 200”; Euclid Chemical Co. “Eucon 537”; or approved substitute. 6. Air Entraining Agent: a. Conform to ASTM C260. Acceptable products include: BASF “”; Sika Chemical Corp. “AEA-15”; Euclid Chemical Co. “AEA-92”; or approved substitute. The air entraining agent added shall produce, in accordance with ASTM C260, an entrained air content specified in the Mix Proportioning table below for each class of concrete. 7. Shrinkage Reducing Admixture: a. Select shrinkage reducing admixture for compatibility with air entrainment admixture and other ingredients of the concrete mix. Acceptable products include: BASF “Tetraguard AS20” and Grace “Eclipse 4500” or approved substitute. E. Water: 1. Water for washing aggregate, for mixing and for curing shall be free from oil and deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials; and shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C1602. Additionally, water used for curing shall not contain an amount of impurities sufficient to discolor the concrete. F. Change of Materials: 1. After each concrete mix design is approved by the Engineer, no changes of any sort or source will be allowed without prior written approval from the Engineer. When brand, type, size, or source of cementitious materials, aggregates, water, ice, or admixtures are proposed to be changed, new field data, data from new trial mixtures, or evidence that indicates that the change will not affect adversely the relevant properties of the concrete shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer before use in concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
2.02 CONCRETE CHARACTERISTICS A. Mix Proportioning: 1. Concrete shall be normal weight concrete composed of specified cement, pozzolan, admixtures, aggregates and water proportioned and mixed to produce a workable, strong, dense, and impermeable concrete. The Contractor may substitute interground Portland-pozzolan cement conforming to ASTM C595, containing the specified amount of pozzolan in lieu of Portland cement and pozzolan. Pozzolan may be omitted in concrete exposed to normal atmospheric conditions and concrete not in contact with the ground or liquid. Water/cement ratio is based on the combined contents of cement and pozzolan in a given mix proportion. 2. Concrete shall be provided in accordance with the following:
Pozzolan, ASTM C33 Maximum Minimumb 28- percent by Air Slump Concrete coarse water/ day weight of content rangeg class aggregate cement compressive cementitious (percent) (inches) size ratio strength, psi materialsa A 467 0.42 20-35 4-6 4000h 3-5 B 57 or 57 0.45 15-25e 4-6 3000 3-5 C 57 or 67 or 0.40 15-25 4-6 4500 3-5 467c D 57 or 67 0.40 15-25 4-6 5000 3-5 Ed 57 -- 15-25e Not 2000 4-8 Required F -- -- 15-25e Not 500f 4-8 Required G 8 0.42 15-25e 4-6 4000 3-5
a Pozzolan content shall be included in cementitious fraction. b Determine compressive strength at the end of 28 days based on test cylinders made and tested in accordance with ASTM C39. c At beams and columns, walls 15” or less in thickness, and at elevated slabs 12” or less in thickness, ASTM coarse aggregate gradation 67 shall be used. At footings and mat slabs greater than 18” in thickness, ASTM coarse aggregate gradation 467 shall be used. d Concrete encasement for electrical conduit shall contain 3 pounds of red oxide per sack of cement. e Pozzolan use optional for this class of concrete. f Minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 500 psi and maximum 28-day compressive strength shall be 1,000 psi. g Slump before addition of high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer). Maximum slump after addition of high range water reducing admixture shall be 8”. h Compressive strength of Class A concrete may be determined at 56 days.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 9
B. Use: 1. Concrete shall be provided by class for the corresponding use listed as follows:
Type of Use Class of Concrete Mass Concrete (thickness greater than 36 inches ) - See Section A 03 70 00 – Mass Concrete for additional requirements Non-structural concrete (sidewalks, curbs, pavers, etc.) B Cast-in-place structural concrete for liquid containment (Pump C Station, Head Box, Footings and Walkways) Precast concrete D Pipe bedding and encasement, electrical conduit encasement E (duct banks) and concrete fill Encasement of reinforcement extension for future construction F Thin (2”-4” thick) topping slab over concrete base slab G C. Control Tests: 1. General: a. Before beginning concrete work, determine the proper proportions of materials for each class of concrete. The mix shall consist of specified cement, pozzolan, admixtures, aggregate and water. Methods for selecting and adjusting proportions of the ingredients shall be in accordance with ACI 211.1. Verification of mix characteristics for submittal may be achieved using either the Trial Mix Design method or Field Experience method. Do not place concrete in the field prior to review and acceptance of mix proposed. 2. Trial Mix Design: a. Manufacture each class of concrete and/or mix verified by this method at the batch plant which will supply concrete to the project using materials proposed for the Work and material combinations listed above. Testing, data and reporting shall conform to ACI 318 and the following: 1) Required compressive strength used as the basis for selecting concrete proportions (f’cr) shall be the specified concrete strength (f’c) + 1000 psi for specified concrete strengths less than 3,000 psi and f’c + 1200 psi for specified concrete strengths between 3000 psi and 5000 psi. 2) Make at least three trial different mixtures for each class of concrete qualified by the Trial Mix Design. Each trial mixture shall have a different w/cm ratio or different cementitious materials content that will produce a range of compressive strengths encompassing f’cr. 3) Design trial mixtures to produce a slump within ¾ inch of the maximum specified and an air content within 0.5 percent of the maximum allowable air content.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 10
4) For each w/cm ratio or cementitious materials content, at least twelve standard test cylinders shall be cast and cured in accordance with ASTM C192. Four cylinders from each batch shall be tested at age 7 days, 14 days, and 28 days or as required to comply with ACI 318. 5) From results of the cylinder tests, plot a curve showing the relationship between w/cm ratio and compressive strength. 6) From the curve of w/cm ratio versus compressive strength, select the w/cm ratio that will produce f’cr. This is the maximum w/cm ratio that shall be used unless a lower w/cm ratio is specified in the Mix Proportioning paragraph above. 3. Field Experience Data: a. When sufficient test data for a particular mix design is available which is identical or substantially similar to that proposed for use, Contractor may substitute use of this data in lieu of a trial mix design. Field data, reports, and analysis shall conform to ACI 318, except as modified herein. 1) Historical mix design proportions for which data are submitted may vary from the specified mix within the following limits: a) f’c as specified or up to 500 psi above b) w/cm ratio as specified or lower c) pozzolan content within 5 percent of that specified d) maximum coarse aggregate size may not vary smaller, but gradation of coarse aggregate may vary e) fine aggregate fraction within +0/ -5 percent of that specified f) slump after introduction of admixtures +0/-1 inch. b. Use of historical mix design data does not allow modification of the project mix specifications herein without review and acceptance by the Engineer. 4. Shrinkage: a. Liquid containing structures using Class C-1 concrete are intended to be watertight. When used for liquid containing structures, the Contractor shall provide test results for the Class C-1 concrete mix meeting the following requirement: drying shrinkage limit of 0.032 percent in the laboratory at 35 days (7 days moist cure and 28 days drying) as tested by ASTM C157 with the following modifications. 1) Wet cure specimens for a period of 7 days (including the period of time the specimens are in the mold). Wet cure may be achieved either through storage in a moist cabinet or room in accordance with ASTM C 511, or through storage in lime saturated water. 2) Slump of concrete for testing shall match job requirements and need not be limited to restrictions as stated in ASTM C 157 section 8.4.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 11
3) Report results in accordance with ASTM C 157 at 0, 7, 14 & 28 days of drying. b. Concrete shall not be placed in the field prior to acceptance of the concrete mix. It is recommended that a shrinkage reducing admixture (see Part 2 paragraph above for Shrinkage Reducing Admixture products) be considered for use in concrete for liquid containing structures using the Class C-1 concrete mix to meet the drying shrinkage limit. 2.03 WATERSTOPS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): 1. Manufacture PVC waterstops from virgin polyvinyl chloride conforming to the Corps of Engineers Specification No. CRD-C572. Unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings, waterstops in construction joints shall be 6-inch flat center/ribbed sides/0.375 inch thick. Acceptable products include: Greenstreak Group, Inc. “Model 679”; Vinylex Waterstops and Accessories “Model R638”; or approved substitute. Waterstops in expansion joints shall be 9 inch center- bulb/ribbed sides/0.375 inch thick. Acceptable products include: Greenstreak Group, Inc. “Model 696”; Vinylex Waterstops and Accessories Model “RLB938”; or approved substitute. 2. Crosses, tees, and other shapes used for changes of direction, intersections, and transitions shall be molded pieces as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Expanding (Hydrophilic) Waterstops: 1. Expanding waterstops shall be bentonite-free and made from unvulcanized rubber. Acceptable products include: Adeka Corporation “Ultra Seal MC- 2010MN”; Greenstreak Group, Inc. “Hydrotite CJ-1020-2K”; or approved substitute. These are allowable for use only where indicated on the drawings or accepted in writing by the Engineer. Provide adhesive approved by the waterstop manufacturer where required due to geometry, irregular surface conditions, or as recommended by the manufacturer. The waterstop MUST be placed between two mats or curtains of steel reinforcement. For limited cover applications or where only one mat or curtain of reinforcement is present, use Adeka Corporation “Ultra Seal KBA-1510FP”. C. Injected Tube Waterstops: 1. Chemical grout injection tube system, if shown on the Drawings, shall be "Injecto System" by De Neef Construction Chemicals or approved substitute. Submit equivalent systems to the Engineer for review. 2.04 SEALANTS AND JOINT FILLERS A. Sealants and preformed joint fillers shall be as specified in Sections 07 92 00, Joint Sealants, and 07 93 00, Preformed Joint Fillers. 2.05 BONDING COMPOUNDS A. Epoxy resin bonding compounds to be used for wet areas shall conform to ASTM C881 Types IV or V, Class A, B, or C depending on temperature at use, and Grade to suit geometry and installation circumstances. Acceptable products include: Degussa Building Systems, Concresive Paste SPL or 1490 as applicable; Sika Chemical Corporation Sikadur 35 or Sikadur 32, as applicable; or approved substitute.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 12
B. Non-epoxy bonding compounds may be used in dry areas for non-structural bonding or as specifically noted on the drawings only and shall conform to ASTM C1059 Type II. Acceptable products include: Burke by Edoco, Acrylic Bondcrete; ChemMasters, Cretelox; or approved substitute. C. Bonding compounds shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 2.06 EPOXY FOR CRACK INJECTION A. Epoxy for crack injection shall be a two component, moisture insensitive, high modulus, injection grade, 100 percent solids, blend of epoxy-resin compounds. The consistency shall be as required to achieve complete penetration in hairline cracks and larger. Material shall conform to ASTM C881 Type 1 Grade 1. Acceptable products include Sika Corporation “Sikadur 52”; Adhesives Technology Corporation “Crackbond SLV302”; or approved substitute. Use epoxy grout for crack repairs except as noted below for non- structural cracks in liquid-containing concrete. The Engineer shall determine whether a crack is classified as structural or non-structural. Structural cracks must be repaired with epoxy. 2.07 CHEMICAL GROUT FOR CRACK INJECTION A. Use Chemical (hydrophobic polyurethane) grout at the Engineer's discretion as an alternative to the injection of the epoxy grout for sealing non-structural cracks in structures intended to be watertight. Acceptable products include "Hydro Active Cut" by De Neef Construction Chemicals or “SikaFix HH Plus” by Sika Corporation for sealing large volume leaks, and “Flex SLV PURe” by De Neef Construction Chemicals or “SikaFix HH LV” by Sika Corporation for sealing small volume leaks and hairline cracks, or approved substitute. 2.08 RETARDANT A. Retardant for exposing aggregates for unformed surfaces in construction joints shall be Sika “Rugasol-S”; W.R. Grace “Top-Cast”; or approved substitute. Apply retardant in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions sufficient to assure a minimum penetration of 1/4 inch. 2.09 CURING AND SEALING COMPOUNDS A. Curing and sealing compound shall be BASF “MasterKure CC 250SB”; Dayton Superior “Cure & Seal 25% J22UV”; or approved substitute, conforming to ASTM C309 and ASTM C1315. B. Curing and sealing compound shall be clear and applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, except as otherwise specified. Curing and sealing compound shall be certified compliant with final finish systems.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 13
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be truck-mixed, ready-mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C94. Proportion materials by weighing. Introduce pozzolan into the mixer with cement and other components of the concrete mix; do not introduce pozzolan into a wet mixer ahead of other materials or with mixing water. Introduce water at the time of charging the mixer; additional water may be introduced within 45 minutes from charging the mixer, provided the specified slump is not exceeded and the maximum total water per the approved mix design is not exceeded. Arrange with the testing laboratory for inspection as required to comply with these specifications. B. Deliver concrete to the site and complete discharge within 90 minutes after introduction of water to the mixture. Extension of allowable time beyond this limit requires a Contractor proposed remedial action plan to be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. 3.02 CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Conveying Concrete: 1. Convey concrete from the mixer to the forms in accordance with ACI 301. Remove concrete that has segregated in conveying from the site of the work. B. Placing Concrete: 1. General: a. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. Do not permit concrete to drop freely more than 4-ft. 2. Placing Concrete By Pumping: a. Concrete may be placed by pumping at Contractor’s discretion. Use of pumping shall not, however, be the cause to change or relax specified mix design characteristics. Concrete shall possess the specified characteristics at the point of placement. b. Measure slump at the hose discharge, except as follows. Initial slump testing in each pour shall occur at both the pumping unit inlet hopper and hose discharge. Slump loss in pumping, measured between the inlet hopper and the hose discharge, shall not exceed 1 inch. After these criteria have been satisfied, slump may be measured at the inlet hopper with allowable slump increased by the earlier measured difference, not to exceed 1 inch. c. Measure air content at the hose discharge, except as follows. Initial air content testing shall occur at both the pumping unit inlet hopper and the hose discharge. Loss of air content shall be measured between the inlet hopper and the hose discharge. Increase the air content of the delivered concrete at the inlet hopper to provide the specified air content at the hose discharge. After these criteria have been satisfied, air content may be measured at the inlet hopper.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 14
d. Before starting each pumping operation, prime the pump and line with a cement slurry to lubricate the system. Waste cement slurry outside the forms. Equip hose tip with a safety chain for recovery in case of hose blowout during pumping. Hose or accessories shall not remain in the freshly placed concrete. e. Use proper tremie placing techniques and equipment for all pump placed concrete. Pump discharge system shall remain full of concrete from pump to discharge point at all times. Concrete pumping shall not occur until SPU has verified that the proper equipment is available, in particular, the tremie plug. Should the discharge line become open, with significant zones empty of concrete, then the pumping shall cease and the line re- primed with tremie plug installed before continuing the pour. 3. Tremie Concrete: a. Proper tremie placing techniques and equipment shall be used for all pump placed concrete. Pump discharge system shall remain full of concrete from pump to discharge point at all times. Concrete pumping shall not occur until Engineer has verified that the proper equipment is available, in particular, the tremie plug. Should the discharge line become open, with significant zones empty of concrete, then the pumping shall cease and the line re-primed with tremie plug installed before continuing the pour. b. Tremie/Seal Slab (Pump Station): Place all concrete in this slab by tremie tube (minimum 10” heavy gauge steel pipes) pumping to avoid separation and segregation of the concrete mix components. Separate the first concrete placed from the fluid in the excavation using a plug in the tube, or other approved device. Continuously place concrete until the tremie tube or pumping pipe is removed from concrete at completion of the pour. If the area to be placed exceeds 15 feet in any dimension, provide multiple, pre-positioned tubes spaced at no more than 15 feet apart. Pump from one tube to the next until the subsequent tube is sufficiently embedded into the fresh concrete. Continue the pour by pumping into the next tube, and so on until the entire slab is placed. c. Maintain a minimum 12 inches of placement pipe embedment in the concrete during concrete placement. If at any time during the pour, the tremie pipe orifice is removed from the concrete and concrete is discharged above the rising concrete level, the placement will be considered to be defective and corrective measures taken at Contractor’s expense. d. The tremie slab thickness makes it a mass concrete pour where precautions shall be taken to minimize thermal cracking. Tremie slab concrete mix shall be pre-cooled such that the temperature of the concrete delivered to the site does not exceed 70 degrees F. Methods of pre-cooling the concrete mix include cooled batch water, shaded aggregates and cement, and coarse aggregate stockpiles sprayed with water for an evaporative cooling effect.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 15
e. Inspection of Tremie Slab Concrete: Develop and submit an inspection plan covering locations and methods of taking soundings during the tremie concrete placement. Soundings shall be taken each hour during placement or every 200 cy, whichever results in the most frequency of soundings. Soundings shall be spaced to cover the area at all tremie pipe discharge locations. Data obtained shall from soundings shall be plotted immediately to monitor progress in placement.
4. Placing Concrete In Hot Weather: In hot weather (above 85 degrees F), concrete shall be placed in accordance with ACI 305.1. 5. Placing Concrete In Cold Weather: In cold weather (below 45 degrees F), concrete shall be placed in accordance with ACI 306.1. 6. Starter Course At Waterstops: a. When placing concrete in wall forms for liquid containing structures over 8 feet in height and without form windows, use a starter course of Class D-2 concrete placed to a minimum depth of 2 inches and maximum depth of 6 inches and thoroughly consolidated. Subsequent lift(s) of concrete shall be placed onto this starter course within 10 minutes of the starter course placement, and the two lifts shall be thoroughly consolidated together to result in a dense, continuous, watertight structure with no cold joint. Provide adequate pumping and consolidating equipment and personnel to achieve the time limit specified herein. C. Consolidating Concrete: 1. Consolidate concrete in accordance with ACI 301. If proper consolidation is not occurring, then suspend concrete placing until proper consolidation can be achieved. 3.03 CURING AND SEALING A. General: 1. Complete concrete curing by water curing or by using a clear membrane curing compound or by a combination of both methods. Coordinate repairs or treatment of concrete surfaces so that interruption of the curing will not be necessary. 2. Maintain concrete surface temperature between 50 degrees F and 80 degrees F for at least 5 days. Cure concrete in hot weather (above 80 degrees F) in accordance with ACI 305.1. Cure concrete in cold weather (below 45 degrees F) in accordance with ACI 306.1. B. Water Curing: 1. When water curing is used, keep concrete wet continuously for a minimum of 10 days after placement. Absorptive mats or fabric may be used to retain moisture during the curing period. 2. Unless otherwise specified, use water curing in hot weather for liquid containment structures. Cover forms and keep moist. Loosen forms as soon as possible without damage to the concrete, and make provisions for curing water to run down inside them. During form removal, take care to provide wet cover to newly exposed surfaces.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 16
C. Curing Compound: 1. When curing compound is used, apply it as soon as the concrete has set sufficiently so as not to be marred by the application or apply it immediately following form removal for vertical and other formed surfaces. Preparation of surfaces, application procedures, and installation precautions shall be followed in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions. For liquid containing structures, apply curing compound at twice the manufacturer’s recommended dosage rate in two coats applied perpendicular to each other. 2. Do not use curing compound on concrete surfaces to be coated, waterproofed, moisture-proofed, tiled, roofed, or where other coverings are to be bonded, unless the curing compound is compatible with the final finish covering or it is removed prior to covering. 3. The Electrical Building concrete floor slab shall be cured and sealed for dustproofing with two coats of KURE-N-SEAL W by BASF Chemical Company. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete from injurious action by sun, rain, flowing water, frost and mechanical injury. B. Loading green concrete will not be permitted. Green concrete is defined as concrete with less than 100 percent of the specified strength. C. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, no backfill shall be placed against concrete walls until the concrete has reached the specified strength, connecting slabs and beams have been cast and have reached the specified strength, and watertightness testing and repairs have been completed for liquid containing structures to the satisfaction of SPU. D. Arrangements for covering, insulating, and protecting concrete in cold weather shall be in accordance with ACI 306.1. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. General: 1. Place concrete in each unit of construction continuously. Before new concrete is placed on or against concrete which has set, retighten forms and clean foreign matter from the surface of the set concrete. Provide watertight joints as specified in the Waterstops article below. B. Construction: 1. Form construction joints as specified. Produce a rough surface of exposed concrete aggregates using a surface retardant at construction joints, including joints between the slab and topping concrete. The limit of the treated surfaces shall be 1 inch away from the joint edges. Within 24 hours after placing, remove retarded surface mortar either by high pressure water jetting or stiff brushing or combination of both so as to expose coarse aggregates. A rough surface of exposed aggregate may also be produced by sandblasting followed by high pressure water jetting. Sandblasting, if used, shall remove 1/4 inch of laitance film and shall expose coarse aggregate to ensure adequate bond and watertightness at the construction joints.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 17
C. Locations: 1. Provide construction joint locations as follows: a. Cast walls exceeding 50 feet in length in panels not to exceed 30 feet in length. Where the number of panels is three or more, the cast panels in an alternating pattern, unless 5 days have elapsed between casting of adjoining panels. Joints are not allowed within the lesser of 10 feet or 25 percent of the wall length from any corner unless specifically detailed thus on the drawings. b. Locate joints in beams or girders at or near the quarterpoint between supports. c. Make joints in the members of a floor system at or near the quarterpoint of the span. d. Make joints in walls and columns at the underside of floors, slabs, beams or girders and at the tops of footings or floor slabs. Make joints in columns perpendicular to the axis. e. Cast slab panels in checkerboard patterns not to exceed 40 feet in length and not to exceed 900 square feet in area, with maximum 1 ½ to 1 ratio of side lengths. Minimum lapsed time between placing adjacent panels shall be 72 hours. The requirements for size of slab panel may be waived if joints are specifically located on the Drawings. 2. Vertical construction joints shall be grooved at faces exposed to view including interior faces of basins and tanks. Caulk grooves subjected to wetting or weather with joint sealer. 3. Continue reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric across construction joints. Girders and floor slabs shall not be constructed over columns or walls until at least one day has elapsed to allow for shrinkage in the column or wall. No joint will be allowed between a slab and a beam or girder unless otherwise specified. Joints shall be perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Provide waterstops in construction joints at locations as specified in Waterstops article below. 3.06 INSERTS AND EMBEDMENTS A. Inserts: 1. Where pipes, castings or conduits are to pass through structures, place such pipes or castings in the forms before placing the concrete, or where shown on Drawings or approved by SPU, provide openings in the concrete for subsequent insertion of such pipes, castings or conduits. Such openings shall be provided with waterstops and shall have a slight flare to facilitate grouting and permit the escape of entrained air during grouting. 2. Additional reinforcement shall be provided around openings as shown. Grout fill around inserts shall be non-shrink grout as specified in Section 03 60 00, Grouting.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 18
3. Place horizontal conduits and pipes, where shown in structural slabs and beams, between the top and bottom layers of reinforcement. Spacing and size limitations shall conform to ACI 318 unless specifically approved otherwise by the Engineer. Such conduits and pipes shall not run directly beneath a column or, if used, its steel base plate. Pipe, conduit, dowels, and other ferrous items required to be embedded in concrete construction shall be so positioned and supported prior to placement of concrete that there will be a minimum of 2-inches clearance between said items and any part of the concrete reinforcement. The outside diameter of such conduits should not exceed one-fourth the slab or beam thickness. Securing such items in position by welding them to the reinforcement will not be permitted. B. Embedments: 1. Gate frames, gate thimbles, special castings, channels or other miscellaneous metal parts that are to be embedded in the concrete shall be set and secured in the forms prior to concrete placement. Unless otherwise specified, embed anchor bolts and inserts in concrete as shown. Provide inserts, anchors or other bolts necessary for the attachment of piping, valves, metal parts and equipment. Provide nailing blocks, plugs, strips, and the like necessary for the attachment of trim, finish, and similar work. Voids in sleeves, inserts and anchor slots shall be filled temporarily with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete into the voids. Positon operators or sleeves for gate or valve stems to clear reinforcing steel, conduit and other embedments, and to align accurately with equipment. 3.07 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Expansion joints shall be as shown. Do not extend reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete through expansion joints. Provide waterstops in expansion joints. 3.08 WATERSTOPS A. Waterstops shall conform to ACI 301. Securely hold waterstops in position during placing of concrete. If, after placing concrete, waterstops are materially out of position or shape, the surrounding concrete shall be removed, the waterstop reset, and concrete replaced in accordance with Modification of Existing Concrete article below. Submit to the Engineer for review the procedures and details for restoring integrity of the waterstop seal, including additional waterstops needed at the repair interface to existing concrete B. Waterstops shall be provided at the following joints: 1. Expansion joints in structures. 2. Joints in parts of structures exposed to ground or water on one side and occupied by non-submerged equipment or by personnel on the other. 3. Wall and slab joints of tanks and channels subject to water pressure. Waterstops shall be provided from 12 inches above high water level to structural foundation slab or footing, or as otherwise noted on the drawings. C. Field splices shall be heat fused welded butt splices only and shall be acceptable only in straight sections. Lapping of splices or joining by any means other than heat fused welding shall not be allowed. Crosses, tees, and other shapes used for changes of direction, intersections, and transitions shall be factory fabricated.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 19
D. Install hydrophilic waterstops according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Surfaces of concrete shall be prepared to required level/plumb and smoothness as required by manufacturer. Form and finish concrete placed first with contact surface requirements in mind, or grind surface if necessary. Provide bonding adhesive if required for the particular product, or if surface conditions warrant. Note restrictions on use described in the Expanding (Hydrophilic) Waterstops paragraph in Part 2. 3.09 MODIFICATION OF EXISTING CONCRETE A. General: 1. Verify structural dimensions related to or controlled by previously constructed or existing structures prior to concrete work. B. Cutting or Coring Concrete: 1. Neatly saw cut surfaces exposed to view to a depth of 1 inch prior to removing the existing concrete. Where existing reinforcement is exposed due to saw cutting or core drilling and no new material is to be placed on the sawcut surface, a coating or surface treatment of epoxy shall be applied to the entire cut surface. Areas that require an oversize opening shall be as shown on the Drawings. The exposed surface of the oversized opening shall be coated with an epoxy bonding compound and re-finished with profiling mortar to the required opening size. 2. Ground existing joint edge to create a chamfer matching those used adjacent, where occurs. Grind existing to imitate tooled edge. 3. Unless specifically notified otherwise, investigate concrete to be drilled, cored or sawcut to determine location of existing reinforcing steel. Locate penetrations to clear existing reinforcing steel if possible. Unless otherwise detailed on the drawings, or where not possible to avoid reinforcing steel, consult the Engineer as to acceptability of cutting reinforcing steel and provide new reinforcing systems as directed. Locating methods include chipping to expose reinforcing steel, ground penetrating radar, X-ray, or magnetic flux devices. Locates of existing reinforcing shall be paid for by the Contractor. C. Joining New Concrete To Existing: 1. Existing concrete surfaces to be joined with new concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened by abrasive blasting, bush hammering or other method to achieve ¼-inch amplitude surface. Remove existing metalwork, embeds or other interfering items. Coat existing surface with epoxy bonding compound just prior to placement of new concrete. D. Dowels: 1. Dowels to be installed in existing concrete shall utilize holes drilled with a hammer drill and carbide bit (core drilled holes not allowed), properly brushed and air-cleaned with oil-free compressed air, and an injectable two-component epoxy adhesive, as per Section 03 60 00. Installation shall conform to manufacturer’s recommendations and to ICC Evaluation Reports. E. Drilling Holes In Existing Concrete For Post-Installed Anchors 1. Use non-destructive methods for locating reinforcement prior to drilling operations. For anchor locations that interfere with reinforcement, first attempt to relocate anchors to avoid drilling through the reinforcement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 20
2. For situations that do not allow relocation of the anchor, cutting of reinforcement for anchor installation subject to the following will be acceptable: a. Prior to drilling through reinforcement, the Contractor shall have the Engineer evaluate the condition. For situations that appear questionable, the Engineer shall be consulted. b. Holes drilled through reinforcement must be in compliance with adhesive anchor assumptions for roughened hole surface typical of a hammer drill and carbide bit. No smooth hole surfaces are allowed. c. Do not cut slab rebar within 24 inches of the supporting wall, column or an opening in the slab. d. No cutting of rebar is allowed in the middle third of slab spans for anchors with diameters equal to or greater than 3/4 inch. e. Maximum of two rebar may be cut in any 10 foot width of slab. f. Maximum of two rebar may be cut within any 10 foot width of concrete wall. g. Maximum of one rebar may be cut within any 8 foot width of CMU wall. h. Do not cut wall or slab rebar within 24 inches of an opening. 3. For anchors that cannot be moved and that conflict with the above requirements, consult the Engineer for direction. Under no circumstances will it be acceptable to cut through reinforcement in beams, columns, precast members, and stairs. F. Waterstops: 1. Where a waterstop between new and existing concrete is required, install a hydrophilic waterstop unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
3.10 FORMED SURFACE FINISHES A. Repair Of Surface Defects: 1. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, minor honeycombing or otherwise defective concrete in accordance with ACI 301. Clean areas to be patched. Cut out minor honeycombed or otherwise defective areas to solid concrete to a depth of at least 1 inch. The edges of the cut shall be perpendicular to the surface of the concrete. Finish patches on exposed surfaces to match the adjoining surfaces after they have set. Cure patches as specified for the concrete. Protect finished surfaces from stains and abrasions. Finishes shall be equal in workmanship, texture, and general appearance to that of the adjacent concrete. Concrete with honeycombing which exposes the reinforcing steel or with defects which affect structural strength shall be corrected by removing concrete a minimum of one inch beyond the reinforcing.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 21
B. Formed Surface Finishing: 1. Finish formed surfaces as soon as practicable after form removal and repair of surface defects. Finishes shall be as follows. a. Finish A shall be a grout-cleaned rubbed finish in accordance with ACI 301 except that all form fins and other protrusions shall be completely removed to the final surface. Lightly sandblast surfaces prior to sacking. Sandblasting shall occur after the specified curing period. For interior areas not exposed to moisture or weather, mix water used in the sacking mortar with a PVA bonding compound as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide Finish A for uncoated surfaces at surfaces of stair wells; interior surfaces of equipment rooms, galleries and tunnels; operations areas; exposed channels and tanks from 1 foot below minimum water surfaces and up; and permanently exposed vertical and sloped surfaces, such as pipe chases. Do not provide Finish A at concrete surfaces receiving a coating. b. Finish B shall be a smooth surface with all form fins and other protrusions completely removed to the final surface. Provide Finish B for coated surfaces. See Section 09 90 00 for concrete surface coatings and surface preparation, including filling bug holes before coating. c. Finish C shall be a finish which has surface imperfections less than 3/8 inch in any dimension. Repair or remove surface imperfections greater than 3/8 inch and neatly patch the affected areas. Provide Finish C or smoother for interior surfaces of wet wells, tanks and channels from 1 foot below minimum water surfaces and down and otherwise unfinished interior surfaces. d. Finish D shall be the finish for surfaces which may be left as they come from the forms, except plug tie holes and repair defects greater than 1/2 inch in any dimension.
FORMED SURFACE FINISHING SCHEDULE Location Surface Finish Pump Station: Walls A Beams and underside of cover slab A Ramp and generator area guard walls A Fin walls between pumps at base slab A Electrical Room: Curbs for CMU walls A Housekeeping pads A Head Box: Exterior of wall extension A Interior of wall extension C
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 22
FORMED SURFACE FINISHING SCHEDULE Location Surface Finish Other Surfaces Not Specifically Noted Above: Above grade exposed concrete (extend finish to one-foot A below grade) Below grade surfaces (below a line one-foot below grade) C
C. Samples of Formed Surface Finishes: A sample concrete panel, 2 feet by 2 feet, representative of formed surface Finish A and Finish B (one sample panel for each different formliner finish specified by the Architect) shall be provided to the Engineer. The panel shall be representative of the workmanship and finish required, including filling of tie holes. The sample shall be deemed acceptable by the Engineer prior to the start of such work. The sample shall be on display at the job site, and finished surfaces shall match sample. 3.11 SLAB FINISHES A. General: 1. The finishes specified herein include surface finishes, treatments and toppings for floors and slabs. Do not use dry cement on new concrete surfaces to absorb excess moisture. Round edges to a radius of 1/2 inch. Joints shall be grooved to a radius and depth of 3/8 inch each. Finishes shall match the sample panels provided per the Samples of Concrete Floor Finishes paragraph below. 2. Slope floors to drain uniformly within a room or space. Unless otherwise specified, slope shall be a minimum of 1/8 inch per foot toward nearest drain. Where finish is not specified, floor slabs shall receive steel troweling. Restrict use of floor drains with only locally depressed slabs to locations specifically noted. B. Float Finish: 1. Perform floating with a hand or power-driven float in accordance with ACI 301. Begin floating when the bleed water sheen has disappeared and the surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of the specific float apparatus. Floating of any one area shall be the minimum necessary to produce a finish that will meet tolerance requirements of ACI 117 for a conventional surface. Refloat the slab immediately to a uniform texture. Floating shall compact and smooth the surface and close any cracks and checking of surfaces. Apply float finish to surfaces of channel, tank bottom slabs, tops of footings, and steps and surfaces to receive roofing and insulation. C. Steel Trowel Finish: 1. Float the concrete surface and then trowel in accordance with ACI 301. Immediately after final troweling, the surface shall be cured and protected as specified in Curing and Sealing and Protection paragraphs above. Provide steel trowel finish on floors unless specified otherwise.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 23
D. Broomed Finish: 1. Immediately after concrete has received a floated finish, give the concrete surface a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across the surface in accordance with ACI 301. Provide broomed finish for walks, tops of tanks, slabs-on-grade exposed to atmosphere, and where otherwise indicated or specified. E. Samples Of Concrete Floor Finishes: 1. Provide a sample concrete panel, 2 feet by 2 feet, representative of each specified finish, to the Engineer. The panels shall be representative of the workmanship and finishes required. Samples shall be approved in field prior to the start of such work.
3.12 RELATED SURFACES A. Stair Tread: 1. Construct stair tread with nonskid nosing as specified in Section 05 50 00. Tread shall have a steel trowel finish and shall have a slope of 1/8 inch per foot toward the front. Ends of treads shall have a 1/16 to 1/8 inch cut between concrete and metal tread to allow for expansion. B. Finishing of Unformed Surfaces: 1. Related Unformed Surfaces: a. Tops of walls or buttresses, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed and shall be floated to a texture reasonably consistent with that of the adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across the unformed surfaces. 2. Pavements and Sidewalks: a. The surfaces of the concrete shall be screeded to grade and sloped to drain. After screeding, the surface shall receive a broomed finish as specified in the Broomed Finish paragraph above. Round edges and expansion joints to a radius of 1/2 inch. Joints shall be grooved to a radius and depth of 1/4 inch each. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Field sampling and testing shall be performed by SPU Materials Lab. Take samples of aggregates and concrete at such times to represent the quality of the materials and work throughout the project. The laboratory shall provide the necessary labor, materials and facilities for sampling the aggregate and for casting, handling and initially storing the concrete samples at the site of work. Sample aggregates in accordance with the Sampling paragraph below not less than 30 days prior to the use of such aggregates in the work. The minimum number of samples and tests are specified in Testing paragraph below.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 24
B. Sampling: 1. Concrete: a. Take samples of plastic concrete in accordance with ASTM C172. Take samples at the hopper of concreting equipment or transit mix truck, except as noted in the Placing Concrete by Pumping subparagraph of the Conveying and Placing article above. C. Testing: 1. Aggregate: a. A minimum of one test of coarse aggregate per 400 cubic yards of concrete and a minimum of one test of fine aggregate per 200 cubic yards of concrete used shall be made to confirm continuing conformance with specifications for gradation, cleanliness and sand equivalent. A maximum of one test per day of each aggregate is required. The full test program is required before source changes will be accepted. 2. Concrete: a. Strength Tests: 1) The strengths specified for the design mix shall be verified by the independent testing laboratory during placement of the concrete. Verification shall be accomplished by testing standard cylinders of concrete samples taken at the job site. Cylinders shall be 4 by 8 inch or 6 x 12 inch. 2) Standard cylinders shall represent the concrete placed in the forms. One set of six standard 6 x 12 inch (or nine 4 x 8 inch) cylinders shall be cast of each class of concrete for each 100 cubic yards or less or for each 5,000 square feet of surface area placed per day. Casting, handling and curing of cylinders shall be in accordance with ASTM C31. Provide additional cylinders when an error in batching is suspected. For the first 24 hours after casting, keep cylinders moist in a storage box constructed and located so that its interior air temperature will be between 60 and 80 degrees F. At the end of 24 hours, transport the cylinders to the testing laboratory. 3) Testing of specimens for compressive strength shall be in accordance with ASTM C39. Tests shall be made at 7 and 28 days from time of casting. Two 6 x 12 inch (or three 4 x 8 inch) test cylinders from each group of six (or nine) shall be tested at the end of 7 days and two 6 x 12 inch (or three 4 x 8 inch) shall be tested at the end of 28 days. The two remaining 6 x 12 inch (or three 4 x 8 inch) cylinders shall be tested at the end of 56 days if the 28-day strength reports below specification. A strength test shall consist of the average strength of two 6 x 12 inch (or three 4 x 8) cylinders cast from material taken from a single load of concrete. If one cylinder shows evidence of low strength due to improper sampling, casting, handling or curing, the result of the remaining cylinders may be used if approved by the Engineer.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 25
4) The average of any three consecutive 28-day strength test results of the cylinders representing each class of concrete for each structure shall be equal to or greater than the specified strength and not more than 10 percent of the strength test results shall have values less than the specified 28-day strength for the total job concrete. No individual strength test result shall be less than the specified strength by more than 500 pounds per square inch. 5) Provide certified reports of the test results directly to SPU and the Engineer. Test reports shall include sufficient information to identify the mix used, the stationing or location of the concrete placement, and the quantity placed. Slump, air content, temperature of concrete, and ambient temperature shall be noted. The 28-day strength test results shall be evaluated in accordance with ACI 214R. Quality control charts showing field test results shall be included with the test results for each class of concrete in each major structure. Charts shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 214R. Quality control charts shall be maintained throughout the entire job and shall be available for SPU inspection at any time. 6) If the 28-day test results fall below the specified compressive strength for the class of concrete required for any portion of the work, adjustment in the proportions, water content, or both, shall be made as necessary at the Contractor’s expense. Report changes and adjustments in writing to SPU. 7) If compressive test results indicate concrete in place may not meet structural requirements, tests shall be made to determine if the structure or portion thereof is structurally sound. Tests may include, but not be limited to, cores in accordance with ASTM C42 and any other analyses or load tests acceptable to SPU. Costs of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor. b. Tests for Consistency of Concrete: 1) The slump shall be as specified when measured in accordance with ASTM C143. Take samples for slump determination from the concrete during placement. Tests shall be made at the beginning of concrete placement operation and at subsequent intervals to ensure that the specification requirements are met. Also perform slump tests whenever standard cylinders are cast. For pumped concrete, measure slump in accordance with the Placing Concrete by Pumping subparagraph of the Conveying and Placing article above. 2) When high range water reducers are added at the site, slump tests shall be taken before and after addition of high range water reducing admixtures.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 26
c. Tests for Temperature and Air Content: 1) Temperature tests shall be made at frequent intervals during hot or cold weather conditions until satisfactory temperature control is established. Perform temperature tests whenever standard cylinders are cast. 2) Air content shall be as specified when measured in accordance with ASTM C231. Measure air content whenever standard cylinders are cast. For pumped concrete, measure air content in accordance with the Placing Concrete by Pumping subparagraph of the Conveying and Placing article above. D. Final Laboratory Report: 1. A final report, prepared by the testing laboratory, shall be provided at the completion of all concreting. This report shall summarize the findings concerning concrete used in the project and provide totals of concrete used by class and structure. Include final quality control charts for compressive strength tests for classes of concrete specified in each major structure shall. The report shall also include the concrete batch plant’s coefficient of variation and standard deviation results for each class of concrete. 3.14 REPAIR OF DAMAGED CONCRETE, CRACKING: A. Acceptance Of Concrete: 1. Completed cast-in-place concrete work shall conform to the applicable requirements of ACI 301 and the Contract Documents. Concrete work that fails to meet the requirements of ACI 301 or the Contract Documents shall be repaired as approved by the Engineer to bring the concrete into compliance. Concrete that cannot be brought into compliance by approved repair methods will be rejected. Remove and replace rejected concrete work. Repair methods shall be in accordance with ACI standards, including ACI 503.7, and are subject to the approval of the Engineer. The cost of repairs and replacement of defective concrete shall be borne by the Contractor.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 27
B. Repair Methods: 1. Damaged/defective concrete or concrete with crack widths exceeding 0.004 inches at liquid-containing and conveying structures or crack widths exceeding 0.006 inches for other structures unless noted otherwise shall be repaired by one of the following methods as approved by the Engineer. Where crack widths exceed the maximum allowable widths listed above, the Engineer in their sole discretion may determine that the crack does not require repair. For liquid- containing and conveying structures, meeting the crack width criteria defined above does not relieve the Contractor from meeting the leakage criteria in this specification and performing crack injection repairs as needed to meet the leakage criteria. Aside from the crack widths previously described, damaged or defective concrete shall be defined as surface defects that include honeycomb, rock pockets, indentations greater than 3/16 inch, spalls, chips, air bubbles greater than 1/2 inch diameter, pinholes, bugholes, embedded debris, lift lines, sand lines, bleed lines, leakage from form joints, fins and other projections, form popouts, texture irregularities, and stains and other color variation that cannot be removed by cleaning. a. Repair Method 1: 1) Fill the joint or crack by drilling holes to the affected area, install injection ports and force epoxy or chemical grout (expanding urethane) into the joint under pressure. The material type, whether epoxy or chemical grout shall be approved by the Engineer. After injection and curing, ports, sealing mix and surface shall be cleaned and worked to match the specified finish. b. Repair Method 2: 1) Fill cracks with low viscosity epoxy, applied by pouring/flooding crack zone until cracks are filled. Prepare surface, install, and cure according to manufacturer’s recommendations. At a minimum, prepare surface to result in a clean, dry surface and with no visible detrimental material in cracks to be filled. Conform to temperature limitations for epoxy to be used. Finish to match adjacent areas. c. Repair Method 3: 1) Cut a bevel groove 3/8 to 1/2 inch in width and depth, and caulk with sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. This repair method is only to be used where expressly allowed by the Engineer. Groove and caulk shall be applied on wet or hydrostatic pressure side of surface. C. Repair Method Use: 1. Use Repair Method 1 for all cracks in walls, surfaces sloped 1:1 or greater, beams, columns, slabs, overhead surfaces and generally for liquid retaining surfaces. Need for repair depends upon crack width, location, and surface conditions under service conditions. Epoxy grout shall be used for repair of structural cracks and chemical grout (expanding urethane) shall be used for repair of non-structural cracks at liquid-containing structures. The Engineer shall determine whether a crack is classified as structural or non-structural.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 28
2. Repair Method 2 may be utilized in lieu of Method 1 for slabs which receive a raked finish. Repair Method 2 may also be used with SPU’s approval for exposed troweled and broomed finishes after review of conditions, degree of exposure to public, and proposed repair product and installation. Finish shall match adjacent surfaces. 3. Repair Method 3 shall be limited to dry-surface slabs, walls subject to less than three feet of liquid pressure, or as specifically directed by the Engineer. Repair Method 3 is not an equivalent repair method to Repair Methods 1 or 2, which shall be considered the standards. 3.15 WATERTIGHTNESS, TESTING AND REPAIR A. Liquid Containing Concrete Tanks And Channels: 1. Watertightness testing shall comply with ACI 350.1 and the following requirements. 2. Concrete tanks, basins, reservoirs and channels which have walls or slabs subjected to hydrostatic pressure shall be tested for watertightness. The tests shall be made after the structure is complete and the concrete has achieved its specified 28-day strength, but prior to application of waterproofing coating or backfilling. Filling of the tank for the watertightness test shall not exceed a rate of 4 feet/hour. Continue filling with water at this maximum rate to the maximum operating water surface. Keep water at this level for at least 72 hours and then visually inspect the dry sides of all walls, the base perimeter of the slab, and the soffit of elevated slabs for evidence of leakage. Damp spots, leakage, or seepage revealed by the test, including those caused by shrinkage of concrete, honeycombed areas, construction joints, or other sources shall be repaired by Repair Method 1 (see Repair Methods paragraph in the Repair of Damaged Concrete and Cracking article above). Damp spots are defined as spots from which water that can be picked up on dry hand. 3. Re-test tanks or channels which have been repaired to check the suitability of repairs. Provide water required for testing and re-testing and dispose of so as not to create a nuisance. 4. All liquid containing or conveying concrete structures must also meet maximum leakage criteria as follows:
Tightness Structure Type Criterion Rectangular basins and tanks 0.050 percent per day Note: All damp spots on or leakage through walls, wall-to-slab joints, and elevated slabs shall be repaired as described above. Leakage into soil equal to or less than the values shown in the table above is permitted only through base slabs on soil or mat foundations. 5. Measure volume loss by measuring the vertical distance from the water surface to a fixed point on the tank above the water surface taking into account evaporation from open surfaces. If the drop in water surface in the 24-hour period exceeds the values given in the table above, exclusive of evaporation, the leakage shall be considered excessive and shall be remedied.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 29
3.16 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the work and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall clean all concrete surfaces. The cleaning procedures shall be as follows: After sweeping with an ordinary broom to remove the loose dirt, the surface shall be flushed with clean water. Final scrubbing by hand or machine shall follow. B. Floors that have curing and sealing compound shall be cleaned of loose dirt and debris by sweeping with ordinary brooms. They shall then be washed and mopped with clean water. Finally, one additional coat of the same clear curing and sealing compound shall be applied in the same manner as specified.
END OF SECTION 03 30 00
PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS SECTION 03 48 11 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Specification Section Includes: 1. Precast Vaults for WQF Valve Vault and Diversion Structure with the following: a. Design and manufacture of precast concrete vault sections and accessories b. Quality assurance and control. c. Field installation of vaults. d. Waterproofing of vaults e. Installation of MH frame and covers, floor access doors, and lift slabs. f. Ladders. 2. For round Maintenance Hole Utility Structures, see Section 33 05 16 1.02 REFERENCES
Reference Title ASTM C150 Portland Cement ASTM C207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes ASTM C478 Precast Reinforced Manhole Sections ASTM C858 Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures ASTM C913 Precast Concrete, Water, and Wastewater Structures ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement ACI 315R Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structures ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete ACI 350 Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures CRSI 63 Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars
1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 DESIGN A. All vaults shall be designed by a licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of Washington and engaged by the manufacturer. All dead loads, live loads, flotation, erection, temperature and anchorage stresses shall be considered. B. The calculations and drawings shall be prepared in a neat and legible manner, sealed by the licensed Professional Engineer performing the calculations. C. The sealed calculations shall include a summary page to list all design loads, material specifications, and design criterion used in the calculations. PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS SECTION 03 48 11 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
D. For design, groundwater shall be assumed to be at the top of the vault for each vault, and the design shall provide for a 1.25 factor of safety against flotation. Concrete fill and channeling may be used as dead load for flotation resistance. Side wall fricition may be considered in accordance with the Geotechnical Report recommendations. E. Vault top slabs shall be designed for AASHTO HL-93 or HS-25 (whichever is more restrictive) including MH frame and covers, floor access doors and lift slabs; and surcharge loading at grade around all sides of the vault. F. The Diversion Structure bar screen lateral loading is based on an assumed water level 2-foot above the top of the screen (i.e. a 2-foot water crest over the top). The screen is conservatively assumed to be plugged for calculating the water pressure on the screen. G. Locations and sizes of knockouts cast into structures. Ensure that pipe penetrations cast into structures are adequately sized to accommodate indicated pipe sizes and materials without requiring additional field modifications. Show clearances for removal of diversion structure bar screen. If modified in the field, repair as indicated in this specification. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. Submit evidence that shows current PCI, NPCA, and/or SDOT certification. C. Submit shop drawings of wall sections and bases proposed for this project, include joint design and related details for field assembly as applicable. D. Submit certification of conformance with Contract Documents and ASTM C858 and C913. E. Submit catalog cut and installation details for MH frame and covers and ladders with safety devices. F. Submit catalog cut for waterproofing system used on exterior surfaces. G. Under a separate submittal, provide two file copies of calculations for review for each vault indicating all loads and load combinations. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall be a PCI, NPCA, and/or SDOT-certified plant for production of precast vaults as specified herein. B. Aggregate used in producing concrete shall be from SDOT approved sources. 1.07 QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION A. Engineer shall be notified 48 hours in advance of casting to inspect rebar and concrete placement. B. The quality of all materials, the process of manufacture and the finished sections shall be subject to inspection by Engineer. Such inspection may be made at the place of manufacture and/or at the Site after delivery. C. All sections shall be inspected for general appearance, dimensions, soundness, etc. The surface shall be dense, close-textured and free of honeycomb, cracks, roughness, exposure of reinforcement, damaged joints, or other irregularities. PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS SECTION 03 48 11 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
D. All sections which have been damaged after delivery will be rejected, or if already installed, shall be repaired or removed and replaced entirely at Contractor’s expense. E. Rejected sections shall be tagged as such, segregated from other sections, and removed from the Site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE A. Precast: Minimum 28-Day Compressive Strength - 5000 psi. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reference Section 03 20 00. 2.03 PRECAST OR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE BASES A. Design and manufacture of precast concrete bases shall conform to the requirements of this section and ASTM C858 and C913. Cast-in-place concrete bases shall conform to Section 03 11 00 and Section 03 30 00. B. Bases shall conform to the dimensions indicated on the Drawings or as required by design. The horizontal joint at the top of the base shall be compatible with that of the precast wall section. C. Sumps and Trench Drains shall be field constructed where shown on the Drawings. Walking surfaces shall be sloped to the sump, have a non-slip broom finish, and be sealed with a penetrating concrete sealer. Minimum concrete fill thickness at sumps shall be two inches. 2.04 PRECAST CONCRETE WALLS A. Design and manufacture of precast concrete walls shall conform to the requirements of this section and ASTM C858 and C913. B. All tongue-and-groove joints in the precast wall, including the joint at the top of the base, shall be made up using gaskets. C. The precast sections shall be provided with a special groove to receive and hold the gasket in position during joint assembly. D. After joint assembly, the gap between sections shall be packed on the inside and outside with “Masterflow 713” by Master Builder; “Five Star Grout” by U.S. Grout Corp.; or approved substitute, and shall be troweled smooth so that no projections remain on the inside. There shall be concrete to concrete bearing between the various sections. The gasket shall not support the weight of the section. 2.05 PRECAST OR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SLAB TOPS A. Precast reinforced concrete slab tops shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM C478, C858 and C913. Openings and frames shall be provided for hatches where shown on the Drawings. Slab tops shall be set in a full bed of mortar. B. Slab tops shall be crowned or sloped to drain, minimum 1/4 inch per foot. C. Slab tops shall receive a non-slip broom finish per Section 03 30 00. PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS SECTION 03 48 11 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
2.06 PIPE SEALS A. Where polyethylene, plastic or PVC pipe is utilized, connections between vault and pipes shall be made with flexible rubber sleeves with stainless steel straps and bolts. Provide an elastomeric waterstop gasket where sleeve sizes are not commercially available. B. The annular space around the pipe wall or sleeve shall be packed with “Masterflow 713” by Master Builders, “Five Star Grout” by U.S. Grout Corp.; or approved substitute. Before the grout has set, Contractor shall recheck invert elevations of the pipe. C. For steel or ductile iron pipe, provide a pipe sleeve sized to accept the pipe plus a modular mechanical seal such as Link Seal or approved substitute. 2.07 FLOOR ACCESS DOORS A. Floor access doors shall be of the size and type shown on the Drawings and as described in Section 08 31 20. 2.08 LADDERS, PLATFORM AND RAILING. A. Provide galvanized steel ladders as indicated on the Drawings. B. Install ladders so that the distance from the rungs to the finished wall or edge of platform is 7 inches. C. Provide ladder access safety post as specified in Section 05 50 00. 2.09 OPENINGS AND INSERTS A. All openings required in the concrete shall be reinforced with additional diagonal bars tied to each layer of wall or slab reinforcement. B. Any required pipe sleeves, inserts, and wall openings shall be coordinated with mechanical requirements prior to casting the units. 2.10 WATERPROOFING A. Around the exterior of all wall and slab joints, apply the “Bituthene” primer and membrane waterproofing system by W.R. Grace Company, or approved substitute. B. Exterior wall and slab surfaces shall be waterproofed using manufacturer’s standard two-coat system, specifically designed to waterproof the exterior of concrete surfaces in a below-grade submerged condition.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subgrade elevations for vault base is correct, excavation is dewatered, and subgrade is pre-compacted. B. Verify that rejected units have been removed from Site. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide foundation mat of compacted structural fill . Mat shall be 12 inches minimum depth and shall bear on sound undisturbed earth per the geotech report. Excavate and remove subgrade material as necessary to reach sound subgrade. B. Foundation mat shall be a minimum of 2 feet greater than the footprint of the vault base, and shall be compacted to a uniform, level surface. PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS SECTION 03 48 11 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Base shall be accurately located and uniformly supported on the foundation mat in a level position. B. Install wall sections in properly oriented position; follow manufacturer’s instructions for joining each section using corrosion resistant hardware. Pack joints with grout. C. Units shall be laid-up plumb and level. D. Contractor is responsible for the integrity of all materials and protection against flotation during the installation and backfilling process. 3.04 COATINGS A. All exterior below-grade walls joints shall be sealed using a membrane waterproofing system. B. All exterior below-grade wall and slab surfaces shall be waterproofed per manufacturer’s instructions. 3.05 BACKFILLING A. Backfill using well compacted structural fill material, being careful to not damage exterior waterproof coating while providing full support under connecting pipes using compacted bedding material. B. During the one year warranty period, all visible leaks shall be sealed in an approved manner.
END OF SECTION 30 48 11 GROUTING SECTION 03 60 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Grout for column base plates, other structural supports, equipment bases, surface repair and uses other than masonry. Grout for masonry is specified in Section 04 20 00. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains specific references to the following related sections. Additional related sections may apply that are not specifically listed below. 1. Section 04 20 00 2. Section 43 05 13 B. The references listed below are a part of this section. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ASTM C230 Flow Table for Use in Tests of Hydraulic Cement ASTM C307 Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical- Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings ASTM C531 Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes ASTM C579 Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes ASTM C882 Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy- Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear ASTM C942 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory ASTM C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink) ASTM C1181 Standard Test Methods for Compressive Creep of Chemical-Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts ASTM E329 Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection COE CRD-C611 Flow of Grout for Preplaced Aggregate Concrete COE CRD-C621 Non-shrink Grout IBC International Building Code 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
GROUTING SECTION 03 60 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. Procedure: Section 01 33 10: 2. A copy of this specification section with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. 3. Check-marks (✓) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. Deviations shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Include a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. 4. Complete product literature and installation instructions for the following: Cementitious non-shrink grout, epoxy grout, adhesive for dowel and anchor setting, and concrete repair mortar products to be used on the project. 5. Current ICC Evaluation Service reports for adhesives used for dowel and anchor setting. 6. Installer certification in accordance with ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification Program for installers of horizontal or upwardly inclined adhesive anchors. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Assurance by SPU 1. SPU will provide the services of a qualified Special Inspector in accordance with Section 01 45 29. 2. Adhesive anchors installed in horizontal or upwardly inclined orientations to resist sustained tension loads shall be continuously inspected during installation by a Special Inspector. a. The Special Inspector shall furnish a report to the Engineer, SPU and Building Official that the work covered by the report has been performed and that the materials used and the installation procedures used conform with the approved Project Manual and the Manufacturer’s Printed Installation Instructions (MPII).
GROUTING SECTION 03 60 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
B. Quality Assurance by Contractor 1. Provide the services of an independent testing laboratory which complies with the requirements of ASTM E329 if a product other than those listed below is proposed and test data is not available from the supplier to demonstrate equivalence to the specified grout. The testing laboratory shall sample and test the proposed grout materials. Submit test results to Engineer for approval prior to product being used on the project. Costs of testing laboratory services shall be borne by the Contractor. C. Certifications 1. Installer certification shall be in accordance with ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification Program for installers of horizontal or upwardly inclined adhesive anchors.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CEMENTITIOUS NON-SHRINK GROUT A. Cementitious non-shrink non-metallic aggregate grout shall be: 1. BASF, Masterflow 928 2. Euclid Chemical Company, Hi-Flow Grout 3. Five Star Products, Inc., Five Star Grout 4. Sika Corporation, SikaGrout 212 5. Approved substitute 2.02 EPOXY GROUT FOR EQUIPMENT MOUNTING: A. Epoxy grout for equipment mounting shall be a non-cementitious, resin based, multi- component formulation. Epoxy grout shall be flowable, with shrinkage minimized to achieve minimum 98% effective bearing area. Epoxy grout shall be: 1. BASF, Masterflow 648 2. Euclid Chemical Company, E3-G 3. Sika Corporation, Sikadur 42 4. Approved substitute. 2.03 ADHESIVE FOR DOWEL AND ANCHOR SETTING A. Adhesive for setting dowels and anchoring connection/base plate bolts shall be an injectable two-component epoxy adhesive. Adhesive shall be approved for the intended use per the product ICC Report. Adhesive shall be: 1. Hilti, HIT-RE 500v3 2. Simpson Strong Tie, SET XP Anchoring Adhesive 3. Approved substitute equivalent product must have ICC approval for use in cracked concrete in areas with high seismic risk).
GROUTING SECTION 03 60 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
2.04 CONCRETE REPAIR MORTAR A. Horizontal Applications: Repair mortars shall be: 1. BASF, MasterEmaco S 466CI 2. Sika Corporation, SikaTop 111 Plus 3. Approved substitute B. Vertical and Overhead Applications: Repair mortars shall be: 1. BASF, MasterEmaco 1500HCR Vertical Overhead 2. Sika Corporation, SikaTop 123 Plus 3. Approved substitute
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and accept existing conditions before beginning work. 3.02 CEMENTITIOUS NONSHRINK GROUT A. Non-shrink, cementitious, nonmetallic aggregate grout shall be used for column base plates, structural bearing plates, and all locations where the general term “non-shrink grout” is indicated on the Drawings. Use of this grout to support the bearing surfaces of machinery shall be as specified in Section 43 23 80.15 or as detailed on the Drawings for specific locations or pieces of equipment. If guidance is not provided in locations noted above, use of non-shrink grout for equipment mounting shall be limited to equipment less than 25 horsepower or 750 pounds. Grout shall be placed and cured in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Non-shrink cementitious grout shall not be used as a surface patch or topping. Non- shrink cementitious grout must be used in confined applications only. 3.03 EPOXY GROUT FOR EQUIPMENT MOUNTING A. Prepare concrete surfaces of equipment pads as indicated in details on the Drawings and as required by the epoxy grout manufacturer. Epoxy grout for equipment mounting shall be placed and cured in accordance with the equipment requirements of Section 43 23 80.15, details on the Drawings, and in conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.04 CONCRETE REPAIR MORTAR A. Concrete repair materials and procedures shall be submitted for review to the SPU and shall be accepted prior to commencement of the repair work. B. Follow all manufacturer's instructions, including those for minimum and maximum application thickness, surface preparation and curing. Add aggregate as required per manufacturer's recommendations. Any deviations from the manufacturer's instructions shall be submitted for review to SPU and shall be accepted prior to commencement of the work.
END OF SECTION 03 60 00
MASS CONCRETE SECTION 03 70 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements for cast-in-place mass concrete as defined in Section 03 30 00. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The references listed below are a part of this section. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ACI 207.1R Guide to Mass Concrete ACI 207.2R Report on Thermal and Volume Change Effects on Cracking Of Mass Concrete ACI 207.4R Cooling and Insulating Systems for Mass Concrete ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)
1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. Action Submittals 1. A copy of this specification section with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. 2. Check-marks (✓) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. Deviations shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Include a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. MASS CONCRETE SECTION 03 70 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
3. Temperature control plan, including system for monitoring the temperature of concrete and reducing excessive temperature and temperature differentials. Temperature control plan shall include the following items: a. Calculated or measured temperature rise of concrete. b. Upper limit for concrete temperature at time of placement. c. Description of specific measures and equipment that will be used to ensure maximum temperature in placement will not exceed specified maximum temperature limit. d. Calculated maximum temperature in placement based on expected conditions at time of placement and use of proposed measures to control temperatures. e. Description of specific measures and equipment that will be used to ensure temperature difference will not exceed specified temperature difference limit. f. Calculated maximum temperature difference in placement based on expected conditions at time of placement and use of proposed measures to control temperature differences. g. Description of equipment and procedures that will be used to monitor and log temperatures and temperature differences. h. Drawing showing locations for temperature sensors. i. Description of format and frequency of providing temperature data. j. Description of measures to address and reduce excessive temperatures and temperature differences, if they occur. k. Description of curing procedures, including materials and methods, and curing duration. l. Description of formwork removal procedures to ensure temperature difference at temporarily exposed surface will not exceed temperature difference limit, and how curing will be maintained. m. If concrete design mixture is changed, temperature control plan must be updated. n. Temperature control plan shall take into account and be coordinated with the lift heights that the Contractor plans for mass concrete pours. Locations of horizontal joints in the mass concrete pours due to planned lift heights shall be submitted for approval to the Engineer. 4. Performance-Based Temperature Difference Limit Approach: a. If the performance based approach to differential temperatures is utilized (see Temperature Control article below in Part 3), submit report with substantiating test data and graphs showing relation between differential temperature and strength of concrete. 5. Layout of cooling pipe system, if used, showing pipe sizes and material type, connections, location, spacing, method of support, and system for monitoring the temperature of the water in the cooling pipes. MASS CONCRETE SECTION 03 70 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General 1. Quality control shall be in accordance with Section 03 30 00, plus the additional provisions specified in this section for mass concrete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Mass concrete materials and concrete characteristics, including mix design, shall be in accordance with the requirements for Concrete Class “A” in Section 03 30 00 and shall further comply with the additional requirements specified in this section. 1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 56-day compressive strength = 5,000 psi. 2. Cement: a. Cement shall be Portland Cement Type II (moderate heat of hydration), except as modified herein. b. Cement shall contain no more than 8 percent tricalcium aluminate. c. The sum of tricalcium aluminate and tricalcium silicate shall be less than 58 percent. d. Cement shall be stored in a covered, shaded silo to prevent heating by direct sunlight. 3. Coarse Aggregate: a. Aggregates shall be stored in a covered area and the aggregates shaded to prevent heating by direct sunlight. b. Aggregates shall be continuously sprayed with water to cool the aggregates. The water content of the concrete mix shall be adjusted to account for the cooling water. 4. Fine Aggregate: a. Aggregates shall be stored in a covered area and the aggregates shaded to prevent heating by direct sunlight. b. Aggregates shall be continuously sprayed with water to cool the aggregates. The water content of the concrete mix shall be adjusted to account for the cooling water. 5. Concrete Admixtures: a. Provide water reducing admixture, as specified in Section 03 30 00 in all mass concrete. b. Provide pozzolan (fly ash) as specified in Section 03 30 00 in all mass concrete. Note that only Class F fly ash is allowed. MASS CONCRETE SECTION 03 70 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
c. Set Retarding Admixture: 1) At the Contractor’s option, a set retarding admixture can be used to control set time and minimize premature setting of concrete and formation of cold joints. 2) Set retarding admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type B. 3) Admixture dosage shall be per the manufacturer’s written requirements. 6. Water and Ice: a. Mixing water shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00. b. Ice used in lieu of, or in addition to, mixing water shall be made from water conforming to Section 03 30 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Concrete placement shall conform to Section 03 30 00 except as modified herein. 3.02 TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. General: 1. Maximum as-delivered concrete temperature shall be 70 degrees F. 2. During placement of concrete, temperature control measures shall be in place to limit the maximum initial concrete temperature rise to 20 degrees F during placement. 3. The maximum allowable temperature of the concrete shall be 158 degrees F. 4. Difference in temperature between concrete interior and surface temperatures shall not exceed 35 degrees F. As an alternative to meeting the 35 degree F maximum differential temperature limit, submit for approval a “Performance- Based Temperature Difference Limit” approach where the allowable differential temperature limit varies with the in-place compressive strength of the concrete (reference ACI 207.2R for more information on this approach). The performance based approach shall be based on measurements of key thermal and physical properties of the project mass concrete mix, such as compressive strength, elastic modulus, and tensile strength, to determine relations between these parameters. 5. Install a temperature monitoring system to measure temperatures within the interior and at the surface of the concrete. 6. Provide a means to control the concrete temperature differential based on the temperature monitoring data. 7. The interior of the concrete shall be allowed to cool down and stabilize for a minimum of 21 days from the time of placement. 8. No mass concrete placement shall occur until written approval of the temperature control plan. MASS CONCRETE SECTION 03 70 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
B. Pre-Cooling of the Concrete Mix: 1. Pre-cooling of the concrete mix prior to placement may also be attained by the following means: a. Batch water shall be cooled and ice may be substituted for a portion of the batch water. b. Alternative means proposed and approved by the Engineer. C. Cooling During Concrete Placement: 1. Use fog sprayers to reduce the ambient air temperature. Adjust the water content of the concrete to account for added water. D. Post-Cooling of the Concrete: 1. Concrete shall be water cured as soon as possible following placement per the requirements of Section 03 30 00. Cold water shall not be used for curing because it will increase the differential temperature between the surface and interior. 2. The temperature of the interior and surfaces of the concrete shall be continuously monitored during the cooling period. 3. The cooling period is defined as the time required for the interior of the concrete placement to stabilize and shall be a minimum of 21 days from the time of placement. 4. Insulating blankets may be used over the pumped curing water to prevent rapid surface cooling. 5. Embedded thin walled piping and circulating water may be used to control heat gain in the previously cast concrete. Clearly indicate in the temperature control plan if cooling piping will be embedded in the concrete. The embedded piping shall not be installed within the top 20 inches of the slab or wall. The cooling pipe system shall be operated for the duration of the cooling period.
END OF SECTION 03 70 00 UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies masonry work consisting of reinforced concrete masonry construction. Masonry work shall be constructed from concrete masonry units in combination with reinforcing, mortar, and grout as specified. B. Related Specification Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 03 20 00 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. 1. American Standard Test Method (ASTM): a. ASTM A82, Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete b. ASTM C90, Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units c. ASTM C144, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar d. ASTM C150, Portland Cement e. ASTM C207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes f. ASTM C270, Mortar for Unit Masonry g. ASTM C404, Aggregates for Masonry Grout h. ASTM C476, Grout for Masonry i. ASTM C666, Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing j. ASTM C780, Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry k. ASTM C1586, Standard Guide for Quality Assurance of Mortars l. ASTM E514, Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. Product Data: For each different masonry unit required to complete work of this section.
UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
C. Shop Drawings: 1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI SP-66. 2. Masonry Units: Details of all types of CMU units including, but not limit to corners, jamb units, lintels and bond beams. D. Samples for Verification: Maximum Surge Current: Full size units for each different exposed masonry unit required. E. Material Test Reports: Provide from an independent testing agency, material test reports for masonry units, mortar and grout. F. Test reports for field sampling and testing mortar in conformance to ASTM C 780. 1. Submit certified test reports showing that the cementitious components of the mortar mix comply with the specified requirements. 2. Submit certified test report showing that the mortar complies with the specified requirements. 3. Submit certified test reports prepared by qualified independent laboratory indicating compliance with performance requirements for mortar admixtures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sample Panel: A sample masonry panel for each type of masonry, approximately 6 feet long by 4 feet high shall be constructed on site for approval by the Engineer. Each panel shall show the workmanship, coursing, bond, anchors, tooling of joints, range of color, texture of masonry, and mortar color. Finished work shall match the approved sample panel. B. Appearance: Source or supply of materials shall not be changed after the work has started if the appearance of the finished work would be affected. C. Prism Tests: Prism tests shall be provided in accordance with the 2015 IBC. D. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Cementitious materials shall be delivered to the site in unbroken containers, plainly marked and labeled with manufacturers' names and brands, stored in dry, weather tight enclosures to prevent entry of foreign materials and damage by water or dampness. Masonry units shall be stored off the ground and handled with care to avoid chipping and breakage. Materials shall be protected from damage and, except for sand, kept dry until used. Sand shall be covered to prevent intrusion of water and foreign materials and to prevent drying. Materials containing frost or ice shall not be used.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. General: Concrete masonry units shall be of modular dimensions and air, water, or steam cured. Masonry units shall be smooth textured and standard grey colored unless otherwise indicated on the Architectural drawings.
UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
2. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): Hollow concrete masonry units at both load- bearing and non-load-bearing walls shall conform to ASTM C90, medium weight, with 1500 psi prism strength (f’m). CMU shall contain “DRY BLOCK” admixture as manufactured by WR Grace Co. or approved substitute, amount per manufacturer’s recommendation. 3. Characteristics: a. Texture & Finish: Smooth face. b. Color: Manufacturers standard natural ‘grey’ from color palette by Mutual Materials, www.mutualmaterials.com or approved substitute. c. Full size Blocks: nominal 8-inches by 8-inches by 16-inches. Pattern: As indicated on drawings. d. Nominal Dimensions: half height blocks: 4-inches by 8 inches by 16 inches. Pattern: As indicated on drawings. e. Special Shapes: Special shapes such as closures, header units, and jamb units shall be provided as necessary to complete the work. Special shapes shall conform to the requirements for the units with which they are used matching height and finish of adjacent blocks. 2.02 MORTAR A. Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali containing less than 0.60 percent alkalies. B. Hydrated Lime: Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C207, Type S. C. Masonry Cement: Masonry cement shall not be used. D. Sand: Aggregate for mortar shall be sand conforming to ASTM C144. E. Water: Water shall be clean, potable, and free from substances which could adversely affect the mortar. F. Waterproofing Compound: Mortar shall contain an admixture of Master Builders Rheomix 235, Sonneborn Hydrocide Powder, or approved substitute. G. Mortar Types: Mortar shall be ASTM C270, Type S. Waterproofing compound shall be added in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where colored mortar is specified to match the masonry units, add colorant to obtain the color indicated. Colorant shall be alkali-resistant iron oxide based and shall be Sonneborn "Sonobrite," Solomon Grind-Chem Service, Inc., "Concentrated Cement Color," or approved substitute. H. Premixed Mortar: Premixed mortar shall be ASTM C270, Type S for use as specified in paragraph 2.02 G of this section. Water proofing compound shall be added in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. I. Admixtures: Admixtures may be used in mortar to retard curing and provide up to 24 hours of workability, provided that the admixture does not adversely affect bonding or compressive strength. J. Joints: All exterior, exposed joints shall be 'concave’ joints, tooled smooth, with a maximum indentation of 1/8-th inch.
UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Reinforcing Bars: Reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Section 03 20 00. 2.04 GROUT A. General: Grout shall comply with ASTM C476, shall use Type II cement, and shall be proportioned by volume to achieve a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,000 psi. Grout shall have sufficient water added to produce a consistency for pouring without segregation. Grout shall contain 4-6% air entrainment. B. Aggregate: Aggregate shall comply with ASTM C404. C. Fine Grout: Fine grout shall be composed of one part cement, not more than 1/10 part lime, and 2 1/4 to 3 parts fine aggregate. D. Coarse Grout: Coarse grout shall be composed of one part cement, not more than 1/10 part lime, 2 to 3 parts fine aggregate, and not more than 2 parts coarse aggregate. E. Color: Manfuacturer standard ‘grey’ color most closely resembling color of adjacent blocks. 2.05 PRODUCT DATA A. The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 33 10, Submittals. Information shall be received by the Engineer at least 14 days prior to the beginning of masonry work 1. Masonry unit certificates showing compliance to the specifications shall be submitted for each type of masonry unit. 2. Reinforcing certificates showing compliance to the specifications shall be submitted for reinforcing steel, including reinforcing steel wire and joint reinforcing, as specified herein and in Section 03 20 00, Concrete Reinforcing. 3. Shop drawings showing details of anchors, adjustable wall ties, positioning devices, and other accessories 4. Manufacturer's data and descriptive literature for each type of masonry accessory, premixed mortar, masonry cement, grout admixtures, and flashing. Clearly mark the data to indicate which type, size, or item the Contractor intends to provide. Data shall show conformance to specified requirements and Contractor's proposed usage details 5. Prism test results.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. General: Foundations for masonry work shall be straight, on-line, and level. All surfaces to be bonded with masonry shall be clean and free from laitance or foreign materials. Reinforcing dowels shall be in the correct location as specified. The placement and location of anchor ties, inserts, and other embedded items in concrete or other adjoining work shall be coordinated by the Contractor to suit the masonry work.
UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
B. Protection: 1. Exposed surfaces shall be protected from mortar and other stains. When mortar joints are tooled, remove mortar from exposed surfaces with fiber brushes and wooden paddles. Base of walls shall be protected from splash stains by covering adjacent ground with sand, sawdust, or polyethylene 2. Uniform loads shall not be applied for at least 12 hours or concentrated loads for at least 72 hours after masonry is constructed. 3. Temporary bracing shall be provided as required to prevent damage during construction. 4. Protective boards for polyester film shall be provided during job installation to ensure no damage from building debris. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Masonry shall be level and plumb. Story poles or gage rods shall be used throughout the work. Changes in coursing or bonding after the work is started will not be permitted; neither will carrying one section of the walls up in advance of the others be permitted. Unfinished work shall be stepped back for joining with new work; toothing will not be permitted. Heights of masonry at each floor and at sills and heads of openings shall be checked with an instrument to maintain the level of the walls. Door and window frames, louvered openings, anchors, pipes, ducts, and conduits shall be built in as the masonry work progresses. Spaces around metal door frames shall be filled solidly with mortar. Drilling, cutting, fitting, and patching to accommodate the work of others shall be performed by masonry mechanics. Masonry shall be cut with masonry saws for exposed work. Structural steelwork, bolts, anchors, inserts, plugs, ties, lintels, and miscellaneous metalwork shall be placed in position as the work progresses. Chases of approved dimensions for pipes and other purposes shall be provided where specified and necessary. Tops of exposed walls and partitions not being worked on shall be covered with a waterproof membrane secured in place and extended down at least 2 feet on both sides. 3.03 MORTAR MIXING A. Mortar materials shall be measured in 1 cubic foot containers to maintain control and accuracy of proportions; measuring materials with shovels is not permitted. Mortar shall be mixed in a mechanical batch mixer for not less than 3 nor more than 5 minutes after all ingredients are in so as to produce a uniform mixture. Water shall be added gradually as required to produce a workable consistency. Mortar not formulated to include retarding admixtures, which has not been placed in final position within 2-1/2 hours after the initial mixing, shall not be re-tempered and used. Use of antifreeze compounds, salts, or other substances to lower the freezing point of mortar is prohibited. B. Mortar shall be mixed in accordance with ASTM C270 to obtain type mortar required. Where colored mortars are required, pigments may be added at the site or provided as part of prepackaged mortar mix. When masonry cement is used, mixing shall conform to printed instructions of the masonry cement manufacturer.
UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
3.04 MORTAR JOINTS A. Mortar joints shall be a uniform thickness of 3/8 inch unless otherwise specified. Exposed joints shall be tooled slightly concave with a round or other suitable jointer when the mortar is thumbprint hard except where otherwise required to match existing construction. For horizontal joints, jointers shall be at least 12 inches long for brickwork and 16 inches long for concrete masonry. Jointers shall be slightly larger than the width of the joint so that complete contact is made along the edges of the units, compressing and sealing the surface of the joint. Joints that will not be exposed shall be struck flush. Vertical joints shall be tooled first. Horizontal joints shall be level; vertical joints shall be plumb and in alignment from top to bottom of wall within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/2 inch in 40 feet. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Masonry work shall be within the following limits: 1. Pilasters and Columns: 1/4 inch from true line. 2. Face of Concrete Masonry Unit: 1/16 inch from face of adjacent unit. 3. Variation from True Plane: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch maximum in 20 feet or more. 4. Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch in each story, noncumulative and 1/2 inch maximum in two stories or more. 5. Variation from Level: 1/8 inch in 3 feet, 1/4 inch in 10 feet, and 1/2 inch maximum. 6. Variation in Wall Thickness: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 3.06 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT WORK A. General: The first course shall be laid in a full bed of mortar for the full width of the unit. Succeeding courses shall be laid in running bond unless otherwise specified. Bed joints shall be formed by applying the mortar to the entire top surfaces of the inner and outer face shells and to head joints by applying the mortar for a width of about 1 inch to the ends of the adjoining units. The mortar shall be of such thickness that it will be forced out of the joints as the units are placed in position. Concrete masonry units shall not be dampened before or during laying. B. Reinforced Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Where vertical reinforcement occurs, cores shall be filled solid with grout, and units laid in such a manner as to preserve the unobstructed vertical continuity of cores to be filled. Adjacent webs shall be embedded in mortar to prevent leakage of grout, and mortar fins protruding from joints removed before grout is placed. Minimum clear dimensions of vertical cores shall be 2 by 3 inches. Reinforcing shall be positioned and held accurately before placing grout by tying or by using bar positioners at maximum 8-foot intervals. Vibrator shall be used to consolidate the grout. Minimum clear distance between masonry and vertical reinforcement shall be 1/2 inch. Splices shall be formed by lapping bars as shown on design drawings.
UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
3.07 BONDING AND ANCHORING A. Unless otherwise specified, partitions shall extend from the floor to the bottom of the construction above. Walls and partitions shall be structurally bonded and anchored to each other and to concrete walls and beams. Unless otherwise specified, non-load- bearing partitions and interior walls shall be securely anchored to the construction above in a manner that provides lateral stability while permitting unrestricted deflection of construction above. Anchors shall be completely embedded in mortar joints. B. In addition, bonding and anchoring shall comply with the following procedures unless otherwise specified. 1. At corners of load bearing walls, provide a true masonry bond in each course. 2. At intersections of load bearing walls, provide a true masonry bond in each course, or anchor with rigid steel anchors not more than 2 feet apart vertically 3. At intersections of non-load-bearing partitions with other walls or partitions, tie with wire mesh ties at vertical intervals of not more than 2 feet or with masonry bonding in alternate courses. 4. At masonry walls facing or abutting new concrete members, anchor masonry to the concrete with dovetail or wire type anchors inserted in slots or inserts built into the concrete. To anchor masonry walls to existing concrete members, use corrugated metal ties anchored by drive pins to the concrete. Locate anchors not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and not more than 24 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.08 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT LINTELS AND BOND BEAMS A. Special units, lintels, and bond beams shall have cells filled solidly with grout or concrete and provided with not less than two No. 5 reinforcing bars, unless otherwise specified. Bond beams and reinforcing shall terminate on each side of expansion joints. Concrete masonry units used for lintels and bond beams shall have exposed surfaces of the same material and texture as the adjoining masonry units. Bond beam units shall be produced from standard vertically-voided units with precut knock-out cross walls. Lintels shall be straight and true and shall have at least 8 inches of bearing at each end. Lintels shall set at least 6 days before shoring is removed. 3.09 GROUT A. General: Fine grout shall be provided in grout spaces which are less than 2 inches in any horizontal dimension after deducting the thickness of horizontal reinforcing or in which clearance between reinforcing and masonry is less than 3/4 inch. Coarse grout shall be provided in grout spaces which are 2 inches or greater in all horizontal dimensions after deducting the thickness of horizontal reinforcing provided the clearance between reinforcing and masonry is not less than 3/4 inch. For a coarse grout pour over 6 feet high, increase grout space minimum horizontal dimension to 3 inches.
UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
B. Placement: Grout shall be placed from the interior side of walls, except as approved otherwise. Sills, ledges, offsets, and other surfaces shall be protected from grout droppings. Prior to grouting, the grout space shall be clean so that all spaces to be filled with grout do not contain mortar projections greater than 1/2 inch, mortar droppings, or other foreign material. Grout shall be well mixed to prevent segregation, shall be sufficiently fluid to flow into joints and around reinforcing without leaving voids, and shall be placed by pumping or pouring from buckets equipped with spouts. Grout shall be placed in a continuous pour in grout lifts not exceeding 6 feet. At grout pours exceeding 6 feet, cleanouts shall be provided in the bottom course at every vertical bar but shall not be spaced more than 32 inches on center for solidly grouted masonry. Pours shall be 1 1/2 inches below the top of masonry units in top course, except at the finish course. Grout shall be agitated thoroughly to eliminate voids. Masonry displaced by grouting operation shall be removed and relaid in alignment with fresh mortar. 3.10 FORMS AND SHORING A. Contractor shall construct forms to the shape, lines, and dimensions of members indicated and make sufficiently rigid to prevent deflections which may result in cracking or other damage to supported masonry. Forms shall not be removed until members have cured. 3.11 CLEANING A. Contractor shall protect work which may be damaged, stained, or discolored during cleaning operations. B. Exposed masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water and stiff fiber brushes and rinsed with clear water. Where stains, mortar, or other soil remain, scrubbing shall continue with warm water and detergent. Immediately after cleaning, each area shall be rinsed thoroughly with clear water. Damaged, stained, and discolored work shall be restored to original condition or replaced with new work. 3.12 COLD WEATHER CONDITIONS A. Construction: During cold weather, that is, when the air temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling, or when it appears that the air temperature will drop to 40 degrees F or below within 24 hours, Contractor shall not lay masonry unless the work is protected from freezing as specified below. Surfaces receiving mortar shall be free of ice and frost. The following requirements shall be adhered to: 1. Air Temperature 40 to 32 Degrees F: Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 and 120 degrees F. 2. Air Temperature 32 to 25 Degrees F: Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 and 120 degrees F. 3. Air Temperature 25 to 20 Degrees F: Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 and 120 degrees F. Use other heat sources on both sides of walls under construction. Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph. 4. Air Temperature 20 Degrees F and Below: Heat sand and mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 and 120 degrees F. Provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F on both sides of walls under construction. Ascertain that temperatures of masonry units are not less than 20 degrees F when units are laid
UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 20 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 9
B. Protection: Newly laid masonry shall be protected as specified below for the respective mean daily air temperature (MDAT), that is, the average of the daytime high temperature and the forecasted nighttime low temperature. 1. MDAT 40 to 32 Degrees F: Protect masonry from rain and snow by covering the top 4 feet with weather resistive membrane for 24 hours after laying. 2. MDAT 32 to 25 Degrees F: Completely cover newly laid masonry with weather resistive membrane for 24 hours. 3. MDAT 25 to 20 Degrees F: Completely cover newly laid masonry with insulating blankets and weather resistive membrane for 24 hours. 4. MDAT 20 Degrees F and Below: Maintain temperature of masonry above 32 degrees F for 24 hours by providing enclosures and supplementary heat or other approved means.
END OF SECTION 04 20 00
HOT-DIP ZINC COATING SECTION 05 05 14 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies hot-dip zinc coating. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A143 Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A384 Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies ASTM A385 Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip) ASTM A780 Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings MILSPEC Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair DOD-P-21035 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01 30 10: 1. Zinc dust-zinc oxide coating manufacturer's product data showing conformance to the specified product. 2. Manufacturer's recommendation for application of zinc dust-zinc oxide coating. 3. Coating applicator's Certificate of Compliance that the hot-dip galvanized coating meets or exceeds the specified requirements of ASTM A123 or A153, as applicable.
HOT-DIP ZINC COATING SECTION 05 05 14 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Zinc Coating: Zinc coating material shall be as specified in ASTM A123 and A153, as applicable. B. Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide Coating: Zinc dust-zinc oxide coating shall conform to MILSPEC DOD-P-21035. Coating shall be as manufactured by Z.R.C. Chemical Products Co., Galvicon Co., or substitute. 2.02 FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Fabrication practices for products to be galvanized shall be in accordance with applicable portions of ASTM A143, A384 and A385.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION A. Steel members, fabrications and assemblies shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123. B. Structural steel connection bolts, screws, nuts, washers shall be hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A153. 3.02 COATING REQUIREMENTS A. Coating weight shall conform with paragraph 5.1 of ASTM A123 or Table 1 of ASTM A153, as appropriate. 3.03 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE GALVANIZED COATING A. Where zinc coating has been damaged after installation, substrate surface shall be first cleaned and then repaired with zinc dust-zinc oxide coating in accordance with ASTM A780. Application shall be as recommended by the zinc dust-zinc oxide coating manufacturer. Coating shall consist of multiple coats to dry film thickness of 8 mils. B. Items not physically damaged, but which have insufficient or deteriorating zinc coatings, and items damaged in shipment or prior to installation, shall be removed from the project site for repair by the hot-dip zinc coating method.
END OF SECTION 05 05 14
ANCHOR BOLTS SECTION 05 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Bolts and all-thread rods used to attach structural elements and equipment to concrete and concrete masonry. Included are cast-in-place and post- installed anchors (adhesive systems and wedge type expansion anchors), nuts and washers. B. Cast-in-place and post-installed anchors shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless noted otherwise. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains specific references to the following related sections. Additional related sections may apply that are not specifically listed below. 1. Section 01 73 24 2. Section 05 10 00 3. Section 03 60 00 4. Section 40 05 02 B. The references listed below are a part of this section. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete ASTM A193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both ASTM A320 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low- Temperature Service ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs ASTM F594 Stainless Steel Nuts ASTM F844 Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use ASTM F1554 Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, 105-ksi Yield Strength IBC International Building Code with City of Seattle amendments 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
ANCHOR BOLTS SECTION 05 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals 1. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. 2. A copy of this specification section with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. 3. Check-marks (✓) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. Deviations shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Include a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. 4. Anchor bolt placement plans. 5. Anchor bolt, nut, and washer material information, including material certifications. 6. Record copy of design calculations and details showing the required diameter, length, embedment, edge distance, confinement, anchor reinforcement, anchor bolt sleeves, connection redesign, and other conditions, stamped and signed by a Professional Engineer currently registered in the state of Washington. Calculations shall comply with the provisions of ACI 318 Appendix D. 7. Submit record copy of proof loading test results within five days after test. 8. Product Data: a. ICC Evaluation Service Reports for post-installed adhesive type anchors and expansion (wedge type) anchors when allowed. Products shall be ICC approved for use in cracked concrete in high seismic areas (Seismic Design Category D, E and F). b. Product data indicating load capacity charts/calculations. c. Chemical resistance. d. Temperature limitations. e. Manufacturers written installation instructions. 9. Installer certification for horizontal or upwardly inclined adhesive anchors in accordance with ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification Program. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Assurance By SPU 1. Special inspection of anchor bolts shall be performed by the Special Inspector under contract with SPU and in accordance with IBC Chapter 17. 2. Adhesive anchors installed in horizontal or upwardly inclined orientations to resist sustained tension loads shall be continuously inspected during installation by a Special Inspector.
ANCHOR BOLTS SECTION 05 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
3. The Special Inspector shall furnish a report to the Engineer, SPU, and Building Official that the work covered by the report has been performed and that the materials used and the installation procedures used conform with the approved Project Manual and the Manufacturer’s Printed Installation Instructions (MPII). B. Certifications 1. Installer certification shall be in accordance with ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification Program for installers of horizontal or upwardly inclined adhesive anchors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Anchor bolt holes in equipment support frames shall not exceed the bolt diameters by more than 1/4 inch. Minimum anchor bolt diameter shall be 1/2 inch. Anchor bolts for equipment mounting and vibration isolation systems shall be provided as specified in Sections 43 05 13 and 43 05 18, respectively. B. Tapered washers shall be provided where mating surface is not square with the nut. C. Anchor bolts shall be cast-in-place anchors unless post-installed anchors are specified or shown on the Drawings. Substitution of post-installed anchors will not be permitted unless specifically requested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 2.02 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA A. Anchor bolts for equipment shall be designed by the equipment manufacturer to include equipment operational loads combined with seismic and wind forces when applicable. design criteria provided in Section 01 73 24. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Anchor bolt materials shall be as specified in Table A.
Material Specification Steel Anchor Bolts (at Electrical Room ASTM F1554, Grade 36 roof beam bearing plates at CMU wall blockout) Steel Nuts and Washers (at Electrical ASTM A563 Heavy Hex Nuts and ASTM Room roof beam bearing plates at F436 Type 1 Hardened Washers CMU blockout) Stainless Steel Anchor Bolts ASTM A193, Grade B8M Class 1, AISI 316 or ASTM A320, Grade B8M Class 1, AISI 316 Stainless Steel Nuts and Washers ASTM A194 Grade 8M, SS316 Expansion Anchors Stainless Steel HILTI “KWIK BOLT TZ”, or approved substitute Adhesive Anchoring System HILTI HIT-RE 500v3, or approved substitute.
ANCHOR BOLTS SECTION 05 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
2.04 STAINLESS STEEL FASTENER LUBRICANT (ANTI-SEIZING) A. Anti-seizing Lubricant for Stainless Steel Threaded Connections: 1. Formulated to resist washout. 2. Acceptable manufacturers are Bostik, Saf-T-Eze, or approved substitute. 2.05 ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVES A. Provide anchor bolt sleeves as shown on design drawings and as required by equipment manufacturer’s design. 1. Provide high density polyethylene plastic sleeves of single unit construction with deformed sidewalls such that the concrete and grout lock in place. 2. The top of the sleeve shall be self-threading to provide adjustment of the threaded anchor bolt projection. 3. Acceptable manufacturers are Contec, Wilson, or approved substitute.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Anchor bolts shall be cast-in-place anchors unless post-installed anchors are specified or shown on the Drawings. B. Grouting of anchor bolts using plastic sleeves with non-shrink or epoxy grout, where specified, shall be in accordance with Section 03 60 00. C. The threaded end of anchor bolts and all-thread rods shall be long enough to project through the entire depth of the nut and if too long, shall be cut off at ½-inch beyond top of nut and ground smooth. 3.02 CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHOR BOLTS A. Anchor bolts to be embedded in concrete shall be placed accurately and held in correct position using templates while the concrete is placed. B. After anchor bolts have been embedded, their threads shall be protected by grease and the nuts run on. 3.03 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS A. Note that adhesive anchors shall not be substituted for cast-in-place anchor bolts unless the adhesive anchors have been specified or shown on the Drawings, or approval has been obtained from the Engineer that substitution of adhesive anchors is acceptable for the specific use and location. Use of adhesive anchors shall be subject to the following conditions: 1. Limit to locations where intermittent or continuous exposure to the following is extremely unlikely: a. Acid concentrations higher than 10 percent b. Chlorine gas c. Machine or diesel oils
ANCHOR BOLTS SECTION 05 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
2. Limit to applications where exposure to the following is extremely unlikely: a. Fire b. Concrete or rod temperature above 120 degrees F 3. Overhead applications (such as pipe supports) shall not be allowed unless approved by the Engineer and installation is by an Installer specially certified for overhead applications. 4. Approval from Engineer for specific application and from supplier of equipment to be anchored, if applicable. 5. Anchor diameter and material shall be per Contract Documents or equipment manufacturer’s specifications. Anchor shall be threaded or deformed the full length of embedment and shall be free of rust, scale, grease, and oils. 6. Embedment depth shall be as specified or as required by the equipment manufacturer. 7. Follow the anchor system manufacturer’s installation instructions. 8. Holes shall have rough surfaces created by using a hammer drill with carbide bit. Core drilled holes are not allowed. 9. Holes shall be blown clean with oil-free compressed air and be free of dust or standing water prior to installation. Follow additional requirements of the adhesive manufacturer. 10. Concrete and air temperature shall be compatible with curing requirements of adhesives per adhesive manufacturer’s instructions. Anchors shall not be placed in concrete when the temperature is below 25 degrees F. 11. Anchors shall be left undisturbed and unloaded for full adhesive curing period, which is based on temperature of the concrete. 3.04 EXPANSION ANCHORS A. Expansion (wedge type) anchors shall not be substituted for cast-in-place anchor bolts or adhesive anchors unless approved by the Engineer for a specific application. Use of expansion anchors shall be subject to conditions 4 through 9 as specified above for adhesive anchors. Expansion anchors shall not be used in a submerged condition or in mounting of equipment subject to vibration or cyclic motion. 3.05 REINFORCING STEEL CONFLICTS WITH POST-INSTALLED ANCHOR INSTALLATION A. When reinforcing steel is encountered in the drill path, slant drill to clear obstruction and provide beveled washer to match angle of anchor. Drill shall not be slanted more than 10 degrees. B. Where slanting the drill does not resolve the conflict, notify SPU and resolve the conflict to the satisfaction of SPU in consultation with the Engineer. C. Abandoned post-installed anchor holes shall be cleaned and filled with non-shrink grout and struck off flush with adjacent surface. D. The costs of determining and executing the resolution shall be borne by the Contractor. The determination and execution of the resolution shall not result in additional cost to SPU.
ANCHOR BOLTS SECTION 05 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
E. Reinforcing steel in masonry shall not be damaged. F. In order to avoid or resolve a conflict, locate embedded reinforcing steel using non- destructive methods and/or redesign the attachment. 1. Redesign shall be done by the Contractor’s Professional Engineer currently registered in the state of Washington. 2. Calculations and details for redesign shall be submitted.
END OF SECTION 05 05 33
STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 05 10 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies structural metals consisting of standard shapes, fasteners, rods and plates that are used in structural supports and connections. B. Related Specification Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 03 30 00 3. Section 09 91 00 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title Aluminum Design The Aluminum Association, Aluminum Design Manual with Manual Specifications and Guidelines for Aluminum Structures AISC 201 AISC Certification Program for Structural Steel Fabricators AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges AISC 341 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings AISC 360 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings AISC 810 Erection Bracing of Low-Rise Structural Steel Frames ASTM A6 General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ASTM A193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both ASTM A320 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low Temperature Service ASTM A325 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 05 10 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
Reference Title ASTM A384 Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot- Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ASTM A992 Structural Steel Shapes ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM B241 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube ASTM B308 Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles ASTM F436 Hardened Steel Washers ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs ASTM F594 Stainless Steel Nuts AWS-B3.0 Welding Procedures and Performance Qualifications AWS-D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminum AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel ASW D1.8 Structural Welding Code - Seismic Supplement IBC International Building Code AISC Steel American Institute of Steel Construction, Manual of Steel Construction Manual Construction
1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Specification Section 01 33 10. B. Shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Shop drawings shall not be reproductions of the Drawings. Include complete information for the fabrication and erection of the structure's components, including the location, type, and size of bolts, welds, member sizes and lengths, coatings, connection details, blocks, copes, and cuts. Substitutions of details shown on the Drawings shall be clearly highlighted on the fabrication drawings. Explain the reasons for any deviations from the Drawings. C. Certification that steel fabricator is approved to perform steel fabrication without special inspection. D. Evidence that steel fabricator has AISC Certification for Steel Building Fabrication. E. Welding procedures, qualifications, and inspection report. F. Certified mill test reports for structural steel and high-strength bolts and nuts G. In accordance with IBC Chapter 17, Fabricator at the completion of fabrication to submit Certification of Compliance stating that the fabrication was performed in accordance with the design documents.
STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 05 10 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
H. Certified copies of all surveys conducted by a registered professional engineer or surveyor showing elevations and locations of base plates and anchor bolts to receive structural steel or aluminum, and final elevations and locations for major members. Indicate discrepancies between actual installation and contract documents. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Assurance by SPU: 1. Special Inspection of structural metals work shall be performed by the Special Inspector under contract with SPU and in conformance with the IBC Chapter 17. Special Inspector(s) and laboratory shall be acceptable to SPU in their sole discretion. Special Inspection of structural metals is in addition to, but not replacing, other inspections and quality control requirements herein. Where sampling and testing required herein conforms to Special Inspection standards, such sampling and testing need not be duplicated. 2. All structural steel work shall receive Special Inspection in accordance with IBC, Chapter 17. Structural steel includes all steel elements that resist code-defined loads and whose failure would affect life safety. Items to be inspected include, but are not limited to, mechanical/electrical supports, beams, stringers, columns, access walkways and stairways. B. Fabricator Qualifications: 1. A qualified fabricator must participate in the AISC 201 Certification program and be designated an AISC Certified Plant, Category STD (Standard for Steel Building Structures).Structural assemblies and shop and field welding shall meet the requirements of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction. C. The use of salvaged, reprocessed or scrap materials shall not be permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel:
Material Specification Standard rolled steel wide flange ASTM A992 Structural steel S-shapes, channels, ASMT A36 angles and plates Pipe sections for posts, guardrails and ASTM A53, TYPE E or S, Grade B handrails Structural steel tubing ASTM A500, Grade B (Fv = 46 ksi) Stainless steel bolts (used at stainless ASTM A193, Grade B8M Class 1, AISI 316 steel and aluminum framing unless noted or ASTM A320, Grade B8M 1, AISI 316 otherwise) Stainless steel nuts and washers (used at ASTM A194 Grade 8M, SS316 stainless steel and aluminum framing unless noted otherwise) Steel bolts (used at galvanized and Galvanized ASTM A325 (Type 1), bearing painted steel framing) type bolts fully tensioned
STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 05 10 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
Material Specification Carbon steel nuts and washers Galvanized ASTM A563 nuts and galvanized ASTM F436 washers 2.02 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabrication of steel shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of the AISC Steel Construction Manual, Fourteenth Edition. Fabrication of aluminum shall be in accordance with Aluminum Design Manual – 2015 Edition. Fabrication and assembly shall be done in the shop to the greatest extent possible. The fabricating plant shall be certified under AISC 201 for Category STD (Standard for Steel Building Structures). B. Compression joints depending on contact bearing shall have a surface roughness not in excess of 500 micro-inch and ends shall be square within the tolerances for milled ends specified in ASTM A6. C. Shop splices of members will be permitted only where indicated on the Drawings. Splices not indicated require the approval of the Engineer. D. Verify measurements at the job site prior to fabrication. Fabricate to match job site measurements. E. Provide holes as necessary or as indicated for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Erection of structural steel shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AISC Steel Construction Manual. Erection plan shall conform to AISC 303. For low-rise structural steel buildings, 60 feet tall or less and a maximum of 2 stories, the structure shall be erected in accordance with AISC 810. 2. Coordinate installation of anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to in place work. 3. Employ a registered professional engineer or surveyor for accurate erection of the structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and locations of anchor bolts before erection proceeds and report discrepancies to the Engineer. 4. Placement tolerances shall be in accordance with AISC 303. 5. After final positioning of steel members, provide full bearing under base plates and bearing plates using non-shrink grout. Place non-shrink grout in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 6. Protect dissimilar metals from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings or isolators. Protect aluminum in contact with concrete or grout with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 7. Metalwork to be embedded in concrete shall be placed accurately and held in correct position while the concrete is placed. The surfaces of metalwork in contact with or embedded in concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned.
STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 05 10 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
8. Structural steel completely encased in concrete shall not be galvanized or painted and shall have a clean surface for bonding to concrete. 9. Metalwork which is bent, broken or otherwise damaged shall be repaired or replaced. B. Welding: 1. Welding shall be performed by operators who have been qualified by tests as prescribed by AWS to perform the type of work required. The quality of welding shall conform to AWS Code for Arc Welding in Building Construction. 2. Unless otherwise specified, continuous welds shall be provided on all structural members that are exposed to weather or submerged in water or wastewater, and continuous seal welds shall be provided on both sides of all plates or structural shapes that are in contact with or submerged in water or wastewater. 3. Provide continuous seal welds for plates or structural shapes that are exposed to or submerged in water or wastewater. C. Bolted Connections: 1. Bolted connections, unless noted otherwise, shall conform to AISC 360 and AISC 341, and shall be bearing type connections with bolts fully tensioned unless connecting HSS shapes. Punch, subpunch and ream, or drill bolt holes perpendicular to the surface of the member. Holes shall be punched 1/16 inch larger than the nominal size of the bolts, unless otherwise specified. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be clean of dirt and rust and lubricated immediately prior to installation. No drifting of bolts or enlargement of holes will be allowed to correct misalignment. Holes shall not be cut or enlarged by burning. Mismatched holes shall be corrected with new material. 3.02 CORROSION PROTECTION A. Unless otherwise specified, carbon steel shall be galvanized. If coatings are indicated on the Drawings or elsewhere in the Specifications, coat in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Coating surface preparation shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 - Coatings and shall include the following operations: 1. Grind the exterior and interior edges of all flame-cut plates or members to a smooth surface. 2. Grind all sharp edges off of the sheared plates and punched holes 3. Grind uneven or rough welds with high beads to a smooth finish
3.03 CLEANING A. After installation, damaged surfaces of shop primed metals shall be cleaned and touched up with the same material used for the shop coat.
END OF SECTION 05 10 00
STEEL ROOF DECKING SECTION 05 31 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies fabrication and erection of steel roof deck. B. Related Specification Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): a. AISI S100-07/S2-10, Design of Cold-formed Steel Structural Members, with Supplement 2, dated 2010. 2. American Standard Test Method (ASTM): a. ASTM A36, Carbon Structural Steel. b. ASTM A446, Specification for Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot- Dip Process Structural (Physical) Quality. c. ASTM A611, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Structural Quality. d. ASTM A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron, Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. e. ASTM A780, Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot- Dipped Galvanized Coatings. f. ASTM A924, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. g. ASTM D746, Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact. h. ASTM D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 3. American Welding Society (AWS): a. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code-Steel. b. AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel. 4. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): a. ANSI/SDI RD 1.0-10, Standard for Steel Roof Deck.
STEEL ROOF DECKING SECTION 05 31 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Specification Section 01 33 10. B. Complete shop drawings showing framing and deck layout indicating length, type, cross section, thickness, markings of metal deck units, and size and locations of all openings. Shop drawings shall not be a reproduction of the Contract Drawings. C. Details and gages of all accessories and miscellaneous items showing sump pans, cant strips, ridge and valley plates, closure strips and insulation supports. D. Manufacturer's load table including design thickness in inches, section properties, allowable gravity load, and allowable diaphragm shear loads. E. Erection marks. Mark each bundle to correspond to the shop drawings. F. Certification from the Steel Deck Institute (SDI) that the steel roof deck is designed in accordance with SDI standards and deck manufacturer is a member of SDI. G. Certification for installers of deck fastening systems. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel roof deck shall conform to the requirements of the SDI standard for Steel Roof Deck. B. Deck manufacturer shall be a member of the Steel Deck Institute and design of the deck shall be by a qualified professional engineer. C. Deck installer shall have minimum three-year experience on comparable steel deck projects. Installers shall be trained and certified by manufacturer to install fastening systems. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials off the ground with one end elevated to provide drainage. Protect from the elements with a waterproof covering, ventilated to avoid condensation. Prevent rust, deterioration and accumulation of foreign materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446, Grade A, with ASTM A653 Designation G60 galvanized coating. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A36. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Paint shall be 95 percent zinc dust, organic vehicle primer compatible with galvanized surfaces.
STEEL ROOF DECKING SECTION 05 31 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
2.02 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Form deck units in lengths to span three or more support spacings, with minimum two-inch laps and side laps. Configuration shall be appropriate for side lap connection. 2. Deck profile and gage shall be as shown on the drawings. Acceptable manufacturer is Verco or approved substitute. B. Closure Plates: Fabricate closure plates of galvanized sheet steel of same quality as deck units. Provide tight-fitting closure with deck units. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Maximum variation in unit alignment shall be 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Check supporting members for correct layout and alignment. Verify that surfaces to receive steel deck are free of debris. Do not proceed with installation until defects are corrected. B. The Engineer reserves the right to inspect steel roof deck in the field for compliance with the requirements specified herein and the approved shop drawings. The Engineer may reject or require repair or refabrication of any steel roof deck or accessories not meeting these requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install steel roof deck and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with final approved shop drawings and as specified herein. B. Fasten steel roof deck to all interior and exterior transverse supports and at side laps and longitudinal supports. Deck fasteners and fastener spacings shall be as shown on the Drawings. End laps of steel roof deck shall be at least 2 inches long and shall occur over transverse supporting members. C. Coordinate size, location, and details of all penetration with the Drawings, other trades, and details of approved equipment. Pipe and conduit openings in the steel roof deck shall be reinforced according to the manufacturer's recommendation. 1. Cutting and Fittings: a. Cut and fit steel roof deck units and accessories around projections through steel roof deck. b. Make cuts neat, square, and trim. c. Cut openings in steel roof deck true to dimensions using metal saws or drills. d. Do not use cutting torches. e. Openings greater than 6-in and less than 12-in in greatest dimension shall be reinforced with a 24-in by 24-in flat plate, minimum 20-gauge thickness, centered on the opening.
STEEL ROOF DECKING SECTION 05 31 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
D. Suspended ceilings, light fixtures, ducts, piping, conduits, or other utilities shall not be attached to steel roof deck. 3.03 FIELD PAINTING A. Touch up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
END OF SECTION 05 31 23
METAL FABRICATONS SECTION 05 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Custom fabricated metal items and certain manufactured units not otherwise indicated to be provided under work of other specification sections. 2. Seat angle frames 3. Fall arrest anchors 4. Iron castings 5. U-channel concrete inserts 6. Cover plates and frames 7. Pipe sleeves 8. Safety nosings at concrete stairs 9. Cast metal signage letters. 10. Cast or precision tooled metal plaques. 11. Miscellaneous metal fabrications not covered elsewhere 1.02 REFERENCES A. The references listed below are a part of this section. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title Aluminum The Aluminum Association, Aluminum Design Manual Design Manual with Specifications and Guidelines for Aluminum Structures AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges AISC 360 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings AISC Steel American Institute of Steel Construction, Manual of Steel Construction Construction Manual ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A48 Gray-Iron Castings ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ASTM A108 Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware METAL FABRICATONS SECTION 05 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
Reference Title ASTM A193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both ASTM A240 Chromium and Chromium Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes ASTM A283 Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60000 psi Tensile Strength ASTM A312 Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes ASTM A320 Alloy-Steel Bolting Materials for Low Temperature Service ASTM A325 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength ASTM A380 Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems ASTM A384 Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies ASTM A489 Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes ASTM A554 Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ASTM A572 High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel ASTM A653 Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process ASTM A780 Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings ASTM A786 Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates ASTM A793 Rolled Floor Plate, Stainless Steel ASTM A924 Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by Hot-Dip Process ASTM A992 Structural Steel Shapes ASTM A1011 Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM B210 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes METAL FABRICATONS SECTION 05 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
Reference Title ASTM B211 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire ASTM B221 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes ASTM B241 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube ASTM B308 Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles ASTM B429 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube ASTM B632 Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate ASTM D1056 Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber ASTM F436 Hardened Steel Washers ASTM F468 Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, SocketHead Cap Screws and Studs for General Use ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs ASTM F594 Stainless Steel Nuts AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminum AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel OSHA 29 CFR Fall Protection Systems Criteria and Practices 1926.502 SSPC SP5 White Metal Blast Cleaning IBC International Building Code
1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Galvanize: Hot-dip galvanize per ASTM A123 or ASTM A153, per Section 05 05 14. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. Action Submittals: 1. A copy of this specification section with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. 2. Check-marks (✓) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. Deviations shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Include a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration 3. Manufacturer's product data. METAL FABRICATONS SECTION 05 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
4. Detailed Shop Drawings: a. Fabrication drawings showing layouts, connections to structural system, and anchoring details. b. Erection and installation drawings indicating thickness, type, grade, class of metal, coating system and dimensions. c. Construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction. 5. Welding procedures and welder certificates and qualifications. 6. U-Channel Concrete Inserts: Manufacturer’s product description and allowable load tables. 7. Passivation method for stainless steel fabrications. 8. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 9. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square representing actual product, color, and patterns. 10. Fall Arrest Anchor Certificate: a. Certify fall arrest system is designed to meet OSHA 29 CFR 1926.502 specified performance requirements. b. Signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Washington. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Fabricator shall have a minimum of five years’ experience in fabrication of metal specified. B. Certificates 1. Certified welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS. C. The use of salvaged, reprocessed or scrap materials will not be permitted. D. Sourcing: All signage shall be manufactured by one manufacturer. E. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of signage letters installation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect. 3. Rework mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Avoid damage during delivery and handling of fabrications. B. Store off the ground on skids or other supports to keep items free of dirt and other foreign debris and to protect against corrosion. METAL FABRICATONS SECTION 05 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials for miscellaneous metalwork are specified in the following table.
Material Specification Steel Sheets, plates and shapes ASTM A36 (except W shapes) W shapes ASTM A992 Pipe ASTM A53, Grade B Square/rectangular tubing ASTM A500, Grade B Headed Anchor Studs ASTM A108 Carbon steel bolts ASTM A307, Grade A High strength bolts ASTM A325 (Type 1) Nuts ASTM A563 Washers ASTM F436 Stainless Steel Sheet and Plates ASTM A240, Type 316 or 316L Shapes, bars, and similar items ASTM A276, Type 316 or 316L Pipe ASTM A312, Type 316 or 316L Headed Anchor Studs ASTM A276, Type 316L Bolts ASTM F593, Type 316 Nuts ASTM F594, Type 316 Aluminum Sheets and plates ASTM B209, Type 6061-T6 Bars, flats and similar items ASTM B211 or B221, Type 6061-T6 Shapes ASTM B308, Type 6061-T6 Round tubing and pipe ASTM B241, Type 6061-T6 Square and rectangular tubing ASTM B221, Type 6063-T52 Pipe ASTM B211 or B241, Type 6061-T6 Bolts, Stainless Steel ASTM F593, Type 316 Nuts, Stainless Steel ASTM F594, Type 316 Checker Plate Steel ASTM A786 Stainless steel ASTM A793, Type 304 Aluminum ASTM B632, Type 6061-T6 Other steel items Iron castings ASTM A48 Eyebolts ASTM A489 Threaded rods ASTM A36 METAL FABRICATONS SECTION 05 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
2.02 SIGNAGE LETTERS A. Cast Metal Letters: Signage shall be manufactured by established regional or national manufacturer. 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Design: As indicated on the drawings. 3. Letter Style: Swiss 721 4. Size: varies 5. Mounting: A mounting template designating stud locations shall be provided. Stud size and type shall be as required by manufacturer for application and design intent. B. Mounting: 1. Cast metal letters shall have threaded stud bosses or drilled and tapped for stud insertion. 2. Aluminum letters under 18 inches (457 mm) shall use aluminum studs, type based on stroke and thickness. 3. Other letter material and sizes shall use stainless steel studs. C. Aluminum Finish: 1. Natural Satin faces, bead-blasted returns, clear acrylic polyurethane powder- coated, baked. 2.03 ETCHED PLAQUES A. Etched Plaques: Signage shall be manufactured by Gemini Inc. 1. Material: Stainless Steel (Alloy C304). 2. Material: Stainless Steel (Alloy 316). B. Design: 1. Plaques shall use graphic file provided by owner, as indicated on the drawings. 2. Thicknesses: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Edges: Square Edge. 4. Copy: Recessed copy and graphics. 5. Stainless steel plaques shall not be coated. C. Mounting: 1. Hardware: Stud Boss Mount. 2. Hardware: Etched Plaques 1/4 inch (6 mm) or thicker shall be drilled and tapped for a stud mount.
2.04 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Conform to AISC or Aluminum Association standards as applicable. Where Code defined loads apply, also conform to IBC requirements. METAL FABRICATONS SECTION 05 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
2. Shop and field welding shall conform to the requirements of AISC, the Aluminum Design Manual, and applicable AWS procedures and specifications as required by the material being welded. 3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt, tight, flush, and hairline. Remove burrs and weld splatter. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. 4. Holes shall be punched 1/16 inch larger than the nominal size of the bolts, unless otherwise specified. Whenever needed, because of the thickness of the metal, holes shall be sub-punched and reamed or shall be drilled. 5. Fabrication, including cutting, drilling, punching, threading and tapping required for fabrications or adjacent work, shall be performed prior to galvanizing. B. Seat Angle Frames 1. Provide recessed seat angle frames for grating and floor plates. Miter corners to ensure accurate fit. Match depth of recess with grating or floor plate thickness. Anchor frames in concrete with headed studs. Steel angle support frames shall be stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 316, unless indicated otherwise. C. Fall Arrest Anchors 1. Fall arrest anchors shall meet requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1926.502. Anchorages attached to personal fall arrest equipment shall be capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds per employee attached, or shall be designed, installed, and used as part of a complete personal fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of at least two. Type of anchor shall fit the application and substrate material. 2. Fall arrest anchors shall be manufactured by: a. Thaler Metal Industries b. Approved Equal D. Iron Castings 1. Castings shall be as specified on the Drawings. Castings weighing less than 100 pounds shall be galvanized after machining. Castings weighing greater than 100 pounds shall be galvanized where specified. E. Ladders 1. Steel Ladders: Provide vertical ladders conforming to 29 CFR 1910.27. As a minimum, provide 2 1/2 inch by 3/8 inch steel flat bars for side rails and 3/4 inch diameter steel rods for rungs unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Rungs shall be a minimum clear length of 16 inches, uniformly spaced at a maximum of 12 inches and plug welded into side rails. Install ladders so that the distance from the centerline of rungs to the finished wall surface is not less than 7 inches nor more than 12 inches. Provide clip angle supports bolted to the side rail at the top. Provide intermediate clip angle lateral supports at a maximum of 10 feet on center. METAL FABRICATONS SECTION 05 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
2. Ladder Safety Post: a. Provide a telescoping ladder safety post at ladders below all floor and roof hatches, and other coverings. b. The ladder safety post shall be pre-assembled from the manufacturer. c. Performance characteristics: 1) Post shall lock automatically when fully extended. 2) Post shall have controlled upward and downward movement. 3) Release lever shall disengage the post to allow it to be returned to its lowered position. 4) Post shall have adjustable mounting brackets to fit ladder rung spacing up to 14” on center and clamp brackets to accommodate ladder rungs up to 1-3/4” in diameter. 5) Post: Manufactured of high strength square tubing with a pull up loop provided at the upper end of the post to facilitate raising the post. 6) Material of construction: Galvanized steel or Stainless steel Type 316 as indicated on the Drawings 7) Balancing spring: Stainless steel spring balancing mechanism to provide smooth, easy, controlled operation when raising and lowering the safety post. d. Acceptable products include: 1) LadderUp Safety Post by Bilco 2) Ladder Safety Post Model SP by Nystrom Inc. 3) Approved equal 3. Ladder Cages: a. Provide ladder cages when ladders are greater than 20 feet tall between floor/landing surfaces. Conform to OSHA 29 CFR 1910.27. F. Ship Ladders 1. Provide Ship Ladders in accordance with IBC 1009.11. Fabricate stringers and framing of steel plates or shapes. Bolt or weld connections and anchors to supporting construction. Provide treads with non-slip surface as specified for safety treads. Provide railings as specified. G. U-Channel Concrete Inserts 1. U-Channel Concrete Inserts shall be [galvanized or stainless steel] conforming to attachment hardware and materials attached. Channels shall be 1 5/8 inch wide by 1 3/8 inch deep with a minimum thickness of 0.105 inches. Channels shall be open-bottom with curved or lipped flange edges to engage standard nuts and connection hardware. Load rating shall meet or exceed a 2,000 pound point load at 12 inch minimum spacing. Provide standard accessories and hardware per manufacturers recommendations. METAL FABRICATONS SECTION 05 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 9
H. Cover Plates and Frames 1. Fabricate aluminum cover plates weighing not more than 80 pounds per cover with a raised pattern nonslip top surface. Reinforce to sustain a live load of 100 pounds per square foot or as indicated on the Drawings. Frames shall be stainless steel angles and plates, with stainless steelheaded anchors welded to frame for anchoring to concrete. Miter and weld corners and butt joint straight runs. Provide flush drop handles for removal. Remove sharp edges and burrs from cover plates and exposed edges of frames. Weld connections and grind top surface smooth. Provide 1/8 inch clearance at edges. I. Pipe Sleeves 1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, fabricate pipe sleeves from schedule 40 steel pipe with 3/16 inch thick by 3 feet wide seep ring continuously seal welded to the outside of the pipe. Galvanize after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123. J. Safety Nosings at Concrete Stairs 1. Safety stair treads shall be 4 inches wide and manufactured by: a. Safe T Metal Company Incorporated, Style AX; b. Wooster Products Incorporated, Alumogrit, Type 101 c. Approved Equal. K. Other Miscellaneous Steel Metalwork 1. Other miscellaneous steel metalwork including embedded and non-embedded steel metalwork, hangers and inserts shall be as specified or shown on the Drawings. 2.05 FINISHES A. Galvanizing 1. Galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated, after fabrication where practicable. Galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A123, ASTM A153, ASTM A653 or ASTM A924, Z275 G90, as applicable. Galvanize anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and parts or devices necessary for proper installation, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Repair damaged Zinc-Coated surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming to ASTM A780 or by application of stick or thick paste material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved by the Engineer. 3. Safeguard against warpage and distortion during galvanizing of steel in accordance with ASTM A384. Straighten items after galvanizing so that they are straight, free of racking and distortion. B. Shop Painting 1. Prepare and coat surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 - Coatings. 2. Steel to be embedded in concrete shall be free of dirt and grease. METAL FABRICATONS SECTION 05 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 10
C. Aluminum Surfaces 1. Surface condition aluminum before finishes are applied. Remove roll marks, scratches, rolled-in scratches, kinks, stains, pits, orange peel, die marks, structural streaks, and other defects which will affect uniform appearance of finished surfaces. 2. Aluminum finishes for unexposed sheet, plate and extrusions may have mill finish as fabricated. 3. Provide other aluminum items with a standard mill finish. 4. Provide a coating thickness not less than that specified for protection. 5. Provide decorative type finishes for items used in interior occupied locations or architectural type finish for items used in exterior locations. 6. Provide a polished satin finish on items to be anodized. D. Stainless Steel Passivation 1. Stainless steel to be cleaned, descaled, and passivated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A380. Passivate to remove iron compounds from the surface of the stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify measurements at the site. Include field dimensions in shop drawings. B. Examine and accept existing conditions before beginning work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Make provisions for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb, level and square, accurately fitted, and free from distortion or defects. Install rigid, substantial, and neat in appearance. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate for proper relationship to adjacent construction. B. Allow for erection loads and provide temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Fieldwork shall not be permitted on galvanized items. Drilling of bolts or enlargement of holes to correct misalignment will not be allowed. D. Protect encased or embedded dissimilar metals (both metals must be encased or embedded) from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings or isolators. E. Place metalwork to be embedded in concrete accurately and hold in correct position while the concrete is placed or, if indicated, form recesses or blockouts in the concrete. Thoroughly clean the surfaces of metalwork in contact with or embedded in concrete. If accepted, recesses may be neatly cored in the concrete after it has attained its design strength and the metalwork grouted in place. METAL FABRICATONS SECTION 05 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 11
F. Seat angles, supports and guides: Set seat angles for grating and supports for floor plates so that they maintain the grating and floor plates flush with the floor. G. Ladder Safety Post: Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions. H. Pipe Sleeves: Provide where pipes pass through concrete or masonry. Holes drilled with a rotary drill may be provided in lieu of sleeves in existing walls. Provide a center flange for water stoppage on sleeves in exterior or water bearing walls. Provide a rubber caulking sealant or a modular mechanical unit to form a watertight seal in the annular space between pipes and sleeves. I. U-Channel Concrete Inserts: Provide as indicated for pipe supports and where otherwise specified or shown on Drawings. J. Safety Nosings: Unless otherwise specified, safety stair nosing shall be installed on concrete stairs. Nosing shall be secured to concrete with suitable anchors at 15 inches on center and not more than 4 inches from the ends. 1/8 inch thick rubber tape shall be provided at both ends and cut to fit shape of nosing prior to concrete placement. K. Concrete: Stairs to be constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. Finish concrete with a “nonslip” finish with “very flat” tolerance as specified in ACI 301. L. Fastening to Construction-In-Place: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for fastening fabricated items to construction-in-place. Design anchorage devices in accordance with Section 01 73 24 – Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures. Anchor bolts to be in accordance with Section 05 05 20 – Anchor Bolts. 3.04 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Galvanized 1. Maximum area to be repaired shall not be more than 1/2 of 1 percent of the surface area or 36 sq. in. per ton of piece weight, whichever is less. Damage in excess of this requirement shall be repaired by stripping and recoating entire piece. 2. Clean damaged areas to SSPC-SP5. Repair with zinc-rich paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and with ASTM A780, Annex A2. Minimum thickness requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM A123. 3. Use zinc-rich repair paint. Acceptable manufacturers: a. LPS, Cold Galvanize b. ZRC Worldwide, ZRC Galvilite c. Approved Equal B. Painted 1. After installation, clean and touch up damaged areas with the same materials used for the shop coat. METAL FABRICATONS SECTION 05 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 12
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Electrolytic Protection B. Protect dissimilar metals from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings, or isolators. Aluminum in contact with concrete or grout shall be protected with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. C. Stainless Steel 1. During handling and installation, take necessary precautions to prevent carbon impregnation of stainless steel members. 2. After installation, visually inspect stainless steel surfaces for evidence of iron rust, oil, paint, and other forms of contamination. 3. Remove contamination in accordance with requirements of ASTM A380. 4. Brushes used to remove foreign substances shall utilize only stainless steel or nonmetallic bristles.
END OF SECTION 05 50 00 METAL STAIRS SECTION 05 51 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Requirements for Contractor designed galvanized steel stair systems, including but not limited to landings, stairs stringers, stair treads, abrasive nosings, and railing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains specific references to the following related sections. Additional related sections may apply that are not specifically listed below. 1. Section 01 73 24 2. Section 03 30 00 3. Section 05 05 14 4. Section 05 05 33 5. Section 05 10 00 6. Section 05 52 20 7. Section 05 53 10 B. The references listed below are a part of this section. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title Aluminum Design The Aluminum Association, Aluminum Design Manual with Manual Specifications and Guidelines for Aluminum Structures ACI 301 Standard Specification for Structural Concrete
AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges AISC 360 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings AISC Steel American Institute of Steel Construction, Manual of Steel Construction Manual Construction ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications ASTM A325 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
METAL STAIRS SECTION 05 51 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
Reference Title ASTM A384 Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ASTM A572 High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel ASTM A653 Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process ASTM A780 Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings ASTM A924 Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A992 Structural Steel Shapes ASTM A1011 Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM B210 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes ASTM B211 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire ASTM B221 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes ASTM B241 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube ASTM B308 Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles ASTM F436 Hardened Steel Washers ASTM F594 Stainless Steel Nuts AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminum NAAMM AMP 510 Metal Stairs Manual OSHA 29 CFR Fixed Industrial Stairs 1910.24 IBC International Building Code 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Galvanize: Hot-dip galvanize per ASTM A123 or ASTM A153, per Section 05 05 14. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. 2. A copy of this specification with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements.
METAL STAIRS SECTION 05 51 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
3. Check-marks (✓) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. Deviations shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Include a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. 4. Manufacturer's product data. 5. Stair Design: Stair assemblies to be designed by the Contractor incorporating specified criteria, and employing a Professional Engineer currently registered in the State of Washington to perform the design engineering. Drawings and design calculations to be stamped and signed by the Professional Engineer. 6. Shop Drawings: Stair fabrication drawings showing layouts, connections to structural system, and anchoring details. Erection and installation drawings indicating thickness, type, grade, class of metal, coating system and dimensions. Show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction. 7. Welding procedures and welder certificates and qualifications. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Fabricator shall be specialized in stair assemblies with a minimum of three years experience. B. Certificates 1. Certified welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS. C. Regulatory Requirements 1. Comply with International Building Code (IBC) and OSHA 29 CR 1910.24. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials to job site properly marked to identify the structure for which they are intended and at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. Marking shall correspond to markings indicated on the shop drawings. Avoid damage during delivery and handling of fabrications. B. Store all members off the ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. C. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supporting structure.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA A. Comply with IBC requirements, including but not limited to means of egress requirements, stair treads and riser configuration, handrail and guard layout and design, headroom, and stairway landing configuration.
METAL STAIRS SECTION 05 51 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
B. Structural Requirements: 1. Dead Loads: a. Designed for full dead-load plus the following live-load conditions applied individually or in combination in accordance with IBC. 2. Live Loads: a. Metal stair assembly to carry a minimum uniform live load of 100 psf of projected plan area. b. Stair treads to be designed for a minimum concentrated load of 300 pounds on an area of 4 square inches. c. An isolated concentrated load of 1000 pounds applied to framing members where it is most critical. 3. Snow Loads: See Section 01 73 24. 4. Wind Loads: See Section 01 73 24. 5. Seismic Loads: See Section 01 73 24. C. Deflections 1. Limit live load deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Materials for stair systems are specified in Table A.
Table A, Materials for Metal Stairs Material Specification Steel Sheets, plates and shapes (except W ASTM A36 shapes) Steel W shapes ASTM A992 Pipe ASTM A53, Grade B Square/rectangular tubing ASTM A500, Grade B High strength bolts ASTM A325 (Type 1) Nuts ASTM A563 Washers ASTM F436 2.03 FABRICATION A. General 1. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, stair treads, hangers, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and landings on supporting structure. 2. Conform to AISC or Aluminum Association standards as applicable. 3. Structural metal framing to be in accordance with Section 05 10 00.
METAL STAIRS SECTION 05 51 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
4. Provide stairs of welded construction. Bolts may be used where welding is not practical. 5. Shop and field welding shall conform to the requirements of AISC, the Aluminum Design Manual, and applicable AWS procedures and specifications as required by the material being welded. 6. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt, tight, flush, and hairline. Remove burrs and weld splatter. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. 7. Holes shall be punched 1/16 inch larger than the nominal size of the bolts, unless otherwise specified. Whenever needed, because of the thickness of the metal, holes shall be subpunched and reamed or shall be drilled. 8. Fabrication including cutting, drilling, punching, threading and tapping required for fabrications or adjacent work shall be performed prior to hot-dip galvanizing. 9. Pre-assemble stair components in the shop to the greatest extent possible. 10. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. B. Stairs – Galvanized Steel 1. Provide galvanized steel stairs complete with stringers, grating treads, landings, columns, guardrails, handrails, and necessary bolts and other fastenings. Hot-dip galvanize steel stairs and accessories. 2. Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. Construct landings of structural channel headers and miscellaneous framing members. 3. Grating Treads and Landings: Provide galvanized grating conforming to Section 05 53 10. Fabricate grating treads with abrasive nosing and with steel angle or plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts. Fabricate grating landings with nosing that matches grating treads. Provide toe-plates at open-sided edges of landing. 4. Provide railings for stairs and platforms in accordance with Section 05 52 20. 2.04 FINISHES A. Galvanizing 1. Galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated, after fabrication where practicable. Galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A123, ASTM A153, ASTM A653 or ASTM A924, Z275 G90, as applicable. Galvanize anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and parts or devices necessary for proper installation, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Repair damaged Zinc-Coated surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming to ASTM A780 or by application of stick or thick paste material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved by Owner’s Representative.
METAL STAIRS SECTION 05 51 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
3. Safeguarding against warpage and distortion during hot-dip galvanizing of steel in accordance with ASTM A384. Straighten items after galvanizing so that they are straight, free of racking and distortion. B. Aluminum Surfaces 1. Surface condition aluminum before finishes are applied. Remove roll marks, scratches, rolled-in scratches, kinks, stains, pits, orange peel, die marks, structural streaks, and other defects which will affect uniform appearance of finished surfaces. 2. Aluminum finishes for unexposed sheet, plate and extrusions may have mill finish as fabricated. 3. Provide all other aluminum items with a standard mill finish.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify measurements at the site. Include field dimensions in shop drawings. B. Examine and accept existing conditions before beginning work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb, level and square, accurately fitted, and free from distortion or defects. Install rigid, substantial, and neat in appearance. B. Allow for erection loads and provide temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Fieldwork shall not be permitted on galvanized items. Drilling of bolts or enlargement of holes to correct misalignment will not be allowed. D. Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, or shims. After stairs have been positioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. E. Railing: Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. F. Safety Nosings: Unless otherwise specified, safety stair nosing shall be installed on all concrete stairs. Nosing shall be secured to concrete with suitable anchors at 15 inches on centers and not more than 4 inches from the ends. 1/8 inch rubber tape, 1/8 inch thick, shall be provided at both ends and cut to fit shape of nosing prior to concrete placement. G. Concrete: Pan-filled stairs to be constructed in accordance with Section 03 30 00. Finish concrete with a “nonslip” finish with “very flat” tolerance as specified in ACI 301. H. Fastening To Construction-In-Place: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for fastening fabricated items to construction-in-place. Design anchorage devices in accordance with Section 01 73 24. Anchor bolts to be in accordance with Section 05 05 20.
METAL STAIRS SECTION 05 51 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
3.03 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Galvanized 1. Maximum area to be repaired shall not be more than 1/2 of 1 percent of the surface area or 36 sq. in. per ton of piece weight, whichever is less. Damage in excess of this requirement shall be repaired by stripping and recoating entire piece. 2. Clean damaged areas to SSPC-SP5. Repair with zinc-rich paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and with ASTM A780, Annex A2. Minimum thickness requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM A123. 3. Use zinc-rich repair paint. Acceptable manufacturer: a. LPS, Cold Galvanize b. ZRC Worldwide, ZRC Galvilite c. Approved Equal 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Electrolytic Protection: Dissimilar metals shall be protected from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, or coatings. Aluminum in contact with concrete, grout, masonry, or dissimilar metals, shall be protected with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
END OF SECTION 05 51 00
STEEL RAILINGS SECTION 05 52 20 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Fabricated stainless steel guardrails and handrails, herein referred to as railing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The references listed below are a part of this section. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ASTM A240/A240M Chromium and Chromium Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications ASTM A312/A312M Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes ASTM A666 Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar ASTM A743/A743M Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron- Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application ASTM C1107/C1107M Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink) ASTM D1187/D1187M Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal ASTM E488/E488M Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete Elements ASTM E894 Standard Test Method for Anchorage of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings ASTM E 935 Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs ASTM F594 Stainless Steel Nuts AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code, Stainless Steel OSHA U.S. Dept. of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration IBC International Building Code with local amendments
1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
STEEL RAILINGS SECTION 05 52 20 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. 2. Product Data for the following a. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. b. Railing brackets. c. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. 3. Layout, installation and detail shop drawings for guardrails and handrails. 4. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. 5. Product Test Reports: For pipe and tube railings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 6. ✓Design calculations stamped and signed by a licensed professional engineer in the State of Washington. Railing and base support connections to be designed by the Contractor incorporating specified criteria and provisions in the current building code with local governing amendments. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Provide material certification for compliance with this specification for steel materials. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Guardrails and handrails shall conform to the standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and International Building Code. B. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years’ experience producing substantially similar products and be able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years. C. Obtain products included in this Section, regardless of the component manufacturer, from a single steel railing manufacturer. D. Provide certification that welders employed for the Work have passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. Ensure that certifications are kept current 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Cushion wrap complete rails, modules and components to prevent scratching and denting during shipment, storage, and installation. B. Leave wrap intact, insofar as possible, until railing is completely installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA A. Railing assembly and attachments shall resist a minimum uniform load of 50 pounds per linear foot on the top rail and a concentrated load of 200 pounds (not acting concurrently with the uniform load) applied in any direction.
STEEL RAILINGS SECTION 05 52 20 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
B. If not shown on a project standard detail, Contractor’s supplier and engineer are responsible for designing the guardrail/handrail system along with its base support and anchor bolt size and embedment depth into concrete, or connection to steel framing, to resist the above loading condition taking into account anchor edge distances and concrete strengths at the point of attachment. Contractor shall submit calculations signed and sealed by a professional engineer in the State of Washington responsible for their preparation where the Contractor is responsible for the design as previously noted. C. Select schedule of pipe, diameter, and maximum post spacing in order to limit deflection in each single span of railing or post to 1/4 inch maximum. D. Provide railing that allows for thermal movement resulting from the project site maximum range in ambient and surface temperatures. Base distance between expansion joints on providing a 1/4-inch wide joint at 70°F, which accommodates a movement of 150 percent of the calculated amount of movement for the specified temperature range. E. Provide expansion joint in railing system where railing crosses expansion joints in the structure. F. Thermal Movements: Provide railing that allow for thermal movements resulting from the project site maximum range in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 2.02 MATERIALS
Component Material Pipe ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 316L Castings ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8M or CF 3M Plate and Sheet ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316L
2.03 configuration, components A. Top Rails: Minimum 1 1/2 inch nominal diameter pipe, Schedule 40. B. Handrails: 1 1/2 inch nominal diameter pipe, Schedule 40. C. Posts: Minimum 1 1/2 inch nominal diameter pipe, Schedule 80. D. Intermediate Rails: Minimum 1-1/2 inch nominal diameter pipe, Schedule 40. E. Provide solid steel dowels of stainless steel type 316 material to fit inside the rails where required. F. Provide toe boards at guardrails except where concrete curbs are indicated. Use 1/4 inch plate connected to posts. G. Anchors to Concrete: Stainless steel, Type 316, in accordance with Section 05 05 20. H. Fasteners: Stainless steel, Type 316 2.04 ASSEMBLY/FABRICATION A. Pipe cuts shall be clean, straight, square and accurate for minimum joint gap. Work shall be done in conformance with the guardrail and handrail manufacturer's instructions. Work shall be free from blemishes, defects, and misfits of any type which can affect durability, strength, or appearance.
STEEL RAILINGS SECTION 05 52 20 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
B. Connect guardrailing and handrailing by screws or bolts or welding. Punch holes 1/16 inch larger than the nominal size of the bolts, unless otherwise specified. Wherever needed because of the thickness of the metal, holes shall be subpunched and reamed or drilled. Replace components with mismatched holes. No drifting of bolts or enlargement of holes will be allowed to correct misalignment. C. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints tight and flush. Round exposed edges to small, uniform radius. 2.05 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and accept existing conditions before beginning work. B. Field verify measurements for railings before fabrication. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Protect dissimilar metals from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings, or isolators. C. Accurately place metal to be embedded in concrete and hold in correct position while the concrete is placed. Where recesses or blockouts are formed in the concrete, the metalwork shall be grouted in place after concrete has attained its design strength in accordance with Section 03 30 00. D. Unless otherwise indicated, field welding of railing is not permitted. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Maximum variance from plumb: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum offset from true alignment: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION 05 52 20
METAL GRATINGS AND STAIR TREADS SECTION 05 53 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Galvanized steel bar grating and stair treads. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains specific references to the following related sections. Additional related sections may apply that are not specifically listed below. 1. Section 03 30 00 2. Section 05 05 14 3. Section 05 51 00 B. The references listed below are a part of this section. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A1011 Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength 1.03 DEFENITIONS A. Galvanize: Hot-dip galvanize per ASTM A123 or ASTM A153, per Section 05 05 14 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. 2. A copy of this specification section with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. 3. Check-marks (✓) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. Deviations shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Include a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.
METAL GRATINGS AND STAIR TREADS SECTION 05 53 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
4. Shop drawings showing placing plans for grating, including manufacturer’s loading tables. 5. Manufacturer’s product data.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
Component Material Steel grating bearing and cross bars ASTM A1011, mild carbon steel 2.02 ASSEMBLY/FABRICATION A. Welds: 1. Rough weld beads and sharp metal edges on gratings shall be ground smooth. Welds exposed to view shall be uniform and neat. Welds to be galvanized shall be sandblasted prior to galvanizing. B. Grating: 1. General a. Grating shall be for slip resistance. b. Both bearing bars and cross bars shall be continuous. c. Openings shall be banded with bars having the same dimensions as the bearing bars. Perimeter edges shall be banded with bars flush at the top surface of the grating and 1/4 inch clear of the bottom surface. d. Bars terminating against edge bars shall be welded to the edge bars when welded construction is used. e. When crimped or swaged construction is used, bars at edges shall protrude a maximum of 1/16 inch and be peened or ground to a smooth surface. f. No single piece of grating shall weigh more than 80 pounds unless specifically detailed otherwise. 2. Steel Grating a. Use steel grating only where specified. Steel grating shall be galvanized. Fabrication methods employing bending or notching of bearing or cross bars will not be permitted. C. Stair Treads: 1. Treads shall match the grating material and type furnished for landings. Stair treads shall be slip resistance. Nosing shall be cast abrasive on each tread along one long edge. Provide carrier angle at each end for attachment to stair stringers. Fasten all components to support members with stainless steel Type 316 fasteners.
METAL GRATINGS AND STAIR TREADS SECTION 05 53 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and accept existing conditions before beginning work. B. Field measure grating for proper cutouts and proper sizes prior to fabrication. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Fieldwork is not permitted on galvanized items. Drilling of bolts or enlargement of holes to correct misalignment will not be permitted. B. Protect dissimilar metals from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings or isolators. Protect aluminum in contact with concrete with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. C. Metalwork to be embedded in concrete shall be stainless steel and shall be placed accurately and held in correct position while the concrete is placed. Or, if specified, recesses or blockouts shall be formed in the concrete after it has attained its design strength and the metalwork grouted in place as specified in Section 03 30 00. The surfaces of metalwork in contact with or embedded in concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned. If accepted, recesses may be neatly cored in the concrete. 3.03 REPAIR A. Repair damaged surfaces of galvanized metals per Section 05 05 14.
END OF SECTION 05 53 10
ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 10 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Preservative treated wood materials. 2. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. B. Related Work: The work of the following sections is related to the work of this Section. Other sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the performance of this work. Perform all the work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 01 74 19 3. Section 05 31 10 4. Section 07 31 10 5. Section 07 61 13 1.02 REFERENCES A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and the listed documents, the requirements of the Contract Specifications shall prevail.
Reference Title AWPA C2 Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood- Preservers' Association; 2003. AWPA U1 Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2007. PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. WWPI Western Wood Preservers Institute – Best Management Practices for Use of Treated Wood in Aquatic Environments.
1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10 B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and application instructions.
ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 10 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Stainless steel for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. 2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards.
ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 10 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
B. Preservative Treatment: 1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft (4.0 kg/cu m) retention. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Comply with WWPI Best Management Practices for the use of treated wood in aquatic environments. 3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.04 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 2. Comply with applicable regulations. 3. Do not burn scrap on project site. 4. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 5. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co- generation facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
END OF SECTION 06 10 00
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS SECTION 06 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Requirements for Contractor designed fiberglass reinforced products and fabrications. Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to install glass fiber and resin fabrications including fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) structural and miscellaneous framing members, stairs, ladders, guardrails, handrails, and frames.
1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains specific references to the following related sections. Additional related sections may apply that are not specifically listed below. 1. Section 01 73 24 2. Section 05 05 33 3. Section 06 82 13 B. The references listed below are a part of this section. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ANSI A14.3 Standard for Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements
ASTM D570 Water Absorption of Plastics
Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning Plastics in a ASTM D635 Horizontal Position
ASTM D638 Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D695 Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics
Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics ASTM D696 Between -30°C and 30°C with a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and ASTM D790 Electrical Insulating Materials Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of ASTM D792 Plastics by Displacement Short-Beam Strength of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials and ASTM D2344 Their Laminates Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol ASTM D2583 Impressor ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials IBC International Building Code
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS SECTION 06 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
Reference Title OSHA 29 CFR 1910.23 Guarding floor and wall openings and holes OSHA 29 CFR 1910.24 Fixed Industrial Stairs OSHA 29 CFR 1910.27 Fixed Ladders
1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. 2. A copy of this specification section with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. 3. Check-marks (✓) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. Deviations shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Include a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. 4. Qualification statements for manufacturer and installer. 5. Shop drawings of fabricated framing members, connections, stairs, ladders, guardrail, handrail, anchors into concrete, and accessories showing dimensions, connections, frames, and details of installation. 6. Shop drawings for manufacturer designed fabrications shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Washington. 7. Structural calculations for platforms, support structures, embedments, ladders and cages, handrails, guards and other fabrications stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Washington. 8. Manufacturer’s published literature, including structural design data, structural properties data, corrosion resistance tables, certificates of compliance, test reports as applicable, anchor systems and their allowable load tables.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. FRP fabrications shall conform to the standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 2. FRP products and fabrications shall be furnished by a qualified manufacturer who is regularly engaged in the manufacturing and installation of FRP systems. B. Qualifications 1. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) manufacturer is required to have a minimum of 10 years experience in manufacturing FRP products.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS SECTION 06 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
2. The FRP Manufacturer’s Professional Engineer is to be currently licensed by the state of Washington, and have a minimum of five years experience as an Engineer for manufacturers of similar FRP systems. Supply the names and locations of five projects of similar size and scope for which the Engineer has provided engineering calculations using the manufacturer's products within the previous three years.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Shipment: 1. Systems, sub-systems and structures shall be shop fabricated and assembled into the largest practical size suitable for transporting. 2. Ladders shall be shipped fully shop fabricated and assembled. 3. Package and clearly tag parts and assemblies, that are of necessity shipped unassembled, in a manner that will protect materials from damage and facilitate identification and final assembly in the field. B. Storage and Handling: Store and handle in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in such a manner as to prevent damage of any kind, including overexposure to sunlight.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Candidate manufacturers are listed below. The manufacturer’s standard product may require modification to conform to specified requirements: 1. American Grating, LLC 2. Fibergrate Composite Structures Inc. 3. Seasafe, Inc. 4. Strongwell Corp. 5. Approved Equal
2.02 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA A. FRP Rail System: 1. Comply with IBC and OSHA 1910.23. Assembly and attachments shall resist a minimum uniform horizontal and vertical load of 50 pounds per linear foot on the top rail and a concentrated load of 200 pounds (not acting concurrently with the uniform load) applied in any direction. B. FRP Ladder System: 1. Design to meet the loading requirements of OSHA 1910.27. Minimum live load of 250 pounds concentrated load at the mid-point of the rung with a safety factor of 4.0.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS SECTION 06 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
2. Comply with OSHA 1910.27 for ladders requiring cages and rest landings. Provide cages on ladders more than 20 feet tall between floor/landing surfaces, to a maximum unbroken length of 30 feet tall between floor/landing surfaces. Provide intermediate rest landing at 30' and for every 30' thereafter. Start cages at a minimum of 7' and a maximum of 8' above the platform. Extend cages 42" above the landing at the top of the ladders. C. FRP Platforms, Landings, and Stairs: 1. Dead Load: Design for full dead-load plus the following load conditions applied individually or in combination in accordance with IBC. 2. Live Loads: a. Platforms, landings and stair assembly to carry a minimum uniform live load of 100 psf of projected plan area. b. Stair treads to be designed for a minimum concentrated load of 300 pounds on an area of 4 square inches. c. An isolated concentrated load of 1000 pounds shall be applied to framing members where it is most critical. 3. Snow Loads: See Section 01 73 24. 4. Wind Loads: See Section 01 73 24. 5. Seismic Loads: See Section 01 73 24. 6. Deflection: Limit dead load plus live load deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/180.
2.03 MATERIALS A. General: 1. FRP systems shall be fabricated using a vinyl ester resin with flame retardant to achieve a flame spread of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. Polyester resin shall not be used. 2. Exterior exposed systems shall be manufactured with a ultra-violet (UV) inhibitor additive and synthetic surface veil as an outermost layer covering the exterior surface. 3. Exposed surfaces shall be smooth and true to form. 4. After fabrication, cuts, drill holes, and abrasions, including field alterations, shall be sealed with a compatible resin coating to prevent intrusion of moisture. 5. Fasteners used for FRP assemblies shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 6. Color pigment shall be dispersed in resin system. Color shall be selected by Owner’s Representative. B. Structural Shapes: 1. Manufacture by the pultrusion process with a glass content minimum of 45 percent, maximum of 55 percent (by weight) for maximum sunlight and chemical resistance. The structural shapes shall be composed of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in qualities, quantities, properties, arrangements, and dimensions as necessary to meet the design requirements and dimensions as specified in the Contract Documents.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS SECTION 06 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
2. Fiberglass reinforcement shall be a combination of continuous roving, continuous strand mat, and surfacing veil in sufficient quantities as needed by the application and/or physical properties required. 3. Resins shall be fire retardant vinyl ester with chemical formulation necessary to provide corrosion resistance and strength. 4. Pultruded structural shapes are to have the minimum mechanical properties listed below:
Material Properties Test Method Value Pultruded Fiberglass Structural Shapes Ultimate tensile stress in ASTM D638 30,000 longitudinal direction, psi Ultimate compressive stress in ASTM D695 30,000 longitudinal direction, psi Ultimate flexural stress in ASTM D790 30,000 longitudinal direction, psi Ultimate short beam shear in ASTM D2344 4,500 longitudinal direction, psi Ultimate tensile stress in ASTM D638 7,000 transverse direction, psi Ultimate compressive stress in ASTM D695 15,000 transverse direction, psi Ultimate flexural stress in ASTM D790 10,000 transverse direction, psi Modulus of elasticity, full section, N/A 2,800,000 psi Density (lb/in.3) ASTM D792 0.060-0.070 Water absorption (25-hr ASTM D570 0.60 max, immersion) percent by weight Barcol hardness ASTM D2583 45 Coefficient of thermal expansion ASTM D696 8.0 10-6 in./in./degrees C Flame-Retardant Properties Flammability test ASTM D635 Self-extinguishing Surface burning characteristics ASTM E84 25 maximum Flammability class UL 94 VO Temperature index UL 94 130 degrees C C. FRP Ladders: 1. Ladder side rails, rungs, ladder mounting brackets and cage straps shall be structural shapes manufactured by the pultrusion process. Cage hoops and brackets shall be produced by the open molded hand lay-up method. 2. Resins shall be vinyl ester with chemical formulation necessary to provide corrosion resistance and strength.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS SECTION 06 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
3. Finished surfaces shall be smooth, resin-rich, free of voids and without dry spots, cracks, crazes or unreinforced areas. Glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering. 4. Pultruded ladder components shall be further protected from ultraviolet (UV) attack with integral UV inhibitors in the resin and a synthetic surfacing veil to help produce a resin rich surface. 5. Ladder side rails shall be square tube with a wall thickness of 1/4 inch or greater. Rungs shall be minimum 1 inch diameter pultruded rods, continuously fluted to provide a non-slip surface. Rungs that are gritted as a secondary operation shall not be permitted. Ladder wall and floor mount shall be fabricated from pultruded angles, 3/8 inch minimum thickness. 6. Ladder cage vertical bars shall be minimum 2 inch by 1/4 inch pultruded straps spaced 9 inches on center around hoop. Cage hoops and cage brackets shall be manufactured by the open mold hand lay-up process. Hoops shall be a minimum of 3 inch by 1/4 inch. 7. Rungs shall be both mechanically attached with stainless steel rivets and chemically bonded with epoxy. 8. Ladder and cage components are to be integrally pigmented yellow. D. FRP Handrail and Guardrail: 1. Fiberglass reinforced pultrusions shall be the material for all components. Reinforcing glass will be a minimum of 50 percent (by weight). 2. Color: safety yellow. A synthetic polyester veil shall be applied to interior exposed surfaces and a UV stabilizer shall be added with a polyurethane coating applied to exterior exposed surfaces. 3. Posts shall be 2 inch by 2 inch by 1/4 inch square tubes minimum. Handrail dimensions to meet the graspability requirements of IBC. Toe plate shall be 4 inch by 1/2 inch corrugated profile. Toe plate shall be designed to allow for thermal contraction and expansion. 4. Top rail, mid-rail and toe plate splices shall be located within 18 inches of a post. 5. Rail and post intersections shall be connected by stainless steel rivets. Toe plate shall be secured to posts with stainless steel bolts. E. FRP Grating And Stair Treads: In accordance with Section 06 82 13.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and accept existing conditions before beginning work.
3.02 FABRICATION A. Member cuts shall be clean, straight, square, and accurate for minimum joint gap. Work shall be done in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Work shall be free from blemishes, defects, and misfits that can affect durability, strength, or appearance. Cuts and drill holes shall be sealed by application of manufacturer provided resin.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS SECTION 06 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
B. Thermal Movements: 1. Provide fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the project site’s maximum range in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. C. Field Measurements: 1. Verify field dimensions after construction of facilities and include in shop drawing submittal. Field verification of dimensions is a prerequisite for fabrication of railing. Any miss-fitting of railing will be the responsibility of the Contractor to rectify until railing complies with the Specifications.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install products in accordance with Contract Documents and manufacturer’s instructions. Field cut and drill fiberglass reinforced plastic products with carbide or diamond tipped bits and blades. Seal shop and field cut or drilled surfaces using manufacturer provided resin. B. Fastening To Construction-In-Place: 1. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for fastening fabricated FRP items to construction-in-place. Design anchorage devices in accordance with Section 01 73 24. Anchor bolts to be in accordance with Section 05 05 20. 2. Use Type 316 stainless steel anchors for attachment of fabrications to structure. 3. Attach grating panels in place with Type 316 stainless steel hold-down fasteners spaced at a maximum of four feet apart with a minimum of four per grating panel.
END OF SECTION 06 71 01
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED GRATINGS SECTION 06 82 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) grating, stair treads, hold down attachments and supports. B. FRP grating and stair treads shall be molded type grating unless noted otherwise. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The references listed below are a part of this section. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes ASTM D635 Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position ASTM E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems IBC International Building Code with City of Seattle Amendments
1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. 2. A copy of this specification section with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. 3. Check-marks (✓) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. Deviations shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Include a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. 4. Grating: Show dimensions, weight, size, and location of connections to adjacent grating, supports, and other work.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED GRATINGS SECTION 06 82 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
5. Grating Supports: Show dimensions, weight, size, location, embedment, and anchorage to supporting structure. 6. Sample: Each type of grating. 7. Product data information and catalog cuts showing materials and allowable loads, spans, and deflections; include manufacturer’s specifications. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Items to be provided under this section shall be furnished only by manufacturers having a minimum of 10 years experience in the design and manufacture of fiberglass reinforced grating. B. Certifications 1. Manufacturer shall be certified to the ISO 9001 standard. 2. Manufacturer shall provide proof of certification from at least two other quality assurance programs for its facilities or products (DNV, ABS, USCG, and AARR).
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Candidate manufacturers are listed below. The manufacturer’s standard product may require modification to conform to specified requirements. 1. American Grating, LLC 2. Fibergrate Composite Structures Inc. 3. Seasafe, Inc. 4. Strongwell Corp. 5. Approved Equal 2.02 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design FRP grating and stair treads in accordance with the following: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, design live loads for FRP grating shall 100 psf minimum. 2. Maximum deflection shall be the quotient of the grating span divided by 180 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. 3. Stair treads shall be designed for 100 psf uniform load or concentrated load of 300 pounds on area of 4 square inches located in center of tread, whichever produces greater stress. 4. The minimum thickness of FRP grating shall be 1 1/2 inches. 5. Grating sheet sizes shall be compatible with the support spans shown on the Drawings and shall require a minimum of field cutting.Provide FRP edge banding around openings or handholes in grating to prevent injury from stub bars.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED GRATINGS SECTION 06 82 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
6. Corrosion Resistance: a. Exterior surfaces of grating shall have a synthetic surfacing veil. b. FRP grating shall be suitable for continuous service under the following conditions:
Concentration by Maximum Weight Temperature Service (percent) (degrees F) Chlorine gas1 20 100 Chlorine solution Saturated 100 Ferrous chloride 30 Hydrogen sulfide1 5 100 Hypochlorite solution 5 100 Hypochlorous acid 5 100 Potassium permanganate 10 100 Sodium hydroxide 25 100 Sodium hypochlorite 15 Sulfuric acid 15 100 Note: 1. Wet or dry 2.03 MATERIALS A. Molded Type Grating: 1. Open-molded fiberglass grating made in one piece by interweaving continuous, thoroughly wetted, glass strand with vinyl ester resin with UV inhibitor additives. Polyester resin shall not be used. 2. Square mesh, 1 1/2 inch maximum spacing for 1 1/2 inch thick grating; 2 inch maximum spacing for 2 inch thick grating. 3. Stair treads shall be minimum 1 1/2 inch by 6 inch grid, with anti-slip grit top and integral abrasive bull nosing. 4. Cut ends, holes and abrasions of FRP shapes shall be sealed with resin to prevent moisture wicking. 5. Load bars in both directions with equal stiffness. 6. Meet self-extinguishing requirements of ASTM D635. 7. Fire Rating: Flame spread of 25 or less as measured by ASTM E84. 8. Skid-Resistant Surface: Grit adhesively bonded, manufacturer’s standard. B. FRP Embedment Angles: Fiberglass reinforced plastic with slate-gray, vinyl ester, fire- retardant resin. Size FRP embed angle as required for the thickness of grating. C. Hold Down Clips: ASTM A276 Type 316 stainless steel. D. Bolts and Connectors: Corrosion resistant FRP or ASTM F593 Type 316 stainless steel. Size and strength to meet IBC requirements.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED GRATINGS SECTION 06 82 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
2.04 ASSEMBLY/FABRICATION A. Measurements: Grating supplied shall meet the dimensional requirements and tolerances as shown or specified. Provide and/or verify measurements in field for work fabricated to fit field conditions as required by grating manufacturer. When field dimensions are not required, determine correct size and locations of required holes or cutouts from field dimensions before grating fabrication. B. Layout: Each grating section shall be readily removable (no single piece shall weigh more than 80 pounds), except where indicated on the Drawings. Manufacturer to provide openings and holes where located on the Drawings. Grating openings that fit around protrusions (pipes, cables, machinery, etc.) shall be discontinuous at approximately the centerline of opening so that each section of grating is readily removable. C. Sealing: Shop fabricated grating cuts shall be coated with vinyl ester resin to provide maximum corrosion resistance. Field fabricated grating cuts shall be coated similarly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. D. Hardware: Hold down clips shall be provided and spaced at maximum of four feet apart with a minimum of four per piece of grating, or as recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and accept existing conditions before beginning work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide FRP grating with hold-down attachments, end panel attachments, and appurtenances to make the work complete and operable. B. Provide adequate quantities of resin sealing kits comprised of pre-measured quantities of thixotropic resin and catalyst, mixing containers, chip brushes, and stirring sticks. C. Seal field cut holes, edges, and abrasions. D. Install plumb or level, rigid and neat, as applicable. E. Install each grating section such that it is easily removable. F. Install each grating section in accordance with manufacturer’s assembly drawings. G. Follow manufacturer's instructions when cutting or drilling fiberglass products or using resin products; provide adequate ventilation. H. Clearance (Grating to Vertical Surfaces): 1/4 inch (±1/8 inch tolerance).
END OF SECTION 06 82 13
DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING SECTION 07 10 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section includes: Dampproofing and waterproofing coatings and membranes for concrete surfaces. Plastic Lining is not covered by this specification. Also see Section 09 90 00 for other concrete coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The references listed below are a part of this section. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ASTM C109 Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. Cube Specimens) ASTM C321 Bond Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars ASTM C348 Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement Mortar COE CRD-C48 Handbook for Concrete and Cement Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. SM – Coating or Membrane System Manufacturer B. TR – Coating or Membrane System Manufacturer’s Technical Representative 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. Action Submittals: 1. A copy of this specification section with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. 2. Check-marks (✓) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. Deviations shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Include a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. 3. Coating or Membrane System Manufacturer’s (SM) current printed recommendations and product data sheets for coating systems including: a. Volatile organic compound (VOC) data. b. Surface preparation recommendations. DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING SECTION 07 10 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
c. Primer type, where required. d. Maximum dry and wet-mil thickness per coat. e. Minimum and maximum curing time between coats, including atmospheric conditions for each. f. Curing time before submergence in liquid. g. Thinner to be used with each coating. h. Ventilation requirements. i. Minimum atmospheric conditions during which the coating shall be applied. j. Allowable application methods. k. Maximum allowable moisture content. l. Maximum shelf life. 4. SM’s current printed recommendations and product data sheets for membrane systems including: a. VOC data. b. Surface preparation recommendations. c. Primer type, coverage rate and drying time. d. Maximum shelf life of primer. e. Ventilation requirements. f. Corner, joint and wall penetration detail requirements. g. Minimum atmospheric conditions during which the membrane shall be applied. h. Allowable application methods. i. Protection board. j. Backfill procedure recommendations including termination bar if required. 5. Affidavits signed and sealed by an officer of the SM’s corporation, attesting to full compliance of each coating or membrane system component with current and promulgated federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations and requirements. 6. SM's detailed, written instructions for coating or membrane system treatment and graphic details for coating or membrane system terminations in the structures to be coated including pipe penetrations, metal embedments, gate frames, and other terminations to be determined from the contract drawings. This information shall also include detail treatment for coating or membrane system at joints in concrete. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for materials to be delivered to the job site, including coating system materials, solvents, and abrasive blast media. 2. List of cleaning and thinner solutions allowed by the SMs. DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING SECTION 07 10 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
3. Storage and handling requirements including temperature, humidity and ventilation for coating or membrane system materials as recommended by the SMs. 4. The Contractor and SM shall provide a minimum of five project references each including contact name, address, and telephone number where similar coating work has been performed by their companies in the past five years. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. Materials in each coating or membrane system shall be the products of a single SM. B. Quality Control: 1. The Contractor is responsible for the workmanship and quality of the coating or membrane system installation. Inspections by the Engineer or the Coating or Membrane System Manufacturer’s Technical Representative (TR) will not relieve or limit the Contractor’s responsibilities. 2. Installation methods shall conform to requirements of this specification. Changes in the coating or membrane system installation requirements will be allowed only with the written acceptance of the Engineer before work commences. 3. Only personnel who are trained by the TR specifically for this contract or who are approved by the SM specifically for this contract shall be allowed to perform the coating or membrane system installation specified in this Section. 4. For repairs, provide the same products, or products recommended by the SM, as used for the original coating or membrane. 5. Identify the points of access for inspection by SPU or the Engineer. Provide ventilation, ingress and egress, and other means necessary for the Engineer’s personnel to safely access the work areas. 6. Conduct and inspect the work so that the coating or membrane system is installed as specified. Coating or membrane system work that does not conform to the specifications shall be corrected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. Dampproofing Coating: 1. W.R. Meadows, Sealtight Sealmastic Emulsion. 2. ChemMasters, MasterGard 400. 3. Euclid Chemical Company, Dehydratine 75. B. Epoxy Waterproofing Coating: See Specification 09 90 00. C. Waterproofing Sheet Membrane: 1. Grace Construction Products: Bituthene 3000, except for walls against exist concrete or below base slab use Preprufe 300R. 2. W.R. Meadows: Sealtight MEL-ROL, except below base slab use Precon. DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING SECTION 07 10 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
2.02 MATERIALS A. Dampproofing Coating: 1. Cold applied, asphalt emulsion. B. Epoxy Waterproofing Coating: 1. Polyamidoamine epoxy resin C. Waterproofing Sheet Membrane: 1. Modified bituminous, self-adhering, cold-applied sheet membrane system consisting of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to polyethylene-film reinforcement with release liner on the adhesive side. 2. Products from the same manufacturer must be used for both vertical and horizontal surfaces. Sealed interface of vertical to horizontal membranes must be per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Protection board shall be 1/2- inch asphalt impregnated Celotex insulation board.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine and accept existing conditions before beginning work. 3.02 DAMPPROOFING COATING A. Location: 1. Apply to the earth side of cast in place concrete (and precast concrete where noted below) walls and/or elevated slabs which are below grade. 2. Do not apply to walls that are to be provided with waterproofing sheet membrane with protection board or to walls that are placed directly against an excavated surface. 3. Dampproofing shall not be a substitute for waterproofing coatings or membranes at concrete walls common with rooms or galleries to be occupied by equipment, piping or personnel. B. Surface Preparation: 1. New concrete to be dampproofed shall have cured at least 28 days. Remove loose concrete and laitance from new concrete surfaces by abrasive blasting. Repair voids and cracks as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. Pre-dampen the surface to be covered as recommended by the product manufacturer. C. Application: 1. Apply one or more coats at the manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness for optimum performance. Surfaces to be coated must be kept damp during the application procedure. Drying time between coats shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer. DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING SECTION 07 10 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
3.03 WATERPROOFING SHEET MEMBRANE A. Location: 1. Apply below base slab, to earth side of walls up to grade, and to buried elevated slabs at walls and slabs of rooms or galleries to be occupied by equipment, piping or personnel, where indicated on the Drawings. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Concrete surface shall be clean, dry and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate, sharp protrusions, and with no coarse aggregate visible. C. Application: 1. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Pipes or conduits that enter structure shall be made watertight. Where the membrane is turned up from the base of the walls, at angles in walls, or at any other place where the membrane may be subjected to unusual strain, apply strips consisting of two additional plies of membrane or as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer’s representative shall be present during initial application to certify that installation procedures comply with manufacturer’s requirements.
END OF SECTION 07 10 00 THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 07 31 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Rigid board insulation for interior metal furred walls. 2. Rigid board insulation for roof decks. 3. Rigid board insulation for below grade, where shown on drawings. 4. Batt Insulation for Ceilings. B. Related Sections: The work of the following sections is related to the work of this Section. Other sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 00 72 00 2. Section 01 22 10 3. Section 01 33 10 4. Section 06 10 00 5. Section 07 61 13 6. Section 09 21 16 1.02 REFERENCES A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and the listed documents, the requirements of the Contract Specifications shall prevail.
Reference Title ASTM C 518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. ASTM C 578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. ASTM C 665 Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2008. ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 07 31 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Installer and manufacturer qualifications. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of proposed product for minimum 5 years with satisfactory performance record. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer approved installer of products similar to specified products on minimum five projects of similar scope as Project with satisfactory performance record. 2. Committed to complying with manufacturer's specifications and NRCA recommendations. 3. Committed to assuming undivided responsibility for roof insulation, metal roofing and sheet metal flashing and trim associated with roofing. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Store roof system materials on pallets or dunnage at least 4 inches above ground and suitably covered to protect from weather. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Rigid Board Insulation for Metal Furred Walls: 1. Extruded polystyrene insulation. 2. R-Value: Minimum of R-5 per inch thickness in accordance with ASTM C 518. B. Rigid Board Insulation for Roof Decks: 1. Extruded polystyrene insulation. 2. R-value: Minimum of R-5 per inch thickness in accordance with ASTM C 518. THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 07 31 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
3. Compressive Strength: Minimum of sixty (60) pounds per square inch, Type VII in accordance with ASTM C 578. C. Rigid Board Insulation for Below Grade, where shown on drawings: 1. Extruded polystyrene insulation. 2. R-value: Minimum of R-5 per inch thickness in accordance with ASTM C 518. 3. Compressive Strength: Minimum of twenty-five (25) pounds per square inch, Type IV, in accordance with ASTM D1621. D. Batt Insulation for Ceilings: 1. Kraft-Faced fiberglass insulation. 2. R-value: R-30 achieve with a maximum thickness of 8.25 inches. 2.02 BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Board Size: as required to fit between studs and furring. 4. Board Thickness: As indicated on the drawings. 5. Board Edges: Square. 6. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F (-3.9 degrees C): 0.18 (0.31). 7. Compressive Resistance: 25 psi (173 kPa). 8. Board Density: 1.3 lb/cu ft (21 kg/cu m). 9. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume. 10. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com. b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. c. Pactiv Building Products: www.pactiv.com/green-guard. d. Substitutions: See Section 00 72 00, General Conditions. 2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIAL A. Kraft-faced thermal and acoustical fiberglass insulation. 1. Formaldehyde-free. 2. ASTM C 665, Type II, Class C, Category 1. 3. ASTM E 96 Permeability: Kraft – 1.0 perms. THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 07 31 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
B. Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville: www.jm.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 00 72 00 General Conditions. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch (50 mm) wide. B. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. C. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. D. Screw Fastener System for Steel Decks: 1. Self-drilling and self-tapping, zinc plated or stainless steel screws, sized for 1/2- to 3/4-inch exposure on exposed to view underside of deck, with minimum 3-inch square or diameter ribbed steel stress plates, hot-dip galvanized with minimum G-60 coating in accordance with ASTM A 123. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Tru Fast, Bryan, OH. b. TW Buildex, Itasca, IL
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FURRED WALLS A. Install boards to fit snugly between metal “C” furring. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE A. On vertical footing and foundation wall surfaces, set insulation units loosely laid according to manufacturer’s written instructions. B. On horizontal surfaces under slabs, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. C. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted. THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 07 31 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
D. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. E. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing slab. 3.04 INSTALLATION OVER STEEL DECK A. Install roof insulation in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. B. Secure wood nailers to roof deck adjoining eaves for attachment of flashing and counter- flashing, and at other locations indicated on the Drawings. C. Apply roof insulation with long joints continuous, either parallel or at right angles to ribs of deck. D. Form joints parallel to ribs over solid bearing. E. Stagger end joints. F. Secure with approved mechanical fasteners. 1. Space fasteners as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2. Drive fasteners through tin caps or plastic fastener/cap assemblies, unless they are provided with integral flat cap not less than 1 inch across. 3. Install screw fastener system in top rib of steel deck in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Where underside of metal deck is exposed to view, size fasteners to penetrate deck from 1/2 to 3/4 inch, unless otherwise recommended by fastener manufacturer. 3.05 BATT INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Installation of insulation for framed construction: 1. Apply insulation units to substrates complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: a. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. b. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. B. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. 2. Set units with facing placed on the warm side of the room. THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 07 31 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
END OF SECTION 07 31 10 THERMOPLASTIC POLYFIN ROOFING SECTION 07 54 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Mechanically Fastened TPO elastomeric sheet roofing system: 2. Elastomeric membrane roofing. 3. Cover board. 4. Roof Vapor Barrier 5. Other roofing-related items specified or indicated on the drawings or otherwise necessary to provide a complete weatherproof roofing system. B. Related Sections: The work of the following sections is related to the work of this Section. Other sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 07 31 00. 2. Section 07 60 00. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and the listed documents, the requirements of the Contract Specifications shall prevail. 1. Reference a. ASTM C 1177/C 1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2004. b. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a. c. ASTM E119-Fire-Resistance-Rated Roof Assemblies. d. ASTM D 6878 e. ASTM E 548 f. ASTM E119 g. ASTM G155 h. ASTM D751 i. ASTM E 108 2. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. 3. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. THERMOPLASTIC POLYFIN ROOFING SECTION 07 54 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. 1. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Installer and manufacturer qualifications. 1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA A. General: Installed roofing membrane system shall remain watertight; and resist specified wind uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing system Manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Provide membrane Manufacturer's printed data sufficient to show that all components of roofing system, including insulation and fasteners, comply with the specified requirements and with the membrane Manufacturer's requirements and recommendations for the system type specified; include data for each product used in conjunction with roofing membrane. 2. Where UL requirements are specified, provide documentation that shows that the roofing system to be installed is UL-Classified, as applicable; include data itemizing the components of the classified or approved system. 3. Installation Instructions: Provide Manufacturer's instructions to installer, marked up to show exactly how all components will be installed; where instructions allow installation options, clearly indicate which option will be used. B. Shop Drawings: 1. The roof membrane Manufacturer's standard details customized for this project for all relevant conditions, including: a. Base flashings, cants and membrane terminations, b. Tapered insulation, including slopes. c. Crickets, saddles and tapered edges strips, including slopes. d. Expansion joints, penetrations, and drains. e. Fastening patterns C. Written copies of notations to show that Manufacturer's required pre-installation preparations and procedures, where Manufacturer requires documentation from installer or other related trades, have been accepted and approved by the Manufacturer. D. Executed Warranty. THERMOPLASTIC POLYFIN ROOFING SECTION 07 54 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
E. Specimen Warranty: Submit prior to starting work. F. Samples: Submit samples of each product to be used. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of proposed product for minimum 5 years with satisfactory performance record. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer approved installer of products similar to specified products on minimum five projects of similar type. C. Installer Certificate: Signed by roofing system Manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by Manufacturer to install roofing system. D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing Manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in “Performance Requirements" and “Guarantees” Article. E. Provide evidence of meeting performance requirements and intent to guarantee. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. G. Test Reports: 1. Roof drain and leader test or submit plumber’s verification. 2. Roof deck fastener pullout test. H. Source Limitations: Obtain all components from the single source roofing Manufacturer guaranteeing the roofing system. All products used in the system must be labeled by the single source roofing Manufacturer issuing the guarantee. I. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class B; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part. J. Preconstruction Conference: A pre-roofing conference will be held at least one week prior to initiation of roofing work. Manufacturer representative, foreman for roofing contractor, estimator for roofing contractor, architect, owner representative, sheet metal contractor, general contractor and other required parties should be present to discuss the execution of the work.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYFIN ROOFING SECTION 07 54 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in Manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and labels intact and legible. B. Store materials clear of ground and moisture with weather protective covering. C. Keep combustible materials away from ignition sources. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide Manufacturer's system warranty as follows: 1. Single-Source special guarantee includes roofing membrane, flashings, roofing membrane accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, cover board, substrate board, vapor retarder, walkway products, Manufacturer’s edge metal products, and other single-source components of roofing system marketed by the Manufacturer. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Installer’s Guarantee: Submit roofing Installer's guarantee, including all components of roofing system for the following guarantee period: 1. Warranty Period: Two Years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Verify field conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section prior to beginning work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Firestone: http://firestonebpco.com B. John Manville: www.jm.com C. Carlisle: www.carlislesyntec.com 2.02 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING (TPO) MEMBRANE A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Sheet: ASTM D 6878, uniform, flexible sheet formed from a thermoplastic polyolefin, internally fabric or scrim reinforced. 1. Thickness : 45 mils, minimum, or greater as required for warranty. 2. Membrane Attachment: Mechanically attached. 3. Accelerated Weathering: Minimum of 24,000 hours without cracking or crazing as tested using ASTM G155. 4. Tensile Strength: Minimum of 300 lbs as tested using ASTM D751 5. Tearing Strength: Minimum of 85 lbs as tested using ASTM D751 THERMOPLASTIC POLYFIN ROOFING SECTION 07 54 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
2.03 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. Firestone ‘UltraPly TPO’ B. Johns Manville ‘JM TPO’ C. Carlisle ‘Sure-Weld TPO’ 2.04 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS & COMPONENTS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system Manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as sheet membrane. C. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate foam board insulation, non-composite. See “Section 07 31 00 Thermal Insulation.” 1. Attachment: Mechanical through fastening. D. Cover Board: High Density Polyisocyanurate Cover Board: 1. Thickness: As recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Attachment: Mechanical through fastening. E. Roof Vapor Barrier as recommended by selected roofing Manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing system. F. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application. G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, with anchors. H. Coping System: Manufacturer’s factory fabricated coping consisting of a base piece and a snap-on cap. Provide product manufactured and marketed by single-source membrane supplier that is included in the system warranty. I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. J. Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet is specified in “Section 07 60 00 Metal Flashing.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL A. Install roofing, insulation, flashings, and accessories in accordance with roofing Manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations for the specified roofing system. Where Manufacturer provides no instructions or recommendations, follow good roofing practices and industry standards. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. THERMOPLASTIC POLYFIN ROOFING SECTION 07 54 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
B. Obtain all relevant instructions and maintain copies at project site for duration of installation period. C. Do not start work until Pre-Installation Notice has been submitted to Manufacturer as notification that this project requires a Manufacturer's Warranty. D. Perform work using competent and properly equipped personnel. E. Temporary closures, which ensure that moisture does not damage any completed section of the new roofing system, are the responsibility of the applicator. Installation of flashings, terminations, and temporary closures shall be completed as required to provide a watertight condition. F. Install roofing membrane only when surfaces are clean, dry, smooth and free of snow or ice; do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when ambient conditions will not allow proper application; consult Manufacturer for recommended procedures during cold weather. Do not work with sealants and adhesives when material temperature is outside the range of 60 to 80 degrees F. G. Protect adjacent construction, property, vehicles, and persons from damage related to roofing work; repair or restore damage caused by roofing work. 1. Protect from spills and overspray from adhesives, sealants and coatings. 2. Particularly protect metal, glass, plastic, and painted surfaces from adhesives, and sealants within the range of wind-borne overspray. 3. Protect finished areas of the roofing system from roofing related work traffic and traffic by other trades. H. Until ready for use, keep materials in their original containers as labeled by the Manufacturer. I. Consult membrane Manufacturer's instructions, container labels, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for specific safety instructions. Keep all adhesives, sealants, primers and cleaning materials away from all sources of ignition. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine roof deck to determine that it is sufficiently rigid to support installers and their mechanical equipment and that deflection will not strain or rupture roof components or deform deck. B. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. Correct defects in the substrate before commencing with roofing work. C. Examine roof substrate to verify that it is properly sloped to drains. D. Verify that the specifications and drawing details are workable and not in conflict with the roofing Manufacturer's recommendations and instructions; start of work constitutes acceptable of project conditions and requirements. THERMOPLASTIC POLYFIN ROOFING SECTION 07 54 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
3.03 PREPARATION A. Take appropriate measures to ensure that fumes from adhesive solvents are not drawn into the building through air intakes. B. Prior to proceeding, prepare roof surface so that it is clean, dry, and smooth, and free of sharp edges, fins, roughened surfaces, loose or foreign materials, oil, grease and other materials that may damage the membrane. C. Fill all surface voids in the immediate substrate that are greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide with fill material acceptable insulation to membrane Manufacturer. D. Seal, grout, or tape deck joints, where needed, to prevent seepage into building. 3.04 ROOF VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Verify substrate is suitable for Manufacturer’s recommended vapor barrier product. B. If deck/deck cover substrates requires priming per Manufacturer’s recommendations prior to application, then use only primer supplied by membrane Manufacturer. C. Application shall follow Manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not apply at ambient temperatures above or below Manufacturer’s stated range of acceptable temperature. 3.05 INSULATION AND COVER BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install as recommended by roofing Manufacturer. B. Install only as much insulation as can be covered with the completed roofing system before the end of the day's work or before the onset of inclement weather. C. Lay roof insulation in courses parallel to roof edges. D. Neatly and tightly fit insulation to all penetrations, projections, and nailers, with gaps not greater than 1/4 inch. Fill gaps greater than 1/4 inch with acceptable insulation. Do not leave the roofing membrane unsupported over a space greater than 1/4 inch. E. Mechanical Fastening: Using specified fasteners and insulation plates engage fasteners through insulation into deck to depth and in pattern required by membrane Manufacturer. 3.06 SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Beginning at low point of roof, place membrane without stretching over substrate and allow to relax at least 30 minutes before attachment or splicing; in colder weather allow for longer relax time. B. Lay out the membrane pieces so that field and flashing splices are installed to shed water. C. Install membrane without wrinkles and without gaps or fishmouths in seams; bond and test seams and laps in accordance with membrane Manufacturer's instructions and details. D. Install membrane mechanically attached to the substrate using fasteners and edge securement as specified and as required by membrane Manufacturers. THERMOPLASTIC POLYFIN ROOFING SECTION 07 54 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
E. Mechanical Attachment: Install fasteners in the seams, covered by membrane. 1. Lay out fasteners as recommended by membrane Manufacturer, and as indicated, whichever is most stringent. 2. Properly engage fasteners in the deck with head flush with the countersunk portion of seam plate. F. Edge Securement: Secure membrane at all locations where membrane terminates or goes through an angle change greater than 2 in 12 inches (1:6 ) using mechanically fastened reinforced perimeter fastening strips, plates, or metal edging as indicated or as recommended by roofing Manufacturer. 1. Exceptions: Round pipe penetrations less than 18 inches in diameter and square penetrations less than 4 inches square. 3.07 FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Install flashings, including laps, splices, joints, bonding, adhesion, and attachment, as required by membrane Manufacturer's recommendations and details. B. Metal Accessories: Install metal edgings and copings in locations indicated on the drawings, with horizontal leg of edge member over membrane and flashing over metal onto membrane. 1. Follow roofing Manufacturer's instructions. 2. Remove protective plastic surface film immediately before installation. 3. Install water block sealant under the membrane anchorage leg. 4. Flash with Manufacturer's recommended flashing sheet unless otherwise indicated. 5. Where single application of flashing will not completely cover the metal flange, install additional piece of flashing to cover the metal edge. C. Scuppers: Set in sealant and secure to structure; flash as recommended by Manufacturer. D. Flashing at Walls, Curbs, and Other Vertical and Sloped Surfaces: Install weathertight flashing at all walls, curbs, parapets, curbs, skylights, and other vertical and sloped surfaces that the roofing membrane abuts to; extend flashing at least 8 inches high above membrane surface. 1. Use the longest practical flashing pieces. 2. Evaluate the substrate and overlay and adjust installation procedure in accordance with membrane Manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Complete the splice between flashing and the main roof sheet with specified splice adhesive before adhering flashing to the vertical surface. 4. Provide termination directly to the vertical substrate as shown on roof drawings. THERMOPLASTIC POLYFIN ROOFING SECTION 07 54 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 9
E. Roof Drains: 1. Taper insulation around drain to provide smooth transition from roof surface to drain. Use specified pre-manufactured tapered insulation with facer or suitable bonding surface to achieve slope; slope not to exceed Manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Position membrane, then cut a hole for roof drain to allow 1/2 to 3/4 inch of membrane to extend inside clamping ring past drain bolts. 3. Make round holes in membrane to align with clamping bolts; do not cut membrane back to bolt holes. 4. Apply sealant on top of drain bowl where clamping ring seats below the membrane 5. Install roof drain clamping ring and clamping bolts; tighten clamping bolts to achieve constant compression.
F. Flashing at Penetrations: Flash all penetrations passing through the membrane; make flashing seals directly to the penetration. 1. Pipes, Round Supports, and Similar Items: Flash with specified pre-molded pipe flashings wherever practical; otherwise use specified self-curing elastomeric flashing. 2. Pipe Clusters and Unusual Shaped Penetrations: Provide penetration pocket at least 2 inches deep, with at least 1 inch clearance from penetration, sloped to shed water. 3. Structural Steel Tubing: If corner radii are greater than 1/4 inch and longest side of tube does not exceed 12 inches, flash as for pipes; otherwise, provide a standard curb with flashing. 4. Flexible and Moving Penetrations: Provide weathertight gooseneck set in sealant and secured to deck, flashed as recommended by Manufacturer. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection by Manufacturer: Provide final inspection of the roofing system by a Technical Representative employed by roofing system Manufacturer specifically to inspect installation for warranty purposes. B. Perform all corrections necessary for issuance of warranty. 3.09 CLEANING A. Clean all contaminants generated by roofing work from building and surrounding areas, including adhesives, sealants and coatings. B. Repair or replace building components and finished surfaces damaged or defaced due to the work of this section; comply with recommendations of Manufacturers of components and surfaces. C. Remove leftover materials, trash, debris, equipment from project site and surrounding areas. THERMOPLASTIC POLYFIN ROOFING SECTION 07 54 23 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 10
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, provide durable protection and replace or repair damaged roofing to original condition.
END OF SECTION 07 54 23 METAL FLASHING TRIM AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 07 60 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Section includes the following: a. Flashing and Trim. b. Gutters and Downspouts. c. Metal Roofing Panels B. Related Sections: The work of the following sections is related to the work of this Section. Other sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 07 31 00. 2. Section 07 92 00. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and the listed documents, the requirements of the Contract Specifications shall prevail. 1. ASTM A 653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Approval Submittals: 1. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s product data for products specified in this Section including product characteristics, performance, certified test results, product limitations and other information necessary to establish conformance with the requirements of this Section for approval by the project Architect. 2. Manufacturer’s Instructions. a. Shop Drawings: 1) Show complete details of construction and installation, including materials, gauges, dimensions, fastenings, finishes, hardware and connections. 2) Elevation drawings showing placement of materials in relation to the surrounding Work. 3) Provide profile drawings for each item. 4) Indicate gauge of metal, and coating that is applied to the metal to match adjacent materials. METAL FLASHING TRIM AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 07 60 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
5) Indicate proposed fasteners. 6) Show expansion and contraction features. 7) Show attachments, clips, fasteners and other items for gutter applications. 8) Show welds where they occur. 3. Samples: a. Metal: Quantity (3) 12” square sample of flashing metal illustrating specified material, gauge, finish and color. b. Samples of accessory items and fasteners. 4. Quality Assurance Submittals: a. Statement of Manufacturer’s Qualifications. b. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative Contact Information. c. Statement of Installer Qualifications. d. Manufacturer’s statement approving the proposed Installer to perform the Work of this Section. 5. Closeout Submittals: a. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Content: 1) Maintenance and cleaning information. 2) Warranty: Provide two executed copies of the Warranty required by this Section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the requirements of this Section: B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1. Have at least ten years of experience in the manufacture of the products specified in this Section. 2. Assign a Manufacturer’s Technical Representative to the Project. 3. Make the Manufacturer’s Technical Representative available to the Owner to provide technical assistance in the form of written directions supplementary to the Manufacturer’s Instructions. C. Installer Qualifications: 1. Have a minimum of five years of experience in the installation of products specified in this Section, and have a record of successful in-service performance. 2. Able to show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope and type. 3. Approved in writing by the Manufacturer. METAL FLASHING TRIM AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 07 60 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
D. Source Limitation: 1. Each product or system specified in this Section shall be from a single Manufacturer. 2. Accessories, materials and components associated with each product specified in this Section shall be provided by the Manufacturer of that product unless: a. Noted otherwise in this Section, or: b. Approved in writing by the Manufacturer of the product. E. Pre-Installation Conference: Convene a Pre-Installation Conference prior to beginning the Work of this Section: 1. The conference shall be attended by at least the following: a. The Contractor. b. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative. c. Flashing, sheet metal and trim Installer. d. Standing-seam metal roofing installer. e. Metal siding panel installer. f. Mechanical and electrical subcontractors. g. Owner. 2. Agenda shall include a review of at least the following: a. Reviewed submittals. b. Scheduling and sequencing. c. Coordination with the Work of other trades. d. Protection and cleaning.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products specified in this Section in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Instructions and the requirements of this Section: 1. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer’s original, unopened protective packaging. 2. Storage: a. Store in original protective packaging until time of installation. b. Provide protection from exposure to harmful weather conditions and damage. 3. Handling: Handle materials in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Instructions. METAL FLASHING TRIM AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 07 60 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty against listed below, and agreeing to repair or replace components that fail during the warranty period. 1. Warranty period for Work of this Section commencing on the date of Substantial Completion is as follows: a. Materials and Workmanship Warranty: Warrant that the materials and accessories furnished in this Section shall remain free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Finish Warranty: Warrant that the fluoropolymer coating system shall remain free from crazing, yellowing, cracking, peeling, fading, and loss of luster for a period of twenty years commencing on the date of Substantial Completion. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Verify field conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section prior to beginning work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FLASHING AND TRIM A. General: 1. Provide special metal shapes and closures for systems including items not identified in other Sections. 2. Provide metal drips, heads, window flashings, door flashings, trim and related items. 3. Provide weep holes or other positive means of drainage at all flashing locations where moisture or liquid water can collect behind flashing components, even if such drainage means are not explicitly indicated on the Drawings. B. Performance Requirements: 1. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. 2. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 3. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F ambient; 180 degrees F material surfaces. METAL FLASHING TRIM AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 07 60 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
C. Galvanized Sheet Metal Characteristics: 1. Provide Prime Commercial Quality Sheet, ASTM A 653, G-90 coating at rate of one and twenty-five hundredth (1.25) ounces per square foot. 2. Provide minimum twenty-four (24) gauge, except: 3. Provide twenty-two (22) gauge for self-supporting items. 4. Use twenty (20) gauge minimum for clips and other attachment and connection devices. 5. Shop pre-coat with fluoropolymer coating system except where concealed. D. Stainless Steel Flashing: 1. Provide stainless steel flashing at all locations: a. Below grade in interior and exterior applications. b. Within 12” of finished grade, including the base of exterior walls and posts bases. c. At all locations where flashing is in contact with concrete surfaces. d. In Ipe wood board soffit. 2. Stainless steel: Type 304, 24 gauge. E. Flashing Accessories 1. Fasteners: a. High dome neoprene gasketed. b. Prefinished hex head screws with washers. F. Bituminous Coating: Provide bituminous coating for isolation of dissimilar metals. 2.02 METAL ROOFING PANELS A. Base Metal: 1. Material: Steel conforming to ASTM A792 minimum yield 50,000 psi. a. Thickness: 24 gauge b. Protective Coatings: Conform to ASTM A792, AZ50 (Zincalume®/Galvalume®). c. Exterior Finish: DuraTech® 5000 (Polyvinylidine Fluoride), full 70% Kynar® 500/Hylar 5000® consisting of a baked-on 0.15-0.20 mil corrosion resistant primer and a baked-on 0.70-0.80 mil finish coat with a specular gloss of 10-30% when tested in accordance with ASTM D-523 at 60°. 2. Panel Exterior Color: Match wall. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Conform to standards and recommended practices set forth in the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. METAL FLASHING TRIM AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 07 60 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
B. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, and in conformance with the requirements of the Drawings and this Section. C. Fabricate continuous cleats, and starter strips from one (1) gauge heavier than the sheet metal material. D. Provide interlocking joints. E. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. F. Form exposed sheet metal without excessive oil canning, buckling and tool marks. G. Space movement joints at maximum spacing of ten (10) feet with no joints within twenty- four inches of intersections and corners. H. Precoat materials as indicated. 2.04 FINISHES A. Provide fluoropolymer coating system in exposed areas. B. Provide G-90 galvanized coating in accordance with ASTM A 653 in concealed areas. C. Colors: Obtain approval of colors from the Architect prior to beginning fabrication. D. Match the adjacent wall panel finishes and colors to the extent possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions are satisfactory to receive the Work of this Section. B. Do not commence work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Resolve deficiencies in accordance with Manufacturer’s Instructions and this Section. D. Beginning of Work constitutes acceptance of conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces from damage prior to beginning work of this Section. B. Field Measurements: Take detailed measurements of actual conditions in the field before fabricating or installing the Work of this Section. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install sheet metal flashing trim, reglets and other items consistent with the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. B. Securely attach all items using the indicated fasteners on the approved Shop Drawings. C. Fasteners not indicated on the reviewed Shop Drawings will not be accepted.
METAL FLASHING TRIM AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 07 60 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: 1. Comply with Manufacturer’s Instructions, including technical bulletins and product catalog data. 2. Retain Manufacturer’s Instructions at the Project Site. E. Reinforce items as required for stiffness. F. Lap materials at least three inches. G. Protect dissimilar metals with electrolytic protection. H. Comply with Manufacturer’s Instructions for positive anchorage to structure. I. Comply with Manufacturer’s Instructions for positive draining, and weather-tightness of joints and panel assemblies. J. Provide waterproof escutcheons for locations where pipe and conduit penetrate the metal roof and wall panels. K. Fastening Tools: L. Install screws using power tools that have adjustable controllable torque settings. M. Field Cutting and Fitting: 1. Field cutting is not permitted unless performed with equipment specifically approved by the manufacturer. a. Torch cutting of sheet metal, including burning holes is not permitted. 3.04 REPAIR AND RESTORATION A. Touch-up or repair minor damage to components in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Instructions. B. Replace components that cannot be returned to as-new condition by means of minor touch-up or repair methods approved the Manufacturer. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove foreign materials including dust and dirt, and excess adhesive using materials and methods in accordance with Manufacturer’s Instructions. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coverings. C. Remove cuttings immediately to prevent staining finishes. D. Wipe down areas after assembly is complete. METAL FLASHING TRIM AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 07 60 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect work of this Section from damage and deterioration until completion and acceptance by Owner. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage resulting from work of this Section. C. Remove excess screws and fasteners on a regular basis to prevent damage to the installed panels and other work.
END OF SECTION 07 60 00 JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 07 92 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies joint sealants for general construction. B. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title FEDSPEC TT-S-00230C Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component FEDSPEC TT-S-00227E Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10 B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's product data showing conformance to the specified products. 2. Manufacturer's recommendations for storage, handling and application of sealants and primers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 POLYURETHANE SEALANT A. Acceptable products: Acceptable products shall be Sikaflex by Sika Chemical Corporation, Vulkem by Mameco International, U-Seal Joint Sealant by Burke Company, or Rubber Calk by Products Research and Chemical Corporation. JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 07 92 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
B. General: Polyurethane sealants shall conform to FEDSPEC TT-S-0230C for one- component systems and FEDSPEC TT-S-00227E for two-component systems. Polyurethane sealant shall be one of the following two types. 1. Self-leveling: Self-leveling polyurethane sealant shall be Type I, Class A as specified by the FEDSPECs referenced above. 2. Non-sag: Non-sag polyurethane sealant shall be Type II, Class A as specified by the FEDSPECs referenced above. C. Primer: Primer shall be as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. D. Backer rod or backer tape: Backer rod shall be open cell polyethylene or polyurethane foam. Rod shall be cylindrical unless otherwise specified. Backer tape shall be polyethylene or polyurethane with adhesive on one side.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL A. Sealants and primers shall be applied according to the sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Polyurethane sealants shall be used on all expansion joints and specified construction joints. B. Joints and spaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry and free of dust, loose mortar, concrete and plaster. Additional preparation of joints and spaces shall be provided in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Primer shall be applied only to the surfaces that will be covered by the sealant. 3.02 POLYURETHANE SEALANTS A. General: Non-sag polyurethane sealants shall be used on vertical joints. Self-leveling polyurethane sealants shall be used on horizontal joints. B. Joint dimensions: Unless otherwise specified, joints and spaces to be filled shall be constructed to the following criteria: Joints and spaces shall have a minimum width of 1/4 inch and a maximum width of 1 inch. The depth of the sealant shall be one-half the width of the joint, but in no case less than 1/4 inch deep. Sealant depth shall be measured at the point of smallest cross section. When joints exceed the depth requirements, backing rod shall be inserted to provide the joint depth specified. If the joint sealant depth is within the specified tolerances, backer tape shall be placed in the bottom of the joint.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00 PREFORMED JOINT FILLERS SECTION 07 93 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies preformed joint fillers. B. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 07 92 00 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ASTM D994 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type) ASTM D1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer’s product data showing conformance with this specification. 2. Manufacturer's recommendations for handling and installation of the material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PREFORMED ASPHALT FIBERBOARD A. Preformed asphalt fiberboard joint filler shall be in accordance with ASTM D994 and shall be 1/2 inch thick unless otherwise specified. 2.02 PREFORMED RESIN-BONDED CORK A. Preformed resin-bonded cork joint filler shall be in accordance with ASTM D1752, Type II. Cork joint filler thickness shall match the specified joint width. PREFORMED JOINT FILLERS SECTION 07 93 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL A. Preformed joint fillers shall be placed into position before the concrete is poured. Where it is necessary for the filler to be fixed to existing concrete or other building materials, a suitable adhesive recommended by the filler manufacturer shall be used. Filler surfaces shall be clean and dry prior to the placement of the concrete. 3.02 PREFORMED ASPHALT FIBERBOARD A. Preformed asphalt fiberboard joint fillers shall be used for expansion joints in concrete sidewalks, curbs, and roadways. 3.03 PREFORMED RESIN-BONDED CORK A. Preformed resin-bonded cork joint filler shall be used for expansion joints in concrete structures. The expansion joint shall be sealed with backer rod and sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants.
END OF SECTION 07 93 00 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 11 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Thermally insulated steel doors. 2. Steel door frames B. Related Sections: The work of the following sections is related to the work of this Section. Other sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 - Submittals 2. Section 08 71 01 - Finish Hardware 3. Section 09 90 00 - Painting 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. B. ANSI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory-Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2007. C. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. D. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004). E. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007. F. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. G. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006. H. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Metal/Steel Doors: Hollow metal access door fabricated of sheet steel and reinforced by light metal channels. B. Metal/Steel Frames: Frame to a doorway including two jambs and a head, supports door. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 11 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming, Imperial series: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Windsor Republic Doors; DL Series: www.republicdoor.com. 3. Steelcraft; L Series: www.steelcraft.com. 4. Or approved equal. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 11 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
5. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 6. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 7. Insulation & U-Value: U-0.37 maximum performance. 8. Provide continuous flexible weather stripping between doors and frames. 9. Finishes: Factory applied high-performance primer-coat. Field applied paint system as indicated in Section 09 90 00 Painting. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors Type 1 – No Glazing: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 2. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 3. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.091 when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. B. Exterior Doors Type 2 – Glazing: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 2. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 3. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.091 when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. 4. Glazing: Door manufacturer installed vision lite panel, nominally 8-inches by 36- inches, clear, minimum 80% light transmission, CAT II impact rated, 3/16-inch thickness, Fire Rated minimum of 20-minutes. Field modifications and cutting is not allowed. 2.04 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: b. Frames: 16 gage for units to 36”, 14 gage for units over 36”. 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 11 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches (100 mm) high to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 5. Frames wider than 48 Inches (1200 mm): Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Weatherstripping: Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Astragals for Double Doors: Z-shaped. B. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. C. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. D. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Field-applied Painted Finish: Comply with Paint and Coatings 09 90 00. C. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. B. Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 11 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Touch up damaged factory finishes. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in (1.5 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION 08 11 00 FLOOR ACCESS DOORS SECTION 08 31 20 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Factory-fabricated single or double leaf aluminum floor access doors and frames with water drainage. Include safety chain. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The references listed below are a part of this section. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title Aluminum Design The Aluminum Association, Aluminum Design Manual with Manual Specifications and Guidelines for Aluminum Structures ASTM B221 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes ASTM B632 Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate ASTM A240 Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications ASTM F593 Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs ASTM F594 Stainless Steel Nuts AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials OSHA U.S. Dept. of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. 2. A copy of this specification section with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. 3. Check-marks (✓) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. Deviations shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Include a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.
FLOOR ACCESS DOORS SECTION 08 31 20 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
4. Statement of experience for both manufacturer and installer. 5. Fabrication drawings showing layouts, connections to structure, and anchoring details. 6. Erection and installation drawings showing construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction. 7. Drain pipe layout from the drain coupling to the discharge point. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's product data showing conformance to the specification. 2. Instructions for the storage, handling, installation, and operation. 3. Manufacturer’s warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Minimum of 5 years’ experience manufacturing similar products. B. Installer: Minimum of 2 years’ experience installing similar products. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original packaging, stored in a dry, protected, well- vented area. Inspect product upon receipt and report damage to carrier and manufacturer. B. An adhesive backed vinyl material that protects the product during shipping and installation shall cover the entire top of the frame and covers. 1.07 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall guarantee the door against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years. Should a part fail to function in normal use within this period, manufacturer shall furnish a new part at no charge.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Pump Station Floor Access Doors shall be U.S.F Fabrication Inc. model ASGD 300 per drawings # 1000129832 & 1000129869 or approved equal. B. Ship’s Ladder Floor Access Door shall be U.S.F Fabrication Inc. model APD300 or approved equal. C. WQF Valve Vault Floor Access Door shall be U.S.F Fabrication Inc. model AHD or approved equal. 2.02 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA A. Pump Station Floor Access Door leaves shall be unreinforced aluminum diamond plate supported by reinforced safety grates to provide a minimum of 300 psf life load rating with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span. See Floor Access Door Schedule at the end of this section, which indicates loading criteria required at each location. B. Ship Ladder Floor Access Door shall be 1/4-inch thick aluminum diamond plate reinforced for a 300psf live load. See Floor Access Door Schedule at the end of this section, which indicates loading criteria required at each location.
FLOOR ACCESS DOORS SECTION 08 31 20 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
C. WQF Valve Vault Floor Access Door leaves shall be 1/4-inch thick aluminum diamond plate reinforced for an AASHTO HL-93 wheel load. See Floor Access Door Schedule at the end of this section, which indicates loading criteria required at each location. D. Nominal opening sizes and hinge opening sizes shall be as noted on the Drawings and in the Floor Access Door Schedule. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Access doors, single or double leaf: 1/4 inch minimum aluminum with diamond tread pattern; ASTM B632, 6061-T6. B. Angle frame shall be aluminum with anchor tabs around the perimeter: ASTM B221, 6061-T6. C. Hardware: ASTM A240 Type 316 stainless steel throughout. D. Fasteners: 1. Bolts: ASTM F593 2. Nuts: ASTM F594 2.04 COMPONENTS/ FEATURES A. Pump Station Floor Access Doors are designed with an integral safety grate to maximize the clear opening while providing a reliable fall through protection hinged safety grate devise. B. Double leaf access doors shall have stainless steel horizontal springs or gas shocks for easy opening. C. Safety grates shall include a 316 stainless steel lift assist devise to control accent and decent of the safety grate(s) when opened or closed and for one handed operation. D. The floor access door shall be equipped with a flush drop handle that does not protrude above the cover. E. The floor access door shall be equipped with 316 stainless steel hold open arms with red vinyl grips that automatically lock the covers in the 90 degree open position. F. The floor access door shall be equipped with a watertight 316 stainless steel slamlock with threaded plug, removable outside key, and fixed inside handle. The slamlock must latch onto a 316 stainless steel catch that is bolted to the frame. G. The floor access door shall include 316 stainless steel hinges and 316 stainless steel tamper resistant bolts/locknuts. H. The floor access door shall have an aluminum skirt welded to the frame perimeter to match the thickness of the concrete slab. I. When door leafs and safety grates are in the open postion, a dual safety chain and post system shall be intergrated into the hatch design as an added fall through barrier 2.05 FINISHES A. Door and frame: Mill finish aluminum with heavy bituminous coating where in contact with concrete. B. Coat top surface of aluminum with non-skid or slip resistant metallic surface. C. Hold open arms: 316 stainless steel with red vinyl grips
FLOOR ACCESS DOORS SECTION 08 31 20 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
D. Safety grate: Powder coated safety orange with signage that states “DO NOT STEP HERE” E. Safety grate lift assist device: 316 stainless steel
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Frame shall be accurately cast in place and securely anchored to concrete. Installation of access doors after concrete is placed is not allowed. C. Set frame level, plumb and in proper alignment with adjacent work. 3.03 REPAIR/RESTORATION A. Repair finishes damaged during installation. B. Remove and replace doors that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces using methods acceptable to the manufacturer that will not damage finish.
FLOOR ACCESS DOORS SECTION 08 31 20 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
3.06 FLOOR ACCESS DOOR SCHEDULE
Floor Access Doors Mark Location/Room Clear Rough Opening Leafs Loading Fall Protection Comments Number Opening Size (north/south Grating Size x east/west) (north/sou th x east/west) 1 H-01 Over Pump P- 5’-0” x 5’-0” x 7’-2” 2-Single 300 psf Yes Odor Gasket; 0111 7’-0” H-02 Over Pump P- 5’-0” x 5’-0” x 7’-2” 2-Single 300psf Yes Odor Gasket; 0112 7’-0” H-03 Over Pump P- 5’-0” x 5’-0” x 7’-2” 2-Single 300 psf Yes Odor Gasket; 0113 7’-0” H-04 Over Pump P- 5’-0” x 5’-0” x 7’-2” 2-Single 300 psf Yes Odor Gasket; 0114 7’-0” H-05 Over Future 5’-0” x 5’-0” x 7’-2” 2-Single 300 psf Yes Odor Gasket; WQF Pumps 7’-0” H-06 Ship’s Ladder 3’-6” x 3’-6” x 7’-0” Double 300 psf No Odor Gasket; Access 7’-0” H-07 WQV Valve 3’-6” x 3’-6” x 6’-0” Double HL-93 No Odor Gasket; Vault 5’-0” Note: 1. Clear opening is defined as the dimensions such that objects can pass through the floor access door. Lifting and other hardware shall be outside of the opening dimensions.
END OF SECTION 08 31 20
FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 08 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Finish and specialty hardware including cylinders. 2. Miscellaneous hardware items. 3. Keying. 4. Hardware Schedule. B. Related Sections: The work of the following sections is related to the work of this Section. Other sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 00 72 00 2. Section 01 33 10 3. Section 08 11 00 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the documents listed below. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document cites other standards, such standards are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ACI 116R Cement and Concrete Terminology ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete ANSI/BHMA ANSI/BHMA Reference Standards 156 NFPA 80 National Fire Protection Association SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturers’ technical product data for each item of hardware. 2. Include information necessary to show compliance with requirements. 3. Include instructions for installation and maintenance of operating parts and finish C. Hardware Schedule: 1. Submit five (5) reproducible copies of schedule on 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch sheets numbered consecutively. 2. Furnish a vertical listing of the hardware items used followed by manufacturer's name either on cover sheet or immediately following the cover sheet (i.e., "hinges--manufacturer's name"). FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 08 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
3. Schedule hardware items for each door separately in typed vertical form; list each door in numerical order under a separate heading using door number in door Opening Schedule, door location, size, and handing; do not group doors with like or similar hardware under a single heading. 4. Letter subcategories of similar hardware groups is OK, i.e., “14 & 14A.” D. Submit samples of products including accessory items and fasteners. Obtain approval before proceeding. E. Operating and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide in ‘Project Operation and Maintenance Manual’ required in accordance with Section 00 72 00 , General Conditions. 2. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 3. Submit copies of as-built hardware schedules. 4. Submit catalog cuts, instruction sheets, and a graphic keying analysis. 5. Deliver a complete set of templates, instruction sheets, schedule, installation details, and similar data. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: 1. A recognized distributor furnishing commercial building hardware in the same area as the Project for not less than five years. 2. The distributor shall be a factory direct authorized distributor of the material specified and provided, and shall maintain a stock and parts inventory consisting of standard items supplied for the Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. See referenced codes, regulations - Section 01 33 10 , Submittals: 2. Provide listed door hardware at fire rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80 and the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. C. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved. D. Completeness: 1. Provide a complete and functional hardware installation including all products, materials and accessories necessary for the Project. 2. Acceptance of the hardware schedule does not relieve supplier of responsibility for errors or omissions. 3. Review and acceptance by the Owners’ Representative does not relieve the contractor of his exclusive responsibility to fulfill the requirements as shown and specified FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 08 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Tag each item or package to clearly identify the item and it’s intended location. B. Package marked items in containers clearly marked with the hardware set number identified in the Hardware Schedule. C. Locked storage space complete with shelving shall be furnished by the General Contractor. D. Inventory hardware jointly with the Contractor and hardware supplier representative until both parties are satisfied that the count is correct. E. Store in original protective packaging until time of installation. PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature: Interior spaces are to be a minimum of 60 degrees F. room temperature. 2. Humidity and Ventilation: Mechanical system is to be operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during work of this Section continuously through the remainder of the construction period. WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship, and agreeing to repair or replace components that fail during the warranty period. B. Warranty period for door closers is 10 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Catalog cut sheets or physical samples are required to accompany requests for approval. B. Manufacturers: 1. Unless otherwise specified, all components shall be manufactured by Stanley (BEST) (preferred) or an approved substitute, following Owner’s operations and maintenance hardware standards. 2. Wherever possible, provide all components within this section from a single, approved manufacturer. Indicate in writing and with cut-sheets components that cannot be sourced from a single manufacturer. MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Provide hardware in compliance with ANSI/BHMA Reference Standards in accordance with provisions of this Section. 2. Provide the following and as indicated in the Schedule. FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 08 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
B. Hinges: 1. Manufacturers: a. Stanley (BEST) (preferred) or approved substitute. 2. Sizes: a. For Doors 3’-0” and Under: 4-1/2 inch x 4-1/2 inch, except as required for 180 degree swing. b. For Doors 3’-1” and over: 5 inch x 4-1/2 inch, except as required for 180 degree swing. 3. Quantity: a. For Doors up to 90 inches height: 4 each. b. For Doors over 90 inches height: 4 each. 4. Special Requirements: Exterior out-swinging doors are to have non-removable pins with NRP screw set into the barrel of the hinge. C. Gate Hinges 1. Manufacturers: a. Innovative Hinge Products, Inc (preferred) or approved substitute. 2. Characteristics: a. Rectangular block hinge welded-on D. Locksets: 1. Manufacturers: a. Stanley (BEST) (preferred) or approved substitute. 2. Backset: 2-3/4 inches. 3. Characteristics: a. Type: Heavy-duty cylindrical type. b. Functions: Per Schedule. c. Latchbolts: ¾ inch anti-friction type. d. Deadbolts: 1 inch projection. e. Strike Plates: Curved lip type with sufficient lip profile to protect trim. E. Door Closers (Surface Mount): 1. Manufacturer: a. Norton ‘Series 7500’ b. LCN 4000 series. c. Approved substitute. 2. Characteristics: a. Fasteners: Furnish hex nuts and bolts. b. Drop Plates: Provide as required. FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 08 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
F. Pushes and Pulls: 1. Manufacturers: a. Stanley (preferred) or approved substitute. G. Wall Mounted Stops: 1. Manufacturers: a. Trimco (preferred) or approved substitute. H. Cremone bolts: 1. Manufacturers: a. Richards Wilcox (preferred) or approved substitute. I. Protection Plates: 1. Manufacturers: a. Trimco b. Tice. c. Approved substitute. 2. Characteristics: a. Plate Widths: 2 inches less than the door width on the push side, except pairs of doors should be 1 inches less on the pull side. b. Kick Plate Height: 16 inch. c. Mop Plate Height: 4 inch. d. Armor Plate Height: 36 inches. J. Gaskets and Thresholds: 1. Manufacturers: a. National Guard Products (NGP) b. Pemko. c. Approved substitute. 2. Configuration: Provide material of proper size and configuration for the specified opening. K. Electric strikes 1. Manufacturers a. Assa Abloy (preferred) or approved substitute. L. Door Silencers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood. b. BBW/Trimco. c. Approved substitute. FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 08 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
2. Quantity: 3 per door leaf. 3. Type: 1229A. FABRICATION A. Templates: 1. Make hardware to template; send templates or template information, together with a copy of the hardware schedule, to the respective door and frame manufacturers or fabricators not later than 14 days after approval of schedule. 2. Coordinate templates of manufacturers of different hardware items to allow installation of various hardware items without interference between the items. 3. Make special templates as necessary. 4. Special consideration and effort shall be given to template coordination when finish hardware and security hardware are furnished by separate suppliers. 5. No fabrication shall begin until templates have been coordinated. B. Keying: 1. Key to existing City of Seattle, Seattle Public Utilities key system. 2. Consult with the Architect and the Owner’s named representative and secure written approval of the complete keying layout prior to placing the lock order with the factory. 3. Quantity: Provide (4) keys for each permanent cylinder. 4. Construction Cylinders and Keys: 5. Furnish standard cylinder items with construction cylinders. 6. Supply 6 construction master keys to the general contractor. 7. Change Keys: Supply 3 change keys for each keyed lock. 8. Delivery of Permanent Keys: Send one month prior to building occupancy direct to the Owner’s representative by registered mail. C. Temporary cylinders: 1. The intent of this key and cylinder specification is to provide key control in order to assure complete security throughout the construction and occupancy phases of this Project. 2. The Owner is assured that the cylinders and keys used during construction are replaced at project completion with the permanent cylinders and keys. 3. Temporary cylinders used during the construction phase will be keyed alike and provided in the interchangeable core versions or as required. 4. Temporary cylinders will be removed at the end of the project by the Contractor, who will then install the permanent cylinders as directed by the keying schedule. FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 08 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
FINISHES A. Finishes for hardware items are to correspond with the following table:
Butts – Exterior 626 Butts – Interior 626 Exit Devices & Trim 626 Locksets & Trim 626 Door Coordinators 626 Closers 689 Push / Pulls 630 Overhead Stops 630 Wall Bumpers 626 or 630 Kickplates 630 Thresholds Aluminum, with Stainless Steel Screws
PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLERS A. Installer is required to be experienced in work of the scope and quality indicated, with a record of successful in-service performance. EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions are satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not commence work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions. PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Verify on job before beginning work. B. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces from damage prior to beginning work of this Section. INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer’s Instructions: 1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, including technical bulletins and product catalog data. 2. Contact the product representative to confirm appropriate procedures prior to beginning installation. 3. Retain manufacturer’s written installation instructions at the project site. REINSTALLATION A. Replacement of Temporary Cylinders: Remove temporary cylinders and replace with permanent cylinders per the Keying Schedule. FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 08 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After installation of hardware and before acceptance of the building, check each locked door against key code index to make certain that correct cylinders are on proper doors. 1. Permanent cylinders are to have been installed prior. B. Inspection: After installation of all hardware, but before acceptance of the work, arrange to have the hardware supplier, in company with the representatives of locks, exit devices and door closers inspect the installation of their hardware. 1. Readjust all hardware for proper and smooth operation. 2. Advise the Contractor of any hardware requiring reinstallation for proper operation. C. Inspection Report: After inspection, but before acceptance of the work, furnish written certification from hardware supplier that hardware is installed and operating in a satisfactory manner and hardware provided is as listed on the approved finish hardware submittal. 1. Include one updated copy of the hardware schedule, listing hardware installed. 2. Submit in writing addressed to the Owner. ADJUSTING A. Adjust for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Adjust door and gate closing speed to be five seconds minimum from open position of 90 degrees to an open position of 12 degrees. C. Adjust door and gate opening force to not exceed five pounds for interior doors and not exceed 10 pounds for exterior doors and gates. CLEANING A. Clean work of this Section in accordance with provisions of Section 00 72 00 , General Conditions. B. Remove foreign materials including dust and dirt, and excess adhesive using materials and methods in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. C. Remove temporary labels and protective coverings. D. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer’s written recommendations. PROTECTION A. Protect work of this Section from damage and deterioration until completion and acceptance by Owner.
FINISH HARDWARE SECTION 08 71 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 9
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
HW Group #1 – use at Door D102
8 (ea) Hinges - BB199 US26D 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 NRP 1 (ea) Cremone bolt - 1028.00310.008 1 (ea) Cylindrical Lockset - QCL150E626 1 (ea) Cylinder - Use Owner Standard. 1 (ea) Closer - 4041EDA 689 2 (ea) Kick plate - K0050 630 16 x 35 1 (ea) Threshold - 171A FHSL25 2 (ea) Door bottom - 18061CNB 1 (ea) Electric strike – HES 9600 630 24VDC * Card reader & power supply by others • Astragal by door manufacturer
HW Group #2 – use at Door D101
4 (ea) Hinges - BB199 US26D 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 NRP 1 (ea) Cylindrical Lockset - QCL150E626 1 (ea) Cylinder - Use Owner Standard. 1 (ea) Closer - 4041EDA 689 1 (ea) Kick plate - K0050 630 16 x 34 1 (ea) Threshold - 171A FHSL25 1 (ea) Door bottom - 18061CNB 1 (ea) Electric strike – HES 9600 630 24VDC * Card reader & power supply by others
HW Group #3 – use at Door D103
4 (ea) Hinges - BB199 US26D 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 NRP 1 (ea) Cylindrical Lockset - QCL150E626 1 (ea) Cylinder - Use Owner Standard. 1 (ea) Closer - 4041EDA 689 1 (ea) Wall Stop – 1270CV 1 (ea) Kick plate - K0050 630 16 x 34 1 (ea) Threshold - 171A FHSL25 1 (ea) Door bottom - 18061CNB
HW Group #4 – use at (2) Exterior Gates
1 (pr) Gate Hinges – BLCS5 1 (ea) Cylindrical Lockset - QCL150E626 1 (ea) Cylinder - Use Owner Standard 1 (ea) Closer - 4041EDA 689 1 (ea) Electric strike - HES 9600 630 24VDC * Card reader & power supply by others
END OF SECTION 08 71 01 GYMPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09 21 16 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. 2. Gypsum wallboard. 3. Metal wall and ceiling framing. 4. Joint treatment and accessories. B. Related Sections: The work of the following sections is related to the work of this Section. Other sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 07 31 10 3. Section 07 92 00 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007). B. ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2007. C. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2007. D. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2007. E. ASTM C 954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2007. F. ASTM C 1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2005. G. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2006a. H. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction; 2005. I. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2004. J. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2004. K. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2007. GYMPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09 21 16 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also known as GWB, plasterboard, wallboard, sheet rock is an interior wall panel used to surface interior walls and ceilings. B. Metal Framing: Light-frame construction metal framing & furring used to support wall assemblies, ceilings, and roofing. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10, Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. C. Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C 645 or C 754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. General: All products to be manufactured by the current member of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. B. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. Scafco Steel Stud Manufacturing Co, 12800 NE 175th Street, Woodinville, WA 98072; (425) 488-7577; www.scafco.com. 2. Steeler Inc., 10023 Martin Luther King Jr. Way South, Seattle, WA 98178; (206) 725-8500; www.steeler.com. 3. Dietrich Metal Framing; www.dietrichindustries.com. C. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs, size as indicated on the drawings. 2. Runners: “U” shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: “C” shaped with flat or formed webs, size as indicated on the drawings. GYMPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09 21 16 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
4. Furring: a. Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. b. 4 inch “Z” shaped. D. Steel Framing Accessories: Provide all accessories including, but not limited to, tracks, clips web stiffeners, anchors, fastening devices, resilient clips, and other accessories required for a complete and proper installation, and as recommended by the manufacturer for the steel members used. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board: 1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC: www.gp.com/gypsum. 3. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 4. USG Corporation: www.usg.com. B. Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 1/2 inch. b. Ceilings: 1/2 inch. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C 1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. B. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. C. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish. D. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C 954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to steel studs. E. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. GYMPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09 21 16 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. C. Wall “Z” furring: Space furring at 24 inches on center. 1. Extend framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. 3.03 INSULATION INTALLATION A. Rigid insulation: Place tightly with in spaces between studs, around cut openings, and tight to items passing through partitions. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. B. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840, as follows: 1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas specifically indicated. B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. C. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish. GYMPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09 21 16 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
END OF SECTION 09 21 16 RESILIENT WALL BASE SECTION 09 65 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Resilient Wall Base. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This Section contains reference to the following is a list of: B. ASTM International – www.astm.org: 1. ASTM D 297 – Standard Practice for Rubber Products – Chemical Analysis. 2. ASTM D 412 – Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension. 3. ASTM F 1861 – Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 00 72 00 – General Terms and Conditions, Article 4.4 – Submittals, and Section 01 33 10 – Submittal Procedures. B. Approval Submittals: 1. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s product data for products specified in this Section including product characteristics, performance, certified test results, product limitations and other information necessary to establish conformance with the requirements of this Section. 2. Manufacturer’s Instructions. 3. Samples: a. Selection samples illustrating the full range of Manufacturer’s colors including special colors. C. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Statement of Manufacturer’s Qualifications. 2. Statement of Installer Qualifications. D. Closeout Submittals: 1. O&M Manual Content: Provide O&M manual documentation as required by Section 01 73 00 – Operation and Maintenance Manuals. a. Maintenance and cleaning recommendations. 2. Documentation of delivery and Project Representative’s acceptance of specified spare parts and materials. RESILIENT WALL BASE SECTION 09 65 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1. Have at least ten (10) years experience in the manufacture of the products specified in this Section. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the installation of products specified in this Section and have a record of successful in-service performance. 2. Able to show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope and type. C. Source Limitation: 1. Each product or system specified in this Section shall be from a single Manufacturer. a. Accessories, materials and components associated with each product specified in this Section shall be provided by the Manufacturer of that product unless: 1) Noted otherwise in this Section, or: 2) Approved in writing by the Manufacturer of the product. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products specified in this Section in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Instructions and the requirements of this Section: 1. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer’s original, unopened protective packaging. 2. Storage: a. Store in original protective packaging until time of installation. b. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperatures, and construction operations. c. Deliver materials sufficiently in advance of installation to condition materials to room temperature prior to installation. 3. Handling: Handle materials in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Instructions. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with the Manufacturer’s Instructions, and the requirements of this Section: 1. Temperature: Interior spaces are to be a minimum of sixty (60) degrees Fahrenheit room temperature. 2. Humidity and Ventilation: Mechanical system to be operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during work of this Section continuously through the remainder of the construction period. RESILIENT WALL BASE SECTION 09 65 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Deliver to Project Representative extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. 1. Quantity: Furnish resilient base equally to five (5) percent of amount installed. 2. Store where directed by the Project Representative. 3. Obtain a receipt for the maintenance materials from the Project Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, products of the following Manufacturers shall be incorporated in the Work of this Section: 1. Resilient Wall Base: a. Tarkett – www.commercial.tarkett.com b. Nora Systems Inc. – www.norarubber.com. c. Roppe – www.roppe.com. d. Or Approved Equal. 2.02 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Characteristics: 1. Compliance: Provide products complying with ASTM F 1861. 2. Material: Group I, Type TS Rubber, thermoset vulcanized extruded rubber. 3. Style: Cove; Style B. 4. Length: Provide rolls. a. Precut stock is not acceptable. 5. Size: Height four (4) inches, thickness one eighth (1/8) inch. 6. Colors: As selected by the Architect. 7. Accessories: Provide pre-molded end stops. 8. Adhesives: a. Provide in accordance with Manufacturer’s Instructions. b. Match characteristics and conditions of substrates closely with the capabilities of the proposed adhesives. B. Acceptable Products: 1. Tarkett Traditional Vinyl Wall Base. 2. Nora – ‘Article 820’. RESILIENT WALL BASE SECTION 09 65 10 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
3. Roppe – ‘Pinnacle Plus’. 4. Or Approved Equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions are satisfactory to receive the Work of this Section. B. Do not commence work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Resolve deficiencies in accordance with Manufacturer’s Instructions and this Section. C. Beginning of Work constitutes acceptance of conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces from damage prior to beginning work of this Section. B. Field Measurements: Take detailed measurements of actual conditions in the field before fabricating or installing the Work of this Section. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with Manufacturer’s Instructions, including technical bulletins and product catalog data. 2. Retain Manufacturer’s Instructions at the Project Site. B. Resilient Base: 1. Install base straight, level and true to line. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. B. Clean installed products in accordance with Manufacturer’s Instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.
END OF SECTION 09 65 10
COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Scope:
1. This Section specifies coating systems, surface preparations, and application requirements for coating systems.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
B. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued, or replaced.
Reference Title ANSI/ASC 29.4 Abrasive Blasting Operations – Ventilation and Safe Practice Exhaust Systems ANSI/NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components Health Effects ANSI B74.18 Grading of Certain Abrasive Grain on Coated Abrasive Material ASTM D16 Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications ASTM D2200 Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel (SSPC-VIS1) Surfaces ASTM D3960 Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings ASTM D4262 Standard Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces ASTM D4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method ASTM D4414 Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch Gages ASTM D4417 Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
Reference Title ASTM D4541 Standard Test Methods for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings On Metal Substrates Using Portable Adhesion Testers ASTM D4787 Standard Practice for Continuity Verification of Liquid or Sheet Linings Applied to Concrete Substrates ASTM D5162 Standard Practice for Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Nonconductive Protective Coating on Metallic Substrates ASTM D7234 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Adhesion Testers. ASTM E337 Standard Test Method for Measuring Humidity With a Psychrometer ASTM F1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride FS 595b Federal Standard Colors ICRI 03732 Guideline for Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays NACE Publication 6D- A Manual for Painter Safety 163 NACE Publication 6F- Surface Preparation of Steel or Concrete Tank/Interiors 163 NACE Publication 6G- Surface Preparation Abrasives for Industrial Maintenance 164 A Painting NACE Standards January 1988 Edition of the National Association of Corrosion Engineers, TPC. NACE Standard Standard Recommended Practice – Discontinuity (Holiday) RP0188 Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates NACE Standard Standard Recommended Practice, Inspection of Linings on Steel RP0288 and Concrete NACE Standard Standard Recommended Practice, Linings Over Concrete in RP0892 Immersion Service NACE Publication Coatings and Linings for Immersion Service TPC2 NAPF 500-03 Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in Exposed Locations Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings NAPF 500-03-04 Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Ductile Iron Pipe NAPF 500-03-05 Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Cast Ductile Iron Fittings OSHA 1910.144 Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards OSHA 1915.35 Standards – 29CFR - Painting SSPC Paint Application Specification No. 1. SSPC-AB 1 Mineral and Slag Abrasives SSPC-PA 1 Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel SSPC-PA 2 Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
Reference Title SSPC-PA 9 Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness on Cementitious Substrates Using Ultrasonic Gages SSPC-PA Guide 1 Guide for Illumination of Industrial Painting Project SSPC-PA Guide 3 A Guide to Safety in Paint Application SSPC-PA Guide 6 Guide for Containing Debris Generated During Paint Removal Operations SSPC-PA Guide 11 Guide for Coating Concrete SSPC SP1 Solvent Cleaning SSPC SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning SSPC SP3 Power Tool Cleaning SSPC SP5 White Metal Blast Cleaning SSPC SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning SSPC SP7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning SSPC SP10 Near-White Blast Cleaning SSPC SP11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal SSPC SP12 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by High and Ultra-High Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating SSPC SP13 Surface Preparation of Concrete SSPC-TR2 Wet Abrasive Blast Cleaning SSPC-TU-3 Overcoating SSPC-TU-4 Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Substrates. SSPC V2 Systems and Specifications: Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2 SSPC-VIS 1 Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel SSPC-VIS 3 Visual Standard for Power and Hand – Tool Cleaned Steel SSPC-VIS 4 Visual Standards (Waterjetting) SSPC-VIS 5 Visual Standards (Wet Abrasive Blast Cleaning) WPCF Manual of Paints and Protective Coatings for Wastewater Treatment Practice No. 17 Facilities. Guide and Paint Application Specifications.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions:
1. Specific coating terminology used in this Section is in accordance with definitions contained in ASTM D16, ASTM D3960, and the following definitions. a. Definitions: 1) Abrasive: Material used for blast cleaning, such as sand, grit or shot. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
2) Abrasive Blast Cleaning: Cleaning/surface preparation by abrasive propelled at high speed. 3) Anchor Pattern: Profile or texture of prepared surface(s). 4) ANSI: American National Standards Institute. 5) Bug Holes: Small cavities, usually not exceeding 15 mm in diameter, resulting from entrapment of air bubbles in the surface of formed concrete during placement and compaction. 6) Coating/Paint/Lining Thickness: The total thickness of primer, intermediate and/or finish coats. 7) Coating System Applicator (CSA): A generic reference to the specialty subcontractor or subcontractors retained by the Contractor to install the coating systems specified in this Section. 8) Coating System Manufacturer (CSM): Refers to the acceptable coating system manufacturer, abbreviated as the CSM. 9) Coating System Manufacturer’s Technical Representative(s) (CTR): Refers to the technical representative(s) of the acceptable Coating System Manufacturer and is abbreviated as CTR. 10) Dew point: Temperature of a given air/water vapor mixture at which condensation starts. 11) Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Depth of cured film, usually expressed in mils (0.001 inch). Use this definition as opposed to existing definition. 12) Drying Time: Time interval between application and curing of material. 13) Dry to Recoat: Time interval between application of material and ability to receive next coat. 14) Dry to Touch: Time interval between application of material and ability to touch lightly without damage. 15) Feather Edging: Reducing the thickness of the edge of paint. 16) Feathering: Operation of tapering off the edge of a point with a comparatively dry brush. 17) Field Coat: The application or the completion of application of the coating system after installation of the surface at the site of the work. 18) Hold Point: A defined point, specified in this Section, at which work shall be halted for inspection. 19) Holiday: a discontinuity, skip, or void in coating or coating system film that exposes the substrate. 20) Honeycomb: Segregated condition of hardened concrete due to non-consolidation. 21) ICRI: International Concrete Repair Institute. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
22) Incompatibility: Inability of a coating to perform well over another coating because of bleeding, poor bonding, or lifting of old coating; inability of a coating to perform well on a substrate. 23) Laitance: A layer of weak, non-durable concrete containing cement fines that is brought to the surface through bleed water because of concrete finishing and/or over-finishing. 24) Mil: 0.001 inch. 25) NACE: National Association of Corrosion Engineers. 26) Overspray: Dry spray, particularly such paint that failed to strike the intended surface. 27) Pinhole: A small diameter discontinuity in a coating or coating system film that is typically created by outgassing of air from a void in a concrete substrate resulting in exposure of the substrate or a void between coats. 28) Pot Life: Time interval after mixing of components during which the coating can be satisfactorily applied. 29) Resurfacer/Resurfacing Material: A layer of cementitious and/or resin-base material used to fill or otherwise restore surface continuity to worn or damaged concrete surfaces. 30) Shelf Life: Maximum storage time for which a material may be stored without losing its usefulness. 31) Shop Coat: One or more coats applied in a shop or plant prior to shipment to the site of the work, where the field or finishing coat is applied. 32) Spreading Rate: Area covered by a unit volume of paint at a specific thickness. 33) SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings. 34) Stripe Coat: A separate coat of paint applied to all weld seems, pits, nuts/bolts/washers and edges by brush. This coat shall not be applied until any previous coat(s) have cured and, once applied, shall be allowed to cure prior to the application of the subsequent coat(s). 35) Surface Saturated Dry (SSD): Refers to concrete surface condition where the surface is saturated (damp) without the presence of standing water. 36) Tie Coat: An intermediate coat used to bond different types of paint coats. Coatings used to improve the adhesion of a succeeding coat. 37) Touch-Up Painting: The application of paint on areas of painted surfaces to repair marks, scratches, and areas where the coating has deteriorated to restore the coating film to an unbroken condition. 38) TPC: Technical Practice Committee. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
39) Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: The portion of the coating that is a compound of carbon, is photochemically reactive, and evaporates during drying or curing, expressed in grams per liter (g/l) or pounds per gallon (lb/gal). 40) Immersion: Refers to a service condition in which the substrate is below the waterline or submerged in water or wastewater at least intermittently if not constantly. 41) Weld Splatter: Beads of metal scattered near seam during welding. 42) Wet Film Thickness (WFT): The primer or coating film’s thickness immediately following application. Wet film thickness is measured in mils or thousandths of an inch (0.001 inch) and is abbreviated WFT.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10.
B. General:
1. Provide the following: a. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked ( ) to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements or those parts which are to be provided by the Contractor or others. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined shall signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for requested deviations to the specification requirements shall be cause for rejection of the entire submittal and no further submittal material will be reviewed. b. CSM’s current printed recommendations and product data sheets for coating systems including: 1) Volatile organic compound (VOC) data. 2) Surface preparation recommendations. 3) Primer type, where required. 4) Maximum dry and wet-mil thickness per coat. 5) Minimum and maximum curing time between coats, including atmospheric conditions for each. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
6) Curing time before submergence in liquid. 7) Thinner to be used with each coating. 8) Ventilation requirements. 9) Minimum atmospheric conditions during which the paint shall be applied. 10) Allowable application methods. 11) Maximum allowable moisture content. 12) Maximum shelf life. c. Affidavits signed and sealed by an officer of the CSM’s corporation, attesting to full compliance of each coating system component with current and promulgated federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations and requirements. d. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for materials to be delivered to the job site, including coating system materials, solvents, and abrasive blast media. e. List of cleaning and thinner solutions allowed by the CSMs. f. Storage requirements including temperature, humidity, and ventilation for Coating System Materials as recommended by the CSMs. g. CSM's detailed, written instructions for coating system treatment and graphic details for coating system terminations in the structures to be coated including pipe penetrations, metal embedments, gate frames, and other terminations to be determined from the contract drawings. This information shall also include detail treatment for coating system at joints in concrete. h. The Contractor and CSA shall provide a minimum of five project references each including contact name, address, and telephone number where similar coating work has been performed by their companies in the past five years.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standardization:
1. Materials and supplies provided shall be the standard products of CSMs. Materials in each coating system shall be the products of a single CSM.
2. The standard products of CSMs other than those specified may be acceptable when it is demonstrated to the Engineer that they are equal in composition, durability, usefulness, and convenience for the purpose intended. Requests for consideration of CSMs other than those specified in this Section will be considered, provided the following minimum conditions are met. Such requests are not a substitution for submittals after the alternative CSMs have been considered and accepted. a. The proposed coating system shall use an equal or greater number of separate coats to achieve the required total dry film thickness. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
b. The proposed coating system shall use coatings of the same generic type as that specified including curing agent type. c. Requests for consideration of products from CSMs other than those specified in this Section shall include information listed in paragraph 1.04, demonstrating that the proposed CSM’s product is equal to the specified coating system. d. The Contractor and the proposed alternative CSM shall provide a list of references for the proposed product where the coating of the same generic type has been applied. The reference list shall include the project name, city, state, SPU, phone number of SPU; coating system reference and number from this Section; type of facility in which it was used, generic type, and year coating was applied.
B. Quality Control Requirements:
1. The Contractor is responsible for the workmanship and quality of the coating system installation. Inspections by the Engineer or the CTR will not relieve or limit the Contractor’s responsibilities.
2. The Contractor’s methods shall conform to requirements of this specification and the standards referenced in this Section. Changes in the coating system installation requirements will be allowed only with the written acceptance of the Engineer before work commences.
3. Only personnel who are trained by the CTR specifically for this contract or who are approved by the CSM specifically for this contract shall be allowed to perform the coating system installation specified in this Section.
4. Contaminated, outdated, diluted materials, and/or materials from previously opened containers shall not be used.
5. For repairs, the Contractor shall provide the same products, or products recommended by the CSM, as used for the original coating.
6. The Contractor shall identify the points of access for inspection by SPU or the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide ventilation, ingress and egress, and other means necessary for the Engineer’s personnel to access safely the work areas.
7. The Contractor shall conduct the work so that the coating system is installed as specified and shall inspect the work continually to ensure that the coating system is installed as specified. Coating system work that does not conform to the specifications or is otherwise not acceptable shall be corrected as specified.
8. The Contractor shall complete the Coating System Inspection Checklist, Form 09 90 00-A, included in Section 01 99 90 – Reference Forms, for coating system installations. Follow the sequential steps required for proper coating system installation as specified and as listed in the Coating System Inspection Checklist. For each portion of the work, install the coating system and complete sign-offs as specified prior to proceeding with the next step. After completing each step as indicated on the Coating System Inspection Checklist, the Contractor shall sign the checklist indicating that the work has been installed and inspected as specified. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 9
9. The Contractor shall provide written daily reports that present, in summary form, test data, work progress, surfaces covered, ambient conditions, quality control inspection test findings, and other information pertinent to the coating system installation.
C. Inspection at Hold Points:
1. The Contractor shall conduct inspections at Hold Points during the coating system installation and record the results from those inspections on Form 09 90 00-A, Coating System Inspection Checklist. The Contractor shall coordinate such Hold Points with the Engineer such that the Engineer may observe Contractor’s inspections on a scheduled basis. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a minimum of two (2) hours of notice prior to conducting Hold Point Inspections. The Hold Points shall be as follows: a. Environment and Site Conditions. Prior to commencing an activity associated with coating system installation, the Contractor shall measure, record, and confirm acceptability of ambient air temperature and humidity as well as other conditions such as proper protective measures for surfaces not to be coated and safety requirements for personnel. The acceptability of the weather and/or environmental conditions within the structure shall be determined by the requirements specified by the CSM of the coating system being used. b. Conditions Prior to Surface Preparation. Prior to commencing surface preparation, the Contractor shall observe, record, and confirm that oil, grease, and/or soluble salts have been eliminated from the surface. c. Monitoring of Surface Preparation. Spot checking of degree of cleanliness, surface profile, and surface pH testing, where applicable. In addition, the compressed air used for surface preparation or blow down cleaning shall be checked to confirm it is free from oil and moisture. d. Post Surface Preparation – Upon completion of the surface preparation, the Contractor shall measure and inspect for proper degree of cleanliness and surface profile as specified in this Section and in the CSM’s written instructions. e. Monitoring of Coatings Application – The Contractor shall inspect, measure, and record the wet film thickness and general film quality (visual inspection) for lack of runs, sags, pinholes, holidays, etc. as the application work proceeds. f. Post Application Inspection – The Contractor shall identify defects in application work including pinholes, holidays, excessive runs or sags, inadequate or excessive film thickness and other problems as may be observed. g. Post Cure Evaluation – The Contractor shall measure and inspect the overall dry film thickness. The Contractor shall conduct a DFT survey, as well as perform adhesion testing, holiday detection, or cure testing as required based on the type of project and the specific requirements in this Section and/or in the CSM’s written instructions. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 10
h. Follow-up to Corrective Actions and Final Inspection. The Contractor shall measure and reinspect corrective coating work performed to repair defects identified at prior Hold Points. This activity also includes final visual inspection along with follow-up tests such as holiday detection, adhesion tests, and DFT surveys.
1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. General:
1. Materials shall be delivered to the job site in their original, unopened containers. Each container shall be properly labeled. Materials shall be handled and stored to prevent damage to or loss of label.
2. Labels on material containers shall show the following information: a. Name or title of product. b. CSM's batch number. c. CSM's name. d. Generic type of material. e. Application and mixing instructions. f. Hazardous material identification label. g. Shelf life expiration date.
3. Materials shall be stored in enclosed structures and shall be protected from weather and excessive heat or cold in accordance with the CSM’s recommendations. Flammable materials shall be stored in accordance with state and local requirements.
4. Containers shall be clearly marked indicating personnel safety hazards associated with the use of or exposure to the materials.
5. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each material shall be provided to the Engineer.
6. The Contractor shall store and dispose of hazardous waste according to federal, state and local requirements. This requirement specifically addresses waste solvents and coatings. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 11
1.07 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CTR
A. General:
1. The Contractor shall retain or obtain the services of the CTR to be on site to perform the Contractor and/or CSA application training and to routinely inspect and verify in writing that the application personnel have successfully performed surface preparation, filler/surface application, coating system application, and Quality Control Inspection in accordance with this Section and to warrantable level of quality. This must include checking the required degree of cleanliness, surface pH for concrete substrates, surface profile of substrates, proper mixing of coating materials, application (including checking the wet and dry film thickness of the coating systems), proper cure of the coating systems, and proper treatment of coating systems at terminations, transitions, and joints and cracks in substrates. Refer to paragraph 1.07 Coating System Installation Training. for further details on these CTR requirements. This inspection is in addition to the inspection performed by the Contractor in accordance with this Section.
B. Coating System Installation Training:
1. Provide a minimum of 8 hours of classroom and off site training for application and supervisory personnel (both the Contractor's and CSA’s). Provide training to a minimum of two supervisory personnel from the CSA and one supervisor from the Contractor. Alternatively, the CTR shall provide a written letter from the CSM stating that the application personnel (listed by name) who shall perform coating work are approved by the CSM without further or additional training.
2. One CTR can provide training for up to fourteen application personnel and three supervisory personnel at one time. The training shall include the following as a minimum: a. A detailed explanation of mixing, application, curing, and termination details. b. Hands-on demonstration of how to mix and apply the coating systems. c. A detailed explanation of the ambient condition requirements (temperature and humidity) and surface preparation requirements for application of the coating system as well as a detailed explanation of re- coat times, cure times, and related ambient condition requirements. d. When training is performed, the CTR shall provide a written letter stating that training was satisfactorily completed by the personnel listed by name in the letter.
C. Coating System Inspection:
1. While on site to routinely inspect and verify, the CTR shall perform the following activities to confirm acceptability and conformance with the specifications: a. Inspect ambient conditions during various coating system installation at hold points for conformance with the specified requirements. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 12
b. Inspect the surface preparation of the substrates where the coating system will terminate or will be applied for conformance to the specified application criteria. c. Inspect preparation and application of coating detail treatment (for example, terminations at joints, metal embedments in concrete, etc.). d. Inspect application of the filler/surface materials for concrete and masonry substrates. e. Inspect application of the primers and finish coats including wet and dry film thickness of the coatings. f. Inspect coating systems for cure. g. Review adhesion testing of the cured coating systems for conformance to specified criteria. h. Review coating system continuity testing for conformance to specified criteria. i. Inspect and record representative localized repairs made to discontinuities identified via continuity testing. j. Conduct a final review of completed coating system installation for conformance to the specifications. k. Prepare and submit a site visit report following each site visit that documents the acceptability of the coating work in accordance with the CSM’s Recommendations.
D. Final Report:
1. Upon completion of coating work for the project, the CTR shall prepare a final report. That report shall summarize daily test data, observations, drawings, and photographs in a report to be submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.02. Include substrate conditions, ambient conditions, and application procedures, observed during the CTR's site visits. Include a statement that the completed work was performed in accordance with the requirements of this Section and the CSM’s recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Notwithstanding the listing of product names in this Section, the Contractor shall provide affidavits, signed and sealed by an officer of the CSM’s corporation, attesting to full compliance of each coating system component with current and promulgated federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations and requirements. No coatings shall be applied to a surface until the specified affidavits have been submitted and have been reviewed and accepted. Failure to comply with this requirement shall be cause for rejection and removal of such materials from the site. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 13
2. The following list specifies the material requirements for coating systems. Coating systems are categorized by generic name followed by an identifying abbreviation. If an abbreviation has a suffix number, it is for identifying subgroups within the coating system.
Material Requirements for Coating Systems Coating CSM First Coat(s) Finish Coat(s) System Epoxy Coatings E-1 PPG PMC Amerlock 2/400 Series Amerlock 2/400 Series Carboline Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890 International Devran 224 HS Devran 224 Paint/ICI * Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Macropoxy 646 Tnemec Series V69 Series V69 E-1-G PPG PMC Amerlock 2/400 Series Amerlock 2/400 Series Carboline Carboguard 894 Carboguard 894 International Devran 223/224HS Devran 224HS Paint/ICI * Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy B67- Macropoxy 646 Epoxy B67-600 600 Tnemec Series V27 or V69 Series V69 E-2 PPG PMC Amerlock 2/400 Series Amerlock 2/400 Series Carboline Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890 International Bar-Rust 236 Bar-Rust 236 Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Sea Guard 6000 Epoxy N11- Sea Guard 6000 Epoxy N11-400 400 Tnemec Series V27 or V69 Series V69 E-3 PPG PMC Amerlock 2/400 Series Amerlock 2/400 Series Carboline Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890 International Bar-Rust 236 Bar-Rust 236 Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Sea Guard 6000 Epoxy N11- Sea Guard 6000 Epoxy N11-400 400 Tnemec Series V69 Series V69 E-4 PPG PMC Amerlock 2/400 Series Amerlock 2/400 Series Carboline Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890 International Bar-Rust 236 Bar-Rust 236 Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Macropoxy 646 Tnemec Series V69 Series V69 COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 14
Material Requirements for Coating Systems Coating CSM First Coat(s) Finish Coat(s) System E7 PPG PMC Amercoat 385 Amercoat 385 Carboline Sanitile 120 Carboguard 890 International Bar-Rust 236 Bar-Rust 236 Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Macropoxy 646 Tnemec Series V69 Series V69 E8 PPG PMC Amercoat 385 Amercoat 385 Carboline Carboguard 1340 Carboguard 1340 International Prep and Prime (Gripper) Tru-Glaze 4408 - WB Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Macropoxy 646 Tnemec Series 201 Series 201 E-9 PPG PMC Amercoat 395 FD Amercoat 395 FD Carboline Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890 International Bar-Rust 231 Bar-Rust 231 Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Sea Guard 6000 Epoxy N11- Sea Guard 6000 Epoxy N11-400 400 Tnemec Series 104 Series 104 E-9-C PPG PMC Amercoat 395 FD Amercoat 395 FD Carboline Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890 International Bar-Rust 231 Bar-Rust 231 Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Sea Guard 6000 Epoxy N11- Sea Guard 6000 Epoxy N11-400 400 Tnemec Series 104 Series 104 E-10 PPG PMC Amerlock 2/400 Series Amerlock 2/400 Series Carboline Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890 International Bar-Rust 236 Bar-Rust 236 Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Macropoxy 646 Tnemec Series V69 Series V69 Specialty Epoxy Linings EA-1 Carboline Plasite 4500S Plasite 4500S Sauereisen Sewergard 210S Sewergard 210S Tnemec Series 435 Series 435 Coating System CSM Base Coat Filler/Surfacer Glaze Coat EA-2 Carboline Plasite Carboguard 510 Plasite 4500S Carboguard 4500S Sauereisen Sewergard Series 209 HB Sewergard 210S 210S Tnemec Series 435 Series 218 Series 435 COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 15
Material Requirements for Coating Systems Coating CSM First Coat(s) Finish Coat(s) System EA-3 Carboline N/A Carboguard 510 Plasite 5371 Sauereisen N/A Series 209 HB Sewergard 210T Tnemec N/A Series 218 Series 434 Epoxy Flooring Systems Coating System CSM Primer Intermediate Finish Coat Coat EF-2 Stonhard Stonhard Stonclad GS Stonkote GS-4 Standard Primer Tnemec Series 238 Series 238 Series 280 Epoxy Polyurethane EU-1 PPG PMC Amercoat Amercoat 385 Carboline Carbozinc 859 Carboguard 890 International Cathacoat 313 Devran 233 or 224HS Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Zinc Clad IV Macropoxy 646 EU-1-FRP PPG PMC Amerlock 2/400 Series Amershield VOC Carboline Carbocrylic 120 Carbothane 134 VOC International Devran 223/224 Devthane 378H Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 High Solids Polyurethane Tnemec Series V27 Series 1075 Latex Acrylic L-1 PPG PMC Amercoat 148 Amercoat 220 Carboline Carbocrylic 120 Carbocrylic 3359 International UH Gripper 3210 Dulux Pro 1406 Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Loxon Acrylic Primer Sher Cryl HPA Tnemec Series 1028 or 1029 Series 1028 or 1029 L-2 PPG PMC Amercoat 220 Amercoat 220 Carboline Carbocrylic 120 Carbocrylic 3359 International Prep and Prime Gripper Ultrahide 250-1406 Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Sher Cryl HPA Sher Cryl HPA Tnemec Series 1028 or 1029 Series 1028 or 1029 L-3 PPG PMC Amercoat 148 Amercoat 220 Carboline Carbocrylic 3359 DTM Carbocrylic 3359 DTM International Devflex 4020 PF Dulux Pro 1406 Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Procryl Primer Sher Cryl HPA Tnemec Series 1028 or 1029 Series 1028 or 1029 COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 16
Material Requirements for Coating Systems Coating CSM First Coat(s) Finish Coat(s) System L-4 PPG PMC Amercoat 148 Amercoat 220 Carboline Sanitile 120 Sanitile 155 International Prepared Prime Gripper Ultrahide 250-1406 Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Prep Rite ProBlock Sher Cryl HPA Tnemec Series 1028 or 1029 Series 1028 or 1029 Miscellaneous M-2 Carboline Carbomastic 15 Carbomastic 15 International Bar-Rust 231 (231K 9100) Bar-Rust 231 (231K 9100) Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams Epoxy Mastic Aluminum II Epoxy Mastic Aluminum II Tnemec Series 135 (1243) Series 135 (1243) Penetrating Stain CSM Primer Finish S-1 Carboline Carbocrete Sealer WB Carbocrete Sealer WB International Groundworks Groundworks Paint/ICI Sherwin Williams H&C Acrylic Concrete Stain H&C Acrylic Concrete Stain Tnemec Series 617 Series 617 S-2 Tnemec N/A Series 636 Dur A Pell 20 Curecrete N/A Ashford Formula Chemical Company S-3 Tnemec N/A Series V626 Dur A Pell GS S-4 Tnemec N/A Series V626 Dur A Pell GS Professional N/A PWS-15 Super Products of Kansas CS-1 Bromoco N/A CT-7571-T Clear coating for International LTD Corten and bare carbon steel
2.02 PRODUCT DATA
A. General:
1. Prior to application of coatings, submit letter(s) from the CTR(s) identifying the application personnel who have satisfactorily completed training as specified in paragraph 1.07 or a letter from the CSM stating that personnel who shall perform the work are approved by the CSM without need for further or additional training.
2. Submit reports specified in paragraph 1.05 Quality Control Requirements and 1.07 Coating System Inspection when the work is underway. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 17
3. Submit the Coating System Inspection Checklists, using Form 09 90 00-A, included in Section 01 99 90 – Reference Forms, for the coating work.
4. CTR final report in accordance with paragraph 1.07 Final Report.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 COATINGS
A. General:
1. Coating products shall not be used until the Engineer has accepted the affidavits specified in paragraphs 1.04 and 2.01, the Engineer has inspected the materials, and the CTR has trained the Contractor and CSA in the surface preparation, mixing and application of each coating system.
2. Erect and maintain protective enclosures as stipulated per SSPC-Guide 6 Guide for Containing Debris Generated During Paint Removal Operations.
B. Shop and Field Coats:
1. Shop Applied Prime Coat: Except as otherwise specified, prime coats may be shop-applied or field-applied. Shop-applied primer shall be compatible with the specified coating system and shall be applied at the minimum dry film thickness recommended by the CSM. Data sheets identifying the shop primer used shall be provided to the on-site coating application personnel. Adhesion tests shall be performed on the shop primer as specified in paragraph 3.01 Adhesion Confirmation. Damaged, deteriorated and poorly applied shop coatings that do not meet the requirements of this Section shall be removed and the surfaces recoated. If the shop primer coat meets the requirements of this Section, the field coating may consist of touching up the shop prime coat and then applying the finish coats to achieve the specified film thickness and continuity.
2. Field Coats: Field coats shall consist of one or more prime coats and one or more finish coats to build up the coating to the specified dry film thickness. Unless otherwise specified, finish coats shall not be applied until other work in the area is complete and until previous coats have been inspected.
3. Adhesion Confirmation: The Contractor shall perform an adhesion test after proper cure in accordance with ASTM D3359 to demonstrate that (1) the shop applied prime coat adheres to the substrate, and (2) the specified field coatings adhere to the shop coat. Test results showing an adhesion rating of 5A on immersed surfaces and 4A or better on other surfaces shall be considered acceptable for coatings 5 mils or more in thickness (Method A). Test results showing an adhesion rating of 5B on immersed surfaces and 4B or better on other surfaces shall be considered acceptable for coating thicknesses less than 5 mils. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 18
C. Application Location Requirements:
1. Equipment, Nonimmersed: Items of equipment, or parts of equipment that are not immersed in service, shall be shop primed and then finish coated in the field after installation with the specified or acceptable color. If the shop primer requires topcoating within a specified period, the equipment shall be finish coated in the shop and then touch-up painted after installation. If equipment removal and reinstallation is required for the project, touch-up coating work shall be performed in the field following installation.
2. Equipment, Immersed: Items of equipment, or parts and surfaces of equipment that are immersed when in service, with the exception of pumps and valves, shall have surface preparation and coating work performed in the field. Coating systems applied to immersed equipment shall be pinhole free.
3. Steel Water Tanks: The interior surfaces of steel water tanks or reservoirs shall have surface preparation and coating work performed in the field.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Surface preparations for each type of surface shall be in accordance with the specific requirements of each coating specification sheet (COATSPEC) and the following. In the event of a conflict, the COATSPEC sheets shall take precedence.
2. Surfaces to be coated shall be clean and dry. Before applying coating or surface treatments, oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill scale, old weathered coatings, and other foreign substances shall be removed. Oil and grease shall be removed before mechanical cleaning is started. Where mechanical cleaning is accomplished by blast cleaning, the abrasive used shall be washed, graded and free from contaminants that might interfere with the adhesion of the coatings. The air used for blast cleaning shall be sufficiently free of oil and moisture so as not to cause detrimental contamination of the surfaces to be coated.
3. Where deemed necessary by the Engineer, a NACE International certified coatings inspector, provided by SPU, will inspect and approve surfaces to be coated before application of a coating. Surface defects identified by the inspector shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to SPU.
4. Cleaning and painting shall be scheduled so that dust and spray from the cleaning process shall not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. Hardware, hardware accessories, nameplates, data tags, machined surfaces, sprinkler heads, electrical fixtures, and similar uncoated items which are in contact with coated surfaces shall be removed or masked prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Following completion of coating, removed items shall be reinstalled. Equipment adjacent to walls shall be disconnected and moved to permit cleaning and painting of equipment and walls and, following painting, shall be replaced and reconnected. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 19
B. Blast Cleaning:
1. When abrasive blast cleaning is required to achieve the specified surface preparation the following requirements for blast cleaning materials and equipment shall be met: a. Used or spent blast abrasive shall not be reused on this project. b. The compressed air used for blast cleaning shall be filtered and shall contain no condensed water and no oil. Moisture traps shall be cleaned at least once every four hours or more frequently as required to prevent moisture from entering the supply air to the abrasive blasting equipment. c. Oil separators shall be installed just downstream of compressor discharge valves and at the discharge of the blast pot discharges. These shall be checked on the same frequency as the moisture traps as defined above. d. Regulators, gauges, filters, and separators shall be in use on compressor air lines to blasting nozzles times during this work. e. An air dryer or desiccant filter drying unit shall be installed which dries the compressed air prior to blast pot connections. This dryer shall be used and maintained for the duration of surface preparation work. f. The abrasive blast nozzles used shall be of the venturi or other high velocity type supplied with a minimum of 100 psig air pressure and sufficient volume to obtain the blast cleaning production rates and cleanliness/specified. g. The Contractor shall provide ventilation for airborne particulate evacuation (meeting pertinent safety standards) to optimize visibility for both blast cleaning and inspection of the substrate during surface preparation work. h. If, between final surface preparation work and coating system application, contamination of prepared and cleaned metallic substrates occurs, or if the prepared substrates' appearance darkens or changes color, recleaning by water blasting, reblasting and abrasive blast cleaning shall be required until the specified degree of cleanliness is reclaimed. i. The Contractor is responsible for dust control and for protection of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment adjacent to and surrounding the work area.
C. Solvent Cleaning:
1. Any solvent wash, solvent wipe, or cleaner used, including but not limited to those used for surface preparation in accordance with SSPC SP-1 Solvent Cleaning and shall be of the emulsifying type which emits no more than 340 g/l VOCs for AIM regions, 250 g/l for CARB regions and 100 g/l for SCAQMD regions, contains no phosphates, is biodegradable, removes no zinc, and is compatible with the specified primer.
2. Clean white cloths and clean fluids shall be used in solvent cleaning. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 20
D. Metallic Surfaces:
1. Metallic surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with applicable portions of surface preparation specifications of the Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) specified for each coating system. See Coat Spec for each coating system in this Section. The profile depth of the surface to be coated shall be in accordance with the COATSPEC requirements in this Section measured by Method C of ASTM D4417. Blast particle size shall be selected by the Contractor to produce the specified surface profile. The solvent in solvent cleaning operations shall be as recommended by the CSM.
2. Preparation of metallic surfaces shall be based upon comparison with SSPC- VIS1-89 (ASTM D2200), and as described in the Coat Spec for each coating system. If dry abrasive blast cleaning is selected and to facilitate inspection, the Contractor shall, on the first day of cleaning operations, abrasive blast metal panels to the standards specified. Plates shall measure a minimum of 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches. Panels meeting the requirements of the specifications shall be initialed by the Contractor and the Engineer and coated with a clear non- yellowing finish. One of these panels shall be prepared for each type of abrasive blasting and shall be used as the comparison standard throughout the project.
3. Blast cleaning requirements for steel, ductile iron and stainless steel substrates are as follows: a. Steel piping shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-6 (Commercial Blast Cleaning) and primed before installation. Ductile iron piping surfaces including fittings shall be prepared in accordance with NAPF 500-03, NAPF 500-03-04, and NAPF 500-03-05. b. Stainless steel surfaces shall be abrasive blast cleaned to leave a clean uniform appearance with a minimum surface profile of 1.5 to 2.5 mils that is uniform. c. Remove traces of grit, dust, dirt, rust scale, friable material, loose corrosion products or embedded abrasive from substrate by vacuum cleaning prior to coating application. d. Care must be taken to prevent contamination of the surface after blasting from worker’s fingerprints, deleterious substances on workers’ clothing, or from atmospheric conditions. e. Ambient environmental conditions in the enclosure must be constantly monitored and maintained to ensure the degree of cleanliness is held and no “rust back” occurs prior to coating material application.
E. Concrete Surfaces:
1. Inspection of concrete surfaces prior to surface preparation and surface preparation of concrete surfaces shall be performed in accordance with SSPC- SP13 (also called NACE 6).
2. Prepare substrate cracks, areas requiring resurfacing and perform detail treatment including but not limited to, terminating edges, per CSM recommendations. This shall precede surface preparation for degree of cleanliness and profile. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 21
3. The surface profile for prepared concrete surfaces to be coated shall be evaluated by comparing the profile of the prepared concrete with the profile of graded abrasive paper, as described in ANSI B74.18 or by comparing the profile with the ICRI 03732 (surface profile replicas). Surface profile requirements shall be in accordance with the Coat Spec requirements and the CSM’s recommendations.
4. Surface cleanliness of prepared concrete substrates shall be inspected after cleaning, preparation, and/or drying, but prior to making repairs or applying a coat in the coating system. If concrete surfaces are repaired, they shall be reinspected for surface cleanliness prior to application of the coating system.
5. Surface preparation of concrete substrates shall be accomplished using methods such as dry abrasive blast cleaning, high, or ultra high-pressure water blast cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP-13. The selected cleaning method shall produce the requirements set forth below. a. A clean substrate that is free of calcium sulfate, loose coarse or fine aggregate, laitance, loose hydrated cement paste, and otherwise deleterious substances shall be achieved. Blast cleaning and other means necessary shall be used to open up air voids or bugholes to expose their complete perimeter. Leaving shelled over, hidden air voids beneath the exposed concrete surface is not acceptable. Concrete substrate must be dry prior to the application of filler/surface or coating system materials. b. Acceptable surface preparation must produce a concrete surface with a minimum pH of 8.0 to be confirmed by surface pH testing. If after surface preparation, the surface pH remains below 8.0, perform additional water blasting, cleaning, or abrasive blast cleaning until additional pH testing indicates an acceptable pH level. c. Following inspection by the Contractor of the concrete surface preparation, thoroughly vacuum clean concrete surfaces to be coated to remove loose dirt, and spent abrasive (if dry blast cleaning is used) leaving a dust free, sound concrete substrate. Debris produced by blast cleaning shall be removed from the structures to be coated and disposed of legally off site by the Contractor.
6. Should abrasive blast cleaning or high or ultrahigh pressure water blasting not remove degraded concrete, chipping or other abrading tools shall be used to remove the deteriorated concrete until a sound, clean substrate is achieved which is free of calcium sulfate, loose coarse or fine aggregate, laitance, loose hydrated cement paste, and otherwise deleterious substances. Concrete substrates must be dry prior to the application of filler/surfacers or coating system materials.
7. Surface cleanliness of prepared concrete substrates shall be inspected after cleaning, preparation, and/or drying, but prior to application of coating materials. If concrete surfaces are repaired, they shall be reinspected for surface cleanliness and required surface profile prior to application of the coating system. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 22
8. Moisture content of concrete to be coated shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D4263, Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method and ASTM F 1869, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. The ASTM D4263 plastic sheet test shall be conducted at least once for every 500 sq. ft. of surface area to be coated. The presence of any moisture on plastic sheet following test period constitutes a non-acceptable test. For concrete surfaces to be coated which are on the negative or back side of concrete walls or structures exposed to soils (back filled) or immersed and waterproofed in accordance with Section 07 10 00 – Dampproofing and Waterproofing, perform calcium chloride tests in accordance with ASTM F-1869 once for each 500 sq. ft. of surface area to be coated. Comply with CSM’s written recommendations regarding acceptance/non-acceptance of moisture vapor emissions.
F. Masonry Surfaces:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces such as Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) to remove chalk, loose dirt, dried mortar splatter, dust, peeling, or loose existing coatings, or otherwise deleterious substances to leave a clean, sound substrate.
2. Be certain masonry surfaces are dry prior to coating application. If pressure washing or low-pressure water blast cleaning is used for preparation, allow the masonry to dry for at least 5 days under dry weather conditions or when the minimum ambient temperature is 70 degrees F prior to coating application work.
G. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Surfaces:
1. Prepare FRP surfaces by sanding to establish uniform surface roughness and to remove gloss from the resin in the FRP. Next, vacuum clean to remove loose FRP dust, dirt, and other materials. Next, solvent clean using clean white rags and allow solvent to evaporate completely before application of coating materials.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Workmanship:
1. Coated surfaces shall be free from runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps, and brush marks. Coats shall be applied to produce an even film of uniform thickness completely coating corners and crevices.
2. The Contractor's equipment shall be designed for application of the materials specified. Compressors shall have suitable traps and filters to remove water and oils from the air. A paper blotter test shall be performed by the Contractor when requested by the Engineer to determine if the air is sufficiently free of oil and moisture so as not to produce deteriorating effects on the coating system. The amount of oil and moisture in spray air shall be less than the amount recommended by the CSM. Spray equipment shall be equipped with mechanical agitators, pressure gages, and pressure regulators, and spray nozzles of the proper sizes. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 23
3. Each coat of coating material shall be applied evenly and sharply cut to line. Care shall be exercised to avoid overspraying or spattering paint on surfaces not to be coated. Glass, hardware, floors, roofs, and other adjacent areas and installations shall be protected by taping, drop cloths, or other suitable measures.
4. Coating applications method shall be conventional or airless spray, brush or roller, or trowel as recommended by CSM.
5. Allow each coat to cure or dry thoroughly, according to CSM’s printed instructions, prior to recoating.
6. Vary color for each successive coat for coating systems when possible.
7. When coating complex steel shapes, prior to overall coating system application, stripe coat welds, edges of structural steel shapes, metal cut-outs, pits in steel surfaces, or rough surfaces with the primer coat. This involves applying a separate coat using brushes or rollers to ensure proper coverage. Stripe coat via spray application is not permitted.
B. Coating Properties, Mixing and Thinning:
1. Coatings, when applied, shall provide a satisfactory film and smooth even surface. Glossy undercoats shall be lightly sanded to provide a surface suitable for the proper application and adhesion of subsequent coats. Coating materials shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at a uniform consistency during application. Coatings consisting of two or more components shall be mixed in accordance with the CSM’s instructions. Where necessary to suit the conditions of the surface, temperature, weather and method of application, the coating may be thinned as recommended by the CSM immediately prior to use. The volatile organic content (VOC) of the coating as applied shall comply with prevailing air pollution control regulations. Unless otherwise specified, coatings shall not be reduced more than necessary to obtain the proper application characteristics. Thinner shall be as recommended by the CSM.
C. Atmospheric Conditions:
1. Coatings shall be applied only to surfaces that are dry, and only under conditions of evaporation rather than condensation. Coatings systems shall not be applied during rainy, misty weather, or to surfaces upon which there is frost or moisture condensation. During damp weather, when the temperature of the surface to be coated is within 10 degrees F of the dew point, forced dehumidification equipment may be used to maintain a temperature of minimum 40 degrees F and 10 degrees F above the dew point for the surfaces to be coated, the coated surface, and the atmosphere in contact with the surface. These conditions shall be maintained for a period of at least 8 hours or as recommended by the CSM. Where conditions causing condensation are severe, dehumidification equipment, fans, and/or heaters shall be used inside enclosed areas to maintain the required atmospheric and surface temperature requirements for proper coating application and cure. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 24
D. Concrete Substrate Temperatures and Detail Treatment:
1. When the surface temperatures of the concrete substrates to be coated are rising or when these substrates are in direct sunlight, outgassing of air from the concrete may result in bubbling, pinhole formations, and/or blistering in the coating system. The application of the filler/surface and the coating system will only be allowed during periods of falling temperature. This will require that application of the filler/surface and coating system shall only occur during the cooler evening hours. Contractor shall include any cost for working outside of normal hours in the bid.
2. Should bubbles, pinholes, or discontinuities form in the applied coating system material, they shall be repaired as recommended by the CSM. Should pinholes develop in the filler/surfacer material or in the first coat of the coating material, the pinholes shall be repaired in accordance with the CSM’s recommendations prior to application of the next coat of material. Whenever pinholes occur, the air void behind or beneath the pinhole shall be opened up completely and then completely filled with the specified filler/surfacer material. Next, the coated area around the pinhole repair shall be abraded and the coating reapplied over that area.
3. Perform application detail work per CSM’s current written recommendations and/or drawings.
E. Protection of Coated Surfaces:
1. Items that have been coated shall not be handled, worked on, or otherwise disturbed, until the coating is completely dry and hard. After delivery at the site, and upon permanent erection or installation, shop-coated metalwork shall be recoated or retouched with specified coating when it is necessary to maintain the integrity of the film.
F. Method of Coating Application:
1. Where two or more coats are required, alternate coats shall contain sufficient compatible color additive to act as indicator of coverage, or the alternate coats shall be of contrasting colors. Color additives shall not contain lead, or lead compounds, which may be destroyed or affected by hydrogen sulfide or other corrosive gas, and/or chromium.
2. Mechanical equipment, on which the equipment manufacturer's coating is acceptable, shall be touch-up primed and coated with two coats of the specified coating system to match the color scheduled. Electrical and instrumentation equipment specified in Divisions 26 and 40 shall be coated as specified in paragraph 3.03 Electrical and Instrumentation Equipment and Materials. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 25
3. Coatings shall not be applied to a surface until it has been prepared as specified. The primer or first coat shall be applied by brush to ferrous surfaces that are not blast-cleaned. Coats for blast-cleaned ferrous surfaces and subsequent coats for nonblast-cleaned ferrous surfaces may be either brush or spray applied. After the prime coat is dry, pinholes and holidays shall be marked, repaired in accordance with CSM's recommendations and retested before succeeding coats are applied. Unless otherwise specified, coats for concrete and masonry shall be brushed, rolled, or troweled.
G. Film Thickness and Continuity:
1. WFT of the first coat of the coating system and subsequent coats shall be verified by the Contractor, following application of each coat.
2. The surface area covered per gallon of coating for various types of surfaces shall not exceed those recommended by the CSM. The first coat, referred to as the prime coat, on metal surfaces refers to the first full paint coat and not to solvent wash, grease emulsifiers or other pretreatment applications. Coatings shall be applied to the thickness specified, and in accordance with these specifications. Unless otherwise specified, the average total thickness (dry) of a completed protective coating system on exposed metal surfaces shall be not less than 1.25 mils per coat. The minimum thickness at any point shall not deviate more than 25 percent from the required average. Unless otherwise specified, no less than two coats shall be applied.
3. In testing for continuity of coating about welds, projections (such as bolts and nuts), and crevices, the Engineer shall determine the minimum conductivity for smooth areas of like coating where the dry-mil thickness has been accepted. This conductivity shall be the minimum required for these rough or irregular areas. Pinholes and holidays shall be recoated to the required coverage.
4. The ability to obtain specified film thickness is generally compromised when brush or roller application methods are used and, therefore, more coats may need to be applied to achieve the specified dry film thickness.
5. For concrete substrates, the Contractor shall apply a complete skim coat of the specified filler/surfacer material over the entire substrate prior to application of the coating system. This material shall be applied such that all open air voids and bugholes in the concrete substrate are completely filled prior to coating application. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 26
H. Special Requirements:
1. Before erection, the Contractor shall apply all but the final finish coat to interior surfaces of roof plates, roof rafters and supports, pipe hangers, piping in contact with hangers, and contact surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly. The final coat shall be applied after erection. Structural friction connections and high tensile bolts and nuts shall be coated after erection. Areas damaged during erection shall be hand-cleaned or power-tool cleaned and recoated with primer coat prior to the application of subsequent coats. Touch-up of surfaces shall be performed after installation. Surfaces to be coated shall be clean and dry at the time of application. Except for those to be filled with grout, the underside of equipment bases and supports that have not been galvanized shall be coated with at least two coats of primer specified for system E-2 prior to setting the equipment in place. Provide coating system terminations at leading edges and transitions to other substrates in accordance with the CSM’s recommendations or detail drawings.
I. Electrical and Instrumentation Equipment and Materials:
1. Electrical and instrumentation equipment and materials shall be coated by the equipment manufacturer as specified below. a. Finish: Electrical equipment shall be treated with zinc phosphate, bonderized or otherwise given a rust-preventive treatment. Equipment shall be primed, coated with enamel, and baked. Minimum dry film thickness shall be 3 mils. 1) Unless otherwise specified, instrumentation panels shall be coated with system E-1 for indoor mounting and system EU-1 for outdoor mounting. 2) Before final acceptance, the Contractor shall touch up scratches on equipment with identical color coating. Finish shall be smooth, free of runs, and match existing finish. Prior to touching up scratches, Contractor shall fill them with an appropriate filler material approved by the CSM. b. Color: Exterior color of electrical equipment shall be FS 26463 (ANSI/NSF 61) light gray. Interior shall be painted FS 27880 white. Nonmetallic electrical enclosures and equipment shall be the equipment manufacturer's standard grey color. 1) Exterior color of instrumentation panels and cabinets mounted indoors shall be FS 26463 light gray; unless otherwise specified, exterior color for cabinets mounted outdoors shall be FS 27722, white. Cabinet interiors shall be FS 27880, white. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 27
J. Soluble Salt Contamination of Metallic Substrates:
1. Contractor shall test in accordance with SSPC-TU-4 metallic substrates to be coated that have been exposed to seawater or coastal air or to industrial fallout of particulate or other sources of soluble chlorides (such as wastewater exposure). If testing indicates detrimental levels of soluble salts, those in excess of 25 ppm, the Contractor shall clean and prepare these surfaces to remove the soluble salts.
3.04 CLEANUP
A. General:
1. Upon completion of coating, the Contractor shall remove surplus materials, protective coverings, and accumulated rubbish, and thoroughly clean surfaces and repair overspray or other coating-related damage.
3.05 COATING SYSTEM SPECIFICATION SHEETS (COATSPEC)
A. General:
1. Coating systems for different types of surfaces and general service conditions for which these systems are normally applied are specified on the following COATSPEC sheets. Surfaces shall be coated in accordance with the COATSPEC to the system thickness specified. Coating systems shall be as specified in paragraph 3.06. In case of conflict between the schedule and the COATSPECS, the requirements of the schedule shall prevail.
2. Coating Specification Sheets included in Table A are included this paragraph.
Table A Coating Specification Sheets Coating Coating Material Surface Service Condition System ID E-1 Epoxy Metal Interior; exterior, covered, not exposed to direct sunlight, non-corrosive exposure. E-1-G Epoxy Galvanized Steel Interior; exterior, covered non-corrosive exposure. Do not use in immersion service. E-2 Epoxy Metal Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, moderately corrosive environment, color required. E-3 Epoxy Concrete or Masonry Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, corrosive environment, color required. E-4 Epoxy Concrete, masonry, Interior plaster, gypsum board E-7 Epoxy Plastic Interior; exterior covered, not exposed to direct sunlight. E-8 Clear epoxy Wood Interior COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 28
Table A Coating Specification Sheets Coating Coating Material Surface Service Condition System ID E-9 Epoxy Metal Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, corrosive environment, color required. (Not for Biogenic Sulfide Corrosion areas.) E-9-C Epoxy Concrete or masonry Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, moderately corrosive environment, color required. (Not for Biogenic Sulfide Corrosion areas.) E-10 Polyamidoamine Metal or concrete Below grade (buried). epoxy EF-2 Amine Epoxy Concrete Floors Heavy-duty, wheeled traffic, frequent foot Troweled Floor traffic, wet and moderately corrosive. Coating EA-1 Blended Amine Cured Metal Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, Epoxy corrosive environment, color not required especially for headspace environments that are corrosive due to biogenic sulfide corrosion. EA-2 Blended Amine Cured Concrete or masonry Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, Epoxy corrosive environment, color not required, new construction especially for headspace environments that are corrosive due to biogenic sulfide corrosion. EA-3 Blended Amine Cured Concrete or Masonry Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, Epoxy corrosive environment, color not required, new or existing construction, especially for headspace environments that are corrosive due to biogenic sulfide corrosion. L-1 Latex Concrete, masonry, Interior and Exterior including existing plaster, gypsum board exterior coated concrete. L-2 Latex PVC and CPVC pipe Exterior, direct sunlight exposure. L-3 Latex-Direct to Metal Ferrous Metal Interior or Exterior L-4 Latex Wood Interior M-2 Epoxy mastic or equal Ferrous Metal Interior, corrosive environment, confined enclosures, where minimal surface preparation is possible. EU-1 Zinc-epoxy- Ferrous Metal Exterior, exposed to direct sunlight, polyurethane system moderately corrosive non-immersed. EU-1-FRP Specialty Primer plus Exterior of FRP pipe Exterior, exposed to direct sunlight, non- Polyurethane Finish and tanks, etc. immersed. Coat S-1 Penetrating acrylic Concrete Non-immersed, exposure to moisture and stain, color required sunlight. S-2 Silane/Siloxane or Concrete Floors Wet, non-immersed, non-corrosive. Blended Sealer Interior or exterior for waterproofing. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 29
Table A Coating Specification Sheets Coating Coating Material Surface Service Condition System ID S-3 RTV Silicone Rubber Concrete or Masonry Exterior or Interior – Weathering Based Sealer Walls Exposure, Non-Corrosive. S-4 Acrylic Co-polymer Concrete Floors Wet, non-immersed, non-corrosive, Blend interior for oil and water repellent. CS-1 Corten Sealer Custom Fabricated Exterior, clear, one-part coating, for fencing and guardrails weathering steel
COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 30
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) A. Coating System Identification: E-1 1. Coating Material: Epoxy 2. Surface: Metal 3. Service Condition: Interior; exterior, covered, not exposed to direct sunlight, non-corrosive exposure. 4. Surface Preparation: a. General: Shop primed surfaces which are to be incorporated in the work shall be prepared in the field by cleaning surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-2 (Hand Tool Cleaning). Damaged shop coated areas shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform surface profile of 2.0 to 2.5 mils and spot primed with the primer specified. Shop epoxy primed surfaces shall require light abrasive and vacuum cleaning blasting prior to receiving finish coats. b. Ferrous Metal: Bare ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-6 (Commercial Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform, surface profile of 2.0 to 2.5 mils. Ferrous metal with rust bleeding shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-1 (Solvent Cleaning). Areas of rust penetration shall be spot blasted to SSPC SP-10 (Near White Blast) (to achieve the 2.0- to 2.5-mil surface profile) and spot primed with the specified primer. For ductile iron surfaces, refer to the requirements in paragraph 3.02 Metallic Surfaces. c. Nonferrous and Nonferrous and galvanized metal shall be prepared in accordance with Galvanized SSPC SP-7 (Brush-off Blast Cleaning) to achieve uniform, minimum Metal: surface profile 1.0 to 1.5 mils. 5. Application: Field a. General: Prime coat may be thinned and applied as recommended by the CSM, provided the coating as applied complies with prevailing air pollution control regulations. b. Ferrous Metal: Prime coats shall be an epoxy primer compatible with the specified finish coats and applied in accordance with the written instructions of the CSM.
c. Nonferrous and Nonferrous and galvanized metal shall be cleaned prior to the application Galvanized of the prime coat in accordance with SSPC SP-1 (Solvent Cleaning). Metal: 6. System Thickness: 10 mils dry film. 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: One or more coats at CSM's recommended dry film thickness per coat to achieve the specified system thickness. B. Coating System Identification: E-1-G 1. Coating Material: Epoxy 2. Surface: Galvanized Steel 3. Service Condition: Interior; exterior, covered, non-corrosive exposure. Do not use in immersion service. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 31
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) 4. Surface Preparation: a. General: Damaged galvanized steel areas with exposed ferrous metal and/or rusted shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or Power Tool Cleaned to Bare Metal in accordance with SSPC-SP-11 to achieve a uniform 1.0- to 1.5-milprofile and spot primed with the primer specified. b. Galvanized Nonferrous and galvanized metal shall be prepared in accordance with Metal: SSPC SP-7 (Brush-off Blast Cleaning) impart a 1- to 2-milprofile to the galvanized steel surfaces. Where this cannot be performed, prepare by abrading in accordance with SSPC-SP-3, Power Tool Cleaning to impart a 1.0- to 1.5-mil profile uniformly to the galvanized steel surfaces. 5. Application: Field a. General: Prime coat may be thinned and applied as recommended by the CSM, provided the coating as applied complies with prevailing air pollution control regulations. b. Galvanized Nonferrous and galvanized metal shall be cleaned prior to the application Metal: of the prime coat in accordance with SSPC SP-1 (Solvent Cleaning). 6. System Thickness: 5 to 8 mils dry film. 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: One or more coats at CSM's recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. If the coated galvanized steel is to be exposed to ultraviolet light, apply one polyurethane top coat from coating system EU-1 over the second coat of the two epoxy coats specified. C. Coating System Identification: E-2 1. Coating Material: Epoxy 2. Surface: Metal 3. Service Condition: Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, moderately corrosive environment, color required. 4. Surface Preparation: a. Ferrous Metal: Ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform surface profile of 2.0 to 2.5 mils. Damaged shop coating shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) and vacuum cleaning and spot primed with the primer specified. Shop epoxy primed surfaces shall require light abrasive blasting or abrading prior to receiving finish coats if the maximum recoat time for the primer has been exceeded. This cleaning must produce a uniform 1.0- to 1.5-mil profile in the intact shop primer. For ductile iron surfaces, refer to the requirements in paragraph 3.02 Metallic Surfaces. b. Nonferrous and Nonferrous and galvanized metal shall be prepared in accordance with Galvanized SSPC SP-7 (Brush-off Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform surface profile Metal: of 1.0 to 1.5 mils. Galvanized steel with this E-2 coating system shall not be used in immersion service in wastewater. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 32
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) 5. Application: Field a. General: Prime coat may be thinned and applied as recommended by the CSM, provided the coating as applied complies with prevailing air pollution control regulations. b. Ferrous Metal: Prime coat shall be an epoxy primer compatible with the specified finish coats. c. Nonferrous and Nonferrous and galvanized metal, non-immersed, shall be coated prior to Galvanized the application of the prime coat with a grease emulsifying agent in Metal: accordance with the CSM's written instructions. Nonferrous metal to be immersed shall not be painted. Galvanized metal shall not be immersed even if it is painted. 6. System Thickness: 16 mils dry film. 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: Two or more coats at CSM's recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. D. Coating System Identification: E-3 1. Coating Material: Epoxy 2. Surface: Concrete or masonry 3. Service Condition: Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, corrosive environment, color required. 4. Surface Preparation: a. Concrete: Concrete surfaces shall be allowed to cure for at least 28 days and allowed to dry to the moisture content recommended by the CSM before coating work proceeds. Moisture content may be tested by the Engineer with a Delmhorst Instrument Company moisture detector, or equal. Except as otherwise specified, loose concrete, form oils, surface hardeners, curing compounds, and laitance shall be removed from surfaces by abrasive blasting and chipping, and voids and cracks shall be repaired as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. Surface preparation can be performed by abrasive blast cleaning or water blast cleaning and must achieve a uniform concrete surface profile of CSP3 in accordance with ICRI 03732. After cleaning, air voids or bugholes in the concrete shall be filled with a surfacer or block filler compatible with the specified primer and finish coats. b. Masonry: Masonry surfaces shall be allowed to cure for at least 28 days after being constructed and be allowed to dry to the moisture content recommended by the CSM. Holes or other joint defects shall be filled with a material compatible with the primers and finish coats or shall be filled with masonry mortar that shall cure for at least 28 days. Loose or splattered mortar shall be removed by scraping and chipping. Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water by washing and scrubbing to remove foreign, loose, and deleterious substances. Muriatic acid shall not be used. After cleaning, masonry surfaces shall be sealed or filled with a sealer or block filler compatible with the specified primer. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 33
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) 5. Application: Field a. General: Apply filler/surfacer as recommended by CSM to fill bugholes and air voids or block texture, etc. leaving a uniformly filled surface that does not produce blowholes or outgassing causing pinholing of the coating system. Filler/surfacers shall dry a minimum of 48 hours prior to application of prime coat or as required by the CSM. Prime coat shall be thinned and applied as recommended by the CSM, provided the coating as applied complies with prevailing air pollution control regulations. Drying time between coats shall be as recommended by CSM. 6. System Thickness: 15 mils dry film. 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM’s recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: Two or more coats at CSM’s recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. E. Coating System Identification: E-4 1. Coating Material: Epoxy 2. Surfaces: Concrete, masonry, plaster, gypsum board. 3. Service Condition: Interior 4. Surface Preparation: a. Concrete: Concrete surfaces shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days and allowed to dry to the moisture content recommended by the CSM. Moisture content may be tested by the Engineer with a Delmhorst Instrument Company moisture detector, or equal. Loose concrete, form oils, surface hardeners, curing compounds and laitance shall be removed from surfaces, and voids and cracks shall be repaired as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. Surface preparation shall produce a concrete surface profile of CSP-2 in accordance with ICRI 03732. After cleaning, air voids or bugholes in the concrete shall be filled with a surfacer or block filler compatible with the specified primer and finish coats. b. Masonry: Masonry surfaces shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days. Holes or other joint defects shall be filled with mortar and repointed. Loose or splattered mortar shall be removed by scrapping and chipping. Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water by washing and scrubbing to remove foreign and deleterious substances. Muriatic acid shall not be used. After cleaning, exterior masonry surfaces shall be sealed or filled with a sealer or block filler compatible with the specified primer. c. Plaster: Plaster surfaces shall be dry, clean, and free from grit, loose plaster, and surface irregularities. Cracks and holes shall be repaired with acceptable patching materials, keyed to existing surfaces, and sandpapered smooth. Surfaces shall be cleaned with clean water by washing and scrubbing to remove foreign and deleterious substances. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 34
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) 5. Application: Field a. General: Block Filler shall be multiple component epoxy block filler or an acrylic based or waterborne epoxy based block filler and shall dry a minimum of 48 hours prior to primer application or as required by the CSM. Prime coat shall be thinned and applied as recommended by CSM, provided the coating as applied complies with prevailing air pollution control regulations. Drying time between coats shall be as recommended by CSM. 6. System Thickness: 10 mils dry film, excluding block filler and sealer. 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: One or more coats at CSM's recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. F. Coating System Identification: E-7 1. Coating Material: Epoxy 2. Surface: Plastic 3. Service Condition: Interior; exterior covered, not exposed to direct sunlight. 4. Surface Preparation: Plastic shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-1 (Solvent Cleaning) and light sanding to produce a uniform surface roughness(uniform surface profile of 1.0 to 1.5 mils) on the plastic. 5. Application: Field 6. System Thickness: 5 mils dry film. 7. Coatings: One or more coats at CSM's recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. G. Coating System Identification: E-8 1. Coating Material: Clear epoxy 2. Surface: Wood 3. Service Condition: Interior 4. Surface Preparation: Wood surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, oil or other foreign substances with mineral spirits, scrapers, sandpaper or wire brush. Finished surfaces exposed to view shall be smoothed by planing or sandpapering. Millwork shall be sandpapered and given a coat of the specified exterior primer on sides before installation. Built-in surfaces of windowsills shall be double primed. Glazing rabbets and beads in exterior sash and doors shall be double primed. Small, dry, seasoned knots shall be surfaced scraped, sandpapered, and thoroughly cleaned and shall be given a thin coat of a clear knot sealer before application of the priming coat. Large, open, unseasoned knots, and beads or streaks of pitch shall be scraped off; however, if the pitch is still soft, it shall be removed with mineral spirits or turpentine, and the resinous area shall be coated with knot sealer prior to priming. After priming, holes and imperfections shall be filled with putty or plastic wood, colored to match the finish coat, allowed to dry and sandpapered smooth. 5. Application: Field a. General: Prime coat shall be thinned and applied as recommended by the CSM, provided the coating as applied complies with prevailing air pollution control regulations. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 35
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) 6. System Thickness: 4 mils 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM’s recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: One or more coats at CSM’s recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. H. Coating System Identification: E-9 1. Coating Material: Epoxy 2. Surface: Metal 3. Service Condition: Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, corrosive environment, color required. (Not for Biogenic Sulfide Corrosion areas.) 4. Surface Preparation: a. Ferrous Metal: Ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform surface profile of 2.5 to 3.0 mils. Shop primed surfaces which are to be incorporated in the work shall be prepared in the field by cleaning surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-2 (Hand Tool Cleaning) or SSPC-SP-3 (Power Tool Cleaning). Damaged shop coating shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform surface profile of 2.5 to 3.0 mils and spot primed with the primer specified. Shop epoxy primed surfaces shall require light abrasive blasting or abrading to achieve a uniform surface profile of 1.0 to 1.5 mils in the intact shop primer prior to receiving finish coats if the maximum recoat time for the primer has been exceeded. For ductile iron surfaces, refer to the requirements in paragraph 3.02 Metallic Surfaces. b. Nonferrous and Nonferrous and galvanized metal shall be prepared in accordance with Galvanized SSPC SP-7 (Brush-off Blast Cleaning) to achieve a 1.5- to 2.0-mil profile Metal: that is uniform. Galvanized steel with this E-2 coating system shall not be used in immersion service in wastewater. 5. Application: Field a. General: Prime coat may be thinned and applied as recommended by the CSM, provided the coating as applied complies with prevailing air pollution control regulations. b. Ferrous Metal: Prime coat shall be an epoxy primer compatible with the specified finish coats. c. Nonferrous and Nonferrous and galvanized metal, non-immersed, shall be coated prior to Galvanized the application of the prime coat with a grease emulsifying agent in Metal: accordance with the CSM’s written instructions. Non-ferrous metal to be immersed shall not be painted. Galvanized metal shall not be immersed even if it is painted with this coating system. 6. System Thickness: 15 to 20 mils dry film. 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM’s recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: Two or more coats at CSM’s recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 36
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) I. Coating System Identification: E-9-C 1. Coating Material: Epoxy 2. Surface: Concrete or masonry 3. Service Condition: Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, moderately corrosive environment, color required. (Not for Biogenic Sulfide Corrosion areas.) 4. Surface Preparation: a. Concrete: Concrete surfaces shall be allowed to cure for at least 28 days following initial concrete placement and allowed to dry to the moisture content recommended by the CSM before coating work proceeds. Moisture content may be tested by the Engineer with a Delmhorst Instrument Company moisture detector, or equal. Except as otherwise specified, loose concrete, form oils, surface hardeners, curing compounds, and laitance shall be removed from surfaces by abrasive blasting and chipping, and voids and cracks shall be repaired as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. Cleaning can be performed using abrasive blast cleaning or water blast cleaning methods to produce a minimum concrete surface profile of CSP-3 in accordance with ICRI 03732. After cleaning, all air voids or bugholes in the concrete shall be filled with a surfacer or block filler compatible with the specified primer and finish coats. b. Masonry: Masonry surfaces shall be allowed to cure for at least 28 days after being constructed and be allowed to dry to the moisture content recommended by the CSM. Holes or other joint defects shall be filled with a material compatible with the primers and finish coats or shall be filled with masonry mortar that shall cure for at least 28 days. Loose or splattered mortar shall be removed by scraping and chipping. Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water by washing and scrubbing to remove foreign and deleterious substances. Muriatic acid shall not be used. After cleaning, masonry surfaces shall be sealed or filled with a sealer or block filler compatible with the specified primer. 5. Application: Field a. General: Apply filler/surfacer as recommended by CSM to fill bugholes and air voids or block texture, etc. leaving a uniformly filled surface that does not produce blowholes or outgassing causing pinholing of the coating system. Filler/Surfacers shall dry a minimum of 48 hours prior to application of prime coat or as required by the CSM. Prime coat shall be thinned and applied as recommended by the CSM, provided the coating as applied complies with prevailing air pollution control regulations. Drying time between coats shall be as recommended by CSM. 6. System Thickness: 16 to 20 mils dry film. 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: Two or more coats at CSM's recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 37
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) J. Coating System Identification: E-10 1. Coating Material: Polyamidoamine epoxy 2. Surface: Metal or concrete 3. Service Condition: Below grade (buried, exterior) in contact with soil 4. Surface Preparation: a. Ferrous Metal: Ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning). b. Nonferrous Nonferrous and galvanized metal shall be prepared in accordance with Metal: SSPC SP-7 (Brush-off Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform surface profile of 2.0 to 2.5 mils. c. Concrete: Concrete surfaces shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days and allowed to dry to the moisture content recommended by the CSM. Moisture content may be tested by the Engineer with a Delmhorst Instrument Company moisture detector, or equal. Except as otherwise specified, loose concrete and laitance shall be removed from surfaces by abrasive blasting and chipping, and voids and cracks shall be repaired as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete surface preparation can be performed using abrasive blast cleaning or water blast cleaning methods and must achieve a concrete surface profile of CSP-3 in accordance with ICRI 03732. 5. Application: Field 6. System Thickness: 16 mils 7. Coating: Two or more coats at CSM's recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. K. Coating System Identification: EF-2 1. Coating Material: Epoxy Resin Based Floor Coating 2. Surface: Concrete Floors 3. Service Condition: For interior – heavy-duty exposure applications. Frequent, heavy wheeled traffic and moderately corrosive exposure conditions. Mainly for wear resistance, impact resistance, protection of concrete, and aesthetics. Non- slip texture can be varied as needed. Test patches to be installed for deciding on level of non-slip texture required. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 38
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) 4. Surface Preparation: Concrete floor slabs shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days and must meet a moisture vapor transmission rate of less than 3.0 lbs. of moisture per 24 hours per 1,000 SF in accordance with ASTM F1869. It is also essential that a well-sealed and intact vapor barrier has been installed beneath all slabs on grade to receive this floor coating system. Except as otherwise specified, loose concrete, curing compounds, and laitance shall be removed by abrasive blast cleaning or preferably by shotblasting. Surface preparation shall produce a clean sound concrete substrate with a concrete surface profile of CSP-7 minimum in accordance with ICRI 03732. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP-13. Additionally, all coating termination and transition details shall be prepared in accordance with the CSM’s standard detail drawings. This includes coating termination details, coating transitions at vertical and vertical to horizontal corners, coating terminations at joints, concrete crack treatment, pipe penetration treatment, coating terminations at metal embedments in the concrete substrate, and other details. The CSM’s standard detail drawings shall be submitted for all such coating applications. If standard details are not available for a given detail treatment, the CSM shall be required to produce one at no additional cost to SPU, the engineer, or any other party. If wet abrasive or water blasting surface preparation methods were used, the concrete substrate shall be allowed to dry under warm conditions (minimum of 75 degrees F) for at least 5 days prior to coating application. Following surface preparation work and dry-out, all surfaces to be coated shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all loose dirt, dust, or other loose materials. 5. Application: Carefully follow CSM’s written instructions regarding mixing, thinning, application, recoat limitations (windows) and curing of coating materials. 6. System Thickness: 250 mils dry film. 7. Coatings: a. Primer: Brush or roller apply at 6.0 – 10.0 mils DFT. b. Trowel Applied: Trowel apply to 230 – 236 mils. c. Top: Brush or roller apply at 8.0 – 10.0 mils. Cumulative dry film thickness. Install all termination and transition details in accordance with the CSM’s detail drawings. L. Coating System Identification: EA-1 1. Coating Material: Blended Amine Cured Epoxy 2. Surface: Metal 3. Service Condition: Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, corrosive environment, color not required especially for headspace environments that are corrosive due to biogenic sulfide corrosion. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 39
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) 4. Surface Preparation: a. Ferrous Metal: Ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform surface profile of 3.0 to 3.5 mils. Blast Cleaning shall produce a minimum surface profile of 3.0 mils. Shop primed surfaces which are to be incorporated in the work shall be prepared in the field by cleaning surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP- 11 (Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal). Damaged shop coated areas shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) and spot primed with the primer specified. Shop epoxy primed surfaces shall require light abrasive blasting and blow down cleaning prior to receiving finish coats. Cast or ductile iron surfaces to be coated shall be abrasive blast cleaned to a clean, gray uniform metal appearance free of variations in color and loose materials. Ductile iron surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with paragraph 3.02 Metallic Surfaces. b. Nonferrous and Nonferrous and galvanized metal shall be prepared in accordance with Galvanized SSPC SP-7 (Brush-off Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform surface profile Metal: of 2.0 to 2.5 mils. Galvanized metal should generally not be used in these environments. 5. Application: Field a. General: Prime coat may be thinned and applied as recommended by the CSM, provided the coating as applied complies with prevailing air pollution control regulations. Drying time between coats shall be as specified by the CSM for the site conditions. If the maximum recoat time is exceeded, surface preparation shall require solvent washing, light abrasive blasting, or other procedures per CSM's instructions. b. Ferrous Metal: If shop priming is required or field priming is necessary, the prime coat shall be an epoxy primer compatible with the specified coating system. Generally, the EA-1 coating system is self-priming and does not require a primer unless there is a special reason to prime the steel to hold the blast cleaning from rusting back. 6. System Thickness: 30 to 40 mils dry film. 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness only if required by special circumstances. b. Finish: One or more coats at CSM's recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. c. Testing: Holiday detection shall be performed over 100% of the coated surface area to identify any holidays or pinholes that must be repaired. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 40
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) d. Pinhole and Pinholes and holidays identified by Holiday Detection shall be repaired as Holiday Repair follows: Procedure: • Using a pencil grinder, remove a ½-inch diameter area of the coating system material back to the ferrous metal substrate. The metal must be shiny • Aggressively sand or abrade the intact coating system surface 2 inches around the complete periphery of the ½-inch diameter removal area to produce a uniform 6 to 8 mils profile • Vacuum clean the prepared area to remove all dust and dirt to achieve a clean, sound surface. Tape the peripheral area to prevent coating application onto unprepared surfaces • Brush apply one coat of the finish coating material. Following proper recoat cure time, apply additional coats of the finish coating system to achieve 60 mils DFT at the coating removal area and feather the coating onto the roughened coated surfaces to form a neat repair outline M. Coating System Identification: EA-2 1. Coating Material: Blended Amine Cured Epoxy 2. Surface: Concrete or masonry 3. Service Condition: Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, corrosive environment, color not required, new construction especially for headspace environments that are corrosive due to biogenic sulfide corrosion. 4. Surface Preparation: All coating termination and transition details shall be prepared in accordance with the CSM’s standard detail drawings. This includes coating termination details, coating transitions at vertical and vertical to horizontal corners, coating terminations at joints, concrete crack treatment, pipe penetration treatment, coating terminations at metal embedments in the concrete substrate, and other details. The CSM’s standard detail drawings shall be submitted for all such coating applications. If standard details are not available for a given detail treatment, the CSM shall be required to produce one at no additional cost to SPU, the engineer, or any other party. If wet abrasive or water blasting surface preparation methods were used, the concrete substrate shall be allowed to dry under warm conditions (minimum of 75 degrees F) for at least 5 days prior to coating application. Following surface preparation work and dry-out, all surfaces to be coated shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all loose dirt, dust, or other loose materials. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 41
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) a. Concrete: Concrete surfaces shall be allowed to cure for at least 28 days and allowed to dry to the moisture content recommended by the CSM. Moisture content may be tested by the Engineer with a Delmhorst Instrument Company moisture detector, or equal. Except as otherwise specified, loose concrete, form oils, surface hardeners, curing compounds, and laitance shall be removed from surfaces by abrasive blasting and chipping, and voids and cracks shall be repaired as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. Surface Preparation must open up all shelled over air voids or bugholes to expose fully the void’s depth, width, and length. Concrete shall be abraded to achieve a uniform concrete surface profile of CSP-5 in accordance with ICRI 03732. After surface preparation has been accepted, a complete skim coat of the specified filler surfacer shall be applied over all concrete surfaces and all bugholes (air voids) shall be completely filled using this same material. The filler/surfacer material shall be applied as a complete parge coat of the substrate. If the parge coat (filler/surfacer material) is non-polymer modified, it must be brush blast cleaned following adequate cure per CSM’s instructions to produce a uniform anchor pattern of CSP-4 in accordance with ICRI 03732 prior to coating application. b. Masonry: Masonry surfaces shall be allowed to cure for at least 28 days. Holes or other joint defects shall be filled with mortar and repointed and allowed to cure for 28 days or shall be filled with a repair material compatible with the coating system that does not require hydration cure time. Loose or splattered mortar shall be removed by scrapping and chipping. Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water by washing and scrubbing to remove foreign and deleterious substances. Muriatic acid shall not be used. After cleaning, masonry surfaces shall be skim coated with a surfacer or block filler compatible with the specified coating system. 5. Application: Field a. General: Surfacer or filler shall be applied per CSM’s recommendations prior to application of coating to fill all bugholes and voids and create a complete parge coat of the prepared substrate. This parge coat shall completely fill all bugholes and voids in the substrate, and will also completely cover the substrate unless specified otherwise above such filled voids by 1/8 inch (125 mils) of thickness. Drying time between coats shall be as specified by the CSM for the site conditions. If the maximum recoat time is exceeded, surface preparation shall require solvent washing, light abrasive blasting, or other procedures per CSM’s instructions. 6. System Thickness: 60 mils dry film in addition to the parge coat. 7. Coatings: a. Finish: One or more coats at CSM’s recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. b. Testing: Holiday detection shall be performed over 100% of the coated surface area to identify any holidays or pinholes, which could compromise coating system performance. Holiday testing to be performed after application and adequate cure of the spray applied epoxy coating material. Holiday detection shall be performed in accordance with NACE RP0188. Pinholes and holidays identified by Holiday Detection shall be repaired as follows: COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 42
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) c. Pinhole and • Using a grinder or other suitable power tool, remove the coating Holiday Repair system at all pinholes or holidays in an area at least 2 inches in Procedure: diameter or in both dimensions around the defect back to the concrete substrate. • Chip out and remove the concrete to expose the full dimensions in all three directions of the air void responsible for the defect. • Aggressively abrade or sand the intact coating system surface at least 3 inches beyond the removal area in all directions to produce a uniform 6- to 8-mil profile in the intact coating system. • Vacuum clean the prepared area to remove all dust, dirt, etc. leaving clean sound surfaces. • Tape to mask the periphery of the prepared intact coating area to prevent coating repair application onto the prepared area. • Using a putty knife or other suitable tool, fill the opened void with the approved filler/surfacer material completely and strike-off. Allow to cure per CSM’s recommendations. • Apply the coating system in the number of coats necessary to achieve the specified 60 mils DFT over the defect and coating removal area and feather the coating onto the abraded coated surfaces around the removal area to avoid a lip and to achieve a neat repair outline. Allow to cure properly. N. Coating System Identification: EA-3 1. Coating Material: Blended Amine Cured Epoxy 2. Surface: Concrete or masonry 3. Service Condition: Immersed, nonpotable; non-immersed, corrosive environment, color not required, new or existing construction, especially for headspace environments that are corrosive due to biogenic sulfide corrosion. 4. Surface Preparation: All coating termination and transition details shall be prepared in accordance with the CSM’s standard detail drawings. This includes coating termination details, coating transitions at vertical and vertical to horizontal corners, coating terminations at joints, concrete crack treatment, pipe penetration treatment, coating terminations at metal embedments in the concrete substrate, and other details. The CSM’s standard detail drawings shall be submitted for all such coating applications. If standard details are not available for a given detail treatment, the CSM shall be required to produce one at no additional cost to SPU, the engineer, or any other party. If wet abrasive or water blasting surface preparation methods were used, the concrete substrate shall be allowed to dry under warm conditions (minimum of 75 degrees F) for at least 5 days prior to coating application. Following surface preparation work and dry-out, all surfaces to be coated shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all loose dirt, dust, or other loose materials. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 43
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) a. Concrete: Concrete surfaces shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days and allowed to dry to the moisture content recommended by the CSM. Moisture content may be tested by the Engineer with a Delmhorst Instrument Company moisture detector, or equal. Except as otherwise specified, loose concrete, form oils, surface hardeners, curing compounds, and laitance shall be removed from surfaces by abrasive blasting and chipping, and voids and cracks shall be repaired as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete shall be abraded also to achieve a uniform concrete surface profile of CSP 5 minimum. If the parge coat (filler/surfacer material) is non-polymer modified, it shall be brush blasted following adequate cure per the CSM’s instructions to produce a uniform concrete surface profile of CSP-4 in accordance with ICRI 03732 prior to coating application. After cleaning, air voids or bugholes in the concrete shall be filled with a surfacer or block filler. The filler/surfacer material shall be applied as a complete parge coat of the substrate. For existing concrete that has been degraded, apply a skim coat of a surfacer or filler material to restore the substrate to a coatable condition. Be certain the filler surfacer material is compatible with the coating system. b. Masonry: Masonry surfaces shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days. Holes or other joint defects shall be filled with mortar and repointed. Loose or splattered mortar shall be removed by scrapping and chipping. Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water by washing and scrubbing to remove foreign and deleterious substances. Muriatic acid shall not be used. After cleaning, masonry surfaces shall be sealed or filled with sealer or block filler compatible with the specified coating system. 5. Application: Field a. General: Surfacer or filler shall be applied and dry per CSM’s recommendations prior to application of coating. Drying time between filler/surfacer and coating system shall be as specified by the CSM for the site conditions. If the maximum recoat time is exceeded, surface preparation shall require solvent washing, light abrasive blasting, or other procedures per CSM's instructions. The parge coat shall completely fill all bugholes and voids in the substrate and it will also completely cover the substrate unless specified otherwise above such filled voids by 1/8 inch of thickness. 6. System Thickness: 125 mils dry film (or 1/8 inch) in addition to the parge coat. 7. Coatings: a. Primer: Self-priming. b. Finish: One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness – trowel applied. c. Testing: Holiday detection shall be performed over 100% of the coated surface area to identify any holidays or pinholes that could compromise coating system performance. Holiday detection shall be performed after adequate cure of the spray applied epoxy coating material. Holiday detection shall be performed in accordance with NACE RP0188. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 44
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) d. Pinhole and Pinholes and holidays identified by Holiday Detection shall be repaired as Holiday Repair follows: Procedure: • Using a grinder or other suitable power tool, remove the coating system at all pinholes or holidays in an area at least 2 inches in diameter or in both dimensions around the defect back to the concrete substrate. • Chip out and remove the concrete to expose the full dimensions in all three directions of the air void responsible for the defect. • Aggressively abrade or sand the intact coating system surface at least 3-inches beyond the removal area in all directions to produce a uniform 6- to 8-mil profile in the intact coating system. • Vacuum clean the prepared area to remove all dust, dirt, etc. leaving clean sound surfaces. • Tape to mask the periphery of the prepared intact coating area to prevent coating repair application onto the prepared area. • Using a putty knife or other suitable tool, fill the opened void with the approved filler/surfacer material completely and strike-off. Allow to cure per CSM’s recommendations. • Apply the coating system in the number of coats necessary to achieve the specified 60 mils DFT over the defect and coating removal area and feather the coating onto the abraded coated surfaces around the removal area to avoid a lip and to achieve a neat repair outline. Allow to cure properly. O. Coating System Identification: EU-1-FRP 1. Coating Material: Specialty Primer plus Polyurethane Finish Coat 2. Surface: Exterior of FRP Pipe and Tanks, etc. 3. Service Condition: Exterior, exposed to direct sunlight, non-immersed. 4. Surface Preparation: a. General: Clean to remove loose dirt, dust, or other contaminants. Prepare surfaces by sanding to produce roughness to achieve a uniform, minimum surface profile of 1.5 to 2.0 mils. Solvent clean thoroughly using solvent as recommended by the CSM. Thoroughly clean to remove loose debris by vacuum cleaning. 5. Application: Field a. General: Apply primer coat and thin as recommended by the CSM provided the coating applied complies with prevailing air pollution control regulations. Apply finish coat as recommended by the CSM. 6. System Thickness: Primer to 2 to 4 mils and finish coat is 2 to 3 mils DFT. 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness per coat to meet the specified system thickness. P. Coating System Identification: L-1 1. Coating Material: Latex 2. Surfaces: Concrete, masonry, plaster, gypsum board. 3. Service Condition: Interior and exterior including existing exterior coated concrete. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 45
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) 4. Surface Preparation: a. Concrete: Concrete surfaces shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days and allowed to dry to the moisture content recommended by the CSM. Moisture content may be tested by the Engineer with a Delmhorst Instrument Company moisture detector, or equal. Loose concrete and laitance shall be removed from surfaces, and voids and cracks shall be repaired as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. b. Existing Coated Remove all loose coating down to a sound substrate or intact, well- Concrete: adhered existing coating by scraping or other means. Then, abrade all surfaces to achieve a 0.5- to 1.5-mil uniform profile and vacuum clean to remove all loose dirt, paint chips, and dirt. c. Masonry: Masonry surfaces shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days. Holes or other joint defects shall be filled with mortar and repointed. Loose or splattered mortar shall be removed by scraping and chipping. Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water by washing and scrubbing to remove foreign and deleterious substances. Muriatic acid shall not be used. After cleaning, masonry surfaces shall be filled with block filler compatible with the specified primer. d. Plaster: Plaster surfaces shall be dry, clean, and free from grit, loose plaster, and surface irregularities. Cracks and holes shall be repaired with acceptable patching materials, keyed to existing surfaces, and sandpapered smooth. Surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water by washing and scrubbing to remove foreign and deleterious substances. After cleaning, surfaces shall be sealed with a compatible sealer. e. Gypsum Tape joints and spackled nail heads shall be sanded smooth and dusted. Wallboard: Seal with PVA sealer for interior uses only. 5. Application: Field a. General: Sealer or filler shall dry a minimum of 48 hours prior to primer application. Drying time between coats shall be as recommended by CSM. 6. System Thickness: 4 mils dry film. 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: Two or more coats at CSM's recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. Q. Coating System Identification: L-2 1. Coating Material: Latex 2. Surface: PVC and CPVC pipe. 3. Service Condition: Exterior, direct sunlight exposure. 4. Surface Preparation: Plastic pipe shall be cleaned with solvent compatible with the specified primer and sanded to roughen surfaces to achieve a uniform surface profile of 1.0 to 1.5 mils. Vacuum clean after sanding to remove all loose dust, plastic particles, and dirt. 5. Application: Field 6. System Thickness: 3 mils dry film. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 46
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: One or more coats at CSM's recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. R. Coating System Identification: L-3 1. Coating Material: Latex – Direct to Metal 2. Surface: Ferrous Metal 3. Service Condition: Interior or Exterior 4. Surface Preparation: a. Ferrous Metals: Bare ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-6 (Commercial Blast Cleaning) unless specified otherwise. Impart a 1.5- to 2.0-mil profile to substrate. Ferrous metal with rust bleeding shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP-1 (Solvent Cleaning). Areas of rust penetration shall be spot blasted to SSPC SP-10 (Near White Blast) and spot primed with the specified primer. Shop primed surfaces which are to be incorporated in the work shall be prepared in the field by cleaning surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-2 (Hand Tool Cleaning) or SSPC-SP-3 (Power Tool Cleaning). b. Nonferrous and Galvanized or nonferrous surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with Galvanized SSPC SP-1 (Solvent Cleaning) after Brush Blast Cleaning in accordance Metal: with SSPC-SP-7. 5. Application: Field 6. System Thickness: 6 to 8 mils dry film excluding sealer 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: Two or more coats at CSM's recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. S. Coating System Identification: L-4 1. Coating Material: Latex 2. Surface: Wood 3. Service Condition: Interior 4. Surface Preparation: Wood surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, oil or other foreign substances with mineral spirits, scrapers, sandpaper or wire brush. Finished surfaces exposed to view shall be smoothed by planing or sandpapering. Millwork shall be sandpapered and given a coat of the specified primer on all sides before installation. Built-in surfaces of windowsills shall be double primed. Glazing rabbets and beads in exterior sash and doors shall be double primed. Small, dry, seasoned knots shall be surfaced scraped, sandpapered, and thoroughly cleaned and shall be given a thin coat of an acceptable knot sealer before application of the priming coat. Large, open, unseasoned knots, and beads or streaks of pitch shall be scraped off; however, if the pitch is still soft, it shall be removed with mineral spirits or turpentine, and the resinous area shall be coated with knot sealer prior to priming. After priming, holes and imperfections shall be filled with putty or plastic wood, colored to match the finish coat, allowed to dry and sandpapered smooth. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 47
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) 5. Application: Field 6. System Thickness: 4.0 mils dry film. 7. Coatings: a. Primer: One coat at CSM's recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: Two or more coats at CSM's recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. T. Coating System Identification: M-2 1. Coating Material: Epoxy mastic or equal 2. Surface: Ferrous Metal 3. Service Condition: Interior, corrosive environment, confined enclosures, where minimal surface preparation is possible. 4. Surface Preparation: a. Ferrous Metal: All uncoated ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-3 (Power Tool Cleaning), or SSPC-SP-11 (Power to Cleaning to Bare Metal) prior to assembly. Surface preparation to achieve a uniform surface profile of 2.0 to 2.5 mils. Shop primed ferrous metal surfaces and fabricated assemblies shall be clean and dry prior to the application of field coats. Following assembly, the Contractor shall smooth welds and prominences using power tools prior to the application of the field applied coatings. 5. Application: Field a. General: Prior to the application of field applied coatings, welds, back-to-back angles, sharp or rough edges and weld splatter shall be brushed with the specified prime coat and allowed to cure overnight. 6. System Thickness: 15 mils dry film. 7. Coatings: a. Prime: One coat of the CSM’s recommended dry film thickness. b. Finish: One or more coats of CSM’s recommended dry film thickness per coat to the specified system thickness. U. Coating System Identification: S-1 1. Coating Material: Penetrating acrylic stain, color required. 2. Surface: Concrete 3. Service Condition: Non-immersed, exposure to moisture and sunlight. 4. Surface Preparation: Brush-off blast or industry standard acid etch or other preparation as approved by the CSM. 5. Application: a. General: Drying time between coats shall be as specified by the CSM for the site conditions. b. Coatings: Minimum of two coats overall (coat as many times as required to achieve desired color). 6. System Thickness: 200 square feet per gallon maximum or as recommended by the CSM. 7. Color Selection: As approved by the Engineer consistent with neighborhood selection. The Contractor to price materials based on custom color. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 48
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) V. Coating System Identification: S-2 1. Coating Material: Penetrating Water Repellent (Clear and Non-Film Building) 2. Surface: Concrete Floors 3. Service Condition: Exterior and Interior. 4. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of all traces of dirt, dust, efflorescence, mold, salt, grease, oil, asphalt, laitance, curing compounds, paint, coatings, and other foreign materials by brush-off blast, water blasting, and/or chemical cleaners or other preparation as approved by the CSM. a. Concrete Concrete surfaces shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days and allowed to dry to the moisture content recommended by the CSM. Moisture content may be tested by the Engineer with a Delmhorst Instrument Company moisture detector, or equal. Loose concrete and laitance shall be removed from surfaces, and voids and cracks shall be repaired as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 5. Application: a. General: Drying time before placing into service shall be as recommended by the CSM for site conditions. 6. System Coverage: Follow CSM’s recommendations. 7. Color Selection: Clear. W. Coating System Identification: S-3 1. Coating Material: Penetrating Water Repellent (Clear & Non-Film Building) 2. Surface: Concrete and Masonry Walls 3. Service Condition: Exterior and Interior – For Anti-Graffiti Applications 4. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of all traces of dirt, dust, efflorescence, mold, salt, grease, oil, asphalt, laitance, curing compounds, paint, coatings, and other foreign materials by brush-off blast, water blasting, and/or chemical cleaners or other preparation as approved by the CSM. a. Concrete Concrete surfaces shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days and allowed to dry to the moisture content recommended by the CSM. Moisture content may be tested by the Engineer with a Delmhorst Instrument Company moisture detector, or equal. Loose concrete and laitance shall be removed from surfaces, and voids and cracks shall be repaired as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. b. Masonry: Masonry surfaces shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days. Holes or other joint defects shall be filled with mortar and repointed. Loose or splattered mortar shall be removed by scraping and chipping. Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water by washing and scrubbing to remove foreign and deleterious substances. Muriatic acid shall not be used. 5. Application: a. General: Drying time before placing into service shall be as recommended by the CSM for site conditions. 6. System Coverage: Follow CSM’s recommendations. 7. Color Selection: Clear. X. Coating System Identification: S-4 1. Coating Material: Penetrating Oil and Water Repellent (Non-Film Forming) 2. Surface: Concrete Floors COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 49
Coating System Specification Sheets (COATSPEC) 3. Service Condition: Exterior and Interior 4. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of all traces of dirt, dust, efflorescence, mold, salt, grease, oil, asphalt, laitance, curing compounds, paint, coatings, and other foreign materials by brush-off blast, water blasting, and/or chemical cleaners or other preparation as approved by the CSM. a. Concrete Concrete surfaces shall be allowed to age for at least 28 days and allowed to dry to the moisture content recommended by the CSM. Moisture content may be tested by the Engineer with a Delmhorst Instrument Company moisture detector, or equal. Loose concrete and laitance shall be removed from surfaces, and voids and cracks shall be repaired as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 5. Application: a. General: Drying time before placing into service shall be as recommended by the CSM for site conditions. b. Coatings: One coat, flood horizontal surface so coating ponds for at least 60 seconds. Broom over all puddles thoroughly until complete penetration is achieved 6. System Thickness: Follow CSM’s recommendations. 7. Color Selection: Clear. Y. Coating System Identification: CS-1 1. Coating Material: 2. Surface: Weathering (Corten) steel 3. Service Condition: Exterior 4. Surface Preparation: Prepare surfaces in accordance with coating manufacturer’s written instructions. 5. Application: Apply with brush directly to surface to a dry film thickness measured between 7 and 10 microns. 6. General: Meet the following: Abrasion resistance using ASTM D3363-05, Salt Fog Test ASTM B117, Chemical resistance ASTM D1308 7. Coatings: Apply with brush directly to surface. 8. System Thickness: Dry film thickness between 7.0 and 10.0-microns. 9. Color Selection: Clear, colorless 10. Sheen Standard, flat sheen
3.06 COATING SYSTEMS SCHEDULE (FINISH SCHEDULE)
A. General:
1. Specific coating systems, colors, and finishes for rooms, galleries, piping, equipment, and other items that are coated or have other architectural finishes are specified in the following coating system schedule. Unless otherwise specified in the coating system schedule, the word “interior” shall mean the inside of a building or structure, and the word “exterior” shall mean outside exposure to weather elements.
COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 50
Coating Systems Schedule (Finish Schedule) Location/Surface Coating System Standard Color Identification A. General: All Surfaces not Specified by Area or Structure 1. Structural Steel, Metal Decking, and Galvanized E-2 White Acoustical Decking 2. Equipment and Metal Appurtenances a. Misc. Equipment, non immersed, unless otherwise specified 1) Indoors E-1 TBD 2) Outdoors EU-1 TBD b. Misc. Equipment, immersed, unless otherwise E-2 TBD specified c. Stainless Steel Sluice Gates Uncoated d. Electric Actuators Factory Coating Manufacturer color e. Valve Heads and Operators E-1 Red f. Pumps Factory Coating Manufacturer color g. Electrical switchgear panels, unit substations, See motor control centers, power transformers, paragraph 3.03 Electri distribution centers, and relay panels; indoors cal and and outdoors Instrumentation Equipment and Materials h. Instrumentation panels, graphic indicating See panels, indicating and transmitting field panels, paragraph 3.03 Electri unless otherwise specified cal and Instrumentation Equipment and Materials i. Bollards EU-1 OSHA Safety Yellow j. Generators Factory Coating Sandstone (Cummins) 3. Conduit, Piping and Ductwork a. Ferrous, non-ferrous and galvanized piping, and appurtenant hangers and supports, non- immersed, unless otherwise specified. 1) Indoors – noncorrosive E-1 TBD 2) Outdoors – noncorrosive EU-1 TBD 3) Indoors – in corrosive environment EA-1 TBD b. Ferrous piping, appurtenant and supports, E-2 TBD immersed c. Conduit, outlet and junction boxes, lighting Uncoated transformers, lighting, communication and small power panels, control stations, piping, lagged ductwork, appurtenant hangers, clamps, and supports unless otherwise specified. d. Exposed ventilation ductwork Uncoated COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 51
Coating Systems Schedule (Finish Schedule) Location/Surface Coating System Standard Color Identification e. Insulated pipe jacketing Uncoated -- f. Plastic, fiberglass and flexible conduit and piping 1) Exposed to direct sunlight L-2 TBD 2) Not exposed to direct sunlight E-7 TBD 4. Door and Door Frames a. Doors unless otherwise specified 1) Ferrous metal a) Indoors E-1 Match wall color b) Outdoors EU-1 Match wall color 2) Aluminum Uncoated -- 3) Louvers Factory Match wall color b. Door frames unless otherwise specified 1) Ferrous metal a) Indoors E-1 Match wall color b) Outdoors EU-1 Match wall color 2) Aluminum Uncoated -- 5. Gratings, Floor Plates, Manhole Covers, and Hatches a. Unless otherwise specified Uncoated 6. Handrails a. Steel handrails, exterior EU-1 Match wall color 7. Aluminum and Stainless Steel Stairs, Ladders, Platforms, and Supports Except Tread and Grating a. Unless otherwise specified Uncoated 8. Aluminum Flashing, Light Standards, Supports, and Louvers a. Indoors and outdoors, unless otherwise Uncoated -- specified 9. Aluminum and Stainless Steel Hatches Uncoated B. Diversion Structure, Discharge Structure, and Uncoated maintenance holes So C. Headbox 1. Exterior Walls Uncoated 2. Interior Walls Uncoated D. Pumping Station 1. Exterior Walls Uncoated 2. Interior Walls Uncoated E. Electrical Building 1. Canopies – Metal Fabrications E-1-G Match wall color 2. Flashing Factory Match wall color COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 52
Coating Systems Schedule (Finish Schedule) Location/Surface Coating System Standard Color Identification 3. Electrical Room a. Floors EF-2 Grey b. Walls E-4 White c. Ceilings E-4 White 4. Toilet Room a. Floors EF-2 Grey b. Walls E-4 White c. Ceilings E-4 White 5. Seat and Retaining Wall S-3 Clear F. Custom Fencing and Guardrails 1. Vertical Pickets CS-1 Clear 2. Horizontal Brackets, welds and supports CS-1 Clear
3.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING BY SPU
A. General:
1. Inspection by SPU or others does not limit the Contractor’s or CSA’s responsibilities for quality workmanship or quality control as specified or as required by the CSM’s instructions. Inspection by SPU is in addition to any inspection required to be performed by the Contractor.
2. SPU may perform, or contract with an inspection agency to perform, quality control inspection and testing of the coating work covered by this Section. These inspections may include the following: a. Inspect materials upon receipt to ensure that are supplied by the CSM. b. Inspect to verify that specified storage conditions for the coating system materials, solvents and abrasives are provided. c. Inspect and record findings for the degree of cleanliness of substrates. d. Inspect and record the pH of concrete and metal substrates. e. Inspect and record substrate profile (anchor pattern) f. Measure and record ambient air and substrate temperature. g. Measure and record relative humidity. h. Check for the presence of substrate moisture in the concrete. i. Inspect to verify that correct mixing of coating system materials is performed in accordance with CSM’s instructions. j. Inspect, confirm, and record that the "pot life" of coating system materials is not exceeded during installation. Inspect to verify that recoat limitations for coating materials are not exceeded. k. Perform adhesion testing. COATINGS SECTION 09 90 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 53
l. Measure and record the thickness of the coating system. m. Inspect to verify proper curing of the coating system in accordance with the CSM's instructions. n. Perform holiday or continuity testing for coatings that will be immersed or coatings that will be exposed to aggressively corrosive conditions.
3.08 FINAL INSPECTION
A. General
1. Contractor shall conduct a final inspection to determine whether coating system work meets the requirements of the specifications.
2. The Engineer will subsequently conduct a final inspection with the Contractor to determine the work is in conformance with requirements of the contract documents.
3. Any rework required shall be marked. Such areas shall be recleaned and repaired as specified at no additional cost to SPU.Contactor shall provide to the Owner, 2-gallons of top coat paint for each coating system used on this project for future touch up.
END OF SECTION 09 90 00 SITE FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 93 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Bike racks 2. Skate deterrents 3. Litter Receptacle 1.02 REFERENCES A. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 2. Section 31 20 00 B. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size not less than 6-inch long linear components and 4-inch square sheet components. D. Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Submit operations and maintenance data in conformance with Section 01 78 00, Closeout Submittals, and the following Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of site furnishing through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide two (2) year warranties on materials and installation.
SITE FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 93 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BIKE RACKS A. Bike racks shall be Sportworks “Tofino” No Scratch Flattop Inverted U bike racks with mounting rails by Sportworks Northwest, Inc., 888-661-0555 or www.sportworks.com. B. Rack shall incorporate Santoprene rubber bumper into design construction to protect bikes. Provide rack with bead blast stainless steel finish. See plans for bike capacity, size and quantity. Surface mounted per manufacturer’s recommendations using vandal resistant fasteners. C. Or approved equal. 2.02 SKATE DETERRENT (IF REQUIRED) A. Skate deterrents shall be manufactured by SkateStoppers, 619-447-6374 or www.skatestoppers.com. Model No. FA1.0. Fabricated with 6061-T6 Aluminum. Outside dimensions are 4.375” (top) x 1.625” (face) x 2.0” (wide). Color to be clear anodize. Install with adhesive and Smart Pins Plus threadlocker and carriage assembly per manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Or approved equal. 2.03 LITTER RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturer: Securr, 909-605-0538, www.trash-cans.com. B. Securr Guardian Series, Outdoor Recycling and Trash Bins, 55 gallon, with perforated steel, anti-graffiti coating, and galvanizing for corrosion against salt. Manufacturer’s reference drawing number: HS55-ASSY-D-030. 1. Recycling Receptacle: Model HS55-OR-PERF-01, Color: Sky Blue 2. Trash Receptacle: Model HS55-OW-PERF-01, Color: Black C. Surface mount per manufacturer’s recommendation using vandal resistant fasteners. When located in planting area mount to concrete footing per manufacturer, using vandal resistant fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all site furnishings as described by the manufacturer’s installation instructions. B. Locations and quantities of site furnishings are per plans. 3.02 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by installation of site furnishings from paved areas. B. Protect all site elements, including surrounding vegetation during installation. Any damages caused by site furnishing installation shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
END OF SECTION 12 93 00
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Specification Section Includes: 1. General requirements for all of the Plumbing materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services included in Division 22 and elsewhere wherever specifically mentioned in the Specifications. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00. 2. Division 01. 1.02 REFERENCES (NOT USED) 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology used in this specification conforms to the following definitions: 1. Authorities Having Jurisdiction: Indicates reviewing authorities, including local building official, local fire marshal, Owner, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain system acceptance. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. UPC: a. Uniform Plumbing Code. B. Governing Standards: 1. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all work covered by this section shall be performed in accordance with all applicable municipal codes and ordinances, laws, and regulations, including 2015 Seattle Plumbing Code and SDCI Side Sewer Code. In case of a conflict between this section and any state law or local ordinance the more stringent requirements shall govern. 2. All work shall conform to the requirements of AGA, ASME, ASSE, ASTM, NSF, NFPA, and UL safety requirements. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Verify that each component of the plumbing system is compatible with all other parts of the system; that all piping, fixtures, and appurtenances are appropriate; and that all devices necessary for a properly functioning system have been provided. B. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, they shall be the product of a single manufacturer; however, all the component parts of the system need not be the products of one manufacturer.
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
C. The equipment as shown on the plans and specified herein, is based on the equipment furnished by one manufacturer. An equipment which is offered as a substitute to the specific requirements of these Specifications and which differs in detail and arrangement from that shown may require changes in design and construction. All costs which result from such changes in design and construction are to be borne entirely and unconditionally by the Contractor and/or the manufacturer; said costs to include but not be limited to structural, piping, mechanical and electrical changes and all engineering costs incurred as a result of the substitution, in the revision of Plans and Specifications, review of design changes by others, preparation of change orders, and any other costs directly resulting from said substitution. D. The Drawings shall be taken as diagrammatic. Size of pipes and general method of running them are shown, but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting nor every structural or coordination difficulty that may be encountered. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 01 33 10 for requirements for the submittal process. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer’s catalog data conforming to the requirements of this section, including materials of construction, construction details of equipment, wiring diagrams, weight of equipment, mounting, seismic bracing, and support. 2. Drawings showing general dimensions and confirming the size of equipment, fixtures, motors and drives, and piping connections (Shop Drawings). 3. Installation requirements, including clearances required for maintenance purposes. C. See Division 22 specifications sections for additional requirements. 1.07 APPURTENANCES A. Furnish and install all necessary guides, inserts, anchors and assembly bolts, washers and nuts, hangers, supports, gaskets, couplings, and flanges; and all other appurtenant items shown on the Drawings, specified, or required for the proper installation and operation of the piping; devices included in or on the piping equipment; and piping accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL A. Additional requirements for plumbing systems shall be as shown in the drawings. B. Suitable connections shall be provided for each fixture, piece of equipment, and appurtenance. C. Coordinate with other trades (e.g., HVAC, Electrical, Structural) for routing of piping and connection points
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
2.02 MANUFACTURERS AND FABRICATION A. Provide like items from one manufacturer, including but not limited to fixtures, drains, and cleanouts. B. Unless the equipment manufacturer is specifically named in this section, the manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified which has been in successful operation for not less than the past 5 years. 2.03 FASTENERS A. Unless indicated otherwise: 1. Bolts - ASTM A193, grade B8M Class 1 or ASTM A320 B8M Class 1 2. Nuts – ASTM A194, grade 8M 3. Washer – 316 SS 2.04 MATERIALS A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. B. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL, ETL, or CSA approved, or have adequate approval or be acceptable the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. C. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer. D. Plumbing fixtures shall be constructed in accordance with the following standards: 1. Enameled Cast Iron ANSI/ASME A112.19.1M 2. Vitreous China ANSI/ASME A112.19.2M 3. Stainless Steel ANSI/ASME A112.19.3M 4. Faucets ANSI/NSF 61 2.05 COLOR A. Vitreous china, cast iron, enameled steel, and composite plumbing fixtures shall be white unless otherwise indicated. B. Equipment shall have the manufacturer's standard color unless otherwise indicated in the schedules or specifications 2.06 ELECTRICAL A. Electrical controls and disconnects shall be furnished and installed under the Electrical section, except where specified herein. B. All electrical controls shall have enclosures suitable for the environment and NEMA rating as indicated on the electrical Drawings.
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
2.07 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Plumbing equipment shall be provided with all supports, fasteners, fittings, and escutcheons required for a complete installation. B. Water Heaters and Accessories: 1. Water heaters shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Heater type, capacity, and power supply requirements shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 3. See the Division 22 specifications sections for additional requirements 2.08 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES A. General: 1. Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ASHRAE 189.1 Section 6.3.2.1 (Plumbing fixtures and Fittings). 2. Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1. 3. Vitreous China, nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified throughout the body shall be provided. Porcelain enameled ware shall have specially selected, clear white, acid-resisting enamel coating evenly applied on surfaces. 4. No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks, crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Fixtures shall be equipped with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain fittings. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system shall be equipped with a trap. 5. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be provided for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow preventers. 6. Internal parts of flush valves and flushometer valves, shower mixing valves, shower head face plates, pop-up stoppers of lavatory waste drains, and pop-up stoppers and overflow tees and shoes of bathtub waste drains may contain acetal resin, fluorocarbon, nylon, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) or other plastic material, if the material has provided satisfactory service under actual commercial or industrial operating conditions for not less than 2 years. 7. Plastic in contact with hot water shall be suitable for 180 degrees F water temperature. B. Access Panels: 1. Provide flush mounting access panels as required for service of valves, drains, test connections, and other Item requiring maintenance or inspection. 2. Where access panels are located in fire-rated assemblies of building, rate access panels accordingly.
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
3. Ceiling access panels to be minimum 24-inch x 24-inch or required and approved size. 4. Wall access panels to be minimum 12-inch x 12-inch or required and approved size. 2.09 PIPING INSULATION A. Continuously insulate all hot water piping with minimum 1-inch thick insulation. 2.10 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Cleanouts: 1. Cleanouts shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings and required by the referenced codes, and shall be of the required type. Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required. 2. Cleanouts installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a chrome-plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron Floor cleanouts shall consist of a two-piece body, a threaded plug, an adjustable head, and a cover. 3. Cleanouts installed in floors that include a waterproofing membrane shall be provided with a flashing flange and membrane clamp. 4. Cast iron cleanouts shall be manufactured by Smith, Josam, or Wade. Polypropylene cleanouts shall be manufactured by Orion, Enfield, or Zurn. PVC cleanouts shall be manufactured by Sioux Chief, Plastic Oddities, or Zurn. B. Floor Drains: 1. Floor drains shall consist of a galvanized body, integral seepage pan, and adjustable perforated or slotted chromium-plated bronze, nickel-bronze, or nickel- brass strainer, consisting of grate and threaded collar. 2. Floor drains shall be cast iron except where metallic waterproofing membrane is installed. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern for embedding in the floor construction. The seepage pan shall have weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe. The strainer shall be adjustable to floor thickness. A clamping device for attaching flashing or waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing membrane shall be provided when required. Drains shall be provided with threaded connection. 3. Between the drain outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C564 may be installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket compression type joint. 4. Floor drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3. Provide drain with trap primer connection, trap primer, and connection piping when indicated on the Drawings. Primer shall meet ASSE 1018. Floor drains shall be of the types specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
5. Floor drains shall have a two-piece body, a flashing collar, an adjustable head, and a grate. A trap primer connection shall be provided when indicated on the Drawings. Floor drains installed in floors that include a waterproofing membrane shall be provided with a flashing flange and membrane clamp. 6. Cast iron floor drains shall be manufactured by Smith, Josam, or Wade. Polypropylene floor drains shall be manufactured by Orion, Enfield, Zurn. PVC floor drains shall be manufactured by Sioux Chief, Plastic Oddities, or Zurn.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION A. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install equipment requiring access (i.e., drain pans, drains, control operators, valves, motors, cleanouts, and water heaters) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced, or recalibrated. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles, or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage. 2. Install equipment and fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions a. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. b. Install plumb, level, and firmly anchored to vibration isolators where required by the manufacturer. c. Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. d. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Construction Documents, request clarification from the Engineer prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing, and coordination with other trades and disciplines 3. Furnish and install all supports, bracing and blocking required for the proper installation of the work specified. 4. Furnish and install miscellaneous supports/metal required for installation of equipment, piping, and vents B. Furnish and install all fixtures with traps and vents unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. C. Piping and Valves: 1. Coordinate work to account for expansion and contraction of piping materials and building as well as anticipated settlement or shrinkage of building. Install work to prevent damage to piping, equipment, and building and its contents. Provide piping offsets, loops, expansion joints, sleeves, anchors, or other means to control pipe movement and minimize forces on piping. Verify anticipated settlement and/or shrinkage of building. Verify construction phasing, type of building construction products, and rating for coordinating installation of piping systems.
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
2. Include provisions for servicing and removal of equipment without dismantling piping. 3. Provide unions, couplings, or flanges where equipment is installed in piping. Unions shall be dielectric unions or couplings At points of connection of ferrous to non-ferrous metal piping, unions, couplings, or flanges shall by dielectric type. 4. Provide a shut-off stop valve in the branch of every water, air, gas, or vacuum pipe service upstream of every fixture or outlet. 5. Install escutcheons secured to pipe with set-screw where pipes or tubing pass through exposed walls or ceilings. 6. Plumbing piping shall not be concrete encased unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. 3.02 CLEANING A. Prior to testing, thoroughly clean the inside of each completed piping system of all dirt, loose scale, sand, and other foreign material. B. Cleaning shall be by sweeping, flushing with water or blowing with compressed air, as appropriate for the size and type of pipe. C. Flushing shall achieve a velocity of at least 3 feet per second. D. The contractor shall install temporary strainers, temporarily disconnect equipment, or take other appropriate measures to protect equipment while cleaning piping. E. At the completion of the testing, all equipment, pipes, valves, and fittings shall be cleaned of grease, debris, metal cuttings, and sludge. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to parts of the building, its finish, or furnishings shall be repaired by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. F. Disinfect potable water lines per AWWA C-651 G. A report shall be provided indicating the successful cleaning of the potable water lines, method used to determine the cleanliness, and results of any tests is required. 3.03 FIELD TESTING AND INSPECTIONS A. Test all plumbing systems and arrange for inspection by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. B. General: 1. Furnish all equipment, material, personnel, and supplies to perform the tests and make all taps and other necessary temporary connections. 2. Field performance tests shall be conducted for each system to demonstrate each is functioning as specified and to the satisfaction of Owner’s Representative. 3. All tests shall be conducted in a manner acceptable to Owner’s Representative and shall be repeated as many times as necessary to secure Owner’s Representative acceptance of each system. 4. If inspection or tests indicate defects, the defective item or material shall be replaced, and the inspection and tests shall be repeated.
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
5. All repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. 6. Caulking of threaded joints or holes will not be acceptable. C. Perform leakage tests on all pipe installed in this project or on any alterations or extensions of existing. Furnish all equipment, material, personnel, and supplies to perform the tests and make all taps and other necessary temporary connections. Leakage tests shall be performed on all piping at a time agreed upon and in the presence of the Owner. All visible leaks shall be repaired, regardless of the test results. D. The test pressure, allowable leakage, and test medium shall be as specified for the piping systems. Test pressure shall be measured at the highest point on the line, except that pressure at lowest point shall not exceed pipe manufacturer’s rated test pressure, unless specifically noted otherwise. E. All visible leaks shall be repaired, regardless of the test results. F. Perform following operations and checks before units are operated for any purpose: 1. Verify shipping blocking and bracing have been removed. 2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and connections for ductwork, electrical, etc. are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in motors, starters and disconnects. 3. Perform specified cleaning and adjusting. Disconnect fan drives from motors, verify proper motor rotation, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth operation of bearings. Reconnect fan drive systems, align belts, and install belt guards. 4. Lubricate bearings and other moving parts with factory-recommended lubricants. 5. Verify manual and automatic volume control dampers are positioned properly and that fire and smoke dampers in related ductwork are in full-open position. 6. Disable automatic temperature control operators, where applicable. G. Start-up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 1. Do not place equipment in sustained operation prior to initial balancing of systems. 2. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with requirements specified. Document tests and include in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. H. The equipment and controls of this Section shall be completely tested, adjusted, and placed in operating condition. I. Retest equipment and controls, as necessary, during the progress of the work. No work shall be covered until it is properly tested and made tight. J. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment with new. Refurbished is not acceptable.
PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 22 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 9
K. When about to turn the apparatus over to the Owner, put all parts of the apparatus in perfect working order and thoroughly clean out all parts of the equipment. L. Clean exterior and interior surfaces of each unit. Vacuum clean fan wheel and surfaces exposed to the air handled by the unit. 3.04 TESTING, TRAINING, AND COMMISSIONING A. In accordance with Section 01 45 20 – Equipment and System Performance and Operational Testing B. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment and systems testing, demonstrate to the Owner’s Representative that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Furnish services of a qualified person at time approved by Owner’s Representative, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. 2. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations.
END OF SECTION 22 00 00
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Specification Section Includes: 1. This Section specifies materials, installation, and testing of plumbing equipment including point-of-application type tankless electric hot water heaters and trap priming manifolds. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00. 2. Division 01. 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. UPC: a. Uniform Plumbing Code. B. Governing Standards: 1. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all work covered by this section shall be performed in accordance with all applicable municipal codes and ordinances, laws, and regulations, including 2015 Seattle Plumbing Code and SDCI Side Sewer Code. In case of a conflict between this section and any state law or local ordinance the more stringent requirements shall govern. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 01 33 10 for requirements for the submittal process. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer’s catalog data conforming to the requirements of this section. 2. Electrical and control diagrams. 3. Installation requirements, including clearances required for maintenance purposes.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL A. All items that are submitted for use on potable water piping, including, but not limited to, pipe and valve linings, solvent cements, welding materials, gaskets and gasket lubricants and additives in concrete or cement mortar shall be NSF certified for use in water systems. 2.02 POINT-OF-APPLICATION TYPE TANKLESS ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. General: 1. Factory assembled, compact, packaged single-stage electric water heater for under-sink mounting. Heat shall be sized to provide a minimum of 0.5-gpm at a minimum pressure of 25-psig. Housing material shall be ABS, cast aluminum or stainless steel. Pre-wired heaters shall be ready for single-point power connection and shall be UL labeled. B. Acceptable Products: 1. Eemax. 2. Chronomite Laboratories. 3. Approved Equal. 2.03 TRAP PRIMING MANIFOLDS A. General: 1. UL listed electronic manifold capable of priming each floor drain trap equally once per 24-hour period (adjustable). 2. Unit shall be factory assembled and pre-piped with all necessary connections, isolation valves, water hammer arrestors, and solenoid valve. 3. Unit shall include a single point 120-volt, single phase power connection with manual override switch, breaker and 24-hour geared timer with relay. 4. Unit shall be tested and supplied in a 16-gauge steel surface-mount enclosure. 5. One half-inch copper tubes shall run from the electronic trap priming panel to the traps. Trap primers shall be mounted in accessible locations. B. Acceptable Products: 1. Zurn 2. Precision Plumbing Products 3. Approved Equal.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
2.04 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Acceptable Products: 1. Zurn Z-1700 2. J.R. Smith 5000 Series 3. Approved Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, local plumbing code, and as indicated on the drawings. B. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions between pipes or fittings of different material. C. Provide isolation valves on hot and cold-water piping, immediately downstream of tankless hot water heater. D. Provide flexible wiring connections.
END OF SECTION 22 13 19
PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 40 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Specification Section Includes: 1. This Section specifies materials, installation, and testing of plumbing fixtures and accessories. 2. Water closets, lavatories, and mop sinks. 3. Cleanouts and floor drains for sanitary drainage systems. 4. Cleanouts, floor drains, and downspout boots for storm drainage systems. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00. 2. Division 01. 3. Division 22 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 01 33 10 for requirements for the submittal process. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer’s catalog data conforming to the requirements of this section. 2. Drawings showing general dimensions and confirming the size of equipment, fixtures, and piping connections. 3. Shop and field painting systems. Include manufacturer’s descriptive technical catalog literature and specifications. 4. All items that are submitted for use on potable water piping, including, but not limited to, pipe and valve linings, solvent cements, welding materials, gaskets and gasket lubricants and additives in concrete or cement mortar shall be NSF certified for use in water systems. Submit proof of NSF certification for each item submitted. 5. Operation and Maintenance Information: Section 01 78 23. 6. Testing Forms in accordance with Section 01 75 00. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ICC A117.1: a. Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities
PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 40 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
2. ISO-9001: a. Quality Management Systems – Requirements 3. NSF-61: a. Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects 4. UPC: a. Uniform Plumbing Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER CLOSETS A. General: 1. White vitreous china, 1.6 gallons per flush, elongated bowl, siphon jet, open-front seat, and meet or exceed ANSI A112.19.2. Locate controls for flush valves on the wide side of the water closet area. Top of 2 inch maximum height seat on ADA water closets shall be between 17 and 19 inches above finished floor. Provide shutoff stop on supply. 2. Flush valve type water closets shall be provided with top spud connections for flushometer valves. Flush tank type water closets shall be provided with factory installed tank liners. Field installed liner kits will not be acceptable. B. WC-1: Not used. C. WC-2: ADA water closet shall be 17 inches high, floor-mounted, pressure-assisted close-coupled tank, American Standard Cadet 2467.016; Kohler Highline Pressure Lite K-3493; or Approved Equal. D. Seats: 1. Water closet seats shall be white, solid plastic, contoured, elongated open front type without cover, with concealed check and stainless steel hinges. 2. The seats shall be manufactured by American Standard, Kohler, Eljer, or Church. E. Supply Set: 1. A supply set consisting of a 1/2 inch NPT brass angle loose key stop valve, a copper supply tube, and an escutcheon plate shall be furnished for each tank type water closet. 2. All supply components shall be polished chrome.
PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 40 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
2.02 LAVATORIES A. General: 1. White vitreous china, complete with faucet-drain assemblies, traps, and angle stops. Angle stops and supplies shall be Chicago Faucet Co.; T&S Brass; or Approved Equal. Lavatories shall meet ADA Specifications. Faucets shall be lead free. 2. Furnish template and mounting kit by lavatory manufacturer. 3. Mount lavatory with the top surface 34 inches above floor. 4. Countertop lavatories shall be self-rimming, and shall be provided with suitable adhesive and/or fastening clamps. B. LAV-1: Wall-hung Lavatory: D-shaped bowl, front overflow, self-draining deck, faucet ledge, 4-inch faucet spacing. Provide polished chrome finish widespread faucet with flexible connections, wrist blade handles, strainer, and 2.5 gpm flow restrictor; American Standard Lucerne 0355.012 with American Standard Monterrey 5502.170; or Approved Equal. Furnish lavatories complete with concealed arm carrier for installation with the wall type shown on the Drawings. C. Traps: 1. Lavatory traps shall be at least 1 1/4 inches in diameter, cast brass with polished chrome finish. 2. Where indicated to be ADA compliant and if exposed to human contact, lavatory traps shall be offset, insulated type. 3. When insulation is needed, lavatory supplies and traps may be pre-insulated or furnished with an insulation kit for field installation. Insulating material shall be flame retardant closed cell vinyl. 4. The supply insulating kit shall be snap form type or shall be provided with ties. The trap insulation material shall not require the use of ties or mechanical fasteners to be held in place. Pre-insulated traps and supply insulation kits shall be McGuire Products "ProWrap". 5. Trap and supply insulation kits shall be as manufactured by IPS Corporation- Truebro, Plumberex, or Buckaroos, Inc. D. Supports: 1. Wall-hung lavatories shall be provided with a complete ASME A112.6.1M support system, including bearing plates, concealed arms, and anchor bolts, designed to support the lavatory from the CMU wall or floor. 2. Lavatory supports shall be manufactured by Smith, Josam, or Wade.
PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 40 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
2.03 UTILITY SINK A. SSK-1: Stainless steel type 304, 24-inch x 24-inch single compartment, 8-inch high backsplash with 45-degree sloped top. Elkay model WNSF81242, Griffin Model TR.144.00, or Approved Equal. 1. Trim: Chicago Faucets LWS4-A21-E, Zurn Z875U2, or Approved Equal. 2. Provide with chrome-plated strainer, support legs, and p-trap. 2.04 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Zurn No. Z-1700; J.R. Smith 5000 Series; or Approved Equal. 2.05 FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast iron drains having inside caulk or push-on compression type neoprene gasket joints, unless otherwise noted. B. Traps: Provide traps for all floor drains unless noted otherwise. Traps shall be the same material for the piping in which they are installed. Traps assembly shall include primer and vent connections as required. Zurn, J.R. Smith, or Approved Equal. Provide PVC or PP P-traps with solvent weld joints for acid-resistant drain systems. C. Type II Floor Drain: Zurn Z-520; J.R. Smith 2320; or Approved Equal. Trap, primer, and vent connections are not required. D. Type III, IV and V Floor Drains: Zurn Z 415, J.R. Smith 2010-A; or Approved Equal, complete with heelproof strainer. 2.06 CLEANOUTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, match cleanout size to connecting pipe size. B. Type I Cleanout: Zurn Z 1400; J.R. Smith 4025 or 4031; Provide scoriated top. 2.07 DOWNSPOUT BOOTS A. Epoxy coated cast iron body with integral cleanout. B. DB-1: Epoxy coated cast iron body with cleanout. Zurn Z191-CA; J.R. Smith 1789-24; or Approved Equal. 2.08 STRAINERS A. Strainers shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. Strainer screen size shall be 20 mesh unless otherwise indicated. B. The blowoff from each strainer shall be equipped with a shutoff valve. C. Strainers located in copper piping systems shall be Y-pattern type with bronze body, threaded ends, and monel or stainless steel screens. D. Strainers shall be Watts “Series LF777SI”, Apollo Valves “Model YB-LF” or Wilkins “Model YBXL”.
PLUMBING FIXTURES SECTION 22 40 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Work in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code, 2015 Seattle Plumbing Code, and SDCI Side Sewer Code. 2. Repair torn and pierced waterproofing. 3. Wrap fixtures, fittings, valves, and copper or brass items with burlap or building paper. Remove wrapping at the completion of the work. 4. Seal fixtures to walls and floors using silicone sealant Dow Corning No. 780 or approved equivalent. Match sealant color to fixture color. 5. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures. 6. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials. 7. During construction cover installed fixtures, drains, sinks, and water coolers with cardboard boxes and wrap with Visqueen. 8. Roof and overflow roof drains shall be installed per architectural details. Drains shall be covered during roof construction to protect drain and off set supply piping. B. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions between pipes or fittings of different material. 3.02 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. Clean and flush piping and equipment in accordance with Section 40 05 08. 3.03 TESTING A. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest. B. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to provide proper flow stream. C. Replace washers or cartridges of leaking or dripping faucets and stops. D. Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing fixtures and trim to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 22 40 00
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 05 93 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Specification section includes: 1. Labor and services necessary to test, adjust, and balance under actual operating conditions air and hydronic systems design flow rates. Nothing herein shall be construed as relieving the Contractor of the overall responsibility of this portion of the work. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00. 2. Division 01. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Referenced standards: 1. NEBB: a. Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 2. AABC: a. National Standards for Total System Balance. 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): a. 70, Standards – Methods of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Specification Section 01 33 10 - Submittals for requirements for the submittal process. B. Testing and Balancing Reports: 1. Sample copy of each of the NEBB or AABC report forms. 2. Proposed approach and schedule of testing and balancing work. 3. A description of each air system including equipment to be balanced. 4. Preliminary balancing report. This report includes field data after initial balance and recommendations for further adjustments if required.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 05 93 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
C. Product Data: 1. The balancing report. 2. Documentation to confirm compliance with codes and standards. 3. NEBB or AABC certification. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: 1. Procure the services of an independent air and hydronic balancing and testing agency, belonging to the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), to perform air and hydronic balancing, testing and adjustment of systems. The Contractor shall submit a copy of the National Project Certification Performance Guaranty, issued to the testing agency by the AABC, as a part of the balancing report. B. Codes and Standards: 1. The Contractor shall comply with applicable procedures and standards of the certification sponsoring association: a. "National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total Systems Balance, Air Distribution-Hydronics Systems," AABC. b. "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", NEBB. c. "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets," ASHRAE. d. Calibration and maintenance of instruments and accuracy of measurements shall comply with the requirements of the standards. 1.06 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Tests and adjustments shall include the complete testing and balancing of all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and necessary adjustments to the heating, air conditioning, and ventilating equipment to accomplish the specified design flow rates. B. Should any apparatus, material or work fail to meet the specified requirements in these tests, the Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and retest the apparatus, material, or work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 BALANCING A. General: 1. Review the plans and specifications prior to testing and balancing the air systems. 2. The contractor shall submit a proposed approach and schedule for approval prior to the start of testing and balancing work.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 05 93 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
3. Characteristics to be tested and adjusted to conform to the values specified include the following: a. Total airflow rates delivered by fans and air-handling units. b. Flow rates at all grilles, registers, diffusers, supply and exhaust and return ducts. c. Capacity and temperature rise or drop across each heating and cooling coil. d. Distribution patterns at air outlets. B. Airflow Rate Measurements: 1. Airflow rates shall be obtained by adjustment of the fan speeds, dampers, or registers. All flow rates shall be measured with supply, return, and exhaust systems operating with heating and cooling coils wet, with filter bank resistance midway between the design values specified for clean and dirty filters, with auxiliary systems in operation and with all doors and windows closed. 2. Flow rates at grilles, registers, branch ductwork, and air distribution patterns shall be tested in strict accordance with ASHRAE Standard-70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BALANCING REPORT A. Report Data: 1. The final certified balancing report shall include the following actual field-verified data: a. Equipment data 1) Manufacturer and model, size, arrangement, class, location, and equipment number. 2) Motor horsepower, voltage, phase, and full load amperage. 3) Fan cfm, static pressure, rpm, and operating motor brake horsepower (BHP). b. Duct size, supply or exhaust recorded cfm, velocity, pressure measurements, and location of all measurements. B. Report Requirements: 1. Each individual final reporting form must bear the signature of the person who recorded the data and that of the supervisor of the reporting organization. 2. One certified organization shall perform the testing and balancing services. 3. All instruments which were used shall be listed and identified including the last date each was calibrated.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 05 93 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
C. Final Report: 1. Final report shall be submitted prior to Contractor's request for final inspection. In addition to providing all specified data and information on applicable reporting forms, report shall include the following: a. A schedule for testing and balancing parts of the systems which must be delayed due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other conditions beyond control of the Contractor. Delayed work shall be completed as early as the proper conditions will allow, after consultation with the Construction Manager. b. Due to delayed testing, reports shall be submitted after execution of those services. c. A total balance report shall include the following components: 1) General Information and Summary 2) Instrument Calibration 3) Air Systems 4) Record drawings with specified and measured flow rates 2.02 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION A. At completion of testing and balancing, Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Compliance stating that each apparatus, device, outlet, and system has been tested, adjusted, and balanced so that it is operating in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and with the specified conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL A. The balancing agency shall conduct the above field tests in the presence of the Construction Manager. B. Following completion of testing and balancing the system shall be left in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. 3.02 PERFORMANCE OF WORK A. Air Systems: 1. General: a. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be performed after the system installation is complete but prior to acceptance of the project.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 05 93 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
2. Measurements: a. The Contractor shall perform the following: 1) Airflow rates supplied, exhausted, or returned shall be within plus or minus 5 percent of the design values specified. 2) Measure static air pressure conditions on fans, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. 3) Adjust fan speeds and motor drives within drive limitations, for required air volume. Set a speed to provide air volume farthest distance from the fan without excess static pressure. Check draw amps of fans on initial start-up. If running amps exceed nameplate, shut off motor immediately, notify Construction Manager, and make necessary drive changes as directed. 4) Airflow rates shall be measured with supply, return, and exhaust systems operating with heating and cooling coils wet, with filter bank resistance midway between design values specified for clean and dirty filters, with auxiliary systems in operation. The deflection pattern of supply outlets shall be adjusted to ensure uniform air distribution throughout the space served. 3. Systems to be Balanced: The following building mechanical equipment and associated devices shall be balanced:
Equipment Description Equipment No. Pump Station Supply Fan FAN-0160 Pump Station Exhaust Fan FAN-0161 Electrical Building Packaged Air Conditioning Unit AC-0162 3.03 FINAL INSPECTION A. Following completion of testing and balancing, submit the draft balancing report. In the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, new reports submitted, and new inspection test made. B. Following acceptance of the reports by the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall permanently mark all damper positions so that they can be restored to their correct position if disturbed at any time. Devices shall not be marked until after final inspection.
END OF SECTION 23 05 93
SHEET METAL DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. Specification Section Includes: 1. Sheet metal ductwork and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Related Specification Sections include but are not limited to: 1. Division 00. 2. Division 01. 3. Section 23 05 93 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 10 for requirements for the submittal process. 2. Product technical data: a. Manufacturer’s data including: 1) Materials of construction. 2) Detail sheets or catalog data. 3) Listing of ductwork components and materials. 4) Detailed installation drawings showing ductwork layout. 5) Accessories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): a. 500, Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. b. 511, Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices. c. 300, Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices d. 301, Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 181, Factory-made Air Ducts and Connectors.
SHEET METAL DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
3. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): a. HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible. 4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): a. CH 1, Handbook – Equipment Volume, Duct Construction. b. CH 33, Handbook – Fundamentals Volume, Duct Design. c. 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. 5. ASTM a. B209, Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate b. B211, Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire. c. B308, Aluminum – Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes, Rolled or Extruded. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 90A, Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Unless otherwise specified, sheet metal gage, reinforcing, hanger and support systems, ductwork joint types and other basic design construction details shall be in accordance with the 2006 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Ductwork shall be fabricated to the configurations and dimensions specified. Dimensions specified indicate net free area; dimensions shall be increased by the thickness of the lining where internal lining is required. B. Low Pressure Ductwork: 1. Low pressure ductwork shall convey air with a velocity less than 2000 fpm and maximum static pressure of 2 inches of water column. Low-pressure ductwork shall conform to 2-inch w.c. pressure class. C. System Leakage: 1. All joints shall be sealed as required to limit total system leakage to a maximum of 1 percent of the specified equipment airflows. D. Change in Duct Size: 1. Change in duct size shall be made by a uniformly tapering section. The change in direction of the tapering section shall not be more than 1 inch in 5 inches of run, unless otherwise specified. SHEET METAL DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
E. Bends in Duct: 1. With the exception of mitered bends, all bends in ducts shall have inside radii equal to the duct width or diameter. Double wall turning vanes shall be provided at all 90-degree mitered bends. F. Duct Sleeves: 1. Whenever ducts extend through concrete or masonry walls, floors or ceilings, they shall be provided with a sleeve as specified in paragraph 2.04. Concrete inserts shall be provided before pour to support all ductwork under this section. G. Duct Openings: 1. Access doors or hand holes shall be provided in ducts at locations to reach modulating dampers, fusible links, controllers and any other moveable devices in the ducts. The opening shall be 1 inch less duct size or of adequate size to reach in and maintain these devices. Two-inch diameter nipples with threaded caps shall be welded to the duct where specified or directed by the engineer for balancing the system. H. Seismic Anchorage and Structural Data: 1. Mechanical, instrumentation and control, electrical, nonstructural systems, components, and elements permanently attached to the structure shall be anchored and braced to resist seismic forces. Contractor shall design the structural components, seismic attachment, braces, and anchors to the structure for all parts or elements of the mechanical and electrical systems in accordance with Section 01 73 24, Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall provide all ductwork, plenums, and all auxiliary work and products of any kind necessary to make the HVAC systems complete and ready for operation. Ductwork shall comply with the following restrictions and conditions: 1. Ductmate systems shall be used as an option by the Contractor for low pressure systems only. 2. Snap lock seams shall not be permitted. 3. Where space conditions permit, full radius turns shall be used at offsets. 4. Turning vanes shall be provided where tees, bends, and elbows are not 1-1/2 times the width at centerline and in all rectangular elbows. 5. Ductwork elbows, takeoffs, and fittings shall be in accordance with the SMACNA and ASHRAE standards for the pressure class and conditions specified. 6. Visible duct deflection, loss of shape, or unwarranted noise or vibration resulting from faulty or inadequate support, reinforcing, metal gage, fabrication, or joint spacing shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner.
SHEET METAL DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
2.02 MATERIALS A. Low Pressure Systems:
Component Material Duct located in stormwater wetwell Stainless Steel Type 316 Duct, all other locations Aluminum alloy 3003-H14 conforming to ASTM B209 and ASTM B211, or Stainless Steel Type 316 Duct sleeve Same as duct material Turning vanes Same as duct material Hangers and supports, rivets and bolts, reinforcing Stainless Steel Type 316 B. Aluminum Ductwork: 1. Aluminum ductwork shall be alloy 3003-H14 conforming to ASTM B209 and ASTM B211 and shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards.” C. Stainless Steel Ductwork: 1. Stainless steel ductwork shall be Type 316 and shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards.” 2.03 JOINTS AND REINFORCING A. Transverse stiffeners and joints shall be appropriately spaced to maintain duct cross- section integrity in accordance with the pressure class specified and at the prevailing operating velocities. After joints are crimped, they shall be further secured by bottom punching or riveting. Longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh lock and shall be cross-broken outward. Intake, or exhaust, side ducts shall be cross-broken inward. Discharge ducts shall be cross-broken outward. All plenums and casings shall be similarly cross-broken and further reinforced with 1-inch x 1-inch x 1/8-inch angles running diagonally between joints, riveted to the casings. B. Low pressure ductwork shall have slip joints. Joints shall not interfere with airflow in the ducts. Interior ducts shall be suitably braced and stiffened over their unsupported length in a manner designed to maintain duct integrity and limit vibration and noise in accordance with recognized standards of the industry. C. Ducts over 17 inches in largest dimension shall be cross-broken or beaded on all four sides. Spacing between rods or rods on side of duct shall not exceed 48 inches. 2.04 JOINT SEALERS AND SEALANTS A. General: 1. Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant. SHEET METAL DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
B. Type: 1. Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts. C. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. D. Water Based Sealant for Brush-On Application: 1. Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts. 2. Minimum 69-percent solids, nonflammable. Durodyne Duroseal, Hardcast Versa- Grip 181, McGill United Duct Sealer. E. Solvent Based Sealant for Brush-On Application: 1. One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant with a minimum of 75 percent solids, nonflammable. McGill Uni-Coat, Hardcast Sure- Grip, 404. F. Flanged Joint Mastic: 1. One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O. G. Flange Gaskets: 1. Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. H. Two-Part Tape and Adhesive System: 1. Hardcast FTD 20/DT, McGill Air Seal Uni-Cast. I. Silicon Sealant: 1. Hardcast PT-302 or Approved Equal. J. Polyurethane Sealant: 1. General-purpose non-brittle sealant for gunned application. Vulkem 616 or Approved Equal. 2.05 DUCT SLEEVES A. Sleeve flanges shall not be less than 4 inches wide and shall be installed tight against each side of the barrier. Sleeves shall be 2 inches larger than the duct or external duct insulation. The space between the duct and the sleeve shall be packed with fiberglass or material of original wall. Duct flanges not less than 4 inches wide shall be installed tight against the wall on each side and fastened to the duct sleeves. SHEET METAL DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
2.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: 1. Duct support spacing shall be in accordance with the SMACNA standards for the pressure class and conditions specified and prevailing in the system. Supports shall be spaced to prevent visible duct deflection and loss of system integrity. For supports and seismic bracing design requirements refer to specification Section 01 73 24. B. Exposed Areas: 1. Rectangular ductwork shall be supported with shelf angle trapeze hanger or unistrut with rods or angles by welding or bolting. Sway bracing shall be provided, minimum of one at right angle to each duct run. 2. Round ductwork shall be supported with two half round bands with rods bolted to the bands. Sway bracing shall be provided, minimum of one at right angle to each duct run. 2.07 ACCESS DOORS A. The doors shall be rigid and shall be provided with airtight gaskets and shall not vibrate or cause noise under service. Doors shall be continuous hinged type with ventlock latch on outside. 2.08 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Flexible connection joints shall be airtight and have a minimum allowance of 1-inch slack all around. Flexible connections shall be designed to be removed from the line and be reinstalled without disassembling adjacent ductwork. B. Connections shall be installed with a minimum 4-inch clearance between metal parts on fan connections, equipment connections, and our distribution devices. 2.09 TURNING VANES A. Turning vanes shall be 2-inch blades for ducts up to 18 inches in either dimension and shall be 4-1/2-inch blades for larger ducts. All turning vane assemblies in aluminum ducts shall be finished with an air-dried phenolic corrosion resistant coating prior to installation. All turning vanes shall be constructed of double thickness vanes. 2.10 DAMPERS A. General: 1. Dampers shall be the same as the material of the surrounding ductwork for which the damper is provided unless otherwise specified. B. Single Blade Damper: 1. Up to 18-inches wide: a. Damper blade shall be minimum 22-gage material. The damper hinge shall consist of a 3/8-inch pin at each side of the damper blade to provide a pivot point for damper positioning. SHEET METAL DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
2. Greater than 18-inches wide: a. Damper blade shall be minimum 16-gage material. The damper hinge shall consist of a 1/2-inch rod, running across the entire width of the damper blade, to provide a pivot point for damper positioning.
C. Backdraft Dampers: 1. Damper blades shall be aluminum and shall be provided with neoprene or felt edge seals to ensure tight closure. The blade interconnecting linkage shall be located within the damper frame and out of the airstream. D. Manual Positioner: 1. A 3/8-inch locking quadrant shall be provided at one end of the damper, external to the ductwork, on manually adjusted dampers. Positioner extensions shall be provided for dampers installed in ductwork located in ceilings, walls or floors that is not directly accessible. 2.11 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. General: 1. Insulation shall be exterior wrap or internal duct lining as specified. Insulation shall have a maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50. B. Exterior Wrap: 1. Fiberglass wrapping, where specified, shall be the flexible blanket type and shall be made of flame attenuated glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. The facing shall be constructed out of reinforced foil kraft. Insulation shall be 1 ½- inches thick or of minimum thickness to meet the requirements of the Washington State Mechanical and Energy Codes, ¾ pound per cubic foot density, and have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.30 Btu-inches/hour/sq ft/°F. Adhesive use in securing insulation to the ductwork shall meet the requirements of the SMACNA. Owens-Corning “Fiberglas All Service Duct Wrap”; Johns-Manville "Microlite"; or Approved Equal. C. Interior Duct Lining: 1. Duct lining, where specified on the Drawings, shall be fiberglass of 3 pounds per cubic foot density; Owens-Corning Fiberglass "Duct Liner Board," Johns- Manville, or Approved Equal, thickness selected to provide minimum insulating value of R-8, installed using pins spot welded to ductwork. Insulation shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer's installation requirements and SMACNA. Duct dimensions shown shall be net inside clear after lining. 2.12 ROOF CURBS A. Provide roof curbs for duct penetrations as shown on the Drawings. Roof curbs shall be straight sided with 2 inch flashing flange, 1 inch rigid insulation, wood nailer and shall be constructed from 18 gauge galvanized steel. Roof curb shall be suitable for duct dimensions as shown on the Drawings and shall be coated with Heresite, Hi-Pro Polyester or manufacturer’s equivalent to protect against UV damage. Manufacturer shall be Greenheck Model GPI; or equal. SHEET METAL DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 30 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION A. Ductwork shall be installed in accordance with SMACNA and NFPA. All ductwork indicated on the drawings is schematic. Therefore, changes in duct size, duct configuration, and location may be necessary to conform to field conditions. B. Ductwork and accessories shall be installed to provide a system free from buckling, warping, breathing, and vibration. Ductwork installation shall permit installation of other required services without piercing, crimping, or reducing duct sizes. The inside of all ducts visible through grilles and registers shall be painted flat black. C. All ductwork shall be made airtight. Flanged joints shall be sealed with closed-cell neoprene gaskets compressed between mating flanges. All other joints and seams shall be sealed with liquid or mastic type sealants. Taped joints shall not be permitted. All joints shall comply with the requirements of SMACNA Seal Class A. D. All duct fittings shall be fabricated with continuously welded seams and joints. 3.02 TESTS A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be as specified in Section 23 05 93, Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC. B. Duct test holes with patches in ducts shall be provided where directed or necessary for testing and balancing purposes. 3.03 DUCTWORK SCHEDULE A. Ductwork material shall be as follows:
Ductwork for Pressure Material Associated Equipment classification FAN-0150 Aluminum Low FAN-0160 Type 316 Stainless Steel Low FAN-0161 Type 316 Stainless Steel Low AC-0162 Aluminum Low
END OF SECTION 23 30 00 HVAC FANS SECTION 23 34 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Specification Section Includes: 1. Square, in-line, Supply Fans 2. Roof Mounted Exhaust Fans 3. Ceiling Exhaust Fans 1.02 REFERENCES A. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 23 05 93 B. Referenced Standards: 1. AMCA: a. 99, Standard Handbook. b. 210, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes c. 300, Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices d. 301, Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 705, Power Ventilators. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. MG-1, Motors and Generators. 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 10 for requirements for the submittal process. 2. Product technical data: a. Manufacturer’s data including: 1) Materials of construction. 2) Construction details of equipment. 3) Wiring diagrams. 4) Weight of equipment. 5) Performance data with system operating conditions specified. HVAC FANS SECTION 23 34 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
6) Listing of equipment components and materials. 7) Detailed installation drawings showing equipment layout. 8) Motor ratings, and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 9) Accessories. 10) Certified sound-power ratings. B. Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 10 for requirements for the submittal process. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. See Equipment Schedules on Drawings for performance requirements. B. Seismic Anchorage and Structural Data: 1. Mechanical, instrumentation and control, electrical, nonstructural systems, components, and elements permanently attached to the structure shall be anchored and braced to resist seismic forces. Contractor shall design the structural components, seismic attachment, braces, and anchors to the structure for all parts or elements of the mechanical and electrical systems in accordance with Section 01 73 24, Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers model numbers listed in the individual product paragraphs below are acceptable. 2.02 GENERAL A. All units shall include factory installed permanently attached nameplate displaying unit model and serial number. B. Fans designated to meet a specified fan class shall comply with requirements of AMCA 99-2408-69. C. Bearing AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance. D. Fan Drives: 1. Furnish multiple drive belts where motor horsepower is 2 horsepower or larger. 2. Drive assembly shall be sized for a minimum 140 percent of fan motor horsepower rating. 3. Sheaves shall be capable of providing 150 percent of motor horsepower. 4. Fan shafts shall be designed such that the first critical speed is at least 125 percent of fan maximum operating speed. 5. Furnish motors for V-belt drives with adjustable rails or bases. 6. Unless otherwise noted, furnish belt-driven fans with cast iron or flanged steel sheaves. HVAC FANS SECTION 23 34 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
E. Motors: 1. The motor shall operate at 1750 rpm and shall be Type 2 as specified in Section 40 05 06 – Common Motor Requirements for Equipment unless otherwise specified. 2. Motors shall be premium efficient and conform to the 2015 Seattle Energy Code. 3. Motors shall be mounted on vibration isolators and shall be sealed from the exhaust airstream. 4. Variable pitch V-belt sheaves allowing at least 20 percent speed variation. 5. Final operating point shall be at approximate sheave midpoint. 6. Provide trial and final sheaves, as well as drive belts, as required. Furnish multiple drive belts where motor horsepower is 2 horsepower or larger. F. Belt and Shaft Guards: 1. Entire drive assembly shall be easily removable and enclosed, meeting federal, OSHA, and State of Washington requirements. 2. Guard faces of expanded metal having minimum 60 percent free area for ventilation. 3. Bright yellow finish. 2.03 SQUARE, IN-LINE, CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Approved Products: 1. Greenheck, Model BSQ 2. Loren Cook, Model SQNB 3. Approved Equal B. Materials:
COMPONENT MATERIAL Fan wheel Stainless steel Fan wheel shaft Stainless steel Fan housing Stainless steel Fasteners Stainless steel C. Design: 1. The fan housing shall be square or rectangular in design and shall be provided with duct mounting collars at the inlet and outlet for connection to rectangular ductwork. 2. Fan housing shall be designed to provide access to the motor and fan unit through a gasketed access door. The fan inlet shall be provided with a venturi throat that is overlapped by the fan wheel. HVAC FANS SECTION 23 34 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
3. The fan wheel shall have backward inclined blades as provided standard by the manufacturer for the specified conditions. The wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. The fan wheel shaft shall be mounted in a heavy duty, permanently sealed, permanently lubricated, ball bearing pillow block. Bearings shall be rated for a minimum AFBMA L-10 bearing life of 100,000 hours. 2.04 ROOF MOUNTED TUBULAR UPBLAST FANS A. Approved Products: 1. Greenheck Model TCBRU. 2. Loren Cook QMXU. 3. Approved Equal. B. Design: 1. Fan: a. Roof exhaust fans shall be factory fabricated stainless steel assemblies, up-blast, having fan, fan-motor, stainless steel fan guard, and roof curb. b. Fan wheel shall be aluminum construction, non-overloading, backward inclined centrifugal type, statically and dynamically balanced in accordance with AMCA 204-05. c. Fan shaft shall be ground and polished solid steel with anti-corrosive coating. d. Gravity operated dampers to prevent backflow when fan is off. e. Metallic windband section mounted to fan discharge, designed to ensure exhaust fumes are directed up and away from the facility. 2. Roof Curb: a. Each fan shall be provided with a 14-inch high prefabricated mounting curb. b. The outer shell of the curb shall be formed with an integral cant strip and mounting flange. c. The corners shall be mitered and welded continuously to form a one- piece leak-proof shell. d. Wooden nailing strips shall be bolted to the top of the curb shell to provide means for easily attaching the flashing material to the curb. 3. Motor: a. Motors shall be premium efficient and conform to the energy code. b. Motors shall be mounted on vibration isolators and shall be sealed from the exhaust airstream. c. Weather protection motor cover. HVAC FANS SECTION 23 34 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
2.05 CEILING EXHAUST FANS A. Approved Products: 1. Greenheck Model SP. 2. Loren Cook Model GC. 3. Approved Equal. B. Design: 1. Factory fabricated assemblies complete with fan, motor, inlet grille, acoustically insulated housing, and duct collar with integral spring-loaded aluminum backdraft damper. 2. Fan wheel shall be galvanized steel or polypropylene construction, forward curved centrifugal type statically and dynamically balanced. 3. Motors shall be open drip proof, permanently lubricated sleeve bearing type mounted on vibration isolators. 4. Provide with wall or roof discharge as required by code and design conditions. 5. Where indicated in the schedules, provide UL listed passive infrared motion detector to automatically start the fan when a change in motion is detected. Motion detector shall be integrally mounted into the grille of the fan. Fan shall run for at least 15 minutes after last change in motion is detected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fans shall be installed as shown in the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.02 TESTING AND BALANCING B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be as specified in Section 23 05 93, Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.
END OF SECTION 23 34 00
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES SECTION 23 37 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Specification Section Includes: 1. Grilles and registers. 2. Gravity ventilation hoods. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00. 2. Division 01. 3. Specification Section 23 05 93. 1.02 REFERENCES (NOT USED) 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Standard catalog cut sheet. b. Performance data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of register and grille.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers model numbers listed in the individual product paragraphs below are acceptable. 2.02 SUPPLY GRILLES: A. Approved Products: 1. Titus Model 300RL (steel)/ 300 FL (aluminum)/300 RL-SS (stainless steel). 2. Price Model 520 (steel)/ 610 (aluminum)/720 (stainless steel). 3. Approved Equal. B. Design: 1. Supply grilles shall have sizes as specified on the Drawings. Supply grilles shall be double deflection, louvered type with individually adjustable bars that allow 45° adjustment spread. Bars shall be on 3/4-inch centers, with horizontal face bars and vertical rear bars. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES SECTION 23 37 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
2.03 RETURN GRILLES A. Approved Products: 1. Titus Model 350RL (steel)/ 350FL (aluminum)/355RL (stainless steel); 2. Price Model 530 (steel)/630 (aluminum)/730 (stainless steel). 3. Approved Equal. B. Design: 1. Wall-mounted return air grilles shall have sizes as specified on the Drawings. Grille blades shall be set horizontally and on 3/4-inch to 35-45 degrees unless otherwise noted. 2.04 GRAVITY VENTILATION HOODS A. Approved Products: 1. Greenheck Model FGI/FGR 2. Loren Cook Model GI/GR 3. Approved Equal. B. Intake and relief hoods shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum and of precision formed, arched panels with interlocking seams. Unit shall be equipped with a ½ inch aluminum bird screen mounted across the discharge area of the hood, gravity backdraft damper tray and 12-inch high roof curb. Where specified, hoods shall be coated with a Heresite applied in strict conformance with the paint manufacturer’s instructions. Hood shall have throat size as specified on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Grilles and registers shall be aligned, connected and install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and with SMACNA Standards. Each unit shall be set flat against the wall or duct surface finish and shall have a felt gasket or seal. Paint visible ductwork behind grille and registers flat black. Touch up marks and abrasions to match original finish. B. VENTILATION HOODS: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install ventilation hoods level and plumb. 3. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, the seismic force required by code. 4. Secure ventilation hoods to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. 5. In seismic zones, restrain support units. 6. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES SECTION 23 37 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
3.02 TESTING AND BALANCING A. Testing, adjusting and balancing shall be as specified in Section 23 05 93.
END OF SECTION 23 37 13 AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 81 43 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Specification Section includes: 1. Packaged air source unitary heat pumps. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00. 2. Division 01. 3. Specification Section 23 05 93. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute / Underwriters Laboratory (ANSI/UL): a. 1025, Electrical Air Heaters 2. American National Standards Institute / American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ANSI/ASHRAE): a. 15-2010, Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems 3. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI): a. 210 / 240, Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. b. 270, Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment c. 340/360, Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment d. 410, Standard for Forced Circulation Air-Heating and Air-Cooling Coils 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems b. 90B, Standard for Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment 6. Energy Code: a. 2015, Seattle Energy Code – Commercial Provisions 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 81 43 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 10 for requirements for the submittal process. 2. Product technical data: a. Manufacturer’s data including: 1) Materials of construction. 2) Construction details of equipment. 3) Wiring diagrams. 4) Weight of equipment. 5) Performance data with system operating conditions specified. 6) Listing of equipment components and materials. 7) Detailed installation drawings showing equipment layout, and the size and location of all piping, electrical, instrumentation and structural connections. 8) Motor ratings, and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 9) MCA and MOCP ratings. 10) Filters. 11) Coils, including materials and finishes. 12) Accessories. 13) Certified sound-power ratings. 14) Required maintenance clearances. B. Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1. See Specification Section 01 33 10 for requirements for the submittal process. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. See Equipment Schedules on Drawings for performance requirements. B. Seismic Anchorage and Structural Data: 1. Mechanical, instrumentation and control, electrical, nonstructural systems, components, and elements permanently attached to the structure shall be anchored and braced to resist seismic forces. Contractor shall design the structural components, seismic attachment, braces, and anchors to the structure for all parts or elements of the mechanical and electrical systems in accordance with Section 01 73 24, Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures. AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 81 43 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers model numbers listed below are acceptable. 1. Trane Model WHC074. 2. Carrier. 3. Daikin. 4. Approved Equal. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. General: 1. Packaged heat pump units shall be outdoor package, factory assembled, fully self-contained, air-to-air unit for at grade installation. Unit shall consist of two- stage scroll compressor, air-cooled coil, condenser fan, all factory wiring, piping, controls, and refrigerant charge shall be R-410A. Unit shall be configured for outdoor installation with horizontal supply and return as shown on the Drawings. 2. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at 125ºF ambient outdoor temperature per maximum load criteria of ARI Standard 210. 3. Unit shall be equipped with a refrigerant circuit containing an adjustable thermostatic expansion valve. 4. Unit shall be equipped with a low ambient temperature kit rated for 0 degrees F. B. Cabinet: 1. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel with a powder coated finish and shall be fully insulated. Cabinet shall include a rust proof base that is externally trapped, integrated sloped drain pan. Unit shall provide single-panel accessibility to serviceable components for maintenance. C. Indoor Fan: 1. Indoor fan shall be a direct driven, variable speed, double inlet type with forward curved blades with corrosion resistant finish. Fan shall be dynamically balanced. D. Outdoor Fan: 1. Condenser fan shall be direct driven propeller type with aluminum blades riveted to corrosion resistant steel supports. Fan shall discharge vertically upward. Fan shall be dynamically balanced and shall include a totally enclosed motor. E. Compressor: 1. Compressor shall be hermetically sealed, two-stage scroll type mounted on rubber vibration isolators. Compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater. F. Coils: 1. Coils shall consist of seamless copper tubes with mechanically bonded aluminum fins. Provide coils with corrosion resistant coating.
AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 81 43 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
G. Filters: 1. Unit shall be equipped with a filter frame upstream of the cooling coil, to take 1-inch disposable type commercially available filters. Disposable filters to be supplied with the unit. Filter access shall be from either the right- or left-hand side of the unit. H. Electrical Requirements: 1. All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single location. Unit shall include a complete self-contained low voltage control circuit complete with starters, step down transformers, and other accessories required for a complete functioning system. I. Controls: 1. Provide complete, integrated packaged control systems for packaged air conditioning equipment. Control systems shall include all necessary components, transformers, accessories, wiring and conduits to provide complete and automatic systems ready for full time operation. 2. System shall include air conditioning controls to automatically start and stop equipment. The system shall provide space cooling sensing to maintain space temperatures as indicated. Each system shall be provided with a programmable thermostat for remote mounting. 3. Thermostats shall be wall-mounted and have a minimum 40 to 104F temperature range. Provide thermostats meeting the following requirements. a. Digital automatic-setback thermostats shall be provided in finished areas. Thermostats shall be digital programmable with 7 different day types and capable of night setback. Thermostats shall have fan Auto-On switch and system Off-Heat-Auto-Cool and manual temperature settings. Thermostats shall be capable of a 5 degree minimum dead-band. 4. Accessories shall include: a. Magnetic contactors for the compressors and fans. b. High and low pressure cutouts and reset relays. c. All control circuitry transformers and fusing. d. Subbase for thermostat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The packaged air source unitary heat pump shall be installed as shown in the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Install conduit and cable between thermostat and control system. Conduit and cable shall be per Division 26 requirements. 3.02 TESTING AND BALANCING A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be as specified in Section 23 05 93. AIR SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS SECTION 23 81 43 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
3.03 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 1. The system is composed of a packaged air source unitary heat pump with auxiliary electric heat, and programmable thermostat. The system provides heating and cooling to the electrical building. 2. The packaged air source unitary heat pump is controlled by inputs received from the programmable thermostat. The thermostat contains a supply fan AUTO/ON switch and a system HEAT/OFF/COOL/AUTO switch. These two switches work together to determine the operation of the air conditioning unit. a. When the supply fan switch is in the AUTO position, the supply fan runs when the heating or cooling system is active. b. When the supply fan switch is in the ON position, the supply fan runs continuously. c. When the system switch is in the HEAT position, the system begins heating when the measured room temperature falls below the heating setpoint. d. When the system switch is in the OFF position, the system remains OFF regardless of observed room temperature. e. When the system switch is in the COOL position, the system begins cooling when the measured room temperature rises above the cooling setpoint. f. When the system switch is in the AUTO position, the system begins heating or cooling, as appropriate, when the measured temperature is outside the bounds of the heating and cooling setpoints. 3. The system operates to maintain a set room temperature of 80°F for cooling (adjustable) and 60°F for heating (adjustable). 4. Normal operating mode is the programmable thermostat’s system switch in the Auto position and the fan switch in the ON position. 5. There are two types of cooling: economizer and mechanical. When the outside air temperature is between 50°F and 75°F (adjustable), the economizer modulates the use of outside air for space cooling. The economizer system shall be integrated with the cooling system and be capable of providing partial cooling even when additional mechanical cooling is required to provide the remainder of the load. If the room temperature continues to rise, the economizer cooling deactivates, and mechanical cooling is activated; outside air damper is at minimum position and return air damper is fully open. Cooling is deactivated when the set room temperature is reached. 6. The controls shall minimize supplemental heat usage during start-up, set-up, and defrost conditions. Controls shall prevent supplemental heater usage above an outside air temperature of 40°F.
END OF SECTION 23 81 43
HEATING UNITS SECTION 23 82 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Specification Section Includes: 1. Electric Wall Heaters. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00. 2. Division 01. 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Product technical data: a. Standard catalog cut sheet. b. Performance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers model numbers listed in the individual product paragraphs below are acceptable. 2.02 ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS: A. Approved Products: 1. QMark Model CRA. 2. INDEECO Model WLI. 3. Approved Equal. B. Design: 1. Factory fabricated assembly bearing the Underwriters Laboratory label. 2. Horizontal airflow discharge. 3. Suitable for recessed wall mounting as shown on the Drawings. 4. Internal wiring, contactors, relays, and transformers. 5. Integral unit-mounted thermostat. HEATING UNITS SECTION 23 82 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Comply with NEC and UL listings. B. Avoid interference with structure and with work of other trades, preserving adequate headroom and clearing doors and passageways. Check each piece of equipment for defects, verifying that items function properly and that adjustments have been made. C. Install heaters in place with box trim flush with finished wall.
END OF SECTION 23 82 00 ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies general requirements for electrical work. Detailed requirements for specific electrical items are specified in other sections but are subject to the general requirements of this section. The electrical drawings and schedules included in this project manual are functional in nature and do not specify exact locations of equipment or equipment terminations. B. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 01 78 39 3. Section 01 73 24 4. Section 09 90 00 5. All Division 26 Sections 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title NECA-1 National Electrical Contractors Association – Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting NFPA-70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Elementary or Schematic Diagram: A schematic (elementary) diagram shows, by means of graphic symbols, the electrical connections and functions of a specific circuit arrangement. The schematic diagram facilitates tracing the circuit and its functions without regard to the actual physical size, shape, or location of the component devices or parts. B. One-Line Diagram: A one-line diagram shows by means of single lines and graphical symbols the course of an electrical circuit or system of circuits and the components, devices or parts used therein. Physical relationships are usually disregarded. C. Block Diagram: A block diagram is a diagram of a system, instrument, computer, or program in which selected portions are represented by annotated boxes and interconnecting lines.
ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
D. Wiring Diagram or Connection System: A wiring or connection diagram includes all of the devices in a system and shows their physical relationship to each other including terminals and interconnecting wiring in an assembly. This diagram shall be (a) in a form showing interconnecting wiring only by terminal designation (wireless diagram), or (b) a panel layout diagram showing the physical location of devices plus the elementary diagram. E. Interconnection Diagram: 1. Interconnection diagrams shall show all external connections between terminals of equipment and outside points, such as motors and auxiliary devices. References shall be shown to all connection diagrams which interface to the interconnection diagrams. Interconnection diagrams shall be of the continuous line type. Bundled wires shall be shown as a single line with the direction of entry/exit of the individual wires clearly shown. Wireless diagrams and wire lists are not acceptable. 2. Each wire identification as actually installed shall be shown. The wire identification for each end of the same wire shall be identical. All devices and equipment shall be identified. Terminal blocks shall be shown as actually installed and identified in the equipment complete with individual terminal identification. 3. All jumpers, shielding and grounding termination details not shown on the equipment connection diagrams shall be shown on the interconnection diagrams. Wires or jumpers shown on the equipment connection diagrams shall not be shown again on the interconnection diagram. Signal and DC circuit polarities and wire pairs shall be shown. Spare wires and cables shall be shown. F. Arrangement, Layout, or Outline Drawings: An arrangement, layout, or outline drawing is one which shows the physical space and mounting requirements of a piece of equipment. It may also indicate ventilation requirements and space provided for connections or the location to which connections are to be made. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10 B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check- marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.
ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
C. Each submittal covered under Division 26 shall be thoroughly reviewed by the Contractor responsible for Division 26 work. The Contractor shall provide review comments attached to the submittal identifying compliance or non-compliance with the Division 26 specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible to verify that submittals meet specified requirements. Submittals shall be partitioned by specification section. D. Submittal information for Division 26 submittals shall be manufacturer's catalog descriptive literature with identifying arrows pointing to the specific equipment, devices, and materials to be supplied for the individual specification sections. Catalog information shall include technical specifications and application information, including NEMA and electrical ratings, range, weight, accuracy, etc. Catalog cuts shall be edited to show only the items, model numbers, and information which apply. E. Submittal information for Division 26 submittals including but not limited to catalog cuts and other such formatted materials shall be assembled in a three ring binder(s) for the submittal. Each Division 26 Section requiring a submittal shall be separated by a section tab. Multiple submittals for a single Division 26 Section is unacceptable. Binders shall contain a cover sheet, indexed by Sections. Sections shall contain an index sheet with equipment listed and cross-referenced to the appropriate specification paragraph. F. Interconnection diagram: The Contractor shall prepare interconnection diagrams depicting all cable requirements together with their actual terminations as specified in paragraph 1.08 E of this section. G. Provide certificates of successful inspection for the electrical inspections specified in this section. H. Applicable operation and maintenance information on an item-by-item basis in accordance with Section 01 33 10, Submittals. Operation and maintenance information shall be provided at the time of equipment, device, or material site delivery, or at a certain stage of project completion as required by Section 01 33 10, Submittals, whichever is the earlier. Full-size drawings shall be reduced to 11 x 17 inches. I. Test results for motors and electrical systems on the forms specified in Section 26 08 01, Testing. A file of the original test results shall be maintained by the Contractor. Prior to acceptance of work, the resulting file shall be provided to the Engineer. J. Description of functional checkout procedures specified shall be provided 5 days prior to performing functional checkout tests. K. Manufacturer’s record documents specified in Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents. L. Storage and handling requirements for all equipment. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Identification of Listed Products: 1. Electrical equipment and materials shall be listed for the purpose for which they are to be used, by an independent testing agency. Two such organizations are Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Canadian Standards Association (CSA). Independent testing agency shall be acceptable to the inspection Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
2. When a product is not available with a testing laboratory listing for the purpose for which it is to serve, the product may be required by the inspection authority, to undergo inspection at the manufacturer's place of assembly. All costs and expenses incurred for such inspections shall be included in the original contract price. Jurisdiction for this project is the City of Seattle Department of Construction and Inspection (SDCI). Contractor shall verify that equipment provided is in conformance with the listing guidelines per Seattle SDCI requirements. B. Factory Tests: Where specified in the individual product specification section, factory tests shall be performed at the place of fabrication and performed on completion of manufacture or assembly. The costs of factory tests shall be included in the contract price. C. Inspections: Work on this project will be subject to review and inspections by the following agencies. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with these agencies in conducting these inspections: 1. Seattle City Light 2. City of Seattle Department of Construction and Inspection 1.06 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Equipment and materials to be located indoors shall be stored indoors and sealed with plastic film wrap. B. Provide manufacturer’s recommended storage and handling requirements. 1.07 BASIS OF DESIGN A. The basis of the mechanical and electrical design is the installation and circuiting of equipment and motors as shown in the electrical drawing(s). In the event that different equipment or motors are provided, the Contractor shall coordinate the various suppliers, vendors, and subcontractors to change the required electrical conduit, cables, breakers, motor control center sections, starters units and accessories, etc. as necessary to meet the vendor’s equipment installation requirements of the National Electrical Code. The traits and characteristics of all provided materials, equipment, and devices shall meet the specifications. These changes to materials, equipment, and devices shall be at no cost to the Owner or Engineer. Electrical submittal information shall be coordinated with the equipment and motors provided. B. The Contractor shall note that certain systems such as the security system, seismic monitoring, communications, and SCADA are provided partially or in total by the Owner. Raceways are included in these Contract Documents for these systems to the extent that these systems requirements were known during design. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of raceways for these systems with the Owner during construction since the exact requirements for raceway routing, sizing, and quantities may not be precisely known until this project is in construction. 1.08 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. General: Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials shall be sized and rated for a temperature of 40 degrees C at an elevation ranging from sea level to 3000 feet without exceeding the manufacturer's stated tolerances.
ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
B. Corrosive Areas: The following areas are designated as corrosive: 1. Pump station wet well 2. Headbox 3. Tide Gate vault 4. Diversion structure 5. All outdoor areas C. Hazardous (Classified) Areas: The following areas are designated as hazardous (classified) in accordance with the NEC:
Area Hazardous Classification Pump station wet well Class I Division 2 Outside three feet from pump station exhaust Class I Division 2 fan Headbox Class I Division 2 Tide Gate vault Class I Division 2 Diversion structure Class I Division 2
D. Seismic: For required seismic bracing of all components including, but not limited to, cable trays, conduits, and lighting see specification Section 01 73 24, Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures, in addition to requirements called for in these Sections. Contractor shall provide Contractor designed engineered systems or SMACNA approved systems as specified. 1.09 DRAWINGS A. Where the Contractor is required to provide information on drawings as part of the specified work, such drawings shall be prepared on 22-inch by 34-inch polyester plastic (Mylar) drafting media complete with borders and title blocks clearly identifying project name, equipment and the scope of the drawing. Drawing quality and size of presentation shall be such as to permit 50 percent reduction of such drawings for insertion in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.10 INDICATING LAMP COLORS A. Unless otherwise specified, indicating lights shall be equipped with colored lenses in accordance with the following schedule:
Color Function Example Red Run, open valve Equipment operating, motor running Green Not running, closed Equipment ready, end of cycle valve White or clear Normal condition Control power on, equipment available to operate Amber (yellow) Abnormal condition Failure of equipment, alarm or fault condition
ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
1.11 UTILITY SERVICES A. Description of Work: 1. Seattle City Light (SCL) is the power utility service provider for this project. 2. For new permanent power service division of work between the Seattle Public Utilities, Seattle City Light and the Contractor, the Contractor’s responsibilities shall be as follows: a. The Contractor shall coordinate with Seattle City Light on the installation of the electrical service for this project. Metered service for this facility will be secondary service at 480 volts, three phase, with proposed location of the metering equipment as shown on the Drawings. b. The Contractor shall finalize all submitted documentation requirements requested by Seattle City Light for new power service. Seattle Public Utilities has submitted design level information to Seattle City Light during initial inquiries for new power service. This information shall be confirmed and updated to reflect any changes based on new information made available during construction. This would include any vendor information on electrical loads that might impact the new service requirements. c. The Contractor shall schedule any required installation inspections with SCL and shall notify the Engineer of such scheduled inspections at least 2 weeks prior to any inspections taking place d. The Contractor shall make arrangements for and obtain any necessary electrical AHJ approval for the electrical installation on this project that may be required for SCL connection of new service e. The Contractor shall coordinate the final location of the electrical service current transformer panel and utility service revenue meter and the routing and installation of the service drop conduits to these panels with SCL per their requirements. f. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that any and all SCL requirements above and beyond those specified above for the installation of the new electrical service for this project are met. 3. For new permanent power service division of work between the Seattle Public Utilities, Seattle City Light and the Contractor the Seattle Public Utilities will be responsible for the following: a. The Seattle Public Utilities will pay SCL customer charges associated with the new permanent electrical service request for this project. The Contractor shall pay any SCL charges for temporary electrical service required for this project. b. The Seattle Public Utilities will provide drawings that may be required by SCL. Load calculation and updated service application forms will be provided by SPU. These forms will be updated by the SPU based on Vendor provided information that shall be furnished via the equipment submittal process. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the information required by SCL is provided by the selected equipment vendors in a timely manner.
ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. General: Equipment and materials shall be new and free from defects. All material and equipment of the same or a similar type shall be of the same manufacturer throughout the work. Standard production materials shall be used wherever possible. B. Equipment Finish: Unless otherwise specified, electrical equipment and materials shall be painted by the manufacturer as specified in Section 09 90 00. C. Enclosure rating table: Unless specified otherwise in other sections, electrical and instrumentation enclosures shall be provided in accordance with the following table.
Area type NEMA 250 rating and material Indoor dry NEMA 12 mild steel Corrosive NEMA 4X stainless steel Outdoor NEMA 4X stainless steel Classified NEMA 7D/NEMA 4X copper free aluminum 2.02 WIRE MARKERS A. Each power and control conductor shall be identified at each terminal to which it is connected. Conductors size No. 10 AWG or smaller shall have identification sleeves. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall use cable markers of the locking tab type. Tabs shall be white plastic with conductor identification number permanently embossed. B. Conductors shall be identified in accordance with paragraph 2.02 A of this section. Adhesive strips are not acceptable. C. The letters and numbers that identify each wire shall be machine printed on sleeves with permanent black ink with figures 1/8 inch high. Sleeves shall be yellow or white tubing and sized to fit the conductor insulation. Shrink the sleeves with hot air after installation to fit the conductor. D. Conductor and Wire Marker Manufacture: 1. TMS Thermofit Marker System by Raychem Co 2. Sleeve style wire marking system by W. H. Brady Co. 3. or equal. 2.03 RACEWAY MARKERS A. Raceway markers tags shall be: 1. Solid brass with 0.036-inch minimum thickness. 2. Raceway number stamped in 3/16-inch minimum height characters 3. Attached to the raceway with 316 stainless steel wire.
ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
2.04 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates shall be made from laminated phenolic plastic. 1. Nominal size: 3/4 inch high by 2 inches long. 2. Black backgrounds with 3/16-inch white letters. B. Abbreviations shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to manufacture because of space limitations. Nameplate adhesives will not be permitted on the outside of enclosures. 2.05 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Unless otherwise specified, terminal blocks shall be panhead strap screw type. Terminals shall be provided with integral marking strips that permanently identify with the connecting wire numbers as shown on the drawings: 1. Terminal blocks for P-circuits (power 120-600 volts) a. Rated not less than the conductor current rating b. Rated not less than 600 volts AC. 2. Terminal blocks for C-circuits and S-circuits: a. Rated not less than 20 amperes b. Rated not less than 300 volts AC. 3. Terminals shall be tin-plated. 4. Insulating material shall be nylon.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The work under Division 26 shall be performed in accordance with these specifications. B. Refer to the National Electrical Contractors Association’s (NECA) National Electrical Installation Standards (NEIS) for Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting (NECA-1) as a minimum baseline of quality and workmanship for installing electrical products and systems that defines what is meant by “neat and workmanlike” as required by the National Electrical Code Section 110-12. Specified requirements supersede NECA practices. C. Electrical layout drawings are diagrammatic, unless otherwise detailed or dimensioned. The Contractor shall coordinate the location of electrical material or equipment with the work. D. Minor changes in location of electrical material or equipment made prior to installation shall be made at no cost to the Owner. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of any required structures penetrations for raceways with work specified in other sections of these specifications.
ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 9
3.02 EQUIPMENT COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall coordinate the equipment supplied from various manufacturers and vendors. This includes but is not limited to: 1. Obtaining specific information on equipment ratings and sizes and verifying that electrical components supplied meet, or match the requirements such as voltage, phase, frequency, starter types, etc. 2. Contractor shall provide equipment that will fit within the space allocated on the Drawings and meet NEC clearances. 3. Providing power and control equipment, wiring, and raceways to meet the requirements of the mechanical equipment supplied. B. Any discrepancies between the electrical equipment and other equipment shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Engineer. 3.03 HOUSEKEEPING A. Electrical equipment shall be protected from dust, water and damage. Motor control centers, switchgear, and buses shall be wiped free of dust and dirt, kept dry, and shall be vacuumed on the inside within 30 days of acceptance of the work. B. Before final acceptance, the Contractor shall touch up any scratches on equipment as specified in 09 90 00. C. Electrical equipment temporarily exposed to weather, debris, liquids, or damage during construction shall be protected. 3.04 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LABELING A. Electrical equipment shall have field marked signs and labeling to warn qualified persons of the potential electric arc flash hazards per NEC Article 110.16 Arc-Flash Hazard Warning. B. Electrical equipment shall have NFPA 70E labels installed stating the results of the Arc Flash analysis specified in Section 26 05 73, Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study. C. Electrical distribution equipment and utilization equipment shall be labeled to identify the power source and the load in accordance with NEC Article 110.22, Identification of Disconnecting Means installation criteria. Specific information is required such as the equipment tag number and equipment description of both the power source and the load equipment. 3.05 TESTING A. General: Testing by a NETA certified testing agency is specified in Section 26 08 01. The testing specified in this Section 26 00 00 may be performed by the Contractor or by the test agency specified in Section 26 08 01. Test submittals shall indicate which party will be responsible for these tests. Prior to energizing the electrical circuits, insulation resistance measurements tests shall be performed using a 1000-volt megohmmeter to verify the conductor is acceptable for use on the project. The test measurements shall be recorded on the specified forms and provided in accordance with paragraph 1.03 of this section.
ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 10
B. Conductor and Cable Tests: The phase-to-ground insulation resistance shall be measured for all circuits rated 120 volts and above except lighting circuits. Measurements may be made with motors and other equipment connected. Solid state equipment shall be disconnected, unless the equipment is normally tested by the manufacturer at voltages in excess of 1000 volts DC. Conduct tests in accordance with the NETA requirements as specified in Section 26 08 01. Insulation resistance measurements shall be recorded in a format similar to Form 26000-A, contained in Section 00 60 00, Sample Forms. Insulation with resistance of less than 10 megohms is not acceptable. C. Motor Tests: 1. The Installed Motor Test Form, 26000-B, specified in Section 00 60 00, Sample Forms, shall be completed for each motor after installation. 2. Motors shall have their insulation resistance measured before they are connected. Motors 50 HP and larger shall have their insulation resistance measured at the time of delivery as well as when they are connected. Conduct tests in accordance with the NETA requirements as specified in Section 26 08 01. Insulation resistance values less than 10 megohms are not acceptable. D. Pre-Functional Test Checkout: Functional testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 08 01, Testing. Prior to functional testing, all protective devices shall be adjusted and made operative. 1. Submit a description of the proposed functional test procedures prior to the performance of functional checkout. 2. Prior to energization of equipment, perform a functional checkout of the control circuit. Checkout: a. Energizing each control circuit. b. Operating each control device, alarm device, or monitoring device. c. Operate each interlock to verify that the specified action occurs. E. Verify motors are connected to rotate in the correct direction. Verification may be accomplished by momentarily energizing the motor, provided the Contractor confirms that neither the motor nor the driven equipment will be damaged by reverse operation or momentary energization. 3.06 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Contract documents shall be maintained and annotated by the Contractor during construction, including the record drawings specified in Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents, and the following additional schedules, lists, and drawings: 1. Circuit Schedules 2. Panel Schedules 3. Original Submittal Drawings
END OF SECTION 26 00 00
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies copper cables, conductors, and wire rated 600 volts insulation used for power; lighting, analog, digital, or pulse signals and control circuits. This section also specifies copper cables and signal cable rated 300 volt insulation used for data communication. B. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 26 00 00 3. Section 26 08 01 4. Section 40 05 06 5. Section 40 90 00 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ASTM B3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire ASTM B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft ASTM B33 Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes ICEA S-68-516 Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire NEMA WC7 Cross-Linked-Thermosetting Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC) UL 44 Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10 B. Submittals specified in Section 26 00 00 C. Complete catalog cuts for all conductors, wire, and cable.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL A. Unscheduled Conductors and Cables: 1. Where not specified on the Drawings, conductors and cables shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code for the particular equipment served with the minimum size as specified herein. 2. Unscheduled power, control, lighting and receptacle conductors shall be XHHW. B. Cable Specification Sheets (CABLESPEC): General requirements for conductors and cables specified in this Section are listed on CABLESPEC sheets in paragraph 3.06 of this section. 2.02 COLOR CODING A. Control conductors color coding shall be as specified in paragraph 2.02 C.3 of Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Controls for Process Systems. B. Power Conductors: 1. Power conductors shall have the following colors for the indicated voltage:
Power 480V 208/120V Conductor Phase A Brown Black Phase B Orange Red Phase C Yellow Blue Ground Green Green Neutral Gray White 2. Cables may be black with colored 3/4-inch vinyl plastic tape applied at each cable termination junction box. Tape shall be wrapped with 25 percent overlay to provide 3 inches minimum coverage. C. Signal Conductors: Signal cable conductors shall be color coded black and white for pairs or black, white, and red for triads. Each conductor and each group of conductors shall be numbered.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
2.03 POWER AND CONTROL CONDUCTORS AND CABLE, 600 VOLT A. Single Conductor: Provide stranded conductors for all wiring. Provide minimum conductor size of 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits and minimum conductor size of 14 AWG for control circuits. 2.04 SIGNAL CABLES A. General: 1. Factory cable between manufactured instrument system components shall be provided in compliance with the instrument manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Signal cable shall be provided for instrument signal transmission. Single instrument cable (SIC) and multiple-circuit instrument cable (MIC) shall be provided in accordance with the following examples: a. CABLESPEC “SIC”: Cable designation: 1PR#16S shielded twisted pair Cable designation: 1TR#16S triad b. CABLESPEC “MIC": Cable designation example: 4PR#16S with individual shields for each of the four pair and an overall shield and jacket for the multi-conductor instrument cable. B. Security System Cables: Security system conductors will be provided by others. 2.05 PORTABLE CORD A. Portable cord shall be provided in accordance with CABLESPEC "CORD," unless otherwise specified. Cords shall contain an equipment grounding conductor. 2.06 SPLICING AND TERMINATING MATERIALS A. Connectors shall be tool applied compression type of correct size and UL listed for the specific application. Connectors shall be tin-plated high conductivity copper. B. Signal and control conductors shall be connected to terminal blocks and field devices and instruments shall be terminated with conductor terminals as specified in paragraph 2.02 of Section 26 00 00, Electrical. C. Connectors for wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger shall be compression tool installed one- hole lugs up to size No. 3/0 AWG, and two-hole or four-hole lugs for size No. 4/0 and larger. Mechanical clamp, dimple, screw-type connectors or wire nuts are not acceptable. In-line splices and taps shall be used only by written consent of the Engineer. D. Power conductor splices shall be compression type, made with a compression tool die approved for the purpose, as made by Thomas and Betts Corp., or equal. Splices shall be covered with electrical products designed for the application, insulated, and covered with a heat-shrinkable sleeve or boot, as specified elsewhere.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
E. Motor connection kits shall consist of heat-shrinkable, polymeric insulating material over the connection area and high dielectric strength mastic to seal the ends against ingress of moisture and contamination. Motor connections may use the Tyco Electronics removable boot product line. F. Motor connection kits shall accommodate a range of cable sizes for both in-line and stub-type configurations. Connection kits shall be independent of cable manufacturer's tolerances. Refer to the electric motor specification Section 40 05 06, Electric Motors. 2.07 CORD GRIPS A. Cord grips shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings to attach flexible cord to equipment enclosures. Cord grips shall consist of a threaded aluminum body and compression nut with a neoprene bushing and stainless steel wire mesh for strain relief. Cord grip shall provide a watertight seal at enclosure interface and sized to accommodate the flexible cord.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL A. Conductors shall be identified at each connection terminal and at splice points. The identification marking system shall comply with Section 26 00 00, Electrical. B. Pulling wire and cable into conduit or trays shall be completed without damaging or putting undue stress on the insulation or jacket. Manufacture recommended and UL Listed pulling compounds are acceptable lubricants for pulling wire and cable. Grease is not acceptable. C. Raceway construction shall be complete, cleaned, and protected from the weather before cable is installed. Where wire or cable exits a raceway or tray, a means of wire or cable support shall be provided. 3.02 600 VOLT CONDUCTOR AND CABLE A. Conductors in panels and electrical equipment shall be bundled and laced at intervals not greater than 6 inches, spread into trees and connected to their respective terminals. Lacing shall be made up with plastic cable ties. Cable ties shall be tensioned and cut off by using a tool specifically designed for the purpose such as a Panduit GS2B. Other methods of cutting cable ties are unacceptable. B. Conductors crossing hinges shall be bundled into groups not exceeding 10 to 15 conductors and protected using nylon spiral flexible covers to protect conductors. Provide oversized plastic panel wiring duct within panels and panelboards. C. Slack shall be provided in junction and pull boxes, handholes and manholes. Slack shall be sufficient to allow cables or conductors to be routed along the walls. Amount of slack shall be equal to largest dimension of the enclosure. Provide dedicated electrical wireways and insulated cable holders mounted on unistrut in manholes and handholes.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
D. Raceway fill limitations shall be as defined by NEC and the following: 1. Lighting and receptacle circuits may be in the same conduit in accordance with de-rating requirements of the NEC. Lighting and receptacle circuits shall not be in conduits with power or control conductors. Signal conductors shall be in separate conduits from power conductors. Motor feeder circuits shall be in separate conduits including small fan circuit unless combination fan-light fixture. 2. Power conductors derived from uninterruptible power supply systems shall not be installed in raceways with conductors of other systems. Install in separate raceways. 3. Splices and terminations are subject to inspection by the Engineer prior to and after insulating. 4. Motor terminations at 460-volt motors shall be made by bolt-connecting the lugged connectors. 5. In-line splices and tees, where approved by the Engineer, shall be made with tubular compression connectors and insulated as specified for motor terminations. Splices and tees in underground handholes or pull boxes shall be insulated using Scotch-cast epoxy resin or Raychem splicing kits. 6. Terminations at solenoid valves, 120 volt motors, and other devices furnished with pigtail leads shall be made using self-insulating tubular compression connectors within the termination box. 7. Terminations at valve and gate motor actuators shall be made directly into the actuator where possible. Power termination shall be made in the actuator power disconnect. Control and signal cable may be routed to a termination box near the actuator on 20-ampere rated terminal strips with label identification for the control and signal conductors and extended from there to the actuator wiring compartment in flexible conduit. 3.03 SIGNAL CABLE A. Provide terminal blocks at instrument cable junctions within dedicated terminal boxes provided by the installer. Signal circuits shall be run without splices between instruments, terminal boxes, or panels. B. Circuits shall not be made using conductors from different pairs or triads. Triads shall be used wherever 3-wire circuits are required. C. Shields are not acceptable as a signal path, except for circuits operating at radio frequencies utilizing coaxial cables. Common ground return conductors for two or more circuits are not acceptable. D. Shields shall be bonded to the signal ground bus at the control panel only and isolated from ground at the field instrument or analyzer and at other locations. Shields or drain wires for spare circuits shall not be grounded at either end of the cable run. Terminals shall be provided for running signal leads and shield drain wires through junction boxes. E. Spare circuits and the shield drain wire shall be terminated on terminal blocks at both ends of the cable run and be electrically continuous through terminal boxes.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
F. Where instrument cable splicing is required, provide an instrument stand with terminal box mounted approximately 3 feet high for instrument cable splices with the circuits and individual conductors provided with label as specified in Section 26 00 00, Electrical. G. Cable for paging, security, voice communication, and telephone systems and fire alarm systems shall be installed and terminated in compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.04 PORTABLE CORD A. Portable power cords feeding permanent equipment, such as pendant cords feeding motors for pumps, cranes, hoists, and portable items shall have a wire mesh cord grip of flexible stainless steel wire to relieve the tension from the cable termination. Connection of portable cords to permanent wiring shall be accomplished with dedicated boxes and terminals blocks. 3.05 TESTING A. The Contractor shall test conductors, wire, and cable in accordance with Section 26 08 01. 3.06 CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC) A. General: Conductor, wire, and cable types for different locations, service conditions and raceway systems are specified on individual cable specification sheets. Scheduled and unscheduled conductors, wires, and cables shall be installed in accordance with the CABLESPEC SHEETS. B. CABLESPEC Sheets: The following CABLESPEC sheets are included in this section.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
Cable System Identification: DC1
Description: Premise Cable: IEC Category 5E UTP; NEMA WC-63.1 Category 5e; Fast Ethernet: 100 Base TX; 4 pair, #24 AWG Cable
Voltage: 300 V RMS
Conductor Material: Solid Bare copper
Insulation Material: FRPO - Flame Retardant Polyolefin / FEP -Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene; Color Coded conductor insulation
Jacket: LS PVC - Low Smoke Polyvinyl Chloride with ripcord Trade Name Example: Flamarrest Sequential Footage Marking: every two feet
Manufacturer(s): Cooper Industries – Belden 1585A; or equal.
Execution:
Applications: Gigabit Ethernet Data Communications LAN, CCTV Fixed. Component or Composite Video, Digital Video, RS-422,
Installation: Install in accordance with associated equipment manufacturer’s instruction.
Testing: Test in accordance with paragraph 3.05 of this section.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
Cable System Identification: DC2
Description: Shielded Data Communication Cable; Remote I/O Cable: RS-485 18 AWG Copper. UL/NEC type TC.
Voltage: 600V V RMS, 75 degree C.
Conductor Material: Tinned copper
Insulation: Flame Retardant Polyolefin
Shield Aluminum/polyester shield with 100% coverage, tinned copper braid shield with 55% coverage, and tinned copper 20 AWG drain wire
Jacket: Sunlight resistant polyvinyl chloride Color: Blue
Manufacturer(s): Belden 3074F; or equal
Execution:
Application: DCU or PLC to equipment Modbus data communications cable.
Installation: Install in accordance with associated equipment manufacturers instruction.
Testing: Test in accordance with paragraph 3.05 of this section.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 9
Cable System Identification: DC3
NOT USED
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 10
Cable System Identification: DC4
Description: Category 6A Ethernet, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, ISO/IEC Class E. 4 pair with overall shield. UL CMR.
Voltage: 600 V RMS
Conductor Material: Solid Bare copper 23 AWG
Insulation Material: Propylene
Shield Shielded, overall aluminum-polyester tape 100 percent coverage with 24 AWG tinned copper drain wire
Jacket: Inner PVC Jacket (PVC), Outer blue PVC Jacket.
Flame Resistance UL 1666 riser
Manufacturer(s): Belden 7953A; or equal.
Execution:
Applications: Gigabit ethernet data communication with 480V equipment.
Installation: Install in accordance with associated equipment manufacturer’s instruction.
Testing: Test in accordance with paragraph 3.05 of this section.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 11
Cable System Identification: XHHW
Description: Industrial grade conductor Sizes: 14 AWG through 750 kcmil, stranded conductor
Voltage: 600 volts
Conductor Material: Bare annealed Class B strand conductor copper
Insulation: NEC Type XHHW-2; 90 degree C dry and C wet; Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLP) per ICEA S-66-524 and UL-44; Color in sizes 14, 12 and 10 AWG: Black, Green, Yellow, White, Orange, Brown, Red, Blue
Jacket: None
Flame Resistance: UL 83
Manufacturer(s): Okonite, X-Olene; Cablec, Durasheath XLP; or equal.
Uses Permitted: Power, controls, lighting and receptacle circuits.
Execution:
Installation: Install in accordance with paragraph 3.02 of this section.
Testing: Test in accordance with paragraph 3.05 of Section 26 00 00, Electrical, and Section 26 08 01, Testing.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 12
Cable System Identification: CORD
Description: Industrial Grade Flexible Portable Cord: Synthetic Rubber Insulation with Oil-Resistant Thermoset Jacket construction: Type SOOW for 600 Volt circuits; Type SJOOW for 300 Volt circuits
Voltage: 600 V RMS where shown or where unspecified: Type SOOW
Conductor Material: Flexible rope stranded annealed copper per ASTM B189 and B33.
Insulation: Insulation: Ethylene propylene (EPR) per ICEA S-68-516 and rated for continuous operation at 90 degrees C. Green used for ground only Color: 2/C Black and White; 3/C Black, White, and Green; 4/C Black, White, Red and Green; 5/C Black, White, Red, Green, and Orange
Jacket: Heavy-duty Neoprene per ICEA S-68-516. Color: Black
Manufacturer(s): Okonite: Okocord; American Insulated Wire Cord equal; or Engineer accepted equal.
Execution:
Installation: Install in accordance with paragraph 3.02 of this section.
Testing: Test in accordance with paragraph 3.05 of this section.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 13
Cable System Identification: SIC
Description: Single twisted, shielded pair or triad, 18 AWG, instrumentation and signal cable; UL/NEC type TC.
Voltage: 600 volts
Conductor Material: Bare annealed copper; stranded per ASTM B8
Insulation: 15 mil, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), 90 degree C temperature rated Color Code per ICEA Method-1: Pairs- Black and White with one conductor in each pair printed alpha-numerically for identification
Lay: Twisted on a 2-inch lay
Shield: 100 percent, 1.35 mil aluminum-Mylar tape with a 7-strand tinned copper drain wire
Jacket: 35 mil Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Flame Resistance: UL 1277
Manufacturer(s): Okonite, Type P-OS;-Belden 1120A; or equal.
Execution:
Use: Analog signal cable and RTD device Triad extension cable.
Installation: Install in accordance with paragraph 3.03 of this section.
Testing: Test in accordance with paragraph 3.05 of this section.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 14
Cable System Identification: VFD
Description: Shielded for VFD drives. Multi conductor cross-linked polyethylene XHHW-2 or RHW-2 power cable with three symmetrical stranded grounds. The sum of the three ground's size (circular mills) equal to or greater than the size of a phase conductor. UL listed TC-ER. Conductor sizes 1 AWG though 4/0 AWG.
Voltage: 600 volts
Conductor Material: Tinned copper. Class B, Class D, or Class K stranded
Insulation: 90 degree C dry or wet, crosslinked polyethylene XLPE in accordance with NEMA. UL listed XHHW-2 or RHW-2.
Shield: Two spirally applied 2 mil copper tapes with 100 percent coverage.
Jacket: Black PVC jacket. UL TC-ER listed. Minimum cable bend radius recommended by the manufacturer than or equal to 15x the cable diameter.
Flame Resistance: UL 1685, IEEE 1202
Manufacturer(s): General Cable 4382-- series, Belden 295-- series, or equal.
Execution:
Use: Motors connected to VFDs.
Installation: Install in accordance with paragraph 3.02 of this section.
Testing: Test in accordance with paragraph 3.05 of this section.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies the system for grounding electrical distribution and utilization equipment cabinets, metal surfaces of process/mechanical equipment that contain energized electrical components, metal structures and buildings. B. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System IEEE Std 81.2-1991 Guide to Measurement of Impedance and Safety Characteristics of Large, Extended or Interconnected Grounding Systems NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC) Article 250 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10, Submittals. B. Product data for products specified in this section. C. Products and drawings for connecting ground conductors to fences. D. Ground resistance readings.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CABLE A. Ground cable shall be soft-drawn, bare annealed copper, concentric stranded as specified. If American Wire Gage (AWG) cable sizes are not shown or specified, the minimum sizes shall be as follows: 1. 480V MCC and switchboards: 2/0 AWG 2. Lighting panels: 2 AWG
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
3. Exposed metal: 2 AWG 4. Electrical equipment: 2 AWG 1.06 GROUND RODS A. Ground rods shall be copper covered steel, 3/4-inch diameter and 10 feet long. Rods shall have threaded type removable caps so that extension rods of same diameter and length may be added where necessary. 1.07 COMPRESSION CONNECTORS A. Compression connections shall be cast copper as manufactured by Thomas and Betts, or equal. 1.08 BOLTED CONNECTORS A. Bolted connectors shall be Burndy, O. Z. Gedney, or equal. 1.09 WELDED CONNECTORS A. Exothermic welding products shall be Erico’s Cadweld Plus system with a remotely operated battery powered electronic ignition device and moisture resistant weld metal cup for the required mold, or equal. 1.10 EQUIPMENT GROUND BARS A. Copper equipment ground bars shall be Erico Eritech EGB Series or equal, sized as required for the installation.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. Grounding system shall be provided in compliance with the NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC). Grounding conductor shall not be used as a system neutral. B. Embedded and buried ground connections shall be made by compression connectors utilizing diamond or hexagon dies and a hand compression tool for wire sizes 2 AWG and smaller and a hydraulic pump and compression head for wire sizes 2/0 AWG and larger. Alternate method allowed: exothermic welding using a remote igniter device. C. Tools and dies shall be approved for this purpose; dimple compressions are not acceptable. Compression connections shall be prepared in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Compression-type lugs shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Exposed ground connections to equipment shall be made by bolted clamps unless otherwise specified. No solder material shall be used in any part of the ground circuits. D. Embedded ground cables and fittings shall be securely attached to concrete reinforcing steel with tie wires and prevented from displacement during concrete placement. E. Notify the Engineer one working day in advance as specified in Section 00 72 00 prior to backfilling, as each part of the grounding system installed below finished grade is complete and ready for inspection. F. Grounding conductors extended beyond concrete surfaces for equipment connection shall be extended a sufficient length to reach the final connection point without splicing. Provide grounding fittings, pads, or plates as shown in the electrical details. Minimum grounding conductor extension shall be 3 feet.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
G. Grounding conductors which project from a concrete surface shall be located as close as possible to a corner of the equipment pad, protected by conduit, or terminated in a flush grounding plate. H. Exposed grounding conductors shall be supported by noncorrosive metallic hardware at 4-foot intervals or less. Grounding conductors for future equipment shall be terminated using a two-hole copper flush mounted grounding plate, Erico Cadweld, or equal. I. Ground conductors entering enclosures shall be bonded together to the enclosure, if metallic, and to metallic raceways within or terminating at the enclosure. Prior to making ground connections or bonds, the metal surface at the point of connection shall be cleaned. J. Lightning arresters shall be directly connected to the ground grid system using lightning industry braided copper conductors, sized as specified. K. Metallic sheaths or shields of shielded power cable shall be terminated by a copper grounding strip provided with cable connection for connection to the grounding system. 2.02 RACEWAY GROUND A. All raceways shall contain a raceway ground conductor sized per the NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC). B. Metallic conduits shall be terminated and bonded using insulated grounding bushings unless terminated in threaded hubs. Grounding bushings shall be connected to the grounding system using conductors sized in compliance with NEC. 2.03 EQUIPMENT AND ENCLOSURE GROUND A. Electrical distribution and utilization equipment enclosures shall be connected to the grounding system with cable sizes as specified. Metallic property fences shall be grounded to the facility ground grid. 2.04 ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND DUCT BANK GROUNDING A. The grounding conductor routed with underground duct banks shall be grounded to the building or structure grounding electrode system at each end and to manhole or handhole ground buses in manholes and handholes where specified. Where handhole ground buses are not specified, provide ground whips to bond all metal in the manholes or handholes to the duct bank grounding conductor. Where a grounding electrode system is not available at either end of the duct bank, connect the grounding conductor to the nearest available grounding electrode that meets the NEC requirement for grounding electrodes. 2.05 ISOLATED GROUNDING A. When required by an equipment manufacturer, an isolated ground system shall be installed. The Contractor shall provide an additional isolated ground conductor from the service or separately derived system to an isolated ground bus bar at each associated distribution point. The isolated ground bus shall be kept isolated from neutral and grounding buses. B. The isolated ground conductor shall have green insulation with a yellow stripe and shall be run in the same raceway as the power and neutral conductors.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
C. A neutral bonding jumper shall be installed in only one location for each service or separately derived system. The bonding jumper shall be located at the service source or the first immediate distribution point downstream from the source. The neutral and ground buses shall be kept isolated from each other accept where the bonding jumper is installed. 2.06 GROUNDING SYSTEM TESTS A. The Contractor shall test each grounding connection to determine the ground resistance. The grounding test shall be IEEE Standard 81. A plot of ground resistance readings for each isolated ground rod or ground mat shall be submitted on 8-1/2 x 11 inch size graph paper. B. The current reference rod shall be driven at least 100 feet from the ground rod or grid under test or as recommended by IEEE Standard 81. The measurements shall be made at 10-foot intervals beginning 25 feet from the test electrode and ending 75 feet from it, in direct line between the ground rod or center of grid and the current reference electrode. C. A grounding system that shows greater than 2 ohm resistance for the flat portion of the plotted data shall be considered inadequately grounded. D. The Contractor shall add additional parallel connected ground rods and/or deeper driven rods until the ground resistance measurements meet the 2 ohm requirement. Use of salts, water or compounds to attain the specified ground resistance is not acceptable.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. This section covers the furnishing and installation of electrical conduits, wireways, pull boxes, manholes, handholes, fittings and supports. Raceways shall be provided for lighting, receptacles, power, control, instrumentation, signaling and grounding systems. B. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 01 73 24 3. Section 03 30 00 4. Section 26 00 00 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title AASHTO H20 Highway Bridges ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit-Zinc Coated ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing-Zinc Coated ASTM A48 REV A Gray Iron Castings ASTM A193/A193M REV Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for C High Temperature Service ASTM F512 Smooth-Wall Polyvinylchloride Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation FEDSPEC WW-C-581E Conduit, Metal, Rigid and Intermediate; and Coupling, Elbow, and Nipple, Electrical Conduit; Zinc Coated FEDSPEC W-C-1094A Conduit and Conduit Fittings, Plastic, Rigid JIC EMP-1 Electrical Standards for Mass Production Equipment NEMA ICS 6 Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures NEMA TC2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC 40 and EPC 80) NEMA TC6 PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
Reference Title NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 79 Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery IBC International Building Code UL 1 Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit UL 360 Liquid Tight Flexible Electrical Conduit UL 514 Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers UL 651 Rigid Nonmetal Electrical Conduit UL 870 Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings UL 886 Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10 B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check- marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. C. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. D. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. E. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. F. Manufacturer's descriptive literature for materials. G. Contractor’s certifications and calculations that conduit rack and cable tray support systems meet the seismic requirements specified in Sections 26 00 00, Electrical, this section, and Section 01 73 24, Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
H. The qualifications of the design professional to be charged with design, inspection and certification of raceway and tray supports and seismic restraint systems including education, proof of registration, proof of insurance, and previous experience in performing this type of work. The documentation shall be sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this Section. I. Raceway layouts and layout schedule showing raceway locations for all raceway systems in each area with respect to structures, other piping and utilities (ductwork, etc.) and details and location of joints, anchors, supports, fittings, connections, penetrations, fire stop barriers, supports, expansions joints, appurtenances, and flexible couplings, as applicable. Drawings shall be original layouts by the Contractor; photocopies of contract drawings are not acceptable J. Inspection reports, authored, sealed, and signed by the design professional retained under this Section and submitted to the Engineer each week, as specified within this Section. The design professional’s final report shall be submitted to the Owner before beneficial occupancy. K. Duct bank installation photo documentation as specified in this Section.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. General requirements for raceway materials specified in this section are listed in the RACESPECS sheets at the end of this section. The type of raceways and raceway fittings to be used for any given area and application shall conform to the requirements in this section. 2.02 BOXES, GUTTERS, TERMINAL CABINETS, MANHOLES, AND HANDHOLES A. Enclosure constructed of mild sheet steel shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Hinges shall be continuous type and for NEMA-4X cabinets hinges shall be stainless steel. B. Pull Boxes and Wiring Gutters: Indoor boxes and enclosures in non-corrosive or non- process areas larger than FD boxes shall be constructed of sheet steel and galvanized after fabrication. Outdoor boxes and enclosures shall be provided with neoprene gaskets on the hinged doors or removable covers. Box and gutter sizes, metal thickness, and grounding shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Bolt-on junction box covers 3 feet square or larger, or heavier than 25 pounds, shall have a rigid handle. Covers larger than 3 x 4 feet shall be split. C. Terminal Cabinets: Terminal cabinets shall be provided with adjustable terminal strip mounting, back-panels for equipment mounting, print pockets in the doors, continuous door hinges, and three-point lockable latches. Enclosures shall be per 26 00 00 Enclosure Rating Table. Terminal cabinets located outdoors and in corrosive areas with stainless steel door hinge, three-point latch, and filtered ventilation. Terminal blocks shall conform to paragraph 2.05 of Section 26 00 00.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
D. Manholes: 1. Unless otherwise specified, manholes shall be precast concrete, 3000 psi strength at 28 days, with reinforcing with the manhole cover designed for H 20 bridge loading. Necking and shaft shall have 36 inch minimum clear opening. 2. Manhole dimensions shall be as shown on the drawings and where not shown shall be sized in accordance with the NEC. Manhole cover and frame shall be Class 30B gray cast iron per ASTM A48 with machine finished flat bearing surfaces. Manhole covers shall have non-skid surfaces and shall be engraved "SPU ELEC". 3. Manholes shall be watertight except for the drainage sumps. Exterior walls of manholes shall be provided with 6 mils of waterproof membrane, Sonneborn HLM 5000 Series, or equal. Manhole walls shall be provided with boxouts with waterstops on all sides of each boxout. Waterstops shall be as specified in the Cast-in-Place Concrete section. 4. Raceway duct entries shall be no less than 14 inches above floor and below ceiling. Raceway boxouts shall be sized to accommodate the penetrating underground duct banks. Raceways bell-ends shall be flush with the interior finished manhole wall. From each duct bank entry into the manhole, the continuous duct bank bare copper grounding conductor shall be supported and routed around the interior manhole walls and bonded together. 5. Floor shall slope to an open drainage sump pit with dimensions shown in the manhole detail or with a minimum of 18 inch length x 18 inch width x 12 inches depth. E. Handholes: 1. Handholes shall be precast concrete with checker plate, galvanized, non-skid surface traffic covers designed for H 20 loading. Handholes shall be provided with precast solid concrete slab bottoms with open drainage sumps. Handholes shall be constructed of 3000 psi reinforced concrete. Handhole cover shall be engraved "SPU ELEC" or "SPU SIGNAL" as applicable. 2. Dimensions shall be as specified on the drawings. Handhole walls shall be provided with boxouts, as specified for manholes. F. Manhole and Handhole Cable Supports: 1. Provide heavy-duty, non-metal cable racks for support of conductors. Racks shall be UL listed glass-reinforced nylon consisting of slotted wall brackets for support arms designed for a minimum of a 400-pound load. Each support bracket shall from the top to the bottom and the arms shall be adjustable and installed on 24- inch centers. Use ½-inch stainless steel bolts, hardware, inserts, and fasteners. Cables supports, clamps or racks shall be provided to support the cable at minimum 2 foot intervals. Concrete inserts shall be embedded on 24-inch centers in walls and ceiling.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
2. Cable Support Products: a. Underground Devices Incorporated Type RA arms with CR36 support brackets. b. Unistrut Power-Rack F20N-STA33 Stanchions with F20N-ARM14 Arms. c. Or approved equal. G. Ground Bus: Provide a ground bus in concrete manholes, handholes, and electrical pullboxes with dimension of 3-foot width x 3-foot length x 3-foot depth and larger. Provide a NEMA threaded 4-hole grounding plate for connecting two to four-1-hole ground connectors on the grounding conductors that enter the enclosure from two to four duct banks. Products: Burndy, T&B, or equal. 2.03 RACEWAY SUPPORTS A. Conduit Supports: 1. Framing channel with end caps and straps shall be provided to support groups of conduit. Individual conduit supports shall be one-hole pipe straps used with clamp backs and nesting backs where required. Material as specified herein. 2. Conduit supports for PVC coated rigid steel and PVC conduit systems shall be one-hole PVC coated rigid steel clamps or oversized stainless steel clamps. B. Ceiling Hangers: Ceiling hangers shall be adjustable steel rod hangers and fittings. Provide J-Type conduit support for single conduit. Straps or hangers of plumber's perforated tape are not acceptable. Unless otherwise shown, hanger rods shall meet ASTM A193 and be sized as 3/8-inch up to 2-inch conduit and shall be 1/2 inch all- thread rod over 2-inch conduit. Material as specified herein. C. Suspended Raceway and Cable Tray Supports and Racks: 1. Suspended raceway and cable tray supports shall consist of concrete inserts, steel rod hangers, and jamb nuts supporting framing channel or lay-in pipe hangers as required. Framing channel shall be a minimum of 12-gauge. Material as specified herein. 2. Hanger rods shall be 1/2-inch diameter all-thread rod and shall meet ASTM A193. Suspended raceway supports and racks shall be braced for seismic forces as specified in Sections 01 86 02 and 26 00 00.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
D. Materials: Table B specifies the type of raceway supports required for each location and application.
Table B Threaded Rod, Location Framing Channel Hardware, and Fittings Indoor, Electrical Room HDG HDG Indoor, process areas Stainless Steel; PVC Stainless Steel; PVC Outdoor area (general) Stainless Steel Stainless Steel HDG = Steel - Hot Dip Galvanized Finish PVC = PVC Coated Galvanized Steel 2.04 CONCRETE ENCASED DUCT BANKS A. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,000 psi. 2.05 UNDERGROUND MARKING TAPE A. Underground detectable marking tape shall be for early warning protection of digging around direct buried cables, conduits, and concrete duct banks. Tape shall be OSHA approved. B. Marking tape example: Low density polyethylene plastic, nominally 6 inches wide and 4 mil thickness with metallic lined tape with red polyethylene film on top and clear polyethylene film on the bottom. Tape shall be imprinted with a warning continuously along the length similar to: "CAUTION - STOP DIGGING - BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW." C. Tape Products: Brady "Identoline"; Services and Materials "Buried Underground Tape"; Somerset (Thomas & Betts) "Protect-A-Line"; or equal. 2.06 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates shall be provided for boxes in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 00 00, Electrical. Nameplate wording shall be as shown on the drawings. Provide the functional description of the device on the nameplate, where wording is not specified 2.07 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION A. Raceway number tags shall conform to the requirements of raceway markers, paragraph 2.03 of Section 26 00 00, Electrical. 2.08 ELECTRICAL SEALANT A. Above elevation 16 feet electrical sealant putty shall be non-hardening, non-oxidizing, non-corrosive, non-poisonous, and non-injurious to human skin with service temperature range of 30 to 200 degrees Fahrenheit. Product shall be used to seal against the entrance of water. B. Below elevation 16 feet electrical selant shall be polyurehtane foam. Approved for electrical cables. HYDRA-SEAL® Handi-Polyurethane-Foam or equal.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
2.09 HAZARDOUS AREA AND CORROSIVE AREA CONDUIT SEALS A. Sealing compound shall be non-hardening type for corrosive areas. Seal fittings for conduit systems in hazardous atmosphere locations shall be hot-dip galvanized cast ferrous alloy or aluminum alloy. Seal fittings shall be 40-percent fill type. B. Sealing compound shall be hard type installed in UL listed for explosion-proof sealing fittings after the conductors are installed, tested, and accepted. C. Provide PVC-coated seal fittings used for PVC-coated conduit with 40-mil factory coating. Seal fitting and sealing compound as manufactured by Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, or equal. 2.10 PULLING LINE A. Pulling line shall be polyethylene type, mildew and rot resistant with minimum of 200- pound tensile strength and minimum 1/4-inch diameter. Install in all “future” raceways. Pulling line as manufactured by Greenlee, Ideal, or equal. 2.11 CONDUIT THREAD LUBRICANT A. Thread lubricant shall be conductive with anti-seize and anti-corrosion properties, compatible with steel and aluminum conduit materials. Conduit thread lubricant as manufactured by T&B CPS KIPR-Shield; Crouse Hinds STL; or equal. 2.12 CONDUIT CABLE SEALING GLAND A. Sealing glands for cables exiting open ends of conduits shall be sealed using synthetic elastomeric sealing gland with stainless steel compression plates drilled for the conduit ID and cable(s) OD, retained by threaded collar at the end of the conduit, OZ Gedney, T&B, Crouse Hinds or equal.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL A. Table C specifies the type of raceway that shall be provided for each location and application by RACESPEC sheet. Table C Location Application/Condition RACESPEC Indoor noncorrosive Exposed GRS Indoor corrosive, Outdoor, Exposed PGRS and Hazardous Concealed Power circuits embedded in concrete PVC8 structure or beneath slab-on-grade Concealed Instrumentation, communications and data PVC8 signals encased in concrete, duct bank Underground Power circuits encased in concrete, duct PVC8 bank
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
Location Application/Condition RACESPEC Underground Instrumentation, communications and data PVC8 signals directly buried Nonhazardous Final connection to equipment and light LFS fixtures Hazardous Final connection to equipment XPFS 3.02 CONDUIT A. Indoor and Outdoor Conduit Systems: 1. In general, Contractor shall be responsible for determining conduit routing that conforms to the specified installation requirements as specified. 2. Conduit installation shall conform to the requirements of the RACESPEC sheets and the following specified installation requirements: a. Exposed conduit: Install parallel or perpendicular to structural members and surfaces. Install conduit horizontally and allow minimum headroom of 7 feet. b. Route two or more exposed conduits in the same general routing parallel with symmetrical bends. c. Space exposed conduit installed on supports not more than 10 feet apart. Space multiple conduits in parallel and use framing channel. d. Comply with the requirements of Section 26 00 00, Electrical, and herein, where conduits are suspended from the ceiling. e. Secure conduit rack supports to concrete walls and ceilings with cast-in- place anchors or framing channel concrete inserts. f. Install conduits with spacing from any heat source that would place the conduit in an ambient above 40 degrees C. g. Install conduits between the reinforcing steel in walls or slabs that have reinforcing in both faces. h. Place conduits under the reinforcement in slabs with only a single layer of reinforcing steel. Separation between conduits, conduits and reinforcement, and conduits and surfaces of concrete shall be maintained in accordance with ACI 318. i. Route conduit clear of structural openings and indicated future openings. j. Provide conduits with flashed and watertight seals routed through roofs or metal walls. k. Grout conduits into openings cut into concrete and masonry structures or where conduits are installed in sleeved wall penetrations. l. Cap conduits or plug flush conduits during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, trash, and water. Cap or plug empty conduits designated as “future”, “spare”, or “empty” and include a pulling accessible at both ends. Use conduit thread lubricant on cap and plug threads prior to installation.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 9
m. Determine concealed conduit stubup locations from the manufacturer's shop drawings. Terminate concealed conduit for future use in specified equipment. n. Install conduit flush with structural surfaces with galvanized couplings and plugs. Caps and plugs shall match the conduit system. o. Provide concealed portions of conduits for future equipment where the drawings indicate future equipment. Match the existing installation for duplicate equipment. p. Terminate conduits that enter enclosures with fittings that match the NEMA rating of the enclosure. q. Provide O-Z Gedney "Type DX" or Crouse-Hinds "Type XD" bonded, weathertight expansion and deflection fitting for the conduit size where conduit across structural joints that allows structural movements. B. Underground Conduit System: Excavation, backfilling, and concrete work shall conform to respective sections of these specifications. Underground conduit shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Underground conduits, including those that are installed beneath concrete slabs on grade, shall be reinforced concrete encased that are not shown otherwise on the drawings. 2. Concrete encased conduit shall have minimum concrete thicknesses of 2 inches between conduits, 1 inch between conduit and reinforcing, and 3 inches between reinforcing and earth, unless shown otherwise in an electrical detail. 3. Concrete encasement on exposed outdoor conduit risers shall continue to 3 inches above grade, with top crowned and edges chamfered. 4. Underground conduit bend radius shall be not less than 2 feet minimum at vertical risers and shall be not less than 3 feet elsewhere. 5. Where conduit and concrete encasement are terminated underground, the conduit and reinforcing shall both extend at least 2 feet past the concrete. Conduits shall be capped and threads protected. Steel surfaces shall be given two coats of epoxy paint. 6. Underground conduits and conduit banks shall have 2 feet minimum earth cover unless otherwise shown. 7. Underground conduit banks through building walls shall be cast-in-place or installed with concrete into boxouts with waterstops on all sides of the boxout. Water stops shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. Extend the horizontal reinforcement from the duct bank into the boxout terminating with J-hook bends. 8. Conduits passing through poured concrete walls with one side in contact with earth shall be installed through sleeves as shown on the Drawings and sealed watertight as specified for pipe in sleeve penetrations as shown on the mechanical drawings. 9. Thoroughly swab conduits and raceways on the inside, immediately upon completion of pouring concrete.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 10
10. Label raceways in accordance with paragraph 2.03 of Section 26 00 00, Electrical. 11. After the concrete has set and before backfilling, pull a mandrel through each conduit. The mandrel shall have a diameter equal to the nominal conduit inside diameter minus 1/2 inch and shall not be less than 4 inches long. 12. If the mandrel showed signs of protrusions on the inside of the conduit, the conduit shall be repaired or replaced. 13. Provide manufactured plastic conduit spacers anchored to prevent movement during the concrete pour. Pulling line as manufactured by Carlon, PW Pipe, Underground Devices, or equal. 14. Form the concrete pour ten feet from the wall, manhole, or handhole and form to allow for future conduit entry. 15. Provide backfill and bedding for duct banks per Section 31 05 00. Backfill after concrete has cured for 72-hours. 16. Prior to backfilling duct banks, document the installation with annotated digital photos that are clear enough to indicate the conduits in the duct bank and identify each of the conduits installed by their raceway tag number. This photo documentation shall also indicate the location of the photo with respect to the nearest building structure or manhole/handhole. Each and every duct bank between each duct bank junction point shall be documented in this manner. 17. Allow and provide for two offsets per conduit and raceway for each 100- linear feet to account for unexpected field conditions including for excavation and backfill limited to three feet of extra width and/or depth. Include these specified provisions in the bid price. 18. Provide PVC threaded adapter with female threads where PVC conduit is joined to steel conduit. Procedure: a. Before assembly: Double coat steel conduit with Red-Robroy, Green- Permacote, Blue-Ocal or equal product. b. After assembly: Seal with 65-mil thick, 2-inch wide mastic sealing tape to ½-inch beyond threads. Products: 3M Scotch 2228; Plymouth 02625; or equal. c. Cover with 20-mil corrosion protection tape applied in ½-lap layers to 2- inch beyond threads. Products: 3M Scotchwrap 51; Plymouth Plywrap 12; or equal. 19. Where reinforced concrete duct banks enter the side of a building, manhole, or handhole and the reinforcement cannot be brought into a window and be terminated, then drill the structure and embed the reinforcement in epoxy to minimum of 3-inches depth. 20. Provide PVC conduit with bell ends where duct banks are terminated at walls, manholes, or handholes. Install bell ends flush with finished concrete. 21. Separate power conduits from signal conduit within the same ductbank by 12” or greater separation. Refer to the drawings or schedules for signal to be installed in metal conduits instead of PVC ducts. 22. Separate high voltage ductbanks from low voltage ductbanks.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 11
23. Install underground conduits into the pump station buildings or structures that are designed to be dry to drain away from the building or structure. Install underground conduits into the pump station to drain away from the pump station. 24. Underground metallic or nonmetallic conduit that turn out of concrete, masonry or earth: Install a 90-degree elbow of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit before emergence above ground. C. Conduit Seal-Off Fittings: 1. Conduits passing: a. Between Class I, Division 1 area and Class I, Division 2 area; provided with sealing fittings located at the boundary in accordance with NEC Article-500. b. From hazardous or corrosive area into a non-hazardous or non-corrosive area. 2. Install the seal-off material after inspection. 3.03 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES A. Unless otherwise specified, manhole and handhole installation shall be as follows: 1. Manholes, handholes, and pull boxes shall be set on a minimum of 6 inches of crushed rock on top of undisturbed or compacted earth. 2. Manholes and handholes shall be set plumb so that water shall drain to the sump. 3. Manhole covers shall be 36-inches in diameter and set at 2 inches above finish grade with surrounding pavement sloping away from the manhole cover. 4. Metallic hardware inside manholes and handholes shall be bonded to the ground plate or ground bus using bolted connections, bonding jumpers and grounding bushings. 3.04 RACEWAY NUMBERING A. Each new and reused conduit shall be provided with a number tag at each end and in each manhole, handhole, or pull box. 3.05 CABLE AND RACEWAY SCHEDULE A. General: The Cable and Raceway Schedule is included on the Drawings. The raceway shall be as specified on the schedule. B. Unscheduled Raceway: 1. With the exception of lighting, and receptacle circuits, the raceway shall be as specified on the drawings or schedules. 2. Unscheduled lighting and receptacle raceways shall be sized by the Contractor in accordance with the NEC. Minimum size shall be 3/4 inch for exposed and 1 inch for embedded raceway.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 12
3.06 RACEWAY LAYOUT A. Submit a raceway layout plan for the overall facility that details the installation of all raceways being installed, scheduled and unscheduled. This layout shall be submitted for review as described in the submittal requirements prior to installing raceway on this project. This layout and installation of raceway shall be used to coordinate the installation or penetration of raceway in or through concrete on this project. The Contractor shall be responsible for the overall coordination of these embedded conduits or penetrations prior to installation.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 13
3.07 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC)
Raceway Identification: GRS
Description: Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS)
Compliance: ANSI and UL
Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, inside and outside. Smooth finished surfaces.
Manufacturers: Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., Wheatland Tube Co., or equal.
Minimum size: Unless otherwise specified, 3/4 inch for exposed, 1 inch for embedded, encased, or otherwise inaccessible.
Fittings:
Locknuts, Rings, Hubs: Hot-dip galvanized insulated throat with bonding locknut or ring,. The hubs shall utilize a neoprene "O" ring and provide a watertight connection. O-Z Gedney, CHM-XXT, or equal
Unions: Electro-galvanized ferrous alloy type Appleton UNF or UNY, Crouse-Hinds UNF or UNY, or equal. Threadless fittings are not acceptable.
Conduit Bodies: Oversized conduit bodies: Ferrous alloy type with screw taps for fastening covers to match the conduit system. Gaskets shall be made of neoprene. Boxes:
Indoor: Dry areas (electrical room) - NEMA 1 mild steel Process areas –Type FD cast ferrous for all device boxes and for junction boxes less than 6 inches square. Larger than FD, galvanized sheet steel or stainless steel.
Corrosive or Outdoor: Type FD cast ferrous or stainless steel for all device boxes and for junction boxes less than 6 inches square. Larger than FD, stainless steel .
Hazardous: NEMA Class 7 cast ferrous.
Elbows:
(3/4" thru 1-1/2") Factory fabricated or field bent.
(2" thru 6") Factory fabricated only.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 14
3.07 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC)
Raceway Identification: GRS (continued)
Conduit Bodies (Oversized):
(3/4" thru 4") Malleable iron, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise noted. Neoprene gaskets for all access plates. Tapered threads for conduit entrances.
(5" and 6") Electro-galvanized iron or cast iron box.
Expansion Fittings: Expansion fittings in embedded runs shall be watertight with an internal bonding jumper. The expansion material shall be neoprene allowing for 3/4-inch movement in any direction.
Manufacturers: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Hubbell, O. Z. Gedney, or equal.
Installation: Rigid steel conduit shall be made up tight and with conductive thread compound. Joints shall be made with standard couplings or threaded unions. Steel conduit shall be supported away from the structures using hot-dip galvanized malleable iron straps with nesting backs or framing channel.
Conduit entering boxes shall be terminated with a threaded hub with a grounding bushing.
Exposed male threads on rigid steel conduit shall be coated with zinc-rich paint.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 15
3.07 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC)
Raceway Identification: LFS
Description: Liquidtight Flexible Steel Conduit
Application: Final connection to equipment subject to vibration or adjustment.
Compliance: UL 360
Construction: Spirally wound galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked and jacketed with liquidtight plastic cover.
Minimum size: 3/4 inch
Fittings: Cadmium-plated malleable iron body and gland nut with cast-in lug, brass grounding ferrule threaded to engage conduit spiral.
O-ring seals around the conduit and box connection and insulated throat.
Provide forty-five and ninety degree fittings where applicable.
Provide PVC coated flexible conduit and fittings where the conduit system is PVC coated.
Installation: Length of flexible liquidtight conduit shall not exceed 15 times the trade diameter of the conduit and not exceed 36 inches in length. Use conductive thread compound.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 16
3.07 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC)
Raceway Identification: PGRS
Description: Rigid Steel Conduit, Corrosion-Resistant, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated. Provide factory made and coated elbows.
Compliance: ANSI, ETL and UL. The PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be stamped with the ETL Verification Mark “ETL Verified to PVC-001”.
Finish: PGRS shall be hot-dip galvanized rigid steel conduit as specified in paragraph 3.03 GRS of this Section, with a PVC Coating. The PVC coating shall be gray, minimum 40 mils thick, bonded to the outside and continuous over the entire length of the conduit except at the threads, and be free of blisters, bubbles, or pinholes. Thread protectors shall be used on the exposed threads of the PVC coated conduit.
A 2-mil coat of urethane enamel coating shall be bonded to the inside. Coating shall be free of pinholes. Bond strength shall exceed the tensile strength of the PVC coat.
Minimum size: 3/4 inch
Fittings: Similarly coated to the same thickness as the conduit and provided with Type 316 stainless steel hardware. Conduit and fittings shall be manufactured by the same company. Male threads on elbows and nipples, and female threads on fittings or conduit couplings shall be protected by application of urethane coating.
Covers: PVC coated covers shall have V-groove seal and stainless steel hardware.
Hubs: Hubs for connection of conduit to junction, device, or terminal boxes shall be threaded cast ferrous alloy. Hubs shall have the same PVC coating as the conduit and insulating grounding bushings. Hubs shall utilize a neoprene "O" ring and shall provide a watertight connection.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 17
3.07 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC)
Raceway Identification: PGRS (continued)
Boxes:
Nonhazardous: NEMA 4X stainless steel. PVC coated coated ferrous.
Hazardous: NEMA 7/4X copper free aluminum. PVC coated ferrous.
Manufacturers: PVC coated conduit shall be by Robroy Industries, , PermaCote, or equal.
Installation: Plastic coated conduit shall be made up tight, threaded, and installed using tools approved by the PVC-coated conduit manufacturer.
Exposed conduit threads shall be covered by a plastic overlap coated and sealed per manufacturer's recommendations.
Pipe wrenches and channel locks shall not be used for tightening plastic coated conduits. Damaged areas shall be patched, using manufacturer's recommended material. The area to be patched shall be built up to the full thickness of the coating. Painted fittings are not acceptable.
PVC coated conduit shall be supported away from the structure using PVC coated conduit wall hangers or PVC coated conduit mounting hardware.
Damaged work shall be replaced
Training: Installers shall be trained and certified in the proper installation techniques provided by the PVC-coated conduit system manufacture. Proof of certification shall be provided under paragraph 1.03 of this section.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 18
3.07 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC)
Raceway Identification: PVC8
Description: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit, extra heavy wall thickness.
Application: Heavy wall thickness for direct bury, concrete encasement.
Compliance: NEMA TC2, UL 651.
Construction: Schedule 80, high-impact, polyvinylchloride (PVC).
Minimum size: 3/4 inch exposed; 1 inch embedded or encased.
Fittings: PVC solvent weld type
Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C
Installation: PVC conduit shall have bell ends where terminated at walls. Joints shall be made with standard PVC couplings. PVC conduit shall have bell ends where terminated at walls.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 33 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 19
3.07 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC)
Raceway Identification: XPFS
Description: Explosion-proof Flexible Steel Conduit
Application: XPFS Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors and other equipment subject to vibration or adjustment for explosion proof motors.
XPFS shall be suitable for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D hazardous areas as specified in the NEC and shall be watertight.
Minimum size: 1/2 inch
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY SECTION 26 05 73 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the short circuit and protective devices coordination study and arc flash study for the electrical distribution equipment being provided under this Contract. These studies shall include power source information from the power utility service company as well as the electrical characteristics of equipment provided under this Contract. B. The Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Report shall include an arc flash analysis on the equipment provided under this Contract in accordance with NFPA 70E Table 3-3.9.3 that includes the personnel protective equipment (PPE) risk category, the energy available, and the clothing recommendation. C. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 26 08 01 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section prevail.
Reference Title IEEE 141 Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants IEEE 242 Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems IEEE 1584 IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations NFPA 70 National Electric Code NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces OSHA 29-CFR, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards: Electrical Subpart S 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY SECTION 26 05 73 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check- marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated and, therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. C. Certified short circuit and coordination report and arc flash report. D. Arc flash warning labels for all new service entrance equipment, motor control centers, transfer switches, power panels, control panels, disconnect switches, and combination motor starters. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Prepared by the manufacturer of the switchgear or motor controls centers for this project or by an electrical testing service or an engineering company which is regularly engaged in power system studies. B. All calculations shall be prepared by or prepared under direct supervision of a Washington State registered professional electrical engineer. 1.06 CERTIFICATION A. Reports prepared under this Section shall be stamped and signed by the Washington State registered professional electrical engineer in responsible charge of the report. 1.07 SCHEDULE A. Reports required under this Section shall be completed prior to energization of equipment. The report shall be completed, submitted to the Engineer for acceptance and reworked to include the Engineer comments and corrections, as required. The report shall be considered complete after no exceptions are taken to the submitted report following review by the Engineer.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION STUDY A. Provide a short circuit and coordination study on the electrical power distribution system as specified and as described in Sections 6.1 and 6.2 of NETA ATS. The studies shall be performed in accordance with IEEE Standards 141 and 242 and shall utilize the ANSI method of short circuit analysis in accordance with ANSI C37.010.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY SECTION 26 05 73 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
B. The studies shall be performed using characteristics and ratings of the actual equipment to be installed on this project. The coordination study shall use the data from the same manufacturer of protective relay devices as being provided by the electrical equipment manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible to obtain and verify all data needed to perform the study. As a minimum, the short circuit study shall include the following: C. One-Line Diagram: 1. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as relays, direct-acting trips, fuses, etc. 2. Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's style and catalog number for all protective devices. 3. Power, voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections of all transformers. 4. Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all instrument transformers energizing each relay. 5. Nameplate ratings of all motors. 6. Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, and induction motors. 7. Significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers, fuses, reactors, etc. 8. Emergency as well as normal switching conditions, as applicable. 9. The time-current setting of existing adjustable relays and direct-acting trips, as applicable. D. Impedance Diagram: 1. Available MVA, voltage, and impedance from the power utility company. 2. Bus impedance. 3. Transformer and/or reactor impedances. 4. Cable impedances. 5. Equipment impedances. 6. System voltages. 7. Grounding scheme for the project: resistance grounding, solid grounding, or no grounding. E. Calculations: 1. Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the greatest. 2. Study shall address bolted faults and calculate the 3-phase and line-to-ground short circuits of each case. 3. Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY SECTION 26 05 73 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
F. As a minimum, the coordination study for the power distribution system shall include the following on 5-cycle, log-log graph paper: 1. Time-current for each protective relay or fuse showing graphically that the settings will provide protection and selectivity within industry standards. Each curve shall be identified, and the tap and time dial settings shall be specified. 2. Time-current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide for maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the Engineer shall be notified as to the cause. 3. Time-current curves and points for cable and equipment damage. 4. Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times. 5. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph. 6. Diagram of bus and breaker arrangement. 2.02 ARC FLASH STUDY A. Perform an arc flash hazard study after the short circuit and protective device coordination study has been completed. Apply the IEEE 1584 nine step analysis procedure. B. For each major part of the electrical power system, determine the following: 1. Flash hazard protection boundary. 2. Limited approach boundary. 3. Restricted approach boundary. 4. Prohibited approach boundary. 5. Incident energy level. 6. PPE hazard/risk category. 7. Type of PPE required. C. Produce arc flash warning labels listing items B 1-7 from above. Also include the bus name and voltage. D. Produce bus detail sheets that list the items B 1-7 from above and the following additional items: 1. Bus name. 2. Upstream protective device name, type, and settings. 3. Bus line to line voltage. E. Produce an arc flash evaluation summary sheet listing the following additional items: 1. Bus name matching contract document identification numbers. 2. Upstream protective device name, type, settings. Numbering shall match contract document identification numbers 3. Bus line to line voltage. 4. Bus bolted fault. 5. Protective device bolted fault current.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY SECTION 26 05 73 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
6. Arcing fault current. 7. Protective device trip/delay time. 8. Breaker opening time. 9. Solidly grounded column. 10. Equipment type. 11. Gap. 12. Arc flash boundary. 13. Working distance. 14. Incident energy. 15. Required protective fire rated clothing type and class. F. Analyze the short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash calculations and highlight any equipment that is determined to be underrated or causes an abnormally high incident energy calculation. Propose approaches to reduce the energy levels. 2.03 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS A. Provide arc flash warning labels printed in color on adhesive backed labels. Provide weatherproof labels for equipment installed outdoors, or for equipment installed in locations that are in NEMA 3R, NEMA 4/4X or NEMA 12 locations.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL A. Coordinate the assembly of information as required for the studies specified in this Section in a manner that facilitates the scheduling of equipment energization. 3.02 IMPLEMENTING THE PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY SETTINGS AND ARC FLASH SIGN INSTALLATION A. The Testing Firm shall implement the protective device coordination study settings on new equipment as required in Section 26 08 01, Testing, based on the Engineer’s accepted Protective Device Coordination Report specified herein and submit a final amended report of the Record As-Built electrical equipment protective device settings subsequent to start-up and testing. B. The Testing Firm shall work with the Contractor and the Study Firm for implementing the Arc Flash Hazard sign installation requirements for electrical equipment as specified in NEC Article 110.16 Flash Protection and NFPA 70E.
END OF SECTION 26 05 73
TESTING SECTION 26 08 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies the acceptance testing of electrical materials, equipment, and systems. It is intended to cover the testing of all electrical distribution equipment furnished under this Contract. Electrical tests shall be conducted per the requirements specified in the NETA ATS 2009 Acceptance Testing Specifications (NETA ATS) as described and or modified within this Section. B. Related Sections: The work of the following sections is related to the work of this Section. Other sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 01 75 00 3. Section 26 00 00 4. Section 26 05 73 5. Section 40 90 00 1.02 REFERENCES A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this Section. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and the listed documents, the Contractor shall point out the conflict to the Engineer; lacking a definitive answer otherwise, the requirements of the Contract Specifications shall prevail. Specified references within the NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications also shall apply.
Reference Title NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NETA International Electrical Testing Association Inc. 2009 Acceptance Testing Specifications NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) B. Requirements for Regulatory Agencies: Testing shall be conducted by a NETA certified testing agency as described in the NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications except as noted elsewhere within this Section. Where the testing agency is referred to in this specification, it shall be in reference to this NETA certified testing firm. 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
TESTING SECTION 26 08 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check- marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. A check mark shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. C. Proposed testing procedures including proposed test report forms and listing of equipment that will be tested. D. Test report including documentation for all tests performed. Utilize test forms from Section 00 60 00, Sample Forms. E. Execution plan including schedule. F. Name and qualifications of the independent testing firm that will be performing the testing work. Submitted information shall confirm that qualifications are to NETA ATS 2009 Section 3 requirements. 1.05 APPLICATION A. Testing specified within this Section shall include all electrical equipment specified in Division 26, all electrical rotating and any power distribution electrical apparatus specified under other specification sections in this Contract. Where testing in accordance with this Section is required, the required tests, including correction of defects and retesting, shall be completed prior to energization of material, equipment, or systems. 1.06 TEST EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Test instruments shall be calibrated to references traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Testing and shall have a current sticker showing date of calibration per manufacturer's specifications, deviation from standard, name of calibration laboratory and technician, and date of recalibration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
TESTING SECTION 26 08 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Electrical testing requirements per NETA ATS 2009 are to be applied for testing of electrical equipment provided under this Contract as noted within this Section. Where NETA is mentioned in these testing procedures, it is understood that this is a reference to the NETA ATS 2009 specifications. 2. Motors and conductors testing as specified in Section 26 00 00 may be performed under this Section or by the Contractor (need not be a certified NETA test agency) under Section 26 00 00. Where the motors and conductors testing is performed by the Contractor under Section 26 00 00, the testing shall be conducted per the requirements specified in this Section. The submitted testing plan shall indicate which entity will be responsible for this testing. 3. Conduct insulation tests and the functional checkouts called for in the following paragraphs on equipment prior to energization. B. Division of Responsibility: 1. Contractor responsibilities for providing information required by the testing agency that are listed in NETA ATS 2009 Section 4 are as follows: a. The Contractor shall provide an approved copy of the short-circuit analysis, coordination study, arc flash report, and protective device setting report that are specified in Section 26 05 73, Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study. b. The Contractor shall provide the required equipment instruction manuals requested by the testing agency. c. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the list of equipment that will be tested under this Contract. d. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing suitable power for testing as required by the testing agency. e. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the scheduling of testing with the testing agency and shall be responsible for ensuring that equipment is prepared as required for testing by the testing agency. f. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the site-specific hazard and safety training called for in NETA ATS 2009 4.1.8. 2. Testing agency responsibilities shall be as listed in NETA ATS 2009 4.2 3. The Contractor shall provide a set of up-to-date Contract Documents for the testing agency C. Safety, Test Equipment Calibration and Reports NETA ATS 2009 Section 5: 1. Conform to the safety requirements specified in this section. 2. Test equipment shall be calibrated to the requirements specified in this Section. 3. Test reports shall include all of the requirements listed in this section. Equipment identification shall include the equipment name and number per the project standards.
TESTING SECTION 26 08 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
D. Thermographic Surveys: In the following specified testing for bolted connections, a choice is generally given for testing via thermographic means or millivolt drop testing or torque tightening verification. In such cases, either the millivolt drop test or torque tightening verification shall be conducted in addition to the thermographic scan. It is acknowledged that thermographic scan testing may be limited in efficacy due to the limited loading that may be available at the time of testing. E. Optional Tests: Testing requirements referenced in these specifications include all of the NETA ATS 2009 applicable test requirements for the equipment type. Tests identified as optional in the NETA ATS documents are required only where specifically called for in these specifications. F. Communications and Controls: Testing of Modbus, Ethernet, DeviceNet, ControlNet, or Foundation Fieldbus circuits and communications is specified in Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems. G. Test Reports: 1. Provide test reports in conformance with the NETA specifications for test reports. 2. Use the project full equipment name and equipment number for equipment identification. 3. Provide a copy of the final test report in electronic Microsoft Office Word format on CD ROM. Images in the report may be in JPEG or Adobe Acrobat PDF format. 3.02 TESTING A. Low Voltage Dry Type Transformers: Perform all testing as specified in the NETA ATS Low Voltage, Small, Dry Transformer testing requirements. B. Low Voltage Cable, 600V Maximum: 1. Low voltage cable testing shall include all low voltage power and control circuits operating at 120V or higher except for circuits that feed lights or receptacles. 2. Perform testing per NETA ATS requirements for low voltage conductors. C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Test molded case circuit breakers and motor circuit protectors in motor control centers and 480V distribution panels to the requirements called for in the NETA specifications for testing molded case circuit breakers. 1. Primary current injection testing will be required only for main and tie breakers and for feeder breakers or motor circuit protectors rated 100A or more. 2. Test ground fault features per NETA ATS ground fault testing requirements. D. Protective Relays: 1. Protective relays that are to be tested per this specification include the electronic trip relays in low voltage circuit breakers, and all motor protection relays. Test protective relays per NETA ATS requirements for protective relays. 2. For multifunction relays, only the implemented protective features that are actually used need to be tested. Non-utilized features do not require testing. 3. Testing of Modbus and Ethernet circuits and communications and remote controls based on these communications is specified in Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
TESTING SECTION 26 08 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
E. Instrument Transformers: Test per NETA ATS requirements for instrument transformers. F. Metering: 1. Test metering devices per NETA ATS requirements. 2. Testing of Modbus and Ethernet circuits and communications and remote controls based on these communications is specified in Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems. G. Grounding Systems: 1. Test grounding per NETA ATS requirements. 2. Fall of potential testing shall be conducted for each building grounding system. H. Rotating Machinery: All motors operating at 480V or higher shall be tested per NETA ATS specifications for rotating machinery testing. I. Low Voltage Motor Starters: 1. Test low voltage motor starters per NETA ATS specifications. 2. Verify that the solid-state overload settings are correct per the motor nameplate data. 3. Discrete remote control features shall be tested to the extent that they can be tested from the terminals of equipment provided in the motor control centers. J. Low Voltage Motor Control Centers: Test motor control centers per NETA ATS specifications and the related sections for components. K. Surge Arrestors: Test low voltage surge arrestors per NETA ATS specifications. L. Automatic Transfer Switches: Test automatic transfer switches per NETA ATS specifications. M. Thermographic Surveys: Thermographic surveys are to be conducted only after all of the loads have been connected to the equipment such that the testing can be conducted under loading sufficient to provide indication of the joints that are not properly connected. N. Functional Testing: 1. Functional testing of process controls related equipment is specified in Section 01 75 00, Commissioning, and Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems, of these specifications. Only those devices that are related to the protection of electrical equipment such as interlocks, alarms and fail safe devices or functionality specific to the type of equipment specified such as transfer functions for transfer switches are included in the functional testing requirements specified in this Section. 2. Electrical function testing may be performed by qualified electricians (not required to be done by an independent test agency) or by the independent testing agency specified under this Section. 3. Submit a description of the functional test procedure prior to the performance of the functional checkout.
TESTING SECTION 26 08 01 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
4. Perform the functional test per NETA ATS specifications for function tests and the requirements of this paragraph prior to energization of the equipment. 5. Application specific electrical functional performance testing of equipment is described in the individual equipment specifications.
END OF SECTION 26 08 01
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS SECTION 26 22 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies dry-type transformers with primary winding rated 600 volts and less used for power distribution, lighting and control purposes as specified or shown. B. This section specifies K-Rated transformer with electro-magnetic shielding. C. Related Sections: The work of the following sections is related to the work of this Section. Other sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 01 73 00 3. Section 01 73 24 4. Section 26 00 00 5. Section 26 05 73 6. Section 26 08 01 1.02 REFERENCES
A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ANSI/IEEE C57.12.01 General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers ANSI/UL 506 Specialty Transformers NEMA ST20 Dry-Type Transformers for General Application 1.03 DEFINITIONS
(NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10 .
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS SECTION 26 22 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check- marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. A check mark shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. C. Manufacturer’s literature indicating conformance with the features specified including materials of construction, weight, sound, efficiency, Kva and voltage ratings, temperature rise, and insulation class. D. Dimensional data. E. Mounting hardware. F. Impedance. G. Manufacturer's product literature. H. Dimensions of ventilation openings. Verification of transformer capacity if the standard opening sizes are reduced to meet the specified maximum opening size. I. Manufacturer's certification and calculations that the equipment complies with the seismic requirements of Sections 01 73 24 , Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures, and 26 00 00 , Electrical, and this Section. J. Manufacturer's verification that the unit has been built and tested in accordance with the specified ANSI standards. K. Manufacturer's verification of the sound levels, if different from the specified NEMA ST20 standards. L. Applicable operation and maintenance information as specified in Section 01 73 00 , Operations and Maintenance Information. M. Manufacturer's product literature. 1.05 RATINGS AND STANDARDS
A. Transformers rated: 1. 10 kVA and smaller shall be single phase or as indicated. 2. 15 kVA and greater shall be 3 phase or as indicated. 3. Voltage, frequency, number of phases and kVA as indicated. 4. Conform to ANSI/IEEE C57.12.01 and ANSI/ UL 506.
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS SECTION 26 22 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D. B. Approved substitute. 2.02 INSULATION
A. Transformers temperature rise based on 40-degree C ambient temperature: 1. 15 kVA and above: Minimum Class 220 insulation, maximum 115 degree C temperature rise. 2. Less than 15 kVA: Minimum Class 180 insulation, maximum 115 degree C temperature rise. 2.03 COILS
A. Transformer coils: 1. Copper. 2. 15 kVA and above: impregnated with varnish. 3. 10 kVA and below: encapsulated. 2.04 WINDING CONFIGURATION
A. Transformers shall have electrically isolated primary and secondary windings. Primary and secondary winding configurations shall be as specified or shown. Provisions shall be made to permit separate grounding of the neutral conductor and the enclosure. Single-phase transformers shall be the four winding type. 2.05 TRANSFORMER TAPS
A. Transformers 15 kVA and above shall be provided with two 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps above normal voltage and four 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps below rated voltage on the primary winding. 2.06 TERMINAL COMPARTMENTS
A. Terminal compartments shall be sized to permit termination of cables specified. Terminal connections shall be made in the bottom third of the enclosure. The terminals shall be copper and sized for the cable specified. 2.07 ENCLOSURES
A. Transformers enclosures: 1. 15 kVA and smaller: weatherproof, nonventilated enclosures. 2. Indoor over 15 kVA: dripproof, ventilated enclosures. Ventilation openings shall be a maximum of 1/2" wide to ensure rodents cannot enter the transformer. 3. Outdoor: weatherproof enclosures.
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS SECTION 26 22 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
2.08 MOUNTING
A. Transformers shall be suitable for wall mounting and include mounting brackets and hardware. 2.09 SEISMIC BRACING
A. Transformers shall conform to the seismic anchorage and bracing requirements of Section 01 73 24 , Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non- Building Structures. 2.10 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 2.04 of Section 26 00 00 , Electrical. 2.11 SOUND LEVELS
A. The sound levels shall not exceed the following values:
kVA dB 0-9 40 10 -45 42 50 -450 45 225-300 50 500 54 2.12 SHIELDED ISOLATION TRANSFORMER
A. Provide self-cooled two winding type transformer with electrical ratings as shown. B. Provide copper or aluminum metal shielding between primary and secondary windings. C. Provide electro-static winding shield grounded to the transformer case.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Bond transformer enclosures and neutrals together and connect to the ground grid. 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install transformers on walls or floors at locations shown on the Drawings. Install floor mounted transformers on raised concrete bases. Provide sufficient access and working space for ready and safe operation and maintenance. B. Mount transformers so that vibrations are not transmitted to the structural parts of the building or to other equipment. Make connections to transformers with flexible conduit. C. Adjust tap settings to provide proper voltage at panelboards. D. Ground transformer in conformance with the National Electrical Code.
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS SECTION 26 22 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
3.03 TESTING
A. Transformers shall be tested in accordance with Section 26 08 01 , Testing. 3.04 COORDINATION WITH SHORT CIRCUIT AND ARC FLASH REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide information required to support the short circuit and coordination and arc flash study specified in Section 26 05 73 , Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.
END OF SECTION 26 22 00
PANELBOARDS SECTION 26 24 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following: 1. Three phase, four wire 208Y/120 or 480Y/277 volt, dead front, circuit breaker type panelboard with current rating of 600-amperes or less. 2. Single phase, three wire 120/240 volt, dead front, circuit breaker type panelboards with current rating of 400-amperes or less. 3. Provide metal oxide varistor (MOV) surge protective device (SPD) integral within each panelboard that indicates the status and condition of the SPD, tested per NEMA LS-1, rated IEEE C3 Combined Wave of 20kV and 10kA with 200kAIC internal fusing and listed / labeled per UL 1449. The surge protective device shall be protected by an integral fuse or circuit breaker disconnect in the panelboard. B. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 01 73 24 3. Section 26 00 00 4. Section 26 05 73 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers NEMA National Electrical Manufacturing Association NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes UL 67 Underwriters Laboratories, Electric Panelboards UL 489 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures UL 1449 Surge Suppression Devices 1.04 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
PANELBOARDS SECTION 26 24 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10 . B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check- marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. A check mark shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. C. Manufacturer's certification that bus bracing is capable of withstanding the specified short circuit condition. D. Panel ratings, bus ampacities, schedule of branch breakers provided, and ground and neutral configuration. E. Outline plan and elevation drawings. F. Information needed for the electrical system analyses reports specified in Section 26 05 73 , Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study. G. Manufacturer's certification and calculations that the equipment complies with the seismic requirements of Sections 01 73 24 , Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures, and 26 00 00 , Electrical, and this Section. H. Manufacturer's certification that bus bracing is capable of withstanding the specified short circuit condition. I. Operation and maintenance information as specified in Section 01 73 00 , Operation and Maintenance Information. J. Quantity and rating of circuit breakers provided with each panelboard.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Square D: NQOD with internal Surge Protective Devices. B. Approved substitute. 2.02 ARRANGEMENT AND CONSTRUCTION A. The front of the panel shall have concealed trim clamps and hinges. The locks shall be flush with cylinder tumbler-type with spring loaded door pulls. The fronts shall not be removable with doors in the locked position. Panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. B. Gutter space shall be provided on all sides of the breaker assembly to neatly connect and arrange incoming wiring.
PANELBOARDS SECTION 26 24 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
C. Panelboard shall be composed of individually mounted circuit breakers designed to be removable without disturbing other breakers. D. A directory holder with clear plastic plate and metal frame shall be mounted on the inside of the door. E. Panelboards shall conform to the seismic anchorage and bracing requirements of Section 01 73 24 , Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non- Building Structures. 2.03 BUS A. Bus shall be tin-plated copper and shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedules, sized in accordance with UL 67. Ratings shall be determined by temperature rise test. B. The minimum bus size shall be 100 amperes. Panel fault withstand rating shall be not less than the interrupting rating of the smallest circuit breaker in the panel. Series rating is prohibited. C. Panelboards shall be provided with a separate ground bus and, where specified, with a full capacity neutral bus. The neutral bus shall be mounted on insulated stand-offs. 2.04 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Circuit breakers shall be molded-case type provided for the current ratings and pole configurations specified on the panelboard schedule. Circuit breakers shall be combination bolt in/plug in circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be listed in accordance with UL 489 for the service specified. Load terminals of circuit breakers shall be solderless connectors. B. Circuit breakers rated 120/208 volt alternating current shall have a minimum interrupting current rating of 18,000 amperes symmetrical at 208 volt AC. C. Circuit breakers rated 277/480 volt alternating current shall have a minimum interrupting current rating of 25,000 amperes symmetrical at 480 volt or as specified on the panelboard schedule. D. Provide circuit breakers with special features such as ground fault interrupting (GFI), heating air conditioning and refrigeration (HACR) rating, or locking capability as shown on the Drawings or Schedules. 2.05 FINISH A. Panelboard cabinet shall be fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel in accordance with UL 50. Panelboard fronts shall have a gray, baked enamel finish. 2.06 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 00 00 , Electrical. 2.07 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two spares for each panelboard.
PANELBOARDS SECTION 26 24 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall type in the circuit description on the circuit directory as shown on the final record drawings or panelboard schedule. B. Provide “Circuit Directory and Circuit Identification” in accordance with NEC 408.4. Each circuit shall be of sufficient detail to allow each circuit to be distinguished from other circuits. Circuit identification shall include load location and provide equipment or instrument Tag Number and Tag Description, where shown on the drawings. 3.02 TESTING A. Panelboards shall be tested for proper operation and function. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. Panelboard schedules are shown on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION 26 24 00
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies freestanding, factory assembled 600 volt motor control centers (MCCs). B. Variable frequency drives (VFDs) are in the MCC and are specified in this section C. MCCs specified herein shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. D. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 01 73 24 3. Section 26 00 00 4. Section 26 05 73 5. Section 26 08 01 6. Section 26 27 15 7. Section 26 35 26 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ANSI/NEMA ICS 1 Industrial Control Systems: General Requirements ANSI/NEMA ICS 18 Motor Control Centers NFPA 79 Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery UL 845 Motor Control Centers IBC International Building Code ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7 Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear CSA C22.2.022 Evaluation Methods for Arc Resistance Ratings of Enclosed Electrical Equipment
B. Codes and Standards: Motor Control Centers and all components shall be Underwriters Laboratory listed to UL 845 and shall conform to NEMA ICS-1 and ICS-18 standards.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check- marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. A check mark shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. C. Elementary connection and interconnection diagrams as required in paragraph 2.07 of this section, in accordance with NFPA 79 and/or NEMA ICS 18 Part 1 standards. D. Time current curves for all protection devices. E. List of VFDs, starters and feeder tap compartments indicating the size and type of circuit protection. F. Interrupting, withstand, and continuous current rating of: 1. Bus bars 2. Feeder tap units 3. Starter units 4. Main incoming units G. Nameplate schedule H. Arrangement and layout drawings of the motor control center enclosures depicting equipment and bus arrangement and dimensions including areas of permissible cable entries. A list of material and components shall accompany the layout drawings. I. Front view elevation with VFD, starter, and component schedule J. Manufacturer's certification and calculations that the equipment complies with the seismic requirements of Sections 01 73 24, Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures, and 26 00 00, Electrical, and this Section. K. Information needed for the electrical system analyses reports specified in Section 26 05 73, Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study. L. Results of factory tests as specified within this Section.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
M. Manufacturer's certification that the following items are capable of interrupting and/or withstanding the specified short circuit condition: 1. Bus bar bracing 2. Feeder tap units 3. Starter units N. Dimensions and weights. O. Installation instructions. P. Manufacturer's product data. Q. Letter attesting that the Contractor and manufacturers of the VFD and the driven equipment manufacturer have reviewed the application and the VFD, motor, and pump are compatible. No other submittal material will be reviewed until this verification has been received and found to be in conformance with these requirements. R. Current and voltage distortion calculations: 1. Point of Common Coupling (PCC) is the main distribution panel 480V low voltage switchgear bus from which the VFDs in each facility are served for utility source power and the local 480V bus from which the VFD is served for generator sourced power. 2. Include first 36 odd current and voltage harmonics: Voltage calculated on line to line basis 3. Provide distortion figures for each harmonic and the total demand distortion. 4. Provide plots of voltage and current waves. 5. Perform calculations for the following criteria: a. Four VFDs operating at full load on utility power b. Three VFDs operating at full load on generator power S. Manufacturer’s instructions for configuring, data registers and programming remote network data exchange using Modbus RS-485. This information is required by the Owner for programming the station’s control system in Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements, to communicate with the following equipment specified in this Section. 1. Power Monitors. 2. Variable Frequency Drives. T. Settings, cut sheets, and other data to demonstrate that the wiring, relays, settings, and operators will provide integration of the submersible pump motor protection relays with the variable frequency drives. U. The input ampere rating of the variable frequency drive depicting a value that does not exceed the limit specified. V. Factory test plan. W. Factory test results
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
X. Field test plan Y. Field test results. Z. Operation and maintenance information as specified in Section 01 73 00, Operations and Maintenance Information. 1.05 FACTORY TESTS A. All system components shall be factory-wired and tested as a system prior to shipment. Testing shall verify system operation. 1.06 SPATIAL LAYOUT A. The motor control center overall dimensions shall not exceed the available space allocated for installation indicated on the Drawings.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Allen Bradley ArchShield device limited B. Eaton Cutler Hammer Freedom Arc Resistant device limited C. Schneider Electric Arc Resistant D. Approved Equal 2.02 SERVICE A. Motor control centers shall be rated 600 volts, 60 Hertz, 3 phase, 3 wire as specified and shall be suitable for operation at the specified voltages and short circuit capacities. 2.03 STRUCTURE AND CONSTRUCTION A. Structure: 1. Motor control centers shall be made of No. 12 gage steel minimum and, unless otherwise shown, each section shall be 90 inches high by 20 inches wide by 20 inches deep. The individual unit compartments shall be a minimum of 12 inches high. There shall be 72 inches available for stacking starter units. Compartments shall have pan-type doors with a minimum of two quarter-turn hold-down latches; and neoprene gaskets. 2. A full height vertical wireway, 30 square inch minimum, shall be provided for sections that do not have variable frequency drives. The wireway shall contain full height removable doors. Horizontal wireways shall be provided top and bottom, extending the length of motor control centers. 3. Bottom channel sills shall be mounted front and rear of the vertical sections extending the full length of the motor control center lineup. A removable lifting angle shall be mounted on top and shall extend the width of the motor control center lineup.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
B. Construction: 1. Motor control centers located indoors shall have NEMA 1, gasketed enclosures. 2. Starter units, size 4 and smaller, and feeder tap units less than 225 amperes shall be drawout plug-in construction with hardened, tin-plated copper free- floating stabs, steel spring backups. The door shall have interference tabs which prevent door closure if unit is improperly installed. 3. Units shall be latched in the position to assure proper bus contact. The unit disconnect device shall be interlocked to prevent removal or reinsertion of a unit when the disconnect is in the "ON" or "TRIPPED" positions. 4. Fusible switch or circuit breaker disconnect operators shall be capable of accommodating three padlocks for locking in the "OPEN" position. 5. Hardware for mounting future starter and feeder tap units shall be provided at compartments specified as "FUTURE." 6. The motor control center shall have a minimum overall short circuit withstand rating of 65,000 amps RMS symmetrical unless specifically noted otherwise with a higher rating on the Drawings. The overall withstand shall apply to the buses and down to the lowest rated component in the overall motor control center assembly. 7. MCCs rated for arc resistance shall have a Type 2 accessibility rating as defined in IEEE guideline C37.20.7 and CSA standard 22.2 No. 0.22-11. 8. Enhanced door hinges and door latches designed to contain arc blast energy and prevent doors from opening during an arc flash event. Doors shall be gasketed. 9. Containing isolation barriers between each structure to aid in the containment of arc blast energy and prevention of prorogation of the event to subsequent structures in the lineup. 10. Arc resistant shall not require an exhaust plenum, roof flaps, or similar venting device/assembly on top of the MCC to vent the arc blast energy and gases generated during an arc flash event. C. Seismic Bracing: Motor control centers and related equipment shall conform to the seismic anchorage and bracing requirements of Section 01 73 24, Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures. 2.05 FINISH AND COLOR A. The finish and color shall be in accordance with Section 26 00 00, Electrical. 2.06 BUS A. General: Bus shall be tin-plated copper with bolted connections between vertical and horizontal bus bars. Access for tightening these connections shall be from the front, without the need for tools on the rear of the connection. Insulated horizontal and vertical bus barriers shall be provided. Barriers shall be fabricated from high-strength, glass- filled polyester resin. B. Horizontal Bus: Horizontal bus minimum continuous amps rating shall be as shown on the Drawings.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
C. Vertical Bus: Unless otherwise specified or shown, the vertical bus shall be insulated and rated a minimum 300 amperes continuous. D. Ground Bus: A 1/4-inch by 2-inch ground bus shall be provided the full length of the motor control center. Ground bus shall be located at the bottom of the motor control center. Provide a lug to terminate a bare 4/0 AWG copper ground conductors at each end of the ground bus. 1.07 WIRING A. General: 1. Motor control centers shall be provided with NEMA ICS 18 Class II, Type B wiring. All starter units shall have terminal blocks for control wiring. Terminal blocks shall be provided for power wiring for starters size 2 and smaller. 2. Motor control centers shall be provided with all necessary interconnecting wiring and interlocking. When a MCC control section is specified on the drawings or schedules, wire directly to the relays or programmable controller's input/output modules as part of the interconnecting wiring. 3. Provide elementary and connection diagrams for each starter unit and an interconnection diagram for the entire motor control center. B. Power Wire: Power wire shall be copper 90 degrees C insulated, sized to suit load; minimum power wire size shall be No. 12 AWG copper stranded. C. Control Wire: Control wire shall be No. 16 AWG stranded copper wire, rated 90 degrees C machine tool wiring (MTW) and UL listed for panel wiring. D. Terminations and Cable Connections: 1. Terminals: Control wiring shall be lugged with ring-tongue or locking spade crimp type terminals made from electrolytic copper, tin-plated. 2. Cable Connectors: Cable connectors for use with stranded copper wire, sizes No. 8 AWG to 1000 kCmil shall be UL listed. Dished conical washers shall be used for each bolted connection. Connectors shall be reusable and shall be rated for use with copper conductors. Incoming line and outgoing feeder compartments shall be provided with crimp type lugs, 3M Company, Burndy Company, or equal. E. Conductor Markers: Markers used for identification shall meet the requirements of Section 26 00 00, Electrical. 2.08 MAIN AND FEEDER BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTION A. General: Main and feeder tap units shall consist of fused disconnect switches or circuit breakers, as specified or shown. Series ratings for overcurrent devices to meet specified short circuit withstand ratings is prohibited.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
B. Fused Disconnect Switches: 1. Fused disconnect switches shall be equipped with visible knife blades, shielded line terminals, and a quick-make, quick-break switch operator. Fuse clips shall be UL Class R rejection type. Type RK-1 dual-element fuses shall be used for both motor and nonmotor loads. 2. Fuses shall be nonrenewable. Fuse removal shall be readily accomplished with the use of a fuse puller. 3. Fused switches used to feed automatic transfer switches provided under Section 26 36 00, Automatic Transfer Switches, that are rated in conjunction with the transfer switches to meet a coordinated withstand rating shall have fuses that are identified by the transfer switch manufacturer that meet their requirements for the coordinated withstand rating. C. Circuit Breakers (Thermal Magnetic): 1. Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers shall be molded case equipped with toggle type handle, quick-make, quick-break over center switching mechanism that is trip-free so that breaker cannot be held closed against short circuits and abnormal currents. The tripped position shall be clearly indicated by breaker handle maintaining a position between "ON" and "OFF." All poles shall open, close, and trip simultaneously. 1. Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers shall be molded case equipped with toggle type handle, quick-make, quick-break over center switching mechanism that is trip-free so that breaker cannot be held closed against short circuits and abnormal currents. The tripped position shall be clearly indicated by breaker handle maintaining a position between "ON" and "OFF." All poles shall open, close, and trip simultaneously. 2.09 MOTOR STARTER UNITS A. General: Motor starter units shall be combination type with contactor and fused disconnect switch, thermal magnetic circuit breaker, or motor circuit protector, and bimetallic type overload unit as indicated on the drawings or specified in the MCC schedule. B. Fused Disconnect Switches: Not used. C. Motor Circuit Protectors: The molded case motor circuit protector (MCP) shall operate on the magnetic principle with a current sensing coil in each of the three poles to provide an instantaneous trip for short circuit protection. The trip setting shall be adjustable from 700 to 1300 percent of the motor full load amperes from the front of the MCP. The motor circuit protector shall be set at its lowest position at the factory. Equipped with toggle type handle, quick-make, quick-break over center switching mechanism that is trip-free so that breaker cannot be held closed against short circuits and abnormal currents. The tripped position shall be clearly indicated by breaker handle maintaining a position between "ON" and "OFF." All poles shall open, close, and trip simultaneously. Minimum short circuit capacity shall be 65,000 amperes symmetrical.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
D. Control Transformers: 1. Each control transformer shall be rated 480/240-120V, single phase, 2-wires, 60 Hertz. The transformer shall be sized for the load it feeds but shall not be less than the minimum ratings as follows unless noted otherwise on the Drawings:
Minimum NEMA Starter Size Transformer Volt- Ampere Rating 1 100 2 130 3 200 4 300
2. Each control transformer shall be provided with time-delay, slow-blow secondary fuse rated to interrupt 10,000 amperes short circuit at 250 volts AC. Two primary fuses rated to interrupt 200,000 amperes at 600 volts shall be provided on all starters. 3. Fuse holder for secondary fuse shall have finger safe blow fuse indication. Fuse holders for primary fuses shall be fuse clips with full barriers between fuses. E. Contactors: 1. Unless otherwise specified or shown, contactors shall be full voltage, 3-pole, 600 volt AC, NEMA Size-1 minimum. Contacts shall be double break, silver- cadmium oxide, and weld resistant. Contacts shall be isolated to prevent arcing. Coils and magnets shall be capable of being removed or replaced without special tools. IEC contactors are prohibited. F. Surge protective device: 1. Provide metal oxide varistor (MOV) surge protective device (SPD) integral within each motor control center that indicates the status and condition of the SPD, tested per NEMA LS-1, rated IEEE C3 Combined Wave of 20kV and 10kA with 200kAIC internal fusing and listed / labeled per UL 1449. Minimum surge rating: 160kA per phase. SPD’s shall include overcurrent protection via a fused switch or circuit breaker integral to the MCC. G. Provide a factory selected transient surge suppressor rated for each motor starter and power contactor encapsulated in a small module and mounted directly to the starter or contactor coil. H. Auxiliary Contacts: Contactors shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts Auxiliary contacts shall be wired out to terminal blocks. Each contactor shall be equipped with contact quantity and configuration shown on the drawings. The minimum quantity and configuration of contacts is as follows: 1. Two normally open and two normally closed electrically isolated auxiliary contacts suitable for 24VDC programmable controller inputs, rated minimum 3A resistive at 28VDC.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 9
2. Two normally open and two normally closed electrically isolated auxiliary contacts rated 10A at 120VAC. I. Overload Relay: All motor starters shall include bimetallic or electronic thermal overload relays with local manual overload reset. Overload relays shall monitor all three phases individually for current. J. Terminal Blocks: 1. Terminal blocks shall be screw type rated 600 volts; 20 amperes for control wiring and 30 amperes power wiring with starters Size 3 and larger shall terminate the power leads directly to the contactor. 2. The number of terminal blocks shall be specified on the drawings. Terminal blocks shall be provided with integral marking strips and shall be permanently marked with the conductor number as specified on the drawings. Internal wiring shall be connected on one side of the terminal block; outgoing conductors shall be connected to the other side. K. Variable Frequency Drives: 1. Manufacturers: a. Allen Bradley PowerFlex 753 b. Eaton DG1 Series c. Square D Altivar ATV 630 d. Or approved equal 2. The electrical service as limited capacity. To avoid exceeding that capacity the rated input current of the variable frequency drives (depicted on the drive) shall not be more than 118 amps. Coordinate with the driven equipment manufacturer and comply with unit responsibility requirements specified in 43 23 80.15. 3. Pulse width modulated (PWM) drive design suitable for use with NEMA Design B squirrel-cage induction motors rated 460V, three-phase, 60 Hz with 1.15 service factor. 4. Converters: a. Multiple full wave, three-phase solid state rectifier bridge to convert incoming fixed voltage and frequency to a fixed DC voltage. 6-Pulse. All components for converters shall be integral to the VFD enclosure. 5. Inverter: a. Output voltage: Adjustable and controlled by the value of output frequency to maintain a constant ratio of volts per Hz throughout the operating range. The volts per Hz shall be internally field adjustable. b. Capable of varying the speed of any standard NEMA B or NEMA E design, squirrel cage, induction motor with a 1.15 service factor. c. A single unit, with no paralleling of smaller inverters. d. Suppresses output dV/dT high voltage spikes and shall be compatible with the motors specified in the driven equipment specification.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 10
6. General Features: a. Inverter output shall be conditioned to prevent high voltage ringing on motor leads. Output filters are acceptable. b. Microprocessor controlled pulse width modulation output voltage control strategy. c. Utilize pulse width modulation control techniques such that the maximum root mean square motor line current at rated voltage, torque and speed is less than 1.05 times the motor nameplate current. d. Power transistor output circuitry shall use insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT). e. Power devices to have peak reverse voltage ratings of 2.5 times line current. f. Input power devices shall have peak reverse voltage ratings of 2.5 times line voltage. g. Insensitive to incoming power phase sequence. h. 3% input line reactor inside the VFD enclosure. 7. Ratings: a. Rated Input Power: 480V, +10 percent or –5 percent, three-phase, 57 to 63 Hz incoming voltage imbalance of ±3 percent. b. Rated Output Power: 0 to 460V, ±1 percent, three-phase, 1 to 90 Hz. c. Frequency Drift: ±0.5 percent. d. Voltage Regulation: ±1 percent rated value no load to full load. e. Speed Regulation: 3 percent f. Ambient Temperature Range: 0 to 40 degrees C. g. Atmosphere: Noncondensing relative humidity to 95 percent. h. VFD Efficiency: A minimum of 95 percent at 100-percent speed and torque at 40 degrees C ambient based upon measurement of input power versus output power with all specified components in system. i. Displacement Power Factor: The minimum displacement power factor the VFD controller shall present to the AC system shall be 95 percent at all speeds. The unit shall be designed to inherently provide this minimum power factor. j. Speed Range: 40:1. k. Input Speed Signal: A 4-20 mA DC from an external source and a remote pot. Circuitry shall be isolated. l. Output Contacts: Three electrically isolated, programmable auxiliary status contacts, 5A at 120 VAC, for Ready, Run, and Fault.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 11
8. Analog input frequency control and regulation: a. Range: 4 mA DC at minimum equipment speed and 20 mA DC at maximum equipment speed. b. Accuracy: 1.0 percent of span. c. Deadband: 0.5 percent of span. d. Repeatability: 0.5 percent of span. e. Input signal impedance: 200 ohms minimum, with isolated two-wire signal follower. f. Adjustable minimum and maximum output frequency limits. g. Independent timed linear acceleration and deceleration functions adjustable from 1 to 600 seconds. 9. Programable to prevent operation of the VFD at a minimum of two critical speeds. 10. Disconnects: a. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breaker b. Through-the-door or flange-mounted handle and include door interlocks with defeater mechanisms. c. Integral components of the VFDs that are factory built into the VFD assemblies. d. Current limiting VFD input fusing after the disconnect. 11. VFD overload capacity: Normal duty: 110 percent of continuous current rating for 1 minute or 150 percent for 3 seconds. Heavy duty: 150 percent of continuous current rating for 1 minute or 200 percent for 3 seconds. 12. Microprocessor Digital Control: a. Drive operating parameters programmable. b. Sealed keypad with pushbuttons or sealed membrane type keypad with LED or LCD display, mounted on door when VFD is inside a NEMA 1 enclosure. c. Operating parameters, fault, and diagnostic data maintained in non- volatile memory with historic log of fault and diagnostic data for a minimum of the five most recent events, and is accessible via keypad, and Modus 485 serial. d. Utilize English messages and engineering units. e. Menu driven. f. Password security. 13. Basic Drive Features and Functions: a. Automatic Restart Feature: 1) Field selectable.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 12
2) Faults: a) Overvoltage b) Undervoltage. 3) Final fault, requiring manual reset, if restart is not successful after three attempts at 30-second intervals within 90 seconds. 4) Provide drive with the ability to start into a motor that is spinning in the forward direction and assume normal operation upon auto restart of the drive. b. Upon restoration of AC power after a loss of utility or standby power, the VFD controller shall not attempt to restart until an external start signal is received. The drive shall not require any type of reset after a power outage. c. 30 percent voltage dip ride through capability for one cycle. d. Controllers shall be compatible and tolerant of disturbances produced by other VFD controllers and shall not interfere with each other. e. VFD controllers shall be capable of restarting (no fault condition) after power loss without the need to reset the VFD controller to restore operation. 14. Adjustments: a. Maximum frequency: Adjustable 60 to 90 Hz. b. Minimum frequency: Adjustable 6 to 40 Hz. c. Speed: Frequency maximum and frequency minimum. d. Independent acceleration and deceleration rates: Field adjustable with minimum range of 3 to 300 seconds. e. Voltage parameters: Minimum and maximum voltage and volts/Hz. f. Current limit: 50 to 110 percent of drive limit for 1 minute g. Inverse time overload: NEMA Class 20. h. Speed shedding: Automatic upon low voltage. i. Speed profile: Starting ramp, stopping ramp, minimum speed, and maximum speed. j. Starting boost: 4 percent. 15. Protective Features and Functions: a. Current limiting fuses, regulators, or other techniques for both internal and external fault protection. b. Overvoltage protection on the incoming AC line. c. Ground fault protection. d. Single-phase fault or three-phase short-circuit on VFD output terminals without damage to any power component. e. Overspeed (overfrequency).
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 13
f. Instantaneous overcurrent and overvoltage trip with inverse time overcurrent protection. g. Line or fuse loss. h. Power unit over-temperature. i. Electronic motor overload protection. j. Desaturation circuit protection for the following conditions: 1) VFD fault. 2) Motor protection interlock. k. DC bus discharge circuit for protection of operator and service personnel with indicator lamp. l. Individual transistor overcurrent protection. 16. Provides safe drive shutdown on following faults: a. Loss of input power. b. Sustained input undervoltage (–15 percent). c. Sustained gradual overload. d. Instantaneous severe overload. e. Power transistor over-temperature. f. Blown fuse. g. Logic power supply failure. 17. Voltage transients: Provide solid state transient protection to meet or exceed ANSI C37.90. 18. Overcurrent protection: a. The VFD system shall provide adjustable electronic current limit. Current shall be accurate to within 1.0 percent and shall smoothly limit motor speed at whatever value is necessary to limit motor current to that value. b. The VFD shall provide motor running overcurrent protection in compliance with NFPA-70. 19. Short-circuit protection: a. The VFD shall be fully protected against load faults. b. Bolted, phase to phase, or phase to ground faults shall not damage the unit. c. Fault protection shall be based on a power source short circuit capacity of 65,000A rms symmetrical at the VFD power input terminals. Any impedance or other current limiting necessary to meet this requirement shall be provided as part of the VFD system, and any losses caused by current limiting devices shall be included in efficiency calculations for the VFD system. 20. Line voltage: The VFD shall be protected against high and low line voltage on one or more phases.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 14
21. Internal faults: The VFD shall incorporate an internal fault monitoring system to detect malfunctions. This system shall be designed to protect the VFD from transient and sustained faults and to limit damage that may be caused by these faults. 22. Submersible Pump Motor Protection Relay: a. Located in that pump's VFD section of the motor control center. b. Relay is specified in Section 43 23 80.15. c. Interlocked with starter controls as depicted on the I drawings and as specified in Section 43 23 80.15. d. Independent listing (specified in Section 26 00 00) of the motor control center unit shall be provided with the relay. either by independent testing agency (eg UL) or by the engineering evaluation described in the Washington Administrative Code). 23. Human Interface Module (HIM) Annunciator: a. Provide a door-mounted HIM with integral LCD display, operating keys and programming keys. b. The HIM shall have a “copy cat” feature which allows for the drive parameters to be saved to EEPROM in the HIM. c. The HIM shall be rated IP66 / UL Type 4X, 12. d. The display shall show drive operating conditions, adjustments and fault indications. e. The display shall be configured to display user configurable and scalable parameters. f. The HIM shall provide digital speed control. g. The keypad shall include programming keys and drive operating keys (Start, Stop, Direction, Jog and Speed Control). 24. Special Features and Functions: a. Operator interface devices on door of MCP: As shown on the Drawings. b. Control power transformer: 1) Secondary; 250VA minimum. 2) Two primary fuses and one secondary fuse with non-fused secondary leg grounded. 3) Blown fuse indicators on all fuses. c. Remote local control interface requirements: 1) Network and hardwired control as shown and specified on the Drawings. 25. Noise Data: Free field noise generated by the VFD shall not exceed 85 dBA at 3 feet from any point of the VFD cabinet under any normal operating condition.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 15
26. Enclosures: a. With removable lifting angles or lifting eyes. b. NEMA 1 with ventilation fans. 27. Paint a. To undergo phosphatizing, prepaint treatment for rust resistance and paint bond. b. Vertical sections and cover plates: Painted with 3-mil thickness of enamel; doors shall be painted Fed. Spec. 26314, light gray. Insides shall be white. c. Paint: Applied by electrostatic process and baked to a durable hard finish. 28. All components shall be accessible and removable from the front only. 29. Doors: a. Open at least 150 degrees and provided with concealed piano hinges. b. Door handles: Capable of accepting a padlock with a 3/8-inch shackle to lock the VFD enclosure closed and the input breaker open. 30. Air Filters: a. Provided with external framework for housing the air filters. b. Access to the filter media for purposes of replacement or cleaning shall be possible from the exterior of the drive without the need to open doors on the drive enclosure or otherwise gain interior access to the drive. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS A. General: 1. Control devices such as pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights and overload reset pushbuttons shall be mounted on the unit compartment door.
2. The control devices shall comply with the requirements of Section 26 27 15, Miscellaneous Electrical Devices. B. Current switches: 1. Spit core current transformer. Input range 1.75A to 150A. 2. Output solid state switch. 3. Switch Powered from current transformer (self powered) 4. Switch normally closed minimum rating .2 amp at 135VDC 5. Potentiometer adjustable trip points. 6. AcuAMP ACS150-CE-S or approved equal. C. Elapsed Time Indicator: Where specified, the elapsed time indicator shall be as specified in Section 26 27 15, Miscellaneous Electrical Devices. The indicator shall be mounted on the unit compartment door.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 16
D. Nameplates: Nameplates shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 00 00. Nameplates shall be provided for all cubicles and compartments and identify the load per NEC. A Nameplate shall be provided identifying the motor control center. Provide equipment tag numbers and descriptions as shown. 2.11 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS A. Dry-type power transformers shall meet the requirements of Section 26 22 00, Low Voltage Transformers. The size and voltage shall be as specified. 2.12 POWER MONITORS A. Provide power monitors where shown on the Drawings. B. Power monitors shall monitor line to line voltage and line current per phase and watts, vars, volt-amperes, displacement power factor, and frequency. C. Modbus RTU RS-485 communications. D. Analog Output: 1. 4-20 ma into a load up to 600 ohms. Scaled 0-500 kw. E. Output Contacts: 1. Two form C relay output contacts 250VAC and 30VDC, 5 amp. Configure one normally closed contact to open and close as follows: a. Underfrequency open: 90 percent b. Underfrequency close: 95 percent c. Overvoltage open: 110 percent d. Overvoltage close: 104 percent e. Undervoltage open: 85 percent f. Undervoltage close: 90 percent F. Power monitors shall be furnished with required current transformers and potential transformers. Allen Bradley, Square D or equal. 2.13 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS FOR ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER A. Current transformers shall be at the location depicted on the one-line diagram. Install the current transformers specified in Section 26 35 26 in the motor control center. Provide space, mounting brackets, shorting terminal strip, and other appurtenances required for a complete installation . Coordinate the location of the current transformers with power cables so the cables can be routed through the transformers to the lugs. 2.14 SPARE PARTS A. One set consisting of the following spare parts shall be provided: 1. 1--set each fuse size and type 2. 10--indicating light bulbs
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 17
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL A. The motor control centers shall be erected in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and with the details specified herein. B. Field wiring shall meet the requirements of paragraph 3.02 of Section 26 05 19, Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. Cables larger than No. 6 AWG which hang from their vertical connections shall be supported within 2 feet of the connection. C. The overload relays, shall be coordinated by the Contractor with the heater elements selected based on the actual full load amperes of the motor connected to the starter and the requirements of the motor driven equipment. D. The motor circuit protectors shall be adjusted by the Contractor to the lowest setting not causing false tripping. E. Install motor control centers level and plumb on 3-1/2-inch concrete housekeeping pads per the manufacturer’s installation instruction. F. Seismic anchorage shall be per Section 01 73 24, Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures. G. Program and configure the soft starters for pump soft start and stop operation to minimize hydraulic surge. 3.02 FIELD TESTS A. Motor control centers shall be tested in accordance with Section 26 08 01. 3.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES A. Provide a factory-trained representative at the site for the specified quantity and duration of the following activities. Specified durations do not include travel time to or from the project site. 1. Training Sessions: a. Section 01 75 00 b. The equipment supplier shall provide training for the facility operating personnel covering operation and maintenance of the equipment provided. The training program shall be not less than 4 hours in duration and the class size shall be up to 12 persons. Training date shall be coordinated with the facility owner. Training shall be video taped and provided to the owner upon completion of training session. The training submittal shall be approved before training takes place. Certify completion of training on Form 11000-B, Section 00 60 00, Sample Forms. 2. Start up and Testing Assistance: a. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of on site support for start up and testing. Complete form 11000-A, Section 00 60 00, Sample Forms.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS SECTION 26 24 19 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 18
b. Configure external communication network and include: 1) Provide a minimum of 16 hours of support for on site network testing. Coordinate this site time with the Owner. 2) Network Settings: Address, transmission rate, bus loss action, heartbeat interval, consumed path, and production path. 3) Test each network data transfer in compliance with Section 40 90 00 and Section 40 98 00. Test each network for complete data transfer between equipment specified in this Section and station’s control system in Section 40 90 00. 3.04 COORDINATION WITH SHORT CIRCUIT AND ARC FLASH REQUIREMENTS A. Provide information required to support the short circuit and coordination and arc flash study specified in Section 26 05 73, Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.
END OF SECTION 26 24 19
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES SECTION 26 27 15 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies miscellaneous electrical control and power devices. B. This section specifies electrical control and monitoring devices: 1. Control Devices: a. Pushbuttons b. Selector Switches c. Indicating Lights d. Control Station Enclosures e. Smoke Detector 2. Control Relays: a. Load-Switching b. Logic Level Switching c. Timers and Time Switch d. Alternators C. This section specifies power devices: 1. Safety Disconnect Switches: 2. Toggle Disconnect Switches 3. Overcurrent Protection: a. Circuit breakers 4. Elapsed Time Indicators 5. Current transformers and transducers D. Request clarification where conflicts occur with this section and other sections of these specifications. E. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 26 00 00 3. Section 26 08 01 4. Section 40 90 00
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES SECTION 26 27 15 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum) NEMA ICS-1 General Standards For Industrial Controls and Systems NEMA ICS -2 Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies NEMA KS 1 Enclosed Switches
1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10 . B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check- marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. C. Arrangement drawings of the panel enclosure indicating the front door and panel equipment arrangement and dimensions, and enclosure type. D. Nameplate legend with engraving and sizes. E. Internal layout drawings showing all components. List of materials and components with the layout drawings. F. Elementary / schematic diagrams G. Internal wiring connection diagrams. H. External wiring interconnection diagrams including interlocks. I. Power and control single line diagrams, where motor controllers are included.
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES SECTION 26 27 15 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
J. Manufacturer's catalog data for all material provided under this section shall be assembled in a folder with each page clearly marked with the item model number and reference number to the specification. K. Product Data.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROL DEVICES A. Pushbuttons: 1. Pushbuttons shall be flush head, heavy-duty, with NEMA rating to match enclosure type. Operators shall be green for start function, red for stop functions, and black for all other functions. The escutcheon legend shall be as specified on the drawings. a. UL Listed. b. Dielectric Strength: 1300 Volts for one minute for Logic Reed contacts, 2200 Volts for one minute for other contacts. c. 30.5mm mounting hole. d. Temperature operating range –10 degree C. to +55 degree C. e. Momentary contact type f. When switching circuits are monitored by programmable controllers or other solid state circuits, furnish hermetically-sealed, logic-reed type contacts rated not less than 0.15 amperes at 150 Vac and 0.06 amperes at 30 Vdc. g. When switching circuits are not monitored by programmable controllers or other solid state circuits, furnish contacts with NEMA Utilization Category rating A600 rated not less than 10 amperes continuous and 6 amperes break at 120 Vac. 2. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley 800T/800H series or approved substitute. B. Selector Switches: 1. Selector switches shall be heavy-duty with NEMA rating to match enclosure type. Selector switches shall have maintained position contacts. Switches shall be provided with contact blocks and number of positions as required performing the specified or indicated operations. 2. The escutcheon legend shall be as specified on the drawings. Provide: a. UL Listed. b. Dielectric Strength: 1300 Volts for one minute for Logic Reed contacts, 2200 Volts for one minute for other contacts. c. 30.5mm mounting hole. d. Temperature operating range –10 degree C. to +55 degree C. e. Standard knob operator (not lever type nor wing lever type) f. Number of positions and contact configuration as shown on Drawings.
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES SECTION 26 27 15 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
g. When switching circuits are monitored by programmable controllers or other solid state circuits, furnish hermetically-sealed, logic-reed type contacts rated not less than 0.15 amperes at 150 Vac and 0.06 amperes at 30 Vdc. h. When switching circuits are not monitored by programmable controllers or other solid state circuits, furnish contacts with NEMA Utilization Category rating A600 rated not less than 10 amperes continuous and 6 amperes break at 120 Vac. 3. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley 800T/800H series or approved substitute. C. Indicating Lights: 1. Red, amber, green, and blue indicating lights shall be heavy-duty universal full voltage push-to-test LED type with NEMA rating to match enclosure type for installation in a 30.5mm hole. Furnish with 28 chip high visibility LED. The escutcheon and lens color shall be as shown on Drawings or scheduled. 2. Manufacturer: a. Allen-Bradley 800H-QRTH2. 3. Indicating Light Lens Color:
Color Function Example Red Run, open valve Equipment operating, motor running Green Not running, closed Equipment ready, end of cycle valve White or clear Normal condition Control power on, equipment available to operate Amber (yellow) Abnormal condition Failure of equipment, alarm or fault condition
D. Control Station Enclosures: 1. Enclosures locations and ratings: a. Indoors: NEMA 12 b. Outdoors and Corrosive areas: NEMA 4X stainless steel c. NEC 500 Hazardous Areas: NEMA-7. E. Smoke Detectors: 1. 24VDC Power. 4 wire. 2. Alarm contact 1/2 amp at 30VDC. Auxiliary contact 1 amp at 30 VDC Form C. 3. Photoelectric smoke detection. Replaceable optical chamber. 4. Heat detector rate of rise 15 degree F per minute and greater than 105 degree F. 5. Heat detector fixed, 135 deg F. 6. The detectors mount to a standard single-gang electrical box, a 4-inch octagonal box, or a 4-inch square electrical box. 7. 85 dB sounder
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES SECTION 26 27 15 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
8. Automatically resets sounder and contacts. 9. UL 268 10. General electric ESL 500N series or approved substitute. 2.02 CONTROL RELAYS A. Load-Switching Control Relays: 1. Control relays used for switching loads such as solenoids, actuators, contactors, motor starter coils, remote interlocking, etc. shall be heavy-duty machine tool type. 2. Contacts shall be 4-pole and be field interchangeable to either normally-open or normally- closed. Relay shall be capable of accepting a 4-pole adder. 3. AC relays shall have NEMA A600 contact ratings and electrical clearances for 600 volts. DC relays shall have NEMA P300 contact ratings and electrical clearances for 250 volts. 4. Manufacturer: Allen Bradley Bulletin-700, Square D Class 8501, or approved substitute. B. Logic Level Switching Control Relays: 1. Control relays for signal circuits shall have a minimum of three SPDT, gold- flashed, fine silver contacts rated 3-ampere resistive at 120V AC or 28Vdc. 2. Control relays shall be plug-in type with heavy-duty, barrier-protected screw terminal sockets and clear polycarbonate dust cover with clip fastener. 3. AC models shall have neon lamp indicator wired in parallel with coil. DC models shall have LED lamp indicator wired in parallel with coil. 4. Manufacturer: Potter Blumfield series KUP; Schrack Series RA; or approved substitute. C. Timers: 1. Multi-function, micro-controller based, socket mounted timing relay. 2. Single functions: a. Delay on Make b. Delay on Break c. Recycle (on time first, equal recycle delays) d. Single shot e. Interval f. Trailing edge single shot g. Inverted single shot h. Inverted delay on break i. Accumulative delay on make j. Re-triggerable single shot
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES SECTION 26 27 15 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
3. Dual functions: a. Delay on make/delay on break b. Delay on make/recycle (on time first, equal recycle delays.) c. Delay on make/interval d. Delay on make/single shot e. Interval/recycle (on time first, equal recycle delays) f. Delay on break/recycle (on time first, equal recycle delays) g. Single shot/recycle (on time first, equal recycle delays) h. Recycle – both times adjustable (on time first) i. Recycle – both times adjustable (off time first) j. Interval/delay on make k. Accumulative delay on make/interval 4. Time delay range, switch selectable: a. Single function 0.1 second to 1,705 hours in 8 ranges. b. Dual function 0.1 second to 3,100 minutes in 8 ranges. c. Setting accuracy +/- 1 percent or 50 milliseconds, whichever is greater. d. Repeat accuracy +/- 0.1 percent or 16 milliseconds, whichever is greater. 5. Output: a. Two Form-C electromechanical isolated contacts rated 10-amperes resistive at 240Vac b. Rated 1/3-horsepower at 120 or 240Vac c. Double-pole double-throw: DPDT. d. Mechanical life: 10,000,000 operations e. Electrical life: 1,000,000 operations at full load. f. Mounting: Magnal Plug 11-pin socket 6. Environment: -20 to +65 degree C. 7. Manufacturer: a. ABB / SSAC’s multifunction type TRDU time delay relay with dip-switch function setting with 24Vdc, 24Vac, 120Vac, 240Vac inputs as required or indicated or approved substitute. D. Time Switch: 1. Provide an electronic time switch with full-year control in a NEMA 3R enclosure. The switch shall incorporate a non-volatile memory that maintains programmed switching times for the life of the time switch and provide a factory installed field replaceable lithium or alkaline battery for time keeping and calendar information for a minimum of 8 years. Furnish with one single-pole, double-throw output switch rated 20-ampere at 240Vac. Furnish with manual override control.
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES SECTION 26 27 15 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
2. Manufacturer: a. Intermatic Model ET70115CR. b. Paragon Electric Company, Inc. EC71ST. c. Or approved substitute. 2.03 SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Disconnect switches shall have-ampere ratings as indicated on the drawings, fused or non-fused as indicated on the drawings, stainless steel operator rated 600 volts AC. B. Provide fusible disconnect switches with ratings as indicated. C. Enclosure locations and ratings. D. Enclosures shall be: 1. NEMA 1 for architecturally finished areas and electrical room. 2. NEMA 7/4X cast metal for hazardous areas. 3. NEMA 4X stainless steel for all other areas. E. The operating handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the "off" position and shall be capable of being locked in the closed "on" position. The operator shall be a positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanism. Provide bolt-on hubs. Provide door lock. Provide nameplates with the equipment tag number, equipment description, and power source as indicated on the drawings. Submit nameplate list. F. Switches shall be horsepower rated for motors and shall comply with NEMA KS-1. Switches shall be provided with defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the operating handle is in the "on" position. Switches shall have line terminal shields. G. Switches shall have two auxiliary contacts rated minimum 3A resistive at 28VDC and 120VAC. One contact normally open and one contact normally closed. 2.04 TOGGLE DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Rated suitable as a motor disconnect. Lock hole minimum .3" diameter. Rated 2 hp and 30A at 120Vac. B. NEMA 3R Thermoplastic enclosure. Hubble HBL13R22D or approved substitute. 2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION A. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic, molded case type with the ampere rating as specified. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, circuit breaker interrupting rating shall be 42,000 amperes symmetrical. 2.06 ELAPSED TIME INDICATORS A. Elapsed time indicators shall be panel mounted, non-resettable, 5.5-digit, hour indicator, rated 120Vac, 60-Hertz.
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES SECTION 26 27 15 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
2.07 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, TRANSDUCERS, AND CURRENT SWITCH A. Provide monitoring current transformers with 600Vac insulation and primary ampere rating as indicated with 5-ampere output. B. Provide AC current transducer for any one of the phase conductors of the power circuit to be installed through onboard toroid. Provide a loop-powered transducer with input rated from 0 to 50-ampere with 4-20madc analog output scaled for the primary current of the current transformer. Provide zero and span adjustments. C. Manufacturer: ABB AC current transducer TCSA Series Loop Powered and mounting accessories, or approved substitute. D. Provide a DIN rail or back plate mounted AC current transducer that is a loop-powered transducer with input rated from 0 to 5-ampere and with 4-20madc analog output scaled for the primary current of the current transformer. E. Manufacturer: ABB AC current transducer DCSA Series Loop Powered and mounting accessories, or approved substitute. F. AC Current Switch: 1. Input Range: Split Core: 1.75 t0 150 Amps. 2. Set Point Adjustable: a. Split Core: 1.75 t0 150 Amps (4-turn Potentiometer). b. Contractor required monitoring load current to adjust set point through test equipment supplied by Contractor during field testing. 3. Output: As specified on Drawings. a. Normally open contact rated 0.15 A @ 240 VAC or VDC. b. Normally closed contact rated 0.20 A @ 135 VAC or VDC. 4. Response Time: 120 milliseconds. 5. Frequency Range: 6 to 100 Hz. 6. Power: Self powered. 7. Manufacturer: AcuAMP, ACS150, or approved substitute. 2.08 TERMINAL STRIPS, BLOCKS, AND DEVICES A. Power Wiring: Provide back plate mounted terminal strips rated at 600 Vac. B. Control Wiring: As specified in paragraph 2.02 C.5 of Section 40 90 00 , Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems. 2.09 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates for all control stations, relays, timers, motor contactors and disconnect switches shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 2.04 of Section 26 00 00 , Electrical.
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES SECTION 26 27 15 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 9
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Control stations and disconnect switches shall be mounted 48 inches above the floor, ground, or slab to center of device. B. Miscellaneous electrical devices shall be tested in accordance with Section 26 00 00 , Electrical, and Section 26 08 01 , Testing.
END OF SECTION 26 27 15
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 27 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION FINAL DESIGN Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section specifies wiring devices consisting of receptacles, plugs, switches and appurtenances. B. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 1.02 REFERENCES A. This Section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this Section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference Title NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum) NEMA WD-1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check- marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. A check mark shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. C. Catalog literature for each device type with ratings.
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 27 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION FINAL DESIGN Page 2
D. Information on nameplate materials E. Product Data: In accordance with Section 01 33 10, provide catalog cuts for all materials provided under this section.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Wiring devices shall be UL approved for the current and voltage specified and shall comply with NEMA WD-1. Devices shall contain provisions for back wiring and side wiring with captive binding screws. B. Provide devices colored to conform to manufacturer’s or industry standard for special use such as orange for isolated ground receptacles, blue for surge suppression receptacles, and red for emergency power receptacles. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings or Schedules, normal use devices shall be brown, except those located in finished areas shall be ivory. 2.02 RECEPTACLES AND PLUGS A. General: Receptacles shall be grounding type. B. 120V Receptacles: 1. Indoor, Clean Areas: a. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings or Schedules, receptacles shall be duplex 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R, and shall accept NEMA 5-15P and 5- 20P plugs. Where the manufacturer of cord connected equipment requires and isolated ground, a receptacle with isolated ground shall be provided. b. Manufacturers: Hubbell 5362, General Electric 4108-2, or equal. 2. Outdoor, Process or Corrosive Areas: a. Receptacle shall be duplex, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R, and shall accept NEMA 5-15P and 5-20P plugs. Receptacle and plug shall be corrosion resistant, marine duty with yellow polycarbonate weatherproof lift covers. b. Manufacturers: Hubbell 53CM62/53CM21, General Electric, or equal. c. Outdoor receptacles in wet locations shall be have “while in use” protective covers. C. 250V Receptacles: Receptacles shall be duplex 15 amp, NEMA 6-15R, and shall accept NEMA 6-15P plug caps. Receptacles shall be Hubbell 5662, Arrow Hart 5662, or equal. Plug caps shall be Hubbell 5666-C, Arrow-Hart 6866, or equal. D. Plug Caps: Male plug caps for 120 volt and 250 volt receptacles shall be of the cord grip armored type with heavy phenolic housing, of the same manufacture as the receptacle. Plug caps shall be rated 15 amps. One plug cap shall be provided for every four receptacles furnished, with a minimum of two plug caps being provided. Plug caps shall be delivered to the Engineer.
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 27 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION FINAL DESIGN Page 3
E. Three Phase Receptacles and Plugs: 1. Receptacles shall be suitable for 480 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire service, with ampere ratings as specified. Receptacles and plugs shall be designed so that the grounding pole is permanently connected to the housing. The grounding pole shall make contact before the line poles are engaged when the plug is connected to the receptacle housing. The plug sleeve shall also make contact with the receptacle housing before the line and load poles make contact. Receptacles shall be provided complete with cast back box, angle adapter, gaskets, and a gasketed screw-type, weathertight cap with chain fastener. Each receptacle shall be provided with one plug. 2. Manufacturers: Crouse-Hinds "Arktite," or approved equal. F. Receptacles for Hazardous Areas: 1. Receptacles for use in hazardous areas shall be rated in accordance with NEC for the area in which they are to be located and shall be factory sealed. Receptacles shall be designed so the plug must be inserted and turned before load is energized. Receptacles shall be provided with mounting box, sealing chamber, and compatible plug. Voltage and current ratings shall be as 120 Vac, 20-ampere. 2. Manufacturers: Appleton "U-Line," Crouse-Hinds "Ark-Gard 2," or equal. 2.03 SWITCHES A. General Purpose (Indoor, Clean Areas): 1. General purpose switches shall be quiet AC type, specification grade, back and side wired, and shall be provided in accordance with rated capacities as required or as indicated on Drawings or Schedules. Switches used for motor control shall be horsepower rated a minimum of ½ HP at 15 amps and 1 HP at 20 amps. Switches shall match receptacles in color. 2. Manufacturers: General Electric, Hubbell, or Engineer-approved substitute, as follows:
15A, 120-277V 20A, 120-277V G.E. Co. Hubbell G.E. Co. Hubbell Single: GE5931 HBL1201 GE5951 HBL1221 Three-way: GE5933 HBL1203 GE5953 HBL1223 Four-way: GE5934 HBL1204 GE5954 HBL1224 SPST momentary: GE5953 ------Three position center off momentary: GE5935 HBL1556 -- HBL1557
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 27 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION FINAL DESIGN Page 4
B. Switches for Hazardous Areas: 1. Switches for control of lighting and small single-phase power loads in hazardous areas shall consist of a factory assembled and sealed combination general purpose type switch in an explosion-proof housing. The switch shall be rated in accordance with NEC for the area in which it is to be installed. The external operating mechanism shall consist of a wing-type handle having the "ON" and "OFF" positions visible from the front. 2. Manufacturers: Crouse-Hinds EFSC2129, Appleton EFSC175-F1, or equal. C. Switches for Outdoor and Corrosive Areas: 1. Switches shall be 20-ampere presswitch type with weatherproof/ corrosion resistant neoprene plate. Switches shall be mounted in "FS" type copper-free aluminum or PVC mounting boxes. 2. Manufacturers: Hubbell or Arrow-Hart as follows:
Hubbell Arrow-Hart with 17CM50 plate with 2881 plate Single pole 1281 2991 Double pole 1282 2992 3-way 1283 2993 4-way 1284 2994
2.04 DEVICE PLATES A. Device plates shall be provided with switches. In non-corrosive indoor areas, receptacle device plates shall be made of sheet steel, zinc electroplated with chrome finish as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or equal. B. Device plates in corrosive or outdoor areas shall be corrosion-resistant/marine-duty type. Device plates for explosion-proof equipment shall be factory provided with the equipment. C. Device plates shall be provided with engraved laminated phenolic nameplates with 1/8- inch white characters on black background. D. Nameplates for switches shall identify panel and circuit number and area served. Nameplates for receptacles shall identify circuit, and voltage if other than 120 volts, single phase. 2.05 PLUG STRIPS A. Plug strips shall be manufactured of sheet steel with the receptacles mounted on the front cover. The front cover shall be removable. B. Plug strips for office and laboratory areas shall have single 3 wire, 20 ampere grounding type receptacles mounted along the strip on a single circuit.
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 27 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION FINAL DESIGN Page 5
C. Plug strips for work benches in shop and laboratory areas shall have 3 wire, 20 ampere grounding type duplex receptacles mounted along the strip on the circuits specified. Sufficient space shall be provided behind the receptacles for ten No. 12 AWG conductors in accordance with the NEC space rules. D. Manufacturer of plug strips: Plugmold, or equal.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Boxes shall be independently supported by galvanized brackets, expansion bolts, toggle bolts, or machine or wood screws as appropriate. Wooden plugs inserted in masonry or concrete shall not be used as a base to secure boxes, nor shall welding or brazing be used for attachment. B. Receptacles and switches installed in sheet steel boxes shall be flush mounted. Flush mounted receptacles shall be located 18 inches above the floor unless otherwise indicated. Switch boxes shall be mounted 48 inches above the floor. Receptacles installed in cast device boxes shall be located 48 inches above the floor. C. Wiring devices shall be tested for correct connections.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for standby power supply with the following features: 1. Diesel engine. 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring. 4. Outdoor enclosure. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section 26 36 00, "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine- generator sets. 2. Section 01 11 00 Owner Furnished Products 1.02 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions: 1. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter. 1.04 SCOPE A. The generators, with welded steel sub base mountings, will be Owner furnished and installed by the Contractor. The generators shall meet the requirements specified and are for reference only. The requirements listed in Part 3 – Execution are still required. B. Provide complete factory assembled generator set with digital (microprocessor-based) electronic generator set controls, digital governor, and digital voltage regulator per the following table and as shown drawings for each pump station.
Duty Ambient Sound Voltage Rating Rating Altitude Temp. level (V)* (kW)** (NFPA110) (ft) (ºF) @23” 480/277 WYE, 4W 450 Standby 20 104 75
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1. Supplement the table in paragraph B with the following information:
Fuel Tank Capacity 850 gallons C. Provide factory test, startup by a supplier authorized by the equipment manufacturer(s), and on-site testing of the system. D. The generator set manufacturer shall warrant all equipment provided under this section, whether or not is manufactured by the generator set manufacturer, so that there is one source for warranty and product service. Technicians specifically trained and certified by the manufacturer to support the product and employed by the generator set supplier shall service the generator sets. E. The generator set supplier shall be responsible for complete compliance to all specification requirements for both the generator set and the paralleling equipment. F. Prototype testing, factory testing, and site testing. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following: 1. Thermal damage curve for generator. 2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device. B. Design Data: 1. The generator manufacturer shall submit design data for engine, generator, and accessories in format indicated in Paragraphs B2 through B13 (For rated kW capacity). 2. Engine Data: a. Manufacturer b. Model c. Number and arrangement of cylinders d. RPM e. Bore x stroke f. Maximum power at rated rpm g. BMEP at rated kW (including any parasitic loads and generator efficiency) h. Piston speed, fpm i. Make and model of governor j. Make and model of overspeed shutdown device.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
3. Generator Data: a. Manufacturer b. Model c. Rated KVA (Standby & Prime) d. Rated KW (Stand-by & Prime) e. Voltage f. Temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient: 1) Stator by thermometer degrees C 2) Field by resistance degrees C 3) Class of insulation degrees C g. Reactance data h. Harmonic analysis 4. Generator efficiency including excitation losses and at 80 percent PF: a. Full load percent b. Three-quarters load percent c. Half load percent 5. Guaranteed fuel consumption rate (at generator terminals/138,000 BTU/gallon): a. Full load, gal/hr b. Three-quarter load, gal/hr c. Half load, gal/hr 6. Generator unit and accessories: a. Weight of skid mounted unit in the enclosure with and without the full load of fuel b. Overall length c. Overall width d. Overall height e. Exhaust pipe size f. Load bank panel drawings, location on generator, receptacle part numbers, cord-plug access location 7. Certification of the emissions performance of the generator set engine by the engine manufacturer. Exhaust gas emissions data, maximum values at loads varying from full to 1/4 load: a. Temperature: [_____] degrees F b. Flow: [_____] ACFM (mass and volume) c. Carbon Monoxide (CO): [_____] grams/BHP-hr d. Nitrogen Oxides (NOx): [_____] grams/BHP-hr
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
e. Hydrocarbons (HC): [_____] grams/BHP-hr f. *Sulfur Dioxide (SO2): [_____] grams/BHP-hr g. *Based on 0.3 percent sulfur content by weight in the fuel. 8. CFM of air required for combustion and ventilation based upon inlet air temperature of 40 degrees C: [___] cfm 9. Heat radiated to room by engine and generator: [____] BTU/min 10. Heat rejected to lubricating oil and intercooler: [____] BTU/min 11. Height from bottom of skid required for removing piston with connecting rod; (also for removing cylinder liner): [____]-ft 12. Is the unit guaranteed to be adequate for the connected motor starting requirement? a. Yes [___] No [___] 13. Radiator (engine driven or remote located) fan cooling air volume and required BHP: [_____] CFM [______] BHP C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components specified. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, Interconnection wiring diagrams, control wiring, and network wiring. D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that engine- generator set, batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in 01 73 24 Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. E. Qualification Data: Submit names, experience level, training certifications, and locations for technicians that will be responsible for servicing equipment at this site F. Source quality-control test reports. 1. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements. 2. Report of sound generation. 3. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 4. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110. G. Field quality-control test reports.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply. I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. J. Manufacturer’s instructions for configuring, data registers and programming remote network data exchange using Modbus RS-485. This information is required by the Owner for programming the station’s control system in Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements, to communicate with the following equipment specified in this Section. 1. Engine Generator. K. Training outline: Submit an outline of the specified training. The training outline submittal shall be approved before training takes place. 1.06 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The generator set installation and on-site testing shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards, as applicable. The generator set shall include necessary features to meet the requirements of these standards. 1. ANSI S1.13-1971—Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels in Air 2. CSA 282, 1989 Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings 3. IEEE446 – Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications 4. NFPA 30 and local IFC Compliance – Flammable and Combustible Liquids 5. NFPA 37 – Standard For the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines 6. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in systems in compliance to Article 700, 701, and 702. 7. NFPA 99 – Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities 8. NFPA 110 – Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The generator set shall meet all requirements for Level 1 systems. Level 1prototype tests required by this standard shall have been performed on a complete and functional unit, component level type tests will not substitute for this requirement. B. The generator set and supplied accessories shall meet the requirements of the following standards: 1. NEMA MG1-1998 part 32. Alternator shall comply with the requirements of this standard. 2. UL142 – Sub-base Tanks 3. UL1236 – Battery Chargers 4. UL2200. The generator set shall be listed to UL2200 or submit to an independent third party certification process to verify compliance as installed.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
C. The control system for the generator set shall comply with the following requirements. 1. CSA C22.2, No. 14 – M91 Industrial Control Equipment. 2. EN50082-2, Electromagnetic Compatibility – Generic Immunity Requirements, Part 2: Industrial. 3. EN55011, Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Industrial, Scientific and Medical Equipment. 4. FCC Part 15, Subpart B. 5. IEC8528 part 4. Control Systems for Generator Sets 6. IEC Std 801.2, 801.3, and 801.5 for susceptibility, conducted, and radiated electromagnetic emissions. D. The generator set manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation, and service, in accordance with ISO 9001. E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.07 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE A. Equipment furnished will include the services of a factory trained representative of the manufacturers of all equipment to supervise the installation, adjustment and testing of the equipment and to instruct the Owner's operating personnel on operation. 1. Installation: to assist in location of anchor bolts; setting, leveling and field erection; coordination of piping, electrical, miscellaneous utility connections: 2 man-days. 2. Start-up, testing and calibration: should be specific to the size of the gen-set.
3. Factory-trained manufacturer’s representative at the site for the following activities. a. Modbus RS-485 external communication network and include: 1) Provide a minimum of 8 hours of support for on site network testing. Coordinate this site time with the Owner. 2) Network Settings: Address, transmission rate, bus loss action, heartbeat interval, consumed path, and production path. 3) Test engine generator network data transfer in compliance with Section 40 90 00 and Section 40 98 00. Test network for complete data transfer between engine generator specified in this Section and station’s control system in Section 40 90 00. 4. Operation instruction: should be specific to the size of the gen-set. B. A certificate in the form provided in Appendix A, and Appendix B, from the manufacturer and signed by Owner's representative stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the unit has been satisfactorily tested, is ready for operation and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of the unit shall be submitted for each piece of equipment indicated above.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
C. For equipment furnished under other Divisions, furnish the services of accredited representatives of the manufacturer only when some evident malfunction or over-heating makes such services necessary in the opinion of the Construction Manager. D. The Contractor is required to coordinate with the generator manufacturer for the dates required for the services required in this Contract. 1.08 OPERATING MANUALS A. Six complete sets of operation and maintenance instructions covering all equipment furnished shall be provided by the generator manufacturer. 1. The manual for each piece of equipment shall be a separate document with the following specific requirements: a. Contents: 1) Table of contents and index 2) Brief description of each system and components 3) Starting and stopping procedures 4) Special operating instructions 5) Routine maintenance procedures 6) Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions, parts list, illustrations, and diagrams 7) One copy of each wiring diagram 8) One copy of each approved shop drawing and the Vendor's coordination and layout drawing for each unit. 9) Name, address, and telephone numbers of local service representatives. b. Material: 1) Loose leaf on 20 lb punched paper 2) Holes reinforced with plastic cloth or metal 3) Page size, 8-1/2-in by 11-in 4) Diagrams, illustrations, and attached foldouts as required, of original quality, reproduced by dry copy method 5) Covers: oil, moisture, and wear resistant 9 by 12 size c. Submittals to the Construction Manager. 1.09 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME A. Table of Contents: Provide title of project, names, addresses and telephone numbers of Engineer, schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of suppliers; including local source of supplies and replacement parts. C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 8
D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. E. Type Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified. 1.10 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. B. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing, applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. C. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specifications. 1.11 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For each Item of Equipment and Each System the generator manufacture shall provide the following: 1. Overview of System and description of unit or system and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Panelboard Circuit Directories including electrical service characteristics, controls and communications and color coded wiring diagrams as installed. 3. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in and routine normal operating instructions and sequences; regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions; and summer, winter and any special operating instructions. 4. Maintenance Requirements: a. Routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair and reassemble instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing and checking instructions. b. Servicing and lubrication schedule and list of lubricants required. c. Manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. d. Sequence of operation. e. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. 5. Control diagrams as installed. 6. Test reports as specified.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 9
1.12 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Before final inspection, the generator manufacturer representative will instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and systems, at agreed upon times. B. The generator manufacturer representative will instruct on the use, operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. The generator manufacturer or their representative will prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. 1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. C. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators and seismic restraints of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200-mi of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. E. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer. F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. G. Comply with ASME B15.1. H. Comply with NFPA 37. I. Comply with NFPA 70. J. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system. This is not an emergency power supply system. K. Comply with UL 2200. L. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 10
M. The engine-generator set shall be the standard product, as modified by this Section, of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of this type of equipment and which maintains a permanent service organization and supply of spare parts in place at the time of the bid within 150 miles of the project site. The unit to be furnished shall be built from components which have proven compatibility, reliability and are coordinated to operate as a unit. N. The standby generator manufacturer will coordinate his/her design with the Pump Station harmonic loads, to assure that generator reactance is limited to a value that will limit the line harmonics to acceptable levels to assure that the generator voltage control system will provide stable operation. O. All mechanical equipment shall be designed and built for 24 hour continuous service at any and all points within the specified range of operation without overheating or excessive vibration or strain, and require only that degree of maintenance generally accepted as peculiar to the specific type of equipment required. All parts and components of all units shall be designed and built for interchangeability so that replacement parts may be installed without any additional fitting or machining. P. Components of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be the products of manufacturers who can produce evidence of their ability to promptly furnish any and all interchangeable replacement parts as may be needed at any time within the expected life of the equipment. Q. Submit information on torsional forces on the engine generator and upon request, any additional information that the Engineer may deem necessary to determine the ability of the manufacturer to produce the specified equipment. 1.14 UNIT PERFORMANCE A. The voltage regulation shall be within plus or minus 1 percent from zero load to full rated load. Upon application or removal of full rated load in one step, the transient voltage and recovery to steady state operation shall be within 3 seconds. B. Stable or steady state operation is defined as operation with the frequency variation not exceeding plus or minus 0.22 percent (0.15 Hz) and voltage variation plus or minus 1 percent of their mean value for constant load from zero load to full rated load. A rheostat shall provide a minimum of plus or minus 5 percent voltage adjustment from rated voltage. C. The generator manufacturer shall submit reactance data and harmonic analysis and shall insure that the generator voltage control system will provide stable operation in the presence of such harmonics. 1.15 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The generator manufacturer shall ship the equipment and material complete except where partial disassembly is required by transportation regulations or for protection of components.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 11
B. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be coated, wrapped and otherwise protected from snow, rain, drippings of any sort, dust, dirt, mud, flood and condensed water vapor during shipment and while installed in place during construction. The protective coverings shall remain in place until the work areas are substantially free of all construction dust and debris. Full details of proposed protective measures shall be submitted for approval to the Engineer prior to shipment. C. All units shall be properly packaged for ocean shipment and especially treated for long periods of storage before use. 1.16 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 1. Ambient Temperature: 0 deg F to 104 deg F. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 100 percent (rain and fog, rare snow). 3. Altitude: Sea level to 3000-ft. 1.17 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Service Agreement: 1. The Engine Generator Manufacturer shall provide a 2 year maintenance service agreement, at the time of the bid, for the engine generators included under this specification. The Service Agreement shall include comprehensive maintenance and preventive maintenance including labor, parts materials, expenses, travel and equipment. There shall be no deductibles applied to the Comprehensive Service Agreement. The agreement shall commence on the date of acceptance of the units by the Owner. 2. The maintenance agreement shall include the services of factory trained technicians to diagnose/inspect the faulty equipment in the shortest possible time. 3. The Service Agreement shall include a minimum of four site visits per year scheduled in advance with the Owners operations personnel. The first three visits will focus on preventive maintenance and the fourth will be a comprehensive maintenance inspection and service visit. The same schedule will be applied each year of the agreement. 4. Throughout the duration of the service agreement remote support over the telephone will be provided by the manufacturer for operational issues. 5. The agreement shall include all labor, materials, equipment and all special tools required for the normal operation and maintenance of the engine driven generator unit and shall be spelled out in the agreement. Throughout the duration of the service agreement all spare parts and materials shall be readily available as required. All required costs for expediting spare parts not readily on stock shall be borne by the maintenance service agreement provider on its entirety. A price list of all spare parts shall be supplied with the agreement that is guaranteed for a minimum of year. Any increase in the price of spare parts shall be provided to the Owner on a yearly basis.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 12
1.18 WARRANTY A. Base Warranty: 1. The complete electrical power system (generator controls, generator set, associated switches, switchgear, and accessories) as provided by the single source manufacturer, shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) year from the date of system acceptance by the Owner. The warranty coverage shall include parts, labor, travel expenses and labor to remove/install said equipment per the manufacturer’s published limited warranty. 1.19 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generator. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. See concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements in other sections.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: The Owner-furnished generator is manufactured by Cummins, Inc. Equipment specifications for this project are based on microprocessor- based generator sets manufactured by Cummins Power Generation. 2.02 GENERAL A. The engine-generator sets shall be factory assembled units, specifically designed and equipped for operation on No. 2 diesel fuel oil and shall be: 1. The engine and generator shall be directly connected with a semi-flexible steel coupling, shall be free from injurious torsional or other vibration and shall be mounted on vibration isolators with a heavy steel sub-base. The diesel engine shall be vertical in-line six cylinder stroke cycle, full diesel, and electronic injection, arranged for direct connection to an alternating current generator. B. The unit shall operate at a rotational speed of not more than 1800 rpm and shall develop its full kW rating including radiator fan power: 1. Four stroke cycle turbocharged with after cooler. The piston speed shall not exceed 1707 fpm. 2. Units offered at ratings in excess of their published ratings are not acceptable and will not be approved. C. The engine shall be rigid, neat in appearance, and shall allow easy access to the various parts for maintenance purposes. The bed plate and frame shall be of heavy construction. All parts shall be properly enclosed to prevent the throwing or dripping of oil. D. The engine generator set shall be pre-piped and pre-wired insofar as possible. Separate pre-wired terminal boxes shall be provided on the engine generator skid for AC and DC wiring.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 13
2.03 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET A. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments. 1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of gravity. 2. The complete engine-generator unit shall be free from harmful torsional or other vibration throughout the entire operation range of speed and load. B. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated on drawings. 3. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire. 4. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of component. C. Generator-Set Performance: 1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: Voltage regulation shall not exceed one percent for any constant load between no load and rated load for both parallel and non-parallel applications. Random voltage variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.5 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds. 6. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to steady state rated load. Random frequency variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.25%. 7. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed. 8. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds. 9. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 14
10. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components. 11. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements. The time required to automatically start, accelerate to rated speed and voltage to the system bus on a normal power failure shall not exceed 10 seconds, assuming that the generator set is in an ambient temperature of 15C or greater, and water jacket heaters are operating properly. 2.04 ENGINE A. General: 1. The engine manufacturer shall make, or have made, the mass-electric system analysis of the complete engine-generator unit, and shall submit to the Engineer a complete report which shall show where any critical speed will be encountered, together with the order, the frequency, and magnitude of any critical speed. B. Air-Intake Filter: Standard-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator. C. Starting System: shall be manufacturer’s standards. 1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article 2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding. 3. Cranking Cycle: 60-seconds. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least fourtimes without recharging. 5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place. 7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 15
8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features: a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again. b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures. c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent. d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates. e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at the generator system control and monitoring panel. f. Enclosure and Mounting: Inside generator enclosure. 2.05 EQUIPMENT A. Governor: 1. Governor shall be Cummins electronic, isochronous governor, with external manual adjustment for speed droop, speed setting and load limit. Mounted in the generator control panel. 2. Furnish also a separate overspeed shutdown device which shall, in case of predetermined overspeed or the operation of various protective devices as later specified, instantly stop the engine without the fuel injection system losing its prime. B. Supporting Structure: 1. The engine-generator shall be directly bolted, doweled, and aligned on a rigid, fabricated steel base, suitably sized to maintain the correct alignment, supported by Korfund or equal heavy duty spring type vibration isolators, anchored to the level surface of a concrete pad. 2.06 FUEL OIL STORAGE
A. Tank Capacity: As recommended by engine manufacturer for an uninterrupted period of 24 hours' operation at 100 percent of rated power output of engine-generator system without being refilled. B. Pump Capacity: Exceeds maximum flow of fuel drawn by engine-mounted fuel supply pump at 110 percent of rated capacity, including fuel returned from engine.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 16
C. Low Level Warning Sensor: Low-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm contacts at 25 percent of normal fuel level. D. Low-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm contacts at 10 percent of normal fuel level. E. High-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm and redundant fuel shutoff contacts at midpoint between overflow level and 100 percent of normal fuel level. F. Piping Connections: Factory-installed fuel supply and return lines from tank to engine; local fuel fill, vent line, overflow line; and tank drain line with shutoff valve. 2.07 SYSTEMS A. Fuel Oil System: 1. The generator manufacture will provide a dual wall sub base fuel storage tank with 24 hours continuous operation at 100% rated power output capacity. The tank shall be constructed of corrosion resistant steel and shall be UL listed. The equipment, as installed, shall meet all local and regional requirements for above ground tanks. a. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1) Manufacturer shall have a minimum ten years’ experience in the design and construction of Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed tank systems. b. Construction: 1) The sub base tank shall be manufactured by IBI Tanks or approved equivalent and constructed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL-142. The sub base tank shall be constructed in accordance with Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, NFPA 30; The Standard for Installation and use of Stationary Combustible Engine and Gas Turbines, NFPA 37; and The Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems, NFPA 110. 2) The tank shall be designed and constructed with a rectangular shape and sized to provide 24 hour continued service at full load. The sub base tank shall match the generator skid dimensions. 3) The sub base tank shall include reinforced steel box channel for generator support, with load rating of 5,000 lbs. per generator set mounting hole location. Full height gussets shall be provided at generator set mounting holes. 4) The sub base tank shall be pressure washed with an iron phosphate solution. The interior shall be coated with a solvent- based film rust preventative, providing inter-operational protection. 5) The sub base tank shall be shipped with a certificate of Structural/Mechanical Integrity, certifying that it has met standards through rigorous testing and has demonstrated specified capabilities.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 17
c. Sub Base Tank Painting: 1) The paint and paint process used will have met the following standards: a) Tank exterior coating tested to withstand continuous salt spray testing at 100% exposure for 244 hours to a 5% salt solution at 92°- 97° F. Coating has been subjected to full exposure humidity testing to 100% humidity at 100° F for 24 hours. Tests conducted in accordance with The American Standard Testing Methods Society. b) The tank shall be pressure washed with a solution of super refined mineral spirits so as to remove all traces of oil, dirt, grease, and markings, and also scour the metal surfaces on a microscopic level to facilitate paint adhesion. The tank shall be wiped with a tack cloth to remove any particles missed in the initial wash. c) A corrosion-resistant, epoxy-based primer approved for use on steel or aluminum surfaces shall be applied to the tank exterior prior to application of finish paint. d) A high gloss, alkyd acrylic enamel finish coat of paint shall be applied to the tank exterior. The tank finish shall be visually inspected prior to shipment and repairs made as necessary. d. Sub Base Tank Testing: 1) Primary tank sections shall be pressurized at 3-5 psi and leak- checked to ensure integrity of sub base weld seams per UL-142 standards. Containment basin shall be leak-checked by means of weld penetrant and ultraviolet light. e. Sub Base Tank Fittings: 1) The sub base tank shall include the following fittings: a) Appropriately sized NPT fuel supply b) Fuel return fitting c) 2" NPT for normal vent d) NPT for emergency vent, sized as appropriate e) 2" NPT for manual fill f) NPT for level gauge, sized as appropriate. g) 3/8" NPT basin drain h) 2" NPT for level alarm i) NPT fitting for leak detection alarm, sized as appropriate. f. Fuel Level Gauge: 1) The sub base tank shall include a direct-reading fuel level gauge.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 18
g. Fuel Containment: 1) Sub base tank shall be double wall to provide containment in the event of tank rupture. Capacity of containment shall be a minimum of 110% of the tank capacity to prevent escape of fuel into the environment in the event of a tank rupture. 2) Means shall lbe provided to prevent release of liquids from the tank by siphon. h. Leak Detection System: 1) A fuel containment basin leak detector switch shall be provided. i. Sub Base Tank Venting: 1) Normal venting: a) Normal venting shall be sized at 2" NPT for tanks through 2,499 gallons; 1-1/2" NPT for 2,500 to 3,000 gallons; 2" NPT for 3,001 to 10,000 gallons in accordance with The American Petroleum Institute Standard No. 2000, for venting atmospheric and low pressure storage tanks. Tank shall be provided with atmospheric (normal) vent cap with screen. Vent pipe shall be extended 120” the above the top of the base tank. 2) Emergency Venting: a) The emergency vents NPT fitting shall be sized to accommodate the total capacity of both normal and emergency vents, and is not less than that derived from NFPA 30, Table 2-8, based on wetted surface area of the tank (calculated based on 100% of primary tank). A zinc- plated emergency pressure relief vent cap shall be furnished. The vent shall be spring-pressure operated. Opening pressure shall be 0.5 psig; full opening pressure shall be 2.5 psig. Limits shall be marked on top of each vent. A second emergency vent fitting shall be provided for the secondary containment portion of the tank if applicable. b) Vent pipes shall be extended 120” the above the top of the base tank. 2. The fuel piping between the sub base tank and the engine shall be black steel and of a size recommended by the engine manufacturer and shall include flexible hose connections in both the supply and return piping. A Preferred or equal 1-in size Fusomatic valve shall be installed in the engine suction supply line between the tank and the diesel engine. 3. All parts of the fuel system shall meet the approval of and be installed in complete compliance with, all applicable Federal, State, and local codes, laws and regulations.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 19
4. The Contractor will coordinate with the Owner for the first complete filling of the fuel tank with No. 2 diesel fuel. The Contractor will schedule with the Owner to refuel after testing, start-up, training, demonstration, and operation of the generators. The fuel tanks will be full when turned over to the owner at substantial completion. 5. The base tank shall include the following items: a. Low level switch. b. High Level switch. 6. All diesel fuel filters shall be provided with the engine-generator set, sized per the manufacturer. 7. A fuel filling ports with vandal resistant cap shall be located on both side of the generator. The filling ports shall be inside the generator enclosure and accessible by opening an access door. B. Electric (Battery) Starting System: 1. Starting shall be accomplished by an engine mounted, solenoid shift electric starter, capable of withstanding four consecutive continuous cranking periods of 15 seconds duration each separated by 15 seconds rest periods before shutting down completely and sounding the alarm. 2. The starting batteries shall be low maintenance, long life, lead calcium type, especially designed for diesel engine cranking service and of a capacity as recommended by the battery manufacturer for cranking the engine being furnished, for the necessary break-away current as required and the spinning current for four consecutive starts of 15 seconds of cranking on each start, without being recharged, with a battery temperature of 45 degrees F and with the SAE 30 oil in the engine maintained at 60 degrees F. The batteries shall be low maintenance, long life. An insulated protective covering, battery rack and suitable cables shall be provided. 3. Battery shall be furnished with all connectors and hardware, lifting device, electrolyte terminal plates, cables, grease, hydrometer and brushes for cleaning posts and connectors. 4. A skid mounted structural steel battery rack shall be furnished by the generator manufacturer specifically designed for battery service. The rack shall be finished with an acid and fire resistant epoxy coating and non-metallic rain covers. 5. Battery charger shall be a UL listed, fully automatic, filtered, float-type, charger suitable for wall or rack mounting. Input voltage shall be 120 VAC, single phase, 60 Hz. The DC output shall be regulated to within 1 percent with plus or minus 10 percent fluctuations of the input voltage and shall be current limited at 120 percent of rated output. Accessories shall include DC ammeter and voltmeter (panel type; 2 percent accuracy), adjustable float and equalize controls and toggle switch, AC and DC circuit breakers, AC power failure alarm relay, low DC voltage alarm relay and DC ground fault relay. The charger shall be Chloride, Model SCR-F; LaMarche, Model A11 or equal.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 20
C. Air Intake System: 1. The engine shall be equipped with suitably sized dry type air intake filter(s) to protect working parts of the engine from dirt and grit with replaceable type filter element(s). A crankcase breather shall be included. D. Lubrication System: 2. The engine shall be provided with a full pressure lubricating oil system arranged to cool the pistons and to distribute oil to all moving parts of the engine including the turbocharger bearings and including full flow filter of the replaceable element type and a suitably sized shell and tube type oil cooler and an AMOT or equal automatic temperature regulator. An engine driven lubricating oil circulating pump shall be provided for the engine. This pump shall be of the positive displacement type, and shall have ample capacity to circulate the amount of lubricating oil and cooling oil required by the engine and turbocharger. The engine shall be provided with a sump type crankcase arrangement of sufficient capacity to suit the requirements of the engine. 3. The engine shall be furnished with a Kenco or equal float operated oil level controller with engine mounted integral oil storage tank. It shall be installed in such a position that it will maintain a constant crankcase oil level as recommended by the engine manufacturer and visually indicate the oil level. E. Engine Cooling System: 1. The unit shall be radiator cooled with a blower or pusher type fan mechanically driven by the engine. Fan and belts shall be completely guarded in accordance with OSHA regulations. The cooling system shall be adequate for cooling the unit at full rated load and for installation in a climate where freezing temperatures are encountered, shall be adequate for proper cooling in summer with a 50 percent ethylene glycol anti-freeze solution in the radiator and with an ambient temperature of 104 degrees F while maintaining a maximum 155 degree F air outflow temperature. A pressurized radiator cap, if used, shall be rated for not more than 6 psi on the cooling system. Furnish and install a suitable air discharge duct from the face of the radiator to the enclosure wall. Incorporate in the enclosure automatic motorized intake and discharge dampers which shall automatically open when the unit starts and automatically close when the unit stops. Any dampers or openings shall be properly screened to prevent the entry of rodents, insects, or birds and shall limit noise level of the radiator. a. Attached engine driven, centrifugal jacket water pump equipped with a mechanical seal and capable of circulating the required amount of jacket water through the remote located radiator and required additional piping, to be suitably sized and furnished by engine manufacturer. b. A suitably sized full flow lubricating oil cooler. c. Provide AMOT or equal automatic temperature regulators for the engine jacket water and lubricating oil which shall maintain pre-set temperature without restricting the rates of flow through the engine.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 21
F. Exhaust System: 1. Exhaust stack shall be installed to prevent water entry into exhaust pipe with using a flapper. 2. The exhaust silencer shall be as manufactured by Maxim; Donaldson; Nelson, or equal, of aluminized steel construction, and mounted and piped inside the enclosure. The silencer shall attenuate the sum of the octave band levels converted to A-weighted sound pressure levels such that the noise level from the engine exhaust plus mechanical noise from the enclosure will conform to the noise limitation specified in Paragraph 2.04. There shall be no puretone. The engine supplier shall size the silencer to operate within the maximum allowable backpressure of the engine, when installed in the exhaust piping system as furnished. Provide a threaded drain tap at the low point of the silencer and a Schedule 40 black steel drain pipe connection from the silencer drain tap to a valved drain outlet to the exterior of the enclosure. 3. Furnish a stainless steel bellows type expansion joint as recommended by the engine manufacturer to connect the exhaust silencer to the engine. The flexible connection shall adapt to the engine exhaust outlet connection, and provide a flanged connection to the silencer. The connector shall be of Type 321 stainless steel and designed for an operating temperature of 1200 degrees F. 4. Exhaust pipe within the enclosure shall be ASTM A106, Schedule 40 black steel with flanged and welded fittings. Exhaust pipe shall be of the size recommended by the engine manufacturer. All exhaust line elbows shall be long radius. G. Miscellaneous Equipment and Requirements: 1. Heaters: a. An automatic thermostatically controlled heater(s), rated 5000 watts 208 Volt, single phase, shall be provided to maintain not less than 90 degrees F temperature with an ambient temperature of 40 degrees F (4.5 degrees C) for the engine jacket water (and engine lubricating oil) system(s). b. An automatic thermostatically controlled generator space heater rated 120 Volt, single phase, shall be provided with the capacity to maintain not less than 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) temperature with an ambient temperature of 40 degrees F (4.5 degrees C). c. All heaters shall be automatically deactivated when the engine generator unit is in operation. 2.08 ENGINE INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS A. Generator Control Panel: 1. The generator manufacturer shall furnish and install a generator control panel. All related equipment and controls shall be provided by the generator manufacturer. 2. The face of the panel shall include volt meter, watt meter, amp meter, controls and indicators as specified, each with descriptive lamacoid nameplates. The back of the panel shall have metal cabinet door(s) with continuous hinge and a cabinet type locking latch.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 22
3. The engine starting controls and alarms shall be powered by the 48 VDC batteries specified herein. 4. Equipment controlled by the generator control panel shall include, but not be limited to: a. Jacket water heater. d. Generator space heater. e. Motorized damper. 5. Controls switches shall be 600 Volt, 20 Amps, multi-stage rotary type with black handles. Each switch shall have a fixed modern pistol grip handle with an engraved black plastic escutcheon plate. Switches shall be General Electric, Type SB-1; Westinghouse, Type W2 or equal. 6. Control relays and timers shall be heavy duty plug-in socket type with a transparent dust cover. The relay shall be equipped with an indicating light to indicate when its coil is energized. The relays shall have 10 Amps minimum unless otherwise specified, 48VDC and 120/230 VAC rated contacts. The mechanical life of the relay shall be 10,000 operations minimum. 7. All panel equipment shall be mounted and wired on or within the cabinet. Wiring shall comply with latest ANSI C1 National Electric Code. All wiring within the panel shall be grouped together with harnesses or ducts and secured to the structure. All wiring shall be numbered in accordance with the numbering system used on the wiring/connection diagrams. Wiring and connection diagrams shall be submitted as part of the shop drawings for approval of the Engineer. 8. Terminal blocks shall be grouped in the instrument and control compartment for easy accessibility unrestricted by interference from structural members and instruments. Sufficient space shall be provided on each side of each terminal block to allow an orderly arrangement of all leads to be terminated on the block. 9. Panel wiring shall be stranded copper conductor, 600 Volt class, insulation and jacketed, General Electric, Type SIS or equal. Minimum size shall be No. 14 AWG for AC power wiring and No. 16 AWG for DC control wiring. Wire for voltage regulator power and field circuits shall be shielded. B. Generator Control Panel Functions: 1. The General Control Panel (GCP) provided by the generator manufacturer shall include all controls for initiating automatic engine start-up and shutdown, including all controls for related auxiliary systems. The panel shall also include controls of components necessary to keep the engine in a ready condition for automatic operation. a. The cranking limiter shall disconnect the starting motor(s) from the batteries after completing a total of four 15 second cranking periods separated by four 15 second rest periods before shutting down completely and sounding the alarm. b. An adjustable 0 to 30 minute cool-down timer shall be provided.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 23
2. The following devices shall be mounted on the panel: a. Control Switches 1) Mode Select Switch. The mode select switch shall initiate the following control modes. When in the RUN or Manual position the generator set shall start, and accelerate to rated speed and voltage as directed by the operator. In the OFF position the generator set shall immediately stop, bypassing all time delays. In the AUTO position the generator set shall be ready to accept a signal from a remote device to start and accelerate to rated speed and voltage. 2) EMERGENCY STOP switch. Switch shall be Red “mushroom-head" push-button. Depressing the emergency stop switch shall cause the generator set to immediately shut down, and be locked out from automatic restarting. The switch shall include a lockout provision for use in safely disabling the generator set for necessary service. 3) RESET switch. The RESET switch shall be used to clear a fault and allow restarting the generator set after it has shut down for any fault condition. 4) PANEL LAMP switch. Operating the panel lamp switch shall cause the entire panel to be lighted with DC control power. The panel lamps shall automatically be switched off 10 minutes after the switch is operated, or after the switch is operated a second time. b. Elapsed time meter - 0 to 99999.9 hours. c. Engine speed meter, rpm, digital display. d. Voltage raise/lower switch - three positions "LOWER-OFF-RAISE" spring return to center switch. e. Engine running status light indicates that the engine is running. 3. An alarm annunciator system shall be mounted on the panel consisting of the following: a. Twenty-four point, triple window type alarm annunciator, with DC power supply, by Rochester Instrument Systems; Ronan or equal. Provide 16 YELLOW indicators for warnings and 8 RED indicators for shutdowns. b. Annunciator horn - 48 VDC Sonalert, or equal, with time delay horn cutout relay to prevent battery drain. c. Test pushbutton - tests all annunciator and status lights. d. Silence/Acknowledge pushbutton - operation changes flashing first out point to steady on and silences annunciator horn. e. Alarm indication shall be provided for the following points, as a minimum:
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 24
Warning Shutdown Condition (Yellow) (Red) Generator Breaker Tripped X Emergency Stop X Fail to Start X Battery Charger Malfunction X High Lube Oil Temperature X X Low Lube Oil Pressure X X Sub Base Tank Approaching Low Level X Engine Over speed X High Jacket Water Temperature X X Sub Base Tank High Level X Sub Base Tank Rupture X Low Jacket Water Temperature X Low Jacket Water Coolant Level X Low Cooling Water Flow X Low Fuel Shutdown X f. All engine warning conditions shall be grouped to provide a common alarm to the station instrument panel. All shutdown alarms shall be grouped to provide a common alarm to the station instrument panel. g. A lockable stop button that requires manual reset shall be provided outside the generator enclosure. The button, contacts, and wiring shall satisfy the requirements of NEC 445.18 to shut down the prime mover. Button with cover to prevent unintended operation. Suitable for location outside. C. Engine Instrument Panel: 1. The engine manufacturer shall provide jacket water, fuel and lube oil pressure gauges, jacket water and lube oil temperature gauges and combustion air filter manometer mounted on a common vibration isolated panel as part of the engine skid. 2. Temperature gauges, with graduations appropriate to the service, shall be installed on the raw cooling water inlet and outlet piping as shown on the Drawings. 3. Pressure and temperature switches shall be Honeywell; United Electric or equal, with adjustable range and differential. Switches shall be located as required to accommodate the control functions previously specified. 4. D. The generator control panel shall interface with the main control panel via Modbus RS 485. E. The Contractor will install the data communication cables. The supplier will assist the Owner in placing the network into operation as required.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 25 2.09 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION A. Generator Circuit Breaker: SUSE-rated molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489 1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. 2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. 3. Mounting: On the generator. 2.10 GENERATOR AND EXCITATION SYSTEM A. The generator shall be of the drip-proof, guarded, bracket type, especially designed for connection to the specified engine and shall be as shown table section1.02 in this specification. The generator shall be mechanically and torsionally matched to the engine driver and shall be designed to withstand inherent pulsating torques of the engine. B. The generator shall have a forged or cast alloy steel flanged shaft for direct connection through a suitable flywheel type coupling to the engine, or with suitable adapter and disc coupling and shall be of the single bearing type with anti-friction bearing. Full load efficiency of the combined generator, exciter, and regulator shall be not less than 93 percent. C. The generator windings, insulation and excitation system shall be braced to withstand any possible short-circuit stresses and shall be designed to withstand any overheating or stresses caused by harmonics generated by the variable frequency drives. The excitation and voltage control system shall sustain at least 300 percent rated generated current for 10 seconds when a three phase symmetrical short-circuit is applied at the generator terminals. The unit shall be "Radio Interference Proof" (RIP) and the "Telephone Influence Factor" (TIF) shall be within the limits of Section 9, ANSI C50.12. D. The generator shall utilize a brushless, rotating field, Permanent Magnetic Generator (PMG) type excitation system with an electronic closed loop voltage regulator. The exciter rotor and field windings shall have Class H insulation, limited to Class B temperature rise. E. The generator armature and field windings shall have Class F vacuum/pressure impregnated (VPI) epoxy insulation, limited to Class B (80 degrees C) temperature rise. 1. The generator stator core shall be built up of low carbon steel laminating precision punched, deburred, and individually insulated. Stator coils shall be all copper, random or form wound and inserted in insulated core slots. Wound core shall be repeatedly treated a minimum of three times with thermosetting synthetic varnish and backed for maximum moisture resistance, high dielectric strength and high bonding qualities. Armature lamination followers and frame ribs shall be welded integral with frame. 2. The generator shall be furnished with 120 Volt anti-condensation space heaters, as specified elsewhere in this section. 3. Generator rotor poles shall be built up of individually insulated steel punchings. Poles shall be wound and bonded with high strength varnish, then baked. Cage connections shall be brazed for strong construction and permanent electrical characteristics. Each pole shall be dovetailed and keyed to rotor shaft. The rotor shall be dynamically balanced for all speeds up to 125 percent of rated speed per NEMA standards.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 26
4. The entire rotor assembly shall be 100 percent epoxy resin vacuum pressure impregnated, then baked. a. A cooling fan shall be mounted on the rotor to draw air from exciter end, over rotor poles and through louvered openings in drive end. b. The generator shall have an oil lubricated anti-friction bearing. The designed bearing life, based on B-10 curve of the ABMA, shall not be less than 40,000 hours. c. Voltage regulator shall be hermetically sealed, silicon controlled rectifier type and shall employ a zener reference and three phase sensing. The voltage regulator shall provide automatic protection of the entire unit on three phase short-circuits. The voltage regulator shall include automatic overexcitation and underfrequency protection. Input isolation transformers and filters shall be provided to minimize disturbances caused by line harmonics. Exciter shall be fast response type with a rotating rectifier and surge suppressor, three phase, full-wave bridge. It shall feature low time constant design to minimize voltage transients under severe load changes. d. Voltage regulation shall be within plus or minus 1 percent of rated voltage from no load to full load. Steady-state modulation shall not exceed plus or minus 1/2 percent. Instantaneous voltage dip shall not exceed 20 percent of rated voltage when full load at rated power factor is applied. Recovery of stable operation shall occur within 1 second. e. The voltage regulator and associated equipment shall be mounted in the generator terminal box. Manual voltage adjustment shall be mounted in the generator control panel. F. LOAD BANK PANEL A. With load bank connection panel for connection of a portable load bank. The panel shall be located where depicted on the drawings. Panel shall have camlock connection for a portable load bank to connect to. Between the load bank panel and the generator there shall be a circuit breaker that has a shunt trip. The ciruit breaker shall be inside the generator enclosure. Configure the controls to open the circuit breaker if the generator load is higher than 105% of rated load. The connection panel shall have female receptacles that are approved by SPU for use with the SPU load bank, Hubble HBLFRBBK or approved equal. Including a space heater and thermostat, powered from the generator panelboard. The following receptacle colors are acceptable: 1. Black, red, blue, brown, orange, yellow, green
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 27
2.11 GENERATOR CIRCUIT BREAKER A. Molded case, three pole, circuit breaker for three phase overloads and/or short circuit protection. Current ratings shall be as required to protect the generator unit from overload or short circuit and shall be as shown on the Electrical Drawings. The circuit breaker shall operate both manually for normal switching functions and automatically during overload and short circuit conditions. Circuit breaker shall be UL listed as 100 percent continuous rated to carry the full ampere load of the generator. The circuit breaker shall include contacts wired to the generator control panel to provide alarm if the breaker is in the “Tripped” or “Off” position. B. The trip unit for each pole shall have elements providing inverse time delay during overload conditions and instantaneous magnetic tripping for short circuit protection. C. The circuit breaker shall meet standards established by Underwriter’s Laboratories. D. Mount the circuit breaker in the generator enclosure. 2.12 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT A. Weatherproof Housing: 1. A weatherproof, shall be provided to house the skid-mounted close-coupled generator with engine driven fan cooled radiator and including starting batteries, battery charger, generator controls and the housing roof designed to support the internal mounted exhaust silencer. 2. The engine generator shall be mounted on vibration isolators. 3. The housing shall be complete with multiple fully gasketed access doors, providing a weathertight perimeter seal, with stainless steel locking door handles, and duplicate keys. All exposed screws, bolts and nuts, if used, shall be stainless steel. Provide a motorized air intake damper, to open when unit starts and close when unit stops. Both motorized intake and gravity dampers shall be screened and enclosed by an acoustical baffle arrangement. 4. Provide one exhaust fan with gravity damper, four vapor tight 15 watt 900 lumen LED lights, located in each corner, two duplex 20 Amps, 2 Pole, 3 Wire receptacles, one on either side. Each of these electrical devices shall be operated by a manual on-off switch. 5. The sound insulation shall comply with the UL Standard 94HF-1 Flammability Test, covering all the inside walls of the enclosure and shall consist of the type, thickness and number of baffles required to limit the resulting noise level of the unit operating at full load to not more than 68 dBA at a distance of 5-ft from the housing in any direction in an open field test. There shall be no puretones. 6. 120/208V single phase threewire panelboard furnished with the generator and located within the housing as specified above. Heaters, battery charger, exhaust fan, motorized louver, lighting, and receptacles shall be wired to branch circuit breakers provided in the panelboard.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 28
2.13 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PAINTING A. The engine generator set and associated equipment shall be shop primed and finished coated in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice prior to shipment. Color shall be selected by the Engineer and an adequate supply of touch-up paint shall be supplied by the manufacturer. 2.14 SHOP TEST A. A complete engine generator unit and the generator control panel shall be shop tested prior to shipment. Four copies of the complete certified test record shall be submitted to the Engineer within 30 days after the completed test. B. These tests for the unit shall be sufficient to assure that the unit will operate successfully and meet all specified operational requirements. The manufacturer shall furnish all necessary instruments, filters, starting air, fuel gas, cooling water, electric power, and load banks for the test. C. Each of the automatic shutdown devices shall be tested and their respective values recorded at the time the devices stop the engine. D. The shop test shall consist of, but not be limited to, four continuous hours of operation. Voltage and frequency regulation and transient response shall be tested and recorded to show full compliance with this Section. During the shop test, readings shall be taken and recorded every thirty minutes for each of the following: 1. Time 2. Ambient temperature 3. Volts for each phase 4. Load: a. Amps for each phase b. kW c. Power factor d. Frequency e. Engine jacket water temperature f. Cooling water temperature (in and out) g. Intake manifold pressure h. Lubricating oil pressure i. Crankcase pressure j. Lube oil temperature k. Intake manifold temperature l. Exhaust gas temperature m. Raw water cooling flow (required only for heat exchanger systems)
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 29
n. Gallons of fuel consumed per hour o. Sound attenuation evaluation per section 1.02 E. The generator shall be shop tested in accordance with IEEE Standard 115. Testing shall include the following: 1. Cold resistance of all windings 2. Insulation resistance of all windings 3. Polarity of field coils 4. High potential on all windings 5. Open circuit saturation 1. Air gap measurement 2. Regulation (with regulator) 3. Transient voltage dip and response 4. Voltage and current balance F. The procedure for the shop test of the engine shall cover the engine manufacturer's standard practice and shall also include at least, but not be limited, to the following: 1. Prior to all starts during initial tests and all starts after new running parts have been installed, the engine shall be connected to a separately driven lubricating oil pump and filtered oil circulated through all of the engine channels. The engine shall be thoroughly inspected for oil leaks prior to shipment, paying particular attention to leaks around the shims of bearing shells in engines where shims are used. 2. The engine shall be pre-lubricated for a sufficient period of time to ensure adequate lubrication. Caution shall be taken to avoid the accumulation of oil in the combustion chambers. 3. Engine and generator alignment shall be checked and generator air gap measured prior to the test. 4. An air filter or cleaner shall be used for the supply of combustion air during all testing. 5. The engine shall be given a suitable wearing-in run before the witnessed shop test as recommended by the manufacturer. Before recording any readings, all operating temperatures and pressures shall have become stabilized. 6. All alarm, shutdown and control functions shall be demonstrated. Transient response shall be measured to indicate compliance with the performance 2.15 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE A. Description: level II, Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph. The enclosure shall be sealed up with non rusting 1/2" expanded metal to keep rodents out. All openings on and under enclosure shall be sealed. Any sharp edges shall be filed smooth. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 30
B. Sound attenuating. C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions. 1. Dampers: Engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable prevent entry of rain and snow. D. Color: Cummins Sandstone. 2.16 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber. Between the generator and the tank. 2.17 FINISHES A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer. 2.18 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine- generator performance. B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110. B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance. C. Install packaged engine generator with elastomeric isolator pads having a minimum deflection of 1-inch on 4-inch high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 31
3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section 26 05 26, "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.” B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section 26 05 19, "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components according to Division 26. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Tests and Inspections 2. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters 3. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test. 4. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages. a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions. b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery. c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications. 5. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions. 6. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks. 7. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-in. Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine. 8. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 9. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 32
10. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits. 11. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations on the property line, and compare measured levels with required values. B. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently. C. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request. D. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. E. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. F. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. G. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. H. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met. I. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. J. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 33
3.07 INSTALLATION A. The generator manufacturer shall provide services of a qualified field representative to supervise the installation of the generator unit to ensure a proper installation as listed in Paragraph 1.07. The Contractor will assist the generator manufacturer and coordinate with the Owner for any commissioning and testing requirements. B. The complete generator unit shall be mounted on a welded steel sub base of sufficient rigidity and strength to maintain alignment of the unit. The Contractor shall rig into place, install, and anchor the generators as recommended by the generator manufacturer. 3.08 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. The generator manufacturer shall operate unit to demonstrate ability to operate continuously without vibration, jamming, leakage, or overheating and to perform specified functions, after installation and after manufacturer's representative check of installed equipment. B. The Contractor shall follow all recommended installation procedures and coordinate with the service representative for the proper equipment installation. C. The generator manufacturer and the Contractor shall promptly correct improper installation of equipment. D. The Contractor shall cooperate with equipment supplier at the time of start-up and in making of all final adjustments necessary to place equipment in satisfactory working order. Start-up shall not commence without the presence of the manufacturer's representative. 3.09 FIELD TEST A. Upon completion of the installation and as soon as conditions permit, the emergency power supply system including the engine driven generator, electrical circuits, controls, transfer switch controls and other devices shall be tested in the presence of the Engineer by the installation Vendor and the service representative for the manufacturer of the engine driven generator unit to assure that the system functions as specified. 1. The Contractor shall, prior to scheduling the test, notify the Engineer in writing that all requirements and provisions of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, that all apparatus are clean, properly adjusted and ready for operation and that the Instruction Manuals, parts lists and record drawings described in Paragraph 1.05 above, have been submitted. 2. The Contractor and generator manufacturers' representatives shall make such changes in wiring or connections and such adjustments, repairs or replacements necessary to make the circuit, device or control system function as specified and otherwise comply with the Contract Documents. a. Engine Generator Load Tests: 3. Resistive Load Bank Test: a. The test shall consist of 2 hours of continuous operation of the unit at full rated load using a portable resistive load bank. The Contractor is responsible for providing the resistive load bank for this test.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 34
4. Live Load Test: a. In addition to the resistive load bank test, a live load test shall be included and will consist of a 2 hours of continuous plant load operation. 5. During the tests, the same readings as outlined under Shop Test Paragraph 2.14D above, shall be taken and recorded at 30 minute intervals. a. As part of the field tests, each of the automatic shutdown devices shall be tested and the respective values recorded at which the devices will stop the engine. Any adjustments required shall be made in the devices to make the operating values correspond to those recommended by the engine manufacturer and as recorded during the stop test. b. After the two hour test has been completed, additional testing shall be performed to demonstrate the emergency power supply system's ability to meet the automatic starting, load transfer and motor starting requirements as specified under Paragraph 2.03 C above. c. The Contractor shall provide a person qualified to conduct sound level testing to take and record octave band sound pressure level readings with the portable resistive load shut off and operating the engine driven generators using the station load available at the time the field tests are conducted. These readings shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer with the record documents. d. Piping shall be tested in strict accordance with the manufacturers testing requirements. For each double wall fuel oil line entering the building, provide a pressure test port with threaded plug in the double wall piping termination fitting. Piping shall be subjected to an air test of 10 psig maximum. e. If the emergency power supply system fails to fulfill the performance requirements of this specification, corrective action shall be taken and the system retested to assure full compliance. All additional expenses associated with the field tests due to the Contractor, including any corrective action, shall be borne to the Contractor. Additional expenses associated with the equipment provided shall be borne by the Generator manufacturer. f. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to refill the diesel fuel tanks after the field tests have been successfully completed and accepted by the Owner. 3.10 TRAINING A. The equipment supplier shall provide training for the facility operating personnel covering operation and maintenance of the equipment provided. The training program shall be not less than 4 hours in duration and the class size shall be up to 12 persons. Training date shall be coordinated with the facility owner. Training shall be video taped and provided to the owner upon completion of training session. The training submittal shall be approved before training takes place. Certify completion of training on Form 11000- B, Section 00 60 00, Sample Forms.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 35
3.11 SERVICE AND SUPPORT A. The generator set supplier shall maintain service parts inventory for the entire power system at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. The inventory shall have a commercial value of $3 million or more. The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain a central parts inventory to support the supplier, covering all the major components of the power system, including engines, alternators, control systems, paralleling electronics, and power transfer equipment. B. The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in generator set service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of critical power system replacement parts in the local service location. Service vehicles shall be stocked with critical replacement parts. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. The service organization shall be physically located within _100___ miles of the site. C. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each generator set provided for at least 20 years.
END OF SECTION 26 32 13
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 36
APPENDIX A
Passage of the Clean Air Act in 1970 established standards of Air Quality throughout our country, to achieve or maintain the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) for CO, NOx, HC, Ozone, SO2 and particulates. Responsibility for complying with these standards rests with the Owner, not the engine manufacturer.
Since these standards apply to the total of all emissions from a site, the permissible emissions level from an individual engine can be varied as required. Most engine manufacturers set the air fuel ratio at the factory to provide a good balance between fuel economy and power output without regard to exhaust emission levels. However, there are certain modifications such as retarded ignition timing that can reduce NOx emissions with only a moderate increase (6 to 10 percent) in fuel consumption. Catalytic Reduction Converters can also be supplied under certain conditions.
In any event, you should first supply your local in house Air Quality Service Group with the following preliminary exhaust emission performance data for the selected diesel engine with pre set standard factory timing.
Output Load Exhaust Emissions (grams/BHP hr) BHP NOx HC CO *SO2
Full ______
3/4 ______
1/2 ______
1/4 ______
*Note: SO2 is proportional to a sulfur content of 0.20 percent by weight of the fuel.
ENGINE GENERATORS SECTION 26 32 13 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 37
APPENDIX B
EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION TESTING AND INSTRUCTION
Owner: Seattle Public Utilities
Project:
Contract No. ______
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION SECTION – 26 32 13 Diesel Engine Driven Generators
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION -
I______, Authorized representative of (Print Name) ______(Print Manufacturer's Name) hereby CERTIFY that ______(Print equipment name and model with serial No.) installed for the subject project have been installed in a satisfactory manner, have been satisfactorily tested, are ready for operation, and that Owner assigned operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of the units on Date: ______Time: ______.
CERTIFIED BY: ______DATE: ______(Signature of Manufacturer's Representative)
OWNER'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTION
We the undersigned, authorized representatives of the Seattle Public Utilities and/or Plant Operating Personnel have received classroom and hands on instruction on the operation of the subject equipment and are prepared to assume normal operational responsibility for the equipment:
______DATE: ______
______DATE:______
______DATE:______
VEHICLE CHARGING EQUIPMENT SECTION 26 32 30 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section includes the following: 1. Vehicle charging equipment. B. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 01 73 24 3. Section 26 00 00 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers NEMA National Electrical Manufacturing Association NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) SAE SAE International
1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
VEHICLE CHARGING EQUIPMENT SECTION 26 32 30 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check- marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. A check mark shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. C. Manufacturer's product data . D. Output voltage, phase, and wire. E. Input amps, minimum circuit amps, maximum overcurrent protection, and grounding requirements. F. Plan and elevation drawings. Space requirements. G. Operation and maintenance information as specified in Section 01 73 00, Operation and Maintenance Information.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. ClipperCreek HCS-40R or approved equal. 2.02 ELECTRICAL A. Input voltage 208V single phase, 2 wire with ground. Input current 32A. Suitable for supply from a 40 amp circuit breaker B. Charge Current Output Power: Level 2, 7.7 kW. C. Output cord 25 feet long. Cord loops around the charger. Connector holster. D. Service Ground Monitor - Constantly checks for presence of proper safety ground E. Automatic Circuit Reclosure After minor power faults F. Charge Circuit Interruption Device - Ground fault protection with fully automated self- test, eliminates manual user testing G. Type 4X watertight and corrosion resistant rubber overmolded EV connector H. Impact and crush resistant SAE-J1772TM connector I. Hardwired installation.
VEHICLE CHARGING EQUIPMENT SECTION 26 32 30 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
2.03 OPERATION A. The front panel has a minimum of the following LED indicator lights 1. Power (yellow): Indicates that power is available to the HCS. 2. Charging (green): Indicates that the vehicle is requesting a charge and AC power is currently applied to the vehicle. 3. Power Fault (red): Indicates that the HCS is not wired correctly. 4. Charging Fault (red): indicates that the HCS is unable to communicate with the vehicle correctly, or a safety fault condition has been detected by the unit. 2.04 OPERATION A. The vehicle will immediately request a charge using a special communication line in the cable. Within a few seconds the green “Charging” light on the face of the HCS will turn on and the charging cycle will begin. B. When the vehicle has stopped charging the green “Charging” light on the HCS will turn off. To remove the connector head once a charge cycle has completed (or to interrupt a charge in progress) press and hold down the latch release lever on the connector handle then unplug the connector from the vehicle charge port.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING A. Test installed charger for proper operation and function.
END OF SECTION 26 32 30
ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS SECTION 26 35 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies active harmonic filter power correction systems to reduce current harmonics and correct power factor on 480-volt power distribution systems. B. Design: 1. The active harmonic filter applied to six pulse adjustable frequency drives (AFD) shall meet the following at the connection to the motor control center: a. 5% total demand distortion (TDD) b. <5% total harmonic voltage distortion (THD-V) C. System Description: 1. System Voltage: a. 480 volts, 3-Phase, 3-Wire plus ground conductor. D. Output Load Capacity: 1. Corrective current rating minimum 100 amps. E. Current Transducers: 1. Two 400-Hertz split core type current transducers shall be installed on phases A & B at motor control center at the location shown on the drawings. 2. Transducer current ratings shall be the full load current of the circuit of 800 amps. 3. Current transducer output shall be 5 amperes full scale. 4. Provide current transformers to the motor control center manufacture for installation in the motor control center. F. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 01 73 24 3. Section 26 00 00 4. Section 26 05 73 5. Section 26 08 01 6. Section 26 24 19
ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS SECTION 26 35 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge Withstand Capacity ANSI/IEEE 519 Harmonic Limits CSA 22.2: No. 14 & 66 Requirements for Power Electronics UL 508C Requirements for Power Conversion Equipment
1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check- marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. A check mark shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. C. Electrical single line, schematic diagrams, and conductor connection diagram. D. Layout drawings indicating arrangement, dimensions, cable entries, and weights. E. Manufacturer's product and catalog data indicating equipment specifications and features including interrupting, withstand, and continuous current ratings of all relevant equipment and components. Catalog data shall be edited or “arrowhead” to indicate only the models and options to be provided as part of this specification. F. Time current curves for all protection devices. G. Interrupting and continuous current ratings H. Nameplates
ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS SECTION 26 35 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
I. Front view elevation with starter and component schedule J. Manufacturer's certification and calculations that the equipment complies with the seismic requirements of Sections 01 73 24, Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures, and 26 00 00, Electrical, and this Section. K. Information needed for the electrical system analyses reports specified in Section 26 05 73, Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study. L. Results of factory tests as specified within this Section. M. Current transformer electrical data, physical data, and mounting instructions. N. Results of field tests as specified within this Section. O. Operation and maintenance information as specified in Section 01 73 00, Operations and Maintenance Information. 1.05 FACTORY TESTS A. All system components shall be factory-wired and tested as a system prior to shipment. Testing shall verify system operation. 1.06 SPATIAL LAYOUT A. The overall dimensions shall not exceed the available space allocated for installation indicated on the Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Schneider Electric AccuSine
B. Eaton HCU2 harmonic correction unit C. Mesta Electronics DPM 2.02 SERVICE A. Rated 480 volts, 60 Hertz, 3 phase. 2.03 DESIGN FEATURES A. Modes Of Operation 1. The power correction system shall inject harmonic current to cancel load produced harmonic current so the upstream power harmonic current and voltage are reduced to below 5% TDD and 5% THD(V), respectfully. The system shall correct all types of nonlinear loads. 2. The applied circuit may be a single nonlinear load, a distribution-bus with multiple loads, or the facility load at the point-of-common coupling (PCC) with the power source.
ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS SECTION 26 35 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
3. The displacement power factor correction of the reactive current shall be activated or deactivated via a digital keypad / display mounted enclosure door. B. Performance Requirements 1. Input Power: a. Voltage: 1) Automatically adapted to 208 - 480V, 3 phase and ground conductor. b. Voltage Tolerance: 1) +/- 10% of nominal. c. Frequency: 1) Automatically adapted to 50 or 60 Hertz, +/- 3 Hertz. d. Surge Withstand Capability: 1) ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 without damage. e. Input Fuses: 1) Class T rated at 200,000 AIC (amperes interrupting capacity). 2. Output Performance a. Performance of the power correction system shall be independent of the impedance of the power source. 3. Harmonic Correction: a. Limit the 2nd through 50th order harmonic current to <5% TDD at each installed location indicated herein. Harmonic levels for individual harmonic orders shall comply with respective levels established in ANSI/IEEE std 519-1992, Table 10.3. b. Limit the THD(V) added to the electrical system immediately upstream of the power correction system location(s) to less than or equal to 5%. c. The power correction system shall not correct for power utility supplied voltage distortion levels. 4. Reactive Current Compensation: a. Maintain a set point of .95 lagging displacement power factor under all load conditions C. System Features 1. Each unit provided with a current limiting function to protect the semiconductors. 2. Non-critical level faults shall provide automatic restart and return to normal operation upon automatic fault clearance: a. Faults such as AC line over voltage b. AC line under-voltage
ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS SECTION 26 35 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
c. AC line power loss d. AC line phase imbalance shall be automatically restarted. 3. Critical level faults shall stop the function of the unit and await Operator action to restart the power correction system: a. The display shall indicate the fault condition and “stop.” b. The run LED and relay shall be disabled and the fault relay enabled. c. Operator shall initiate a power reset by turning the power off and on 4. The ratio of the two CTs shall be entered into the logic via the digital keypad/display to calibrate the operation of the power correction system. D. Operator Interface System 1. Door mounted operator interface system (OIS) with an English character alphanumeric digital display with a minimum of 2-lines with 20 characters per line. 2. Functions and display parameters: a. Run, stop, setup, enter, and up/down scroll function buttons b. Run pushbutton with green LED lighted when operating. c. AC line voltage d. Total RMS load current e. Harmonic current of load f. Harmonic voltage of load g. Reactive current of load h. At-maximum capacity and actuate an at-maximum capacity relay. i. Fault conditions with diagnostic information. 3. Relay provided with form C contacts rated for 1 ampere at 120/240 volts for power-on, run, fault, and at-maximum capacity. 4. RS-485 serial communication port shall be provided for communication between parallel units. E. Enclosure 1. NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure a. Top cable entry. b. Each of the enclosure sections shall have a full-length flanged front door. 2. Disconnects: a. Door-interlocked disconnect for power interruption when the door is opened. b. Lockable in the power-off position. 3. Lifting Provisions:
ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS SECTION 26 35 26 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
4. Features: a. 200,000 AIC rated fuses with Class T actuation. b. Grounding lug 2.04 FINISH AND COLOR A. The finish and color shall be in accordance with Section 26 00 00, Electrical. 2.05 SPARE PARTS A. One set consisting of the following spare parts shall be provided: 1. 1--set each fuse size and type 2. 10--indicating light bulbs
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL A. Installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and with the details specified herein. B. Installed level and plumb on 3-1/2-inch concrete housekeeping pads per the manufacturer’s installation instruction. C. Seismic anchorage shall be per Section 01 73 24, Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures. 3.02 FIELD TESTS A. Test in accordance with Section 26 08 01. 3.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES A. Provide a factory-trained representative at the site for the specified quantity and duration of the following activities. Specified durations do not include travel time to or from the project site. 1. Training Sessions: a. Procedures: Section 01 75 00. b. Provide a minimum of 2 hours of training. Certify completion of training on Form 11000-B, Section 00 60 00. 2. Start up and Testing Assistance: a. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of on site support for start up and testing. Complete form 11000-A, Section 00 60 00, Sample Forms. 3.04 COORDINATION WITH SHORT CIRCUIT AND ARC FLASH REQUIREMENTS A. Provide information required to support the short circuit and coordination and arc flash study specified in Section 26 05 73, Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.
END OF SECTION 26 24 19
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 26 36 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The automatic transfer switch will be SPU-furnished. The automatic transfer switch shall meet the requirements specified and are Contractor reference only. The Contractor is still responsible for the requirements listed in Part 3 - Execution. B. This Section includes Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS) rated 600 V and less, per the following table and as shown on drawings.
GENERATOR ATS RATING ATS RATING Voltage Current Phase NEMA KW ATS-185 480 600A, 65KAIC 3 1 450
1.02 REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified. 1. One-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, power sources, and load. C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 01 73 24, Design Requirements for Non-Structural Components and Non-Building Structures. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 26 36 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
D. Qualification Data 1. The transfer switch manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation, and service, in accordance with ISO 9001. 2. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar equipment for a minimum period of 10 years. When requested, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. E. Field quality-control test reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions, including software, where applicable. G. Manufacturer’s instructions for configuring, data registers and programming remote network data exchange using Modbus RS-485. This information is required by the Owner for programming the station’s control system in Section 40 90 00, Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements, to communicate with the following equipment specified in this Section. 1. Automatic Transfer Switch. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NEMA ICS 1. D. Comply with NFPA 70. E. Comply with NFPA 110. F. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 26 36 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: The Owner-furnished ATS is from the same manufacturer of Generator, Cummins, Inc. See Section 26 32 13. 2.02 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer. B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008. 1. The transfer switch includes internal UL 489 listed circuit breaker. Rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location 2. The transfer switch includes internal ground fault-current protection. Rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location. C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C. D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1. E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions. F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources. 1. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 2. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts. G. Marked Suitable for Use as Service Equipment. H. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated. I. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section 26 00 00. 1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated. 2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated. 3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 26 36 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
J. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 12, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated. K. Surge protective device (SPD) on normal source and on load side. See the drawings. SPD as follows: 1. Metal oxide varistor (MOV) SPD. With LED indication of the status and condition of the SPD, tested per NEMA LS-1, rated IEEE C3 Combined Wave of 20kV and 10kA with 200kAIC internal fusing and listed / labeled per UL 1449. Minimum surge rating: 160kA per phase. SPD’s shall have overcurrent protection via a fused switch or circuit breaker integral to the ATS. 2.03 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110. B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated. C. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation. D. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds. E. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutral position arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, with an intentional, time-controlled pause at midpoint during transfer. Pause is adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds minimum and factory set for 0.5 second, unless otherwise indicated. Time delay occurs for both transfer directions. Pause is disabled unless both sources are live. F. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features: 1. Under Voltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to- ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent. 2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and set to one second. 3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Set for pickup at 95 percent. 4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of generator source, provided normal supply has been restored. 5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure. 6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 26 36 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and generator-source sensing circuits. a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available." b. Generator Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Generator Source Available." 8. Contacts rated minimum 3A resistive at 28VDC and 120VAC. a. Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for open switch position. b. Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for closed switch position. c. Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for utility voltage ok. d. Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for generator voltage ok. 9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to generator power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status. 10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum. 11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine- generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source. 12. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following: a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without load transfer. b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings. c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not available. 13. Remote control: a. Dry contact monitored by the ATS. When the remote dry contact closes the ATS changes the preferred source to the generator and closes the generator start contact.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 26 36 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 6
14. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Seismic anchorage shall be per Section 01 73 24, Design Requirements for Non- Structural Components and Non-Building Structures. 1. Concrete Bases: Reinforced, with chamfered edges. Construct concrete bases according to Division 03 and the electrical details. 2. Identify components according to Division 26 Section 26 00 00. 3. Generator manufacturer will set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section 26 05 26, "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section 26 05 19, "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Provide a factory-trained manufacturer’s representative at the site for the following activities. a. Modbus RS-485 external communication network and include: 1) Provide a minimum of 8 hours of support for on site network testing. Coordinate this site time with the Owner. 2) Network Settings: Address, transmission rate, bus loss action, heartbeat interval, consumed path, and production path.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH SECTION 26 36 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 7
3) Test each network data transfer in compliance with Section 40 90 00 and Section 40 98 00. Test each network for complete data transfer between equipment specified in this Section and station’s control system in Section 40 90 00. 4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation. 5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of generator source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch operations. f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown. B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently. C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 26 36 00
LIGHTING SECTION 26 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 1
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies luminaries (lighting fixtures) features and installation. B. Related Sections: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections, not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents. 1. Section 01 33 10 2. Section 26 05 19 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference Title NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment UL 844 Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment UL 1958 Luminaires UL 8750 Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products 1.03 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01 33 10. B. Operation and maintenance items as specified in Section 00 72 00, General Conditions. C. Polar plots on 8-1/2 x 11 inch paper providing candlepower vs. angle and foot-lamberts (brightness) vs. angle for longitudinal and transverse axis. D. Table of utilization factors for calculation of illumination levels by the zonal cavity method. E. Catalog information describing fixture make, materials, and dimensions. F. Manufacturers’ warranties as specified in paragraph 1.03 of this section.
LIGHTING SECTION 26 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 2
1.05 WARRANTY A. Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. Provide full warranty for first year and prorated warranty for the remaining warranty period.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHTING MATERIALS A. Lighting materials, including luminaries, lamps, accessories, and hardware, shall conform to the detailed requirements specified on the applicable lighting fixture specification on the lighting plan drawing. Lighting fixtures shall be provided where specified on the drawings. 2.02 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND COMPONENTS A. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Formed and supported to prevent warping and sagging. B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. C. Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers and Other Products: Provide 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic with high resistance to yellowing and physical changes due to aging, exposure to heat and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum. b. UV stabilized. 2.03 LIGHT EMITTING DIODES A. Conform to the following: 1. Temperature range --20 to 40 degrees celsius. 2. 50,000 hour minimum life expectancy. 2.04 EXIT SIGNS A. Comply with UL 924 and City of Seattle Codes for sign colors and lettering size.
LIGHTING SECTION 26 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 3
2.05 EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit factory mounted within fixture body complying with UL 924 with the following features: 1. Emergency Connection: Leads to connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to lamp. Connection to switch and power is specified on the drawings. 2. Test Switch and Light-Emitting-Diode Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. 3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with minimum seven- year nominal life. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. B. Manufacturers: Bodine, Daybrite, Guth, Lithonia, Siltron, or equal. 2.06 FIXTURE FINISHES A. Manufacturer standard unless scheduled or shown. 1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. 2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant. 2.07 PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS A. Photo-Cells: 1. Provide UL 773 or UL 773A listed units. 2. Provide time-delay relays that fail in the on-position, factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 foot candles (16 to 32 lux) and off at 4.5 to 10 foot candles (48 to 108 lux) with 15-second minimum time delay. Provide directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light sources to cause turnoff. 3. Provide a cadmium sulfide cell housed in a plug receptacle assembly, three- prong, polarized, locking type. Provide assembly for outdoor mounting and rated for 1800 VA at 120V maximum capacity. a. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with NEMA C136.10. b. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points. 2.08 WALL MOUNT MOTION CONTROL A. Passive infrared (PIR) wall switch sensor can turn lights OFF and ON based on occupancy B. DIP switch settings allow for a variety of control options such as: 1. Time Delay. 2. Walk Through 3. PIR Sensitivity 4. Visible alert
LIGHTING SECTION 26 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 4
5. Audible alert 6. On Mode (Auto On or Manual On). a. Wall switch motion control shall turn lighting off within 30 minutes of an occupant leaving a space. b. Voltage: 120/277 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 500 Watts
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL A. The location and type of luminaries, associated poles, fixtures, and receptacles are as shown on the drawings. B. Labels and marks, except the UL label, shall be removed from exposed parts of the fixtures. Fixtures shall be cleaned when the project is ready for acceptance. Photoelectric cells shall be oriented toward the north. C. Raceways, wire, or cable shall be provided in accordance with Division 26. Raceways and wire shall be provided from the fixtures, switches and receptacles to the lighting panel in accordance with the NEC. Underground and outdoor wire splices shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 19, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. D. Fixtures labeled to require conductors with a temperature rating exceeding 75 degrees C shall be spliced to circuit conductors in a separately mounted junction box. Fixture wire shall meet UL and NEC requirements. Fixture shall be connected to junction box using flexible conduit with a temperature rating equal to that of the fixture. E. Recessed fixtures shall be provided with mounting hardware for the ceiling system specified. A concealed latch and hinge mechanism shall be provided to permit access to the lamps and ballasts and for removal and replacement of the diffuser without removing the fixture from ceiling panels. Fixtures recessed in concrete shall have protective coating of bituminous paint. F. Fixtures shall be aligned and directed to illuminate an area as specified. Fixtures shall be directly and rigidly mounted on their supporting structures. The conduit system shall not be used to support fixtures. G. Fixture supports that are welded to steel members shall be treated with rust-resistant primer and finish paint where brackets or supports for lighting fixtures. H. Provide manufacturer recommended mounting hardware and brackets. 3.02 WIRE CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values or use torque values specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
LIGHTING SECTION 26 50 00 SOUTH PARK PUMP STATION Page 5
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage then replace damaged fixtures and components. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation. B. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify normal transfer to battery power source and retransfer to normal. C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. Retest to demonstrate compliance with specification requirements where adjustments are made. Replace fixtures with damage or corrosion during warranty period. 3.04 LIGHTING FIXTURE SPECIFICATIONS A. General: Lighting fixtures, including accessories, options, and hardware are specified on the Drawings. B. Example Catalog Numbers: The manufacturer's catalog numbers listed are examples of the basic model or series. Referenced catalog numbers may not include voltage, mounting style, modifications, and other special features that are specified. The Contractor, supplier, and manufacturer shall provide the specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 26 50 00